j4-' JOHN A-:, 
 \P, LIBRARY o'' 
 
 %1 
 
 v\: 
 
CORNELL UNIVERSITY UBRARY 
 
 3 1924 102 
 
 99 266 
 
 
 DATE DUE 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^^^ 
 
 
 
 
 ■ '.l!'""l 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 QAYLORD 
 
 
 
 PRIffTB) m U.SA 
 
Cornell University 
 Library 
 
 The original of tiiis book is in 
 tine Cornell University Library. 
 
 There are no known copyright restrictions in 
 the United States on the use of the text. 
 
 http://www.archive.org/details/cu31924102199266 
 
In compliance with current 
 
 Copyright law, Cornell University 
 
 Library produced this 
 
 replacement volume on paper 
 
 that meets the ANSI Standard 
 
 Z39 .48-1992 to replace the 
 
 irreparably deteriorated original. 
 
 2005 
 
CORNELL 
 
 UNIVERSITY 
 LIBRARY 
 
EEADING BOOK 
 
 TUEKISH LANaUAGE, 
 
 GRAMMAE AND VOCABULAEY. 
 
READING BOOK 
 
 OF THE 
 
 TURKISH LANGUAGE, 
 
 WITH A 
 
 GEAMMAE AND VOCABULAEY; 
 
 CONTAIKING A SELECTION OF ORIGINAL TALES, LITEKALLY TRANSLATED, AND 
 ACCOMPANIED BY 
 
 GRAMMATICAL REFERENCES: 
 
 THE PRONUNCIATION OF EACH WORD GIVEN AS NOW USED IN CONSTANTINOPLE. 
 
 WILLIAM BURCKHAEDT BAEKEE, M.RA.S., 
 
 pEIENTAL IKTliEPEKTEK, AND PEOFliSSOH OF THE AEABIC, TUEBIISH, PEESIAN AND HLMDUSTANI 
 
 LANGUAGKS AT ETON COLLEGE: AUTHOE OF "LAKES AND PENATES/' 
 
 " TUEKISH TALES IN ENGLTSH ;" ETC., ETC. 
 
 yt^B'.SO'ABO 
 
 LONDON: 
 
 JAMES MADDEN, 8, LEADENHALL STEEET. 
 
 MJJCCC.LIV. 
 (p 
 
 Tlic Author of this work notifies tlua lie reserves the right of translating it. 
 

 JNiV^r-SrrY 
 
 ® 
 
 STBPUKN AUSTIN, PRINTKR, HKRTPORD. 
 
LIEUT.-COL. HENEY CRESWICKE RAWLINSON, C.B., 
 
 P.E.5., COURESPONDTNG HIEMBER 0? THE IMPERIAL INSTITUTE OF TRANCE, 
 ETC. ETC. 
 
 AS A SLIGHT TESTIMONY OF ADMIEATION FOR HIS TALENTS AND ATTAINMENTS, 
 AND ESTEEM FOR HIS CHARACTER, 
 
 THIS WORK IS INSCRIBED 
 
 THE AUTHOR. 
 
PREFACE. 
 
 The object of the present work is to assist the student in 
 arriving at a more intimate acquaintance with the Turkish 
 language than can be acquired by means of the grammars 
 which have hitherto been published, and which are either 
 incorrect or too complex for a general reader. 
 
 For a person who aspires to read and write a language with 
 any degree of accuracy, something more is necessary than a 
 superficial knowledge of grammatical rules. He must study its 
 construction and possess a just conception of its organization ; 
 and this the author ventures to hope may be effected by following 
 the plan laid down in these pages. 
 
 While it is impossible to foresee all the difficulties that 
 may arise in the mind of a student, the author has done 
 his best towards anticipating them, and in this task he has 
 been mainly guided by the remarks and questions put to him 
 bv his pupils in the several stages of their progress. 
 
 By first presenting a number of simple but necessarv forms 
 and rules, he lays a foundation for observations of a more 
 critical nature ; by giving a grammatical analysis of every 
 
via PKEFACE. 
 
 difficult word, he rendei-s these rules familiar ; and by con- 
 stant repetition, he inculcates them on the memory. By giving 
 a literal translation of each word, he saves the learner much 
 time and trouble; and by presenting the same word in the 
 vocabulary, he lays before the student its root and origin as it 
 would occur in a dictionary. 
 
 Doubtless, a great deal more might be written without 
 exhausting the subject; but the author trusts that sufficient has 
 been done to simplify the rules, and bring them within reach 
 of the comprehension of every one — without prolixity, and yet 
 with sufficient diffuseness for every requisite purpose. 
 
 It is with much diffidence that the author now lays the 
 result of his experience before the world ; but he trusts he 
 may, in some measure, gain the approval of more competent 
 judges, amongst whom there is no one whose good opinion he 
 could more highly value than the distinguished officer to whom 
 he ventures to dedicate this volume. 
 
 London, July, 1854. 
 
TABLE OP CONTENTS. 
 
 THE ALPHABET, ETC. 
 
 PAGE 
 
 [ l.j The Saghir Mn . . ... 1 
 
 [2.] The Turkish Alphahet . . . ib. 
 
 [ 3.] — Consists of 17 different characters, (33 letters in all) . 3 
 
 [ 4.] The primary order of the letters .... il. 
 
 [5.] Value of the letters . . ih. 
 
 [6.] TheAhjadie . . il. 
 
 [ 7.J Letters that are never joined to those following . ih. 
 
 [8.] Of the letters 1, c, _j and ^ .... 4 
 
 [ 9.] Of the Towel Points — Fatha, Kesra, and Bammah . ih. 
 
 [10.] Prolongation of the same . . . . ih. 
 
 [11.] Vowel Points only used on particular occasions ih. 
 
 [ 12.] Of the TannAn, Tasldid, Wasla, Mamm, Jazma and Kadf 5 
 
 OP THE AETICLE. 
 
 [13.] The Turks have no Definite Article ... 6 
 
 OP NOUNS. 
 
 [ 14.] No distinction of Gender in Nouns . . ih. 
 
 OF THE DECLENSION OF NOUNS. 
 
 [ 15.] Affixes taken to form the cases : jl ev, 'a house,' declined ih. 
 [ 16.] Nouns terminating with a vowel : as bb haba, ' a father,' 
 
 declined. .... 7 
 
 [ 17.] Arabic words sometimes retain their own plural . . ih. 
 
 [ 18.] Arabic words sometimes take the Persian foi-m of plural . ih. 
 
TABLE OF CONTENTS. 
 
 [19.] 
 [20.] 
 
 [21.] 
 
 [22.] 
 [23.] 
 [24.] 
 [25.] 
 
 [26.] 
 [27.] 
 [28.] 
 [29.] 
 [30.] 
 
 [31.] 
 [32.] 
 [33.] 
 [34.] 
 
 The change of the ,J to i 
 The change of the i^l/to cSJ* 
 
 or ADJECTIVES. 
 
 The Turkish Adjective invariable, but may be used sub- 
 stantively 
 Of the comparative ^=-0 
 Another form of comparative 
 Of the superlative degree . 
 List of superlative prefixes or expletives 
 
 PEONOTOTS. 
 
 Pronouns have no distinction of gender 
 The Personal Pronouns declined . 
 Of the Substantive Pronoun J jc^ . 
 
 7 
 ib. 
 
 Of the Substantive Pronoun 
 
 vr 
 
 [35.] 
 [36.] 
 [37.] 
 [38.] 
 [39.] 
 [40.] 
 [41.] 
 [42.] 
 
 •tXi^ declined with the possessive affixes 
 
 Of the Demonstrative Pronouns »j, Ji,, and .1 or 
 
 »1 
 ,, J»~'i 
 
 Of the possessive affixes 
 
 ji declined with one of the above . 
 
 ■ jil Jj declined with one of the above 
 
 Note on the double use of the personal 
 
 3rd person 
 
 Important changes after the affixes of the 
 
 Of the pronominal afiix ^ 
 
 Oiy^ . . ". 
 
 Of J and I .ii 
 
 Of the Interrogative Pronoun *-^ 
 
 Of tO and ^j''-'^ ■ 
 
 Of _li, Juki, iJji <SJ, ,i) and tU*.'! 
 
 Of Indofinifc Pronouns 
 
 J.l 
 
 pronoun in the 
 3id person 
 
 a. 
 a. 
 
 9 
 
 a. 
 
 10 
 
 ti,. 
 ib. 
 11 
 a. 
 ib. 
 ib. 
 
 12 
 
 ib. 
 ib. 
 
 ib. 
 
 13 
 
 ib. 
 ib. 
 ib. 
 ib. 
 14 
 ih. 
 ib. 
 
TABLE OF CONTENTS. XI 
 
 TAGE 
 
 [43.] Of-^ 15 
 
 [ 44.] Table of the Cardinal Numbers . . . . tb- 
 
 [45.] Pormation of the cardinal numbers by adding ,j=f^ ■ 16 
 
 Important note oneuphony,and tbe sounding of vowel points tb. 
 
 [ 46.] Of the interrogative ordinal number ^^.a-li . . ib. 
 
 [47.] Ordinals used adjeotively .... 17 
 
 [ 48.] Of numbers witli an affix — t_jj declined 2'^. 
 
 [ 49.] Of distributive numbers ..... ib. 
 
 [ 50-1. J And their uses . . . . . tb. 
 
 [ 52-3.] Of fractional numbers . . . ib. 
 [ 54.] Notation of figures . . .18 
 
 [ 55.] Of the use of the alphabet for numbers . tb. 
 
 OP VEEBS. 
 
 [ 56.] Division of verbs ...... ib. 
 
 [ 57.] Of the Simple Verb ib. 
 
 [ 58.] Derivative verbs ...... ib. 
 
 [ 59.] Model proposed . . . . . . ib. 
 
 [ 60.] Table of the formation of Turkish Verbs, — Active, Nega- 
 tive, Impossible, eto. . . . . .19 
 
 [ 61.] All conjugated in same manner as the simple verb 20 
 
 [ 62.] Irregularity of some verbs .... ib. 
 
 [ 63.] Of the changes of transitive verbs . . ib. 
 
 [ 64.] Of the Composite Verbs . . . . . ib. 
 
 [ 65.] Conjugation of the Auxiliaries LLiv^Jjl and t_X^l . 21 
 
 [ 66.] Necessitative Mood . ... 23 
 
 [ 67.] Optative ...... ib. 
 
 [68.] Conditional ...... 24 
 
 [ 69.] Imperative . . . . . . ib. 
 
 [70.] Infinitive . ... 25 
 
 [71.] Participles . ... ib. 
 
TAIiI.E OF CONTENTS. 
 
 [72.J 
 
 Conjugation of Auxiliaries — Gerunds 
 
 26 
 
 [73.] 
 
 Verbal nouns ... 
 
 ih. 
 
 [74.] 
 
 The dative infinitive 
 
 a. 
 
 [75.] 
 
 Examples 
 
 ih. 
 
 
 Observations on the foregoing table of conjugations 
 
 27 
 
 [76.] 
 
 Conjugation of the Verb (J^^^ '"'ith its passive JuJj 
 
 29 
 
 [77.] 
 
 Neoessitative Mood 
 
 31 
 
 [78.] 
 
 Optative 
 
 il. 
 
 [79.] 
 
 Conditional 
 
 32 
 
 [80.] 
 
 Imperative ..... 
 
 ib. 
 
 [81.] 
 
 Infinitive 
 
 33 
 
 [82.] 
 
 Participles 
 
 ib. 
 
 [83.] 
 
 Gerunds . ... 
 
 34 
 
 [84.] 
 
 Verbal nouns 
 
 ib. 
 
 [85.] 
 
 Examples 
 
 ib. 
 
 [8fi.] 
 
 Of the other two Auxiliary Verbs 
 
 35 
 
 [87.] 
 
 Of the Defective Verb vl 
 
 \ 
 
 ih. 
 
 [88.] 
 
 Example with adjunct .... 
 
 36 
 
 [89.] 
 
 Negative of ijl — how formed 
 
 ib. 
 
 [90.] 
 
 Of the Impersonal Verb jlj 
 
 37 
 
 [91.] 
 
 Indicative mood 
 
 ib. 
 
 [92.] 
 
 Conditional 
 
 ib. 
 
 [93.] 
 
 Gerunds 
 
 ib. 
 
 [94.] 
 
 Of the Negative 
 
 38 
 
 [95.] 
 
 Of its imperative 
 
 ib. 
 
 [96.] 
 
 Of its conditional 
 
 il. 
 
 [97.] 
 
 Gerunds 
 
 ih. 
 
 [98.] 
 
 Conjugation of a Eegular Verb 
 
 39 
 
 [99.] 
 
 Of the Verb lLX<j-= ' to love ' 
 
 ib. 
 
 [ 100.] 
 
 Necessitative . 
 
 40 
 
 [101.] 
 
 Optative ..... 
 
 ib. 
 
TABLE OF CONTENTS. 
 
 SKCT. 
 
 
 PAGK 
 
 [ 102.] 
 
 Conjugation of the Verb CJi*^ — Conditional . 
 
 40 
 
 [103.] 
 
 Imperative ...... 
 
 ib. 
 
 [ 104.] 
 
 Infinitive ..... 
 
 a. 
 
 [105.] 
 
 Participles and Gerunds .... 
 
 ih. 
 
 [106.] 
 
 Verbal nouns . . . . 
 
 41 
 
 C 107.] 
 
 Of the Passive Verb Cji^y> .... 
 
 ih. 
 
 [108.] 
 
 Of the Negative Verb lLx^-^S-j . 
 
 42 
 
 [109.] 
 
 Neeessitative 
 
 43 
 
 [110.] 
 
 Optative . ... 
 
 44 
 
 [111.] 
 
 Conditional . ... 
 
 ih. 
 
 [ 112-] 
 
 Imperative 
 
 ih. 
 
 [113.] 
 
 Infinitive 
 
 45 
 
 [114.] 
 
 Participles and Gerunds 
 
 ib. 
 
 [115.] 
 
 ft the sign of the Negative verb 
 
 46 
 
 [116.] 
 
 Indeterminates .... 
 
 ih. 
 
 [117-] 
 
 Example of the gerund 
 
 ib. 
 
 [118.] 
 
 Of Interrogative Verbs 
 
 ib. 
 
 [119.] 
 
 Of the Verb used Negatively and Interrogatively 
 
 47 
 
 [ 120.] 
 
 Of the interrogative particle ^-» 
 
 48 
 
 
 Summary. — Verbs .... 
 
 ib. 
 
 [121.] 
 
 Of Adverbs 
 
 49 
 
 [ 122.] 
 
 Of Expletives 
 
 ih. 
 
 [ 123.] 
 
 List of Expletives 
 
 50 
 
 [ 124.] 
 
 Of Prepositions, Persian and Arabic 
 
 51 
 
 [ 125.] 
 
 Of Post-positions 
 
 53 
 
 
 I. — Those which form the cases of nouns 
 
 ih. 
 
 [126.] 
 
 Of vj'the sign of the genitive 
 
 ib. 
 
 [l27.] 
 
 Of i the sign of the dative 
 
 ih. 
 
 [ 128.] 
 
 Of i_s the sign of the accusative 
 
 ib. 
 
 [ 129.] 
 
 The i_i is often dropped in MSS., and the termination 
 
 
 of a word written 
 
 for 
 
 lb. 
 
XIV 
 
 TABLE OF CONTENTS. 
 
 Of Post-positions whicli form the cases of nouns — 
 130-1. J Of aJ) and ^^,J the sign of the ablative 
 132.] Of ^ or iM\ another sign of the ablative 
 
 133.] Of the use of a1_^ with the infinitive 
 
 134.] II. — Of Post-positions affixed to the nominative 
 135.] III. — Of Post-positions used with the genitive 
 136.] IV. — Of Post-positions used with the dative 
 137.] V. — Of Post-positions used with the ablative 
 138.] VI. — Of Post-positions which take the possessive affix 
 139—171.] Conjunctions .... 
 
 172 — 191.] Interjections .... 
 
 192.] Of Derivation .... 
 193-4.] Arabic words with Persian terminations 
 
 195.] 
 196.] 
 197.] 
 198.] 
 199.] 
 200.] 
 
 Of Jj=- 
 Of iJ] or 
 
 Of 
 
 (^ 
 
 added to nouns 
 added to verbs 
 
 j! . . . 
 
 added to the roots of verbs 
 
 Of J^ and CS^ to express diminution 
 
 Of Aj!- when added to words 
 
 201.] Of ^ expressive of diminution 
 
 202.] Of J or ^ expressive of possession 
 
 203.] Of Ij expressive of privation 
 
 204,] Of ^ or ^^^i, and ^^J or ^^y 
 
 205.] Of J, J, or ^ to form verbs from noxms 
 
 206.] Of ^ and ij \ , Persian terminations 
 
 207.] Of iJJ^lj and JJ^, Jij or j,, Persian terminations 
 
 208.] Of ^\ as a termination to substativcs . 
 
 209.] Of ssA or iJo, Persian terminations 
 
 54 
 il. 
 ib. 
 il. 
 55 
 ib. 
 ib. 
 56 
 ib. 
 60 
 61 
 ih. 
 62 
 ib. 
 il. 
 03 
 ib. 
 ih. 
 il. 
 ih. 
 64 
 ib. 
 il. 
 ib. 
 65 
 ib. 
 
 SYNTAX. 
 [ 210.] Important rule on two Nouns coming together 
 
 66 
 
TABLE OF CONTENTS. 
 
 XV 
 
 C211.J 
 
 [212.] 
 
 [213.J 
 [214.] 
 [215.] 
 [216.] 
 [217.] 
 [218.] 
 
 [219.] 
 
 [220.J 
 
 [221.] 
 
 [222.] 
 
 [223.] 
 
 [ 224.] 
 
 [225.] 
 
 [226.] 
 
 [227.] 
 
 [228.] 
 
 [229.] 
 
 [230.] 
 
 [231.] 
 
 [ 232.] 
 
 [233.] 
 
 [234.] 
 
 [235, 6 
 
 [237.] 
 
 [238.] 
 
 [239.] 
 
 The Persian form used, the (--) Icesra representing the 
 English genitive case ('s) . . . . 
 
 Of two names coming together with an adjective he- 
 tween them ..... 
 
 Of Arabic and Persian Wonns 
 
 Of a Noun of Number with two genitives preceding 
 
 Of the use of the word /♦li 
 
 Of the dative case .... 
 
 Of i^}=^\ and its accompan3-ing noun 
 
 ^^ ui"^}' ij^' ^}^ bji"' \^> y ^^^ ^, 
 
 forming part of the word preceding them 
 Of the Adjective preceding the Substantive 
 Of titles ..... 
 
 Of numbers with regard to their position as to nouns 
 A noun rem.ains in the singular with a plural number 
 The use of the 3rd person singular avoided 
 The pronoun of the 3rdpers. plural generally understood 
 Of the pronoun of the 1st person 
 Of the pronoun of the 2nd person 
 Of the possessive affix 
 Of the particle S, and its demonstrative power 
 
 Of its power of appropriation. 
 
 Of its specific power as to time 
 The Verb agrees with the 1 st and 2nd persons 
 
 But need not be in concord with the 3rd person 
 The use of the Verb when addressing one or more persons 
 The use of the Verb when speaking collectively 
 ] Of lO and its use and disuse . 
 Of the Verb in poetry 
 
 Ofi^l 
 
 Of d.u.^'1 and of -vj .... 
 
 66 
 
 67 
 ib. 
 ib. 
 il. 
 ib. 
 68 
 
 ih. 
 
 ih. 
 
 ih. 
 
 69 
 
 il. 
 
 ih. 
 
 ih. 
 
 ih. 
 
 ih. 
 
 70 
 
 71 
 
 ih. 
 
 ih. 
 
 ih. 
 
 ib. 
 
 ih. 
 
 ih. 
 
 ih. 
 
 72 
 
 ih. 
 
 ih. 
 
XVI TABLE OF CONTENTS. 
 
 KKCl'. PACK 
 
 [ 240.] Of s J added to infinitives . . . 72 
 
 [ 241.] Of the dative infinitive, and of il or i\j\ when joined 
 
 to infinitives . . . ib. 
 
 [242.] Of Participles v?hen declined .... 73 
 
 [ 243.] Of Conjunctions or Disjunctives . . . ii- 
 
 [ 244.] The Gerund represents a pause in the sentence . . ih. 
 
 Example, with literal and free translation, illustrative 
 
 of the construction of Turkish sentences ; with notes 
 
 and grammatical references . . 74 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 [ 245.] Compound tenses of a Verb (which have been purposely 
 omitted in the body of the work) 
 I. — (J^^\ with the present participle of j:-«j'tl . 77 
 
 [ 246.] II. — ,, with the past participle of ,, 79 
 
 [ 247.] III. — ,, with the future participle of ,, 80 
 
 INDECLINABLE GERUNDS. 
 
 [ 248.] Gerunds formed with the present, past, and future 
 
 participles of Verbs, and the Gerund ^^^ . ib. 
 
 [ 249.] Gerunds formed by i! or i\j\ taking the infinitive. [241] 81 
 
 [ 250.] Gerunds formed by i,:>- being added to the verbal noun ih. 
 
 [251.] Gerunds formed by the addition of Jjl ^J and i Si^ ^J ih. 
 
 [252.] This foi-m is often curtailed . . . ?'J. 
 
 DECLINABLE GERUNDS. 
 
 [253.] Gerunds produced by ij being added to the verbal noun ih. 
 
 [254.] Gerunds produced by Jjl j and iX^ ^J being 
 
 added to the verbal noun . ih. 
 
 [ 255.] The past, present, and future tenses of a verb, with the 
 gerunds of ^^jl , exemplifying the changes of which 
 a verb is capable . ... 82 
 
TAliLE OF CONTENTS. 
 
 SUMMARY. 
 
 Table of the Gerunds of a verb in iJJ^ — CS^j^ ' to sec ' . 84 
 
 Table of the gerunds of a verb in j — (J-*!T ' to take' . 87 
 
 CHAPTER ON COMPOSITION. 
 
 How best to arrive at facility of composition . . 90 
 The time and application requisite . . .91 
 Listless students should not undertake to acquire a language, as 
 
 tliey must fail . . . 93 
 "We should endeavour to think in Turkish, and represent our 
 
 thoughts first in Turldfied English . 95 
 
 Which may easily be translated, until we are able to do it off-hand th. 
 
 Examples to illustrate our meaning . . 96 
 
 CHAPTER ON PRONUNCIATION. 
 The vexata qutsstio of representing Oriental words with Eoman 
 
 characters . . . . . .97 
 
 Example of a dialogue written by three persons, each diiferently, 
 
 to illustrate this difficulty ... 98 
 
 No acoetit in the Turkish language . 100 
 
 On Turkish orthography . .101 
 
 The pronunciation of the words, as noted in the Vocabulary, the 
 
 best possible under existing circumstances . . 101 
 
 First chapter of St. John's Gospel, with the pronunciation of each 
 word, and an interlinear translation, accompanied 
 by copious explanatory notes and grammatical 
 references : adapted to the comprehension of a 
 beginner ...... \ — Tl 
 
 Anecdotes of S"asr-il-deen Khoja, with interlinear translation, 
 copious notes and grammatical references : adapted 
 to the student in the second stage of his progress . T V-V1 
 
TABLE OF CONTENTS. 
 
 PAGE 
 
 ( 1.) The Khoja's preaoMng . . . . . fV 
 
 r 
 
 ( 2.) The Khoja thanks Providence for not giving wings to camels 
 
 (3.) The Khojafindstheairofacitylikethat ofhisnative town T- 
 
 (4.) The Khoja goes to the bath . . • . Tl 
 
 (5.) The Khoja's dream. ..... TT 
 
 (6.) The Khoja's fright at some Bashi Eozuks. . . Tr 
 
 ( 7.) The Khoja is taken aback and loses his presence of mind TP 
 
 (8.) The Khoja at Koniah ..... To 
 
 ( 9.) The Khoja avoids keeping Eamadan and is discovered . f* 1 
 
 ( 10.) The Khoja's opinion of the moon . . ^^ 
 
 ( 11.) The Khoja accompanies a caravan . . ^^ 
 
 ( 12.) The Khoja turns merchant . . r i 
 
 (13.) The Khoja's indifference on a blind man being drowned ^1 
 
 ( 14.) The Khoja eats his neighbour's heifer . . r" 
 
 ( 15.) The Khoja's repartee on being asked the day of the month i" \ 
 
 ( 16.) The Khoja enters a garden by means of a ladder r 1 
 
 (17.) The Khoja puts his fowls in mourning . . rf 
 
 (18.) The Khoja beats an ox for infringing on his premises r T 
 
 (19.) The Khoja's charge to his followers regarding his tomb 
 
 ( 20.) The Khoja mourns for himself 
 
 (21.) The Khoja's anger at being wetted by a spout of water 
 
 (22.) The Khoja burns all his companion's clothes 
 
 ( 23.) The Khoja follows home a thief 
 
 ( 24.) The Khoja borrows a caldron, returns it saying that it 
 had begot a little one, then he borrows it again and 
 
 declares it dead ..... pA 
 
 ( 2.5.) The Khoja overpowered by a dog, confesses himself 
 
 vanquished . . . . . i • 
 
 ( 26.) The Khoja's cruelty to a stork, whom he considered not 
 
 like a bird . . c 1 
 
 ( 27.) The Khoja cats duck-soup . . . . . c 1 
 
 Y'Y' 
 i-v 
 
TABLE OF CONTENTS. 
 
 XIX 
 
 TALE 
 
 28. 
 29. 
 30. 
 31. 
 
 32.; 
 
 33. 
 34.' 
 35. 
 36. 
 ;37.' 
 38. 
 
 39.; 
 40. 
 
 41. 
 42. 
 43. 
 44.' 
 45. 
 
 46. 
 47.' 
 48.) 
 
 ; 49.) 
 50. 
 51. 
 52. 
 
 (53.) 
 
 The Khoja's indifference 
 
 The Khoja beats a cook and reproaches him 
 
 The Khoja shams dead 
 
 The Khoja at Siir Hissar . 
 
 The Khoja and the rich jew 
 
 The Khoja's sarcasm on external appearances 
 
 The Khoja wishes every day was Bairam 
 
 The Khoja's honesty in spite of himself and his interests 
 
 The Khoja's reply on being asked the loan of his donkey 
 
 The Khoja resents the loss of his pelisse on his donkey . 
 
 The Khoja's donkey braying saves his pelisse from being 
 
 stolen ...... 
 
 The Khoja believes his donkey has become a Cadi 
 The Khoja's astonishment at the testimony of a donkey 
 being preferred to his ..... 
 
 The Khoja fancies himself dead 
 
 The Khoja cuts off the tail of his donkey 
 
 The Khoja's present to the frogs 
 
 The Khoja converts three Christians 
 
 The Khoja luckily takes a present of figs to the governor 
 
 of the district instead of beetroot 
 The Khoja returns home dry in the rain ' 
 The Khoja takes a goose to Timurlane, but eats a leg of it first 
 The Khoja's decision when Cadi drawn from practical 
 
 experience ...... 
 
 The Khoja is disturbed by thieves 
 
 The Khoja shoots his own linen, taking it for a thief 
 
 The Khoja mounts his donkey backwards 
 
 The Khoja longs to mount between the horns of an old 
 
 ox of his 
 The Khoja's sarcastic reproach to his wife 
 
 PAGE 
 
 or 
 er 
 el 
 
 1- 
 II 
 ir 
 
 IP 
 
 Is 
 
 11 
 n 
 
 IV 
 1A 
 
 vv 
 
 VA 
 A' 
 
 Af 
 
 Ar 
 
 AP 
 Aj 
 
 A1 
 AV 
 
XX TABLE OF CONTENTS. 
 
 TALE I'AGE 
 
 Powers of the Eoman letters as adopted ia this work 
 
 The systeni laid down the best to give the learner a correct 
 
 pronunciation 
 Vocabulary, consisting of nearly three thousand words, with the 
 pronunciation of each word as at present used in 
 Constantinople, with thrir correct meaning as under- 
 stood by the Turks 
 
 c 
 
 The Khoja's compassion for a dirty bird of prey . '^^ 
 
 The Khoja wishes to have two shavings for one payment '^ l 
 
 The Khoja throws himself into the sea . . i ' 
 
 The Khoja is too sharp for the lads of the neighbourhood i " 
 
 The Khoja's treatment of connections . . . i ' 
 
 The Khoja's treatment of a tortoise . i " 
 
 The Khoja's reply to those who had forgotten him at 
 
 table, and who afterwards sought his company 1 r 
 
 The Khoja loses and recovers his horse with a caravan l r 
 
 The Khoja's pun a bad one . . l 
 
 The Khoja reprobates the clipping of words i 1 
 
 The Khoja's shift at prayer when only half-washed . 1 V 
 
 The Khoja's laziness . . . . 1 V 
 
 The Khoja's poverty and shifts . . . l ^ 
 
 The Khoja's retort upon an importuning mendicant . i l 
 
 The Khoja's tricks and laughs at a troop of softas . 1 ' ' 
 
 The Khoja catches a Cadi drunk, and despoUs him of his 
 
 cloak with impunity . . \'\ 
 
 The Khoja's anger and pun on being badly shaved . 1 ' r" 
 
 The Khoja pretends he is a bulbul . . . 1 'P 
 
 The Khoja's learning and excellence . \'f' 
 
 VOCABULAEY. 
 

 
 E E E A T A. 
 
 
 PAGE 
 
 LINB 
 
 
 
 
 7 
 
 11 For 
 
 in or by fathers,' 
 
 read 
 
 in or by a father.' 
 
 10 
 
 28 „ 
 
 Ace. ^^-.;J>i^ 
 
 )? 
 
 ^r^•^ 
 
 11 
 
 29 „ 
 
 > 
 
 jj 
 
 xj:^^ 
 
 — 
 
 32 „ 
 
 [31] 
 
 )» 
 
 [32] 
 
 12 
 
 13 „ 
 
 / 
 
 )j 
 
 JL or/ 
 
 — 
 
 27 „ 
 
 !! eZJ 
 
 jj 
 
 J eli 
 
 14 
 
 21 „ 
 
 >^ 
 
 '■ 
 
 [42]^ 
 
 15 
 
 25 „ 
 
 eZ-/j (lurt 
 
 rf' 
 
 el-Ii durt se-ne-si 
 
 17 
 
 4 „ 
 
 ^"^^^^ 
 
 )j 
 
 Ji^^^\ 
 
 — 
 
 12 „ 
 
 Ace. xi J 
 
 j; 
 
 LS^.ji. o'- ^.J 
 
 24 
 
 14 „ 
 
 ^^JoJ 
 
 ?7 
 
 jTi^Jat orj^vji 
 
 25 
 
 6 Transpose 
 
 
 with, 
 
 1 JUL.1 
 
 31 
 
 4 iT)r 
 
 
 read 
 
 1 ljil\-i:^ .djl 
 
 32 
 
 13 „ 
 
 
 jj 
 
 1 J>^y>^j\ orJ,i^^\ 
 
 35 
 
 10 „ 
 
 ^1 or /*^i 
 
 i> 
 
 I«J or j*Jo! 
 
 39 
 
 6 „ 
 
 is conjugate 
 
 jj 
 
 is conjugated 
 
xxii 
 
 
 
 ERRATA. 
 
 
 PACK 
 
 40 
 
 LINE 
 
 15 
 
 For 
 
 i_Cs 
 
 r^rt^^ 
 
 
 41 
 47 
 50 
 
 4 
 28 
 21 
 
 
 mood of ^»J_5^ 
 
 
 mood of *j1 
 
 53 
 
 19 
 
 }} 
 
 i_?iJ>J 
 
 J> 
 
 s^J^, 
 
 — 
 
 20 
 
 J? 
 
 <t..'_,AJ 'his father' 
 
 n 
 
 J^;jAj his father or iJjAJ [35] 
 
 54 
 
 25 
 
 29 
 
 8 
 
 
 4^ 
 
 
 ^^-^ [253] 
 
 — 
 
 21 
 
 )J 
 
 whilst coming 
 
 }} 
 
 whilst coming, are coming, 
 coming. 
 
 — 
 
 28 
 
 J) 
 
 ^^,lL-a 
 
 }> 
 
 
 55 
 
 27 
 
 JJ 
 
 with the Norn. [134] 
 
 jy 
 
 with the Nominative [134] 
 and Genitive. 
 
 56 
 
 11 
 
 Dele 
 
 'its own side' 
 
 
 
 59 
 
 3 
 
 For 
 
 lij^ or A^l)/ 
 
 )j 
 
 l.;_jf or i^\;_^ 
 
 — 
 
 16 
 
 )) 
 
 ^Ixil ij.^ 
 
 ?j 
 
 ijj\j\uj\ A-.^..,l 
 
 61 
 
 2 
 
 J7 
 
 ^\h ^J> 
 
 )j 
 
 jjlw ^J 
 
 — 
 
 7 
 
 Jt 
 
 r^^^ 
 
 jj 
 
 ^L^'l 
 
 — ■ 
 
 27 
 
 yy 
 
 'putting his hand/ 
 
 jj 
 
 putting his right hand.' 
 
 5 The paragraph commencing ALC^ii' ,0^-^ '^Ir^J belongs to 
 the latter part of [241] and not to [242]. 
 
 78 
 87 
 
 15 For 
 19 „ 
 
 
 road 
 
 

 
 ERRATA. 
 
 
 XXlll 
 
 I'AGIi 
 
 LTNE 
 
 
 
 
 
 \-r 
 
 23 Jbr 
 
 ^^w^ 
 
 read 
 
 
 ^f^^ 
 
 \-\ 
 
 13 „ 
 
 > 
 
 )t 
 
 
 " P 
 
 '\^ 
 
 26 „ 
 
 u-te-mal i-du-reh, 
 
 }t 
 
 
 is-tez^-mal i-de-reh. 
 
 A1 
 
 19 „ 
 
 iS\ \S\^^ ^r^y^ 
 
 )j 
 
 
 j,\ j;/,i ^,ir 
 
 VP 
 
 n „ 
 
 ■ rJjt 
 
 jj 
 
 
 1J.\ 
 
 vr 
 
 11 „ 
 
 duah-u-ni-mah 
 
 J7 
 
 
 dtish ii-ni-ma. 
 
 V- 
 
 28 „ 
 
 'ii-l-k-ma-sin 
 
 }> 
 
 
 cii-Iii-ma-sin. 
 
 ir 
 
 9 -, 
 
 i^Ji^^\ 
 
 JJ 
 
 
 
 — 
 
 15 „ 
 
 (it) 
 
 J7 
 
 
 it 
 
 ^] 
 
 5 „ 
 
 C^J^ ^,.J1 4^ 
 
 j; 
 
 ^j^l 
 
 ur!^ ^- 
 
 
 
 I kept asking 1000 
 
 I 
 
 kept asking 1000 (pieces 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 of) gold. 
 
 iV 
 
 6 „ 
 
 purse of gold 
 
 JJ 
 
 
 purse -witli gold 
 
 o1 
 
 3 „ 
 
 ijj 
 
 J7 
 
 
 (LjJ 
 
 C6 
 
 22 „ 
 
 ni gu-nah (jicM-lim 
 
 J» 
 
 
 Me ffu-nd ge-cM Mm 
 
 P^ 
 
 1 „ 
 
 ^.s^^ u4? 
 
 j; 
 
 
 ^S^^ J^? 
 
 P" 
 
 5 „ 
 
 ^• 
 
 }} 
 
 
 C<3 
 
 — 
 
 9 „ 
 
 ^- 
 
 jj 
 
 
 cSj 
 
 pr 
 
 19 „ 
 
 )\J^i^ 
 
 7} 
 
 
 J(_^.*jj 
 
 p- 
 
 7 „ 
 
 ^j¥^ 
 
 }> 
 
 
 ufP.^ 
 
 — 
 
 7 „ 
 
 ^■,^1 
 
 J) 
 
 
 .(•,,?Jl 
 
 rA 
 
 9 „ 
 
 gr.J^S' u/^v^ 
 
 )f 
 
 
 a.jjAii' i_js:S 
 
 n 
 
 18- „ 
 
 Jo.^ 
 
 jy 
 
 
 jAl'.l 
 
XXIV ERRATA. 
 
 I'Aun LiNt: 
 
 rr 1 For jj^ read jjS 
 
 rv 17 ,, Grosse Claus und die „ Der kleine Klaus und dor 
 Idein Claus grosse Klaus. 
 
 — 21 „ such were the contradictions ,, such were the inconsistencies. 
 
 1 A 19 Dele ' Vide note 7, page 1 ' ' 
 
 ERRATA IN THE VOCABULARY. 
 
 u-lii 
 
 ra-sul 
 
 zin-di-gd-n'i 
 
 ty-hyl-mah 
 
 Note. — All the ( " ) in the Vocahulary have been omitted for tyiDO- 
 graphical reasons : the Roman characters will suffice to show where they 
 come in. 
 
 9 
 
 14 
 
 For 
 
 0-lu 
 
 }) 
 
 24 
 
 5 
 
 7J 
 
 ra-sul 
 
 read 
 
 — 
 
 2 
 
 >? 
 
 zin-da-gani 
 
 )j 
 
 30 
 
 26 
 
 n 
 
 ta-kel-melc 
 
 read 
 
ELEMENTS 
 
 TUEKISH GEAMMAE. 
 
 [ l.J The Turks use the Arabic and Persian characters, to which 
 they have added the sagjiir niin [lL/], on which three dots are sometimes 
 affixed [ vj] to distinguish it from the Arabic ijS haf, and the Persian 
 1^ gaf; but generally no distinction is considered necessary, and a 
 knowledge of the word suffices to direct the reader. 
 
 [2.]— THE TURKISH ALPHABET. 
 
 
 Fiual. 
 
 
 
 
 Name. 
 
 Connee. 1 Uncon. 
 
 Medial. 
 
 Initial. 
 
 Power. 
 
 AKf 
 
 I 
 
 \ 
 
 I 
 
 
 
 a, e, i, 0, and u, according to the 
 
 the vowel-point. 
 h. 
 
 Pe 
 
 I— 
 
 <_J 
 
 V 
 
 
 
 P- 
 
 Te 
 
 c:-^ 
 
 cu 
 
 :; 
 
 
 
 t. 
 
 The 
 
 .4 
 
 cu 
 
 A 
 
 
 
 th, and sometimes s. 
 
 Jim 
 
 Chfm 
 
 Hha 
 
 t 
 f 
 
 (I 
 
 te! 
 
 
 
 ch, as in ' child.' 
 hh, a strong aspirate. 
 
 Kha 
 
 ■t 
 
 t 
 
 .s 
 
 ^^ 
 
 M, like the German ch (guttural) 
 
 Dal 
 
 S 
 
 J 
 
 d 
 
 J 
 
 d. 
 
TURKISH GRAMMAK. 
 
 
 Fl 
 
 lal. 
 
 
 
 
 Name. 
 
 Connec. 
 
 Uiicon. 
 
 MeflioJ. 
 
 Initial. 
 
 I'owcr. 
 
 Zal 
 
 J. 
 
 J 
 
 j> 
 
 i 
 
 "Z, 
 
 M 
 
 J 
 
 J 
 
 ^ 
 
 J 
 
 r. 
 
 Za 
 Zha 
 
 3 
 
 J 
 
 J 
 
 1 
 \ 
 
 ~Ji, precisely as the French /. 
 
 Sm 
 
 LT- 
 
 u^ 
 
 .WJ. 
 
 •.O 
 
 s. 
 
 Shm 
 
 lA 
 
 u^ 
 
 >J.^ 
 
 >^ 
 
 sli. 
 
 Ssdd 
 
 ^ 
 
 u^ 
 
 -^ 
 
 *^ 
 
 ss, s hard. 
 
 Dhiid 
 
 i> 
 
 l> 
 
 -i 
 
 *£! 
 
 dd, d hard, and sometimes -. 
 
 Tab 
 
 k 
 
 L 
 
 k 
 
 L 
 
 t(, t hard, and sometimes d. 
 
 Zah 
 
 li 
 
 ii 
 
 li 
 
 L^ 
 
 z hard. 
 
 Ain 
 
 t 
 
 c 
 
 ^ 
 
 ~ 
 
 a, i, u, a soft guttural. 
 
 Ghaiu 
 
 t 
 
 s 
 
 i. 
 
 ffh, guttural. 
 
 Fe 
 
 i_i 
 
 
 i 
 
 i 
 
 /• 
 
 Eaf 
 
 J- 
 
 J 
 
 SL 
 
 i 
 
 h hard and palatal. 
 
 Kaf 
 
 cs. 
 
 Ll/ 
 
 i 
 
 ^ 
 
 /,;. 
 
 Saghir 7 
 nuu 3 
 
 s 
 
 J- 
 
 t 
 
 r 
 
 n, cerebral. 
 
 Gaf 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 t 
 
 r 
 
 ff hard, sometimes softened into y. 
 
 Lam 
 
 J 
 
 J 
 
 i 
 
 ! 
 
 I 
 
 Mi'm 
 
 r 
 
 (* 
 
 ■^ 
 
 -^ 
 
 m. 
 
 ISTun 
 
 C; 
 
 - 
 
 j 
 
 n. 
 
 "Waw 
 
 i 
 
 J 
 
 i 
 
 J 
 
 0, oa, u, to, and r.* 
 
 Heh 
 
 d. 
 
 e i( 
 
 « i' 
 
 jb 
 
 h. 
 
 Yeh 
 
 C5 
 
 !_> 
 
 
 -' 
 
 y- 
 
 Lam-Alif, i! or \ is simply a combination of J lam and \ alif. 
 
 '■'■ To facilitate the pronunciation of the learner, a small (") will be 
 placed over it thus, j, whenever the _j is sounded as the consonant v. 
 
THE ALPHABET. o 
 
 [3.] The learner will observe that the aliohabet consists of only 
 seventeen different characters, to which one or more dots are placed above 
 or below to form the remaining letters — thirty-three in all. 
 
 [4.] If he follow the order of these primary letters [I (_> _ J, 
 ct. P, 7, o ] , he wiU find that they are arranged at first like the Greek, 
 and thus prove their common origin with this language from the 
 Phoenician. Whatever may have been the origin of the Shemitic, 
 Indo-Germanic, and Tartaric languages, it is evident that the invention 
 of letters had but one source.* 
 
 [5. J In this order they have a certain value, which is sometimes 
 used to form a word, and a date by which it maybe retained more easily 
 in the memory ; the order is as follows : — 
 
 ^^^^u^lJ|~J>^h^j 
 
 J S J _ i_J 1 
 
 60 50 40 30 20 10 9 8 7 
 
 6 3 4 3 2 1 
 
 t ^ ^ J ^ ^ CIJ J. 
 
 J Lf "-> t. 
 
 1000 900 800 700 600 500 400 300 
 
 200 100 90 80 70 
 
 [6.] In this order the letters are divided into eight barely pro- 
 nounceable words, jJi-i air lil^^wKj ^_^^t-j ,j-*l^ i_s^ j>* ^^^'j 
 and which we give here to show how the letters may be joined, j 
 
 [ 7.] There are seven letters, however, 1, J, ^,j,j,j, and •, which 
 
 * It would not be proper here to follow out this ai-gument, but the 
 writer has often thought that he could trace in the Sanskrit characters a 
 remarkable coincidence ia form with many of the Eoman letters. This 
 may arise from the Phoenician and Sanskrit being both descended from 
 some still more ancient language, which is now lost in the remote ages 
 prior to the existence of either of these languages. 
 
 f The use of the letter mimiers is fast going, if not entirely gone, out 
 of practice, as puerile ; but formerly great significance was attached to any 
 combination of letters that express in one or more words an event and a date. 
 
 B 2 
 
4 TURKISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 are never joined to the following letter, and when they occur, the word 
 is broken,— that is, the pen is taken off, and the second part of the word 
 is resumed unconnected. 
 
 They may only he joined to the letter preceding them, as thus 
 exhibited,— .ill liL, JIa^j;!, jlicl, ^\j^\, (_!i3^Ujl, i-iy\. 
 
 [ 8. J The Turkish alphabet is composed entirely of consonants. The 
 letters \, f,j, and o, although they sometimes perform the part of 
 vowels, must rather be considered to stand under the first category. 
 
 [9.] The place of the vowels is supplied by three marks called 
 Fatha ( " ), S'esra ( _ ), and Damma ( ^ ). The first consists of a small stroke 
 above the letter, giving the sound of a ; the second, of a similar one 
 below the letter, giving the sound of i ; and the third of a small •' like a 
 comma over the letter, imparting the power of u. 
 
 Ex. Fatha Jo pronounced bad. 
 
 Kesra Jj ,, lid. 
 
 Dammah Jj ,, lud. 
 
 [ 9.] Wben either of these occurs in conjunction with a letter pre- 
 ceding an 1, t_f, or •, the sound of the/a^7t«, liesra, or damma is prolonged. 
 
 Jb lal. J-J III. Jv' hid. 
 
 But in this case the vowel-points are generally omitted, as the 1, ^, 
 and . are sufficient indications of what vowel sound will be required. 
 
 [ ll.J Indeed, in most cases the vowel points are not inserted, except 
 in quotations from the Koran, or in writing a foreign word or name, and 
 in some poetical works : this causes at first a little embarrassment to the 
 learner: he must accustom himself to pronounce the word as if such 
 vowels did not exist, until he can supply them by a knowledge of the 
 word. This difficulty wiU vanish by dint of a little practice. 
 
VOWEL POINTS AN» OTHER SIGNS. 
 
 [ 1 2.] The Turks also have recourse to other signs in use among Arab 
 ■writers, which are — 
 
 '{ — ) an or en over a final letter, ) Mj lalan, 
 generally the \ •' 
 Tanwin j ( - ) ,-^ ^^\j lahin. 
 
 . ( f. ) o« or M» '-r'" iabun. 
 
 Tashdid ( ), this sign doubles the letter over which it is placed ; as, 
 (_^;-siiij tanakkus. 
 
 Wasla ( -■= ) implies conjunction, and is placed over the alif, which 
 loses its power and becomes mute. 
 
 Ex. t—sLtts' \ li 'Allal Mssab. , Ls' I l!J3-*11 II malek il hak. 
 Madda ( *- ) when placed over an alif lengthens its sound. 
 
 Ex. ipijij 1 Azarish. 
 Kamza (') is equal to half an alif, and when placed over a (i_j) the 
 dots are omitted, as in ^'L.-. It is also used with the faiha and kesra 
 over and below the alif. 
 
 Ex. j^\j ta'thir, l_jI=;-1 '^ijdb. 
 
 Jazma ( ^ ) or ( ° ) is placed over a letter to separate the syllables of a 
 
 word. , 'Ai ^^~ chok-luk, .JiA-tiJl et-mish-dir. 
 
 Note. — When the Arabic article Jl occurs before a noun commencing 
 with CLi, Cj, ^, J, J, j, ijM, ^Ji, ^js, ^, \s, Si, J, or ^, the taMid 
 is placed over the first letter of the noun, and the article is not sounded. 
 
 Ex. . --^ ^^ ^^.4j>-_1I ^<dll **uj Bism illah-h-vrrahman irrahim. 
 
6 TURKISH GKAMMAR. 
 
 OF THE ARTICLE. 
 
 [ 13.J The Turts have no definite article ; for the indefinite article 
 they use the numeral adjective j Ur, one. They sometimes have 
 recourse to the Persian manner of expressing the article by a lesra or 
 hemza between the nouns. 
 
 Ex. ij^^ >'^V Nawale-y-'ihshh, the Lamentations of Love ; 
 ;1 _i) ^^cjJ^, the Kose-garden of Shiraz. 
 
 OF NOUNS. 
 
 [ 14.] The Turkish language, like the English, makes no distinction 
 of genders in nouns, except in borrowing an Arabic or Persian word, 
 when they import it as they find it used. 
 
 Ex. ioJ^. walidah, a mother. i.::— iJ lint, a daughter. 
 
 J--» merd, a man, ^j %en, a woman. 
 
 OP THE DECLENSION OF NOUNS. 
 
 [ 15.] Properly speaking there are no declensions, as the word never 
 changes, but takes an afiix which gives it the required meaning. Such 
 affixes are, however, so constantly used, that we shall look upon them as 
 forming cases, and treat them as such, to facilitate the comprehension of 
 the students who have accustomed their minds to such form by the study 
 of the Classics. 
 
 jl ev, a house.' 
 
 SINGULAE. 
 
 jl ev, a house. 
 Uf|l evin, of a house. 
 ^j\ eveh, to a house. 
 ,_5j\ evi, the house. 
 l^i>jl evdan, from a house. 
 
 or 
 
 iJjl evdah, in or by the house. 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 _Jjl evler, houses. 
 ^jGj) evlcrin, of houses. 
 
 iJjl erlerah, to houses. 
 i^)j\ evleri, houses. 
 I^J^jl evlerdan, from houses. 
 
 or 
 
 iJJjl evlerdah, in or by houses. 
 
NOUNS. 
 
 [ 16.] If the noun terminates with a vowel, it then takes i-C, di , 
 and J in the singular (gen. dat. and ace), instead of »J and ^ . 
 
 l.'lj laha, "a father.' 
 
 SINGUL.iK. 
 
 Lb haha, a father. 
 
 iXjIiu labanin, of a father. 
 
 (L'Llj lalayah, to a father. 
 
 ^AjLi lulmjt, a father. 
 
 .jblj lahadan, from a father, 
 or 
 
 ,\ jbL' Idbadeh, in or by fathers. 
 
 \Wo labaler, fathers. 
 vJ^Sljlj lahalerin, of fathers. 
 jJLlj habahrah, to fathers. 
 i_oul) halaleri, fathers. 
 (jt^Jljlj labalerdan, from fathers. 
 
 or 
 
 iJ^ljlj labaler dah, in or by fathers. 
 
 Tliis is all that is required to be borne in mind regarding the changes of 
 substantive nouns, when they are parely Turkish. 
 
 [ 1 7.] The Turks often take an Arabic word, and use it with its own 
 jplural. 
 
 Ex. i^^sj, plural J.-*51kj or CuL.«£iJ' ; i_-uli, plural CI^LjLc. 
 
 [ 18.] But they also take an Arabic word and give it a Persian muta- 
 tion for the plural, as t^'Lj, ' governor,' plural ^J^Vs, governors.' 
 
 Ex. St. John, chap, i., v. 4, k_>Jv.l Ljjy> i-DL^Jl f-l^ltj^ _j , 
 or ^-Jol _f)y v_rX»Jt <.uL=- J, And the life was the light of men.' 
 
 [ 19.] Both in substantives and verbs [57], those words which have a 
 V change it into a 4 for the sake of euphony, which is much studied 
 by the Turks to soften their language, and of which more will be said 
 later in this work. 
 
 Thus, (J^ makes m*j^i ''•*^; ^'^^ l5v' "^ ^^^ genitive, dative, 
 and accusative cases singular. 
 
 [ 20. J For the same reason the lLS is softened into a Persian C-/ 
 (^hard). 
 
8 TURKISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 Ex. CSj^ makes SLi f ^ f i_/i/ ™ ^^ inflected [i.e., 
 the gen. dat. and ace.) oases singular. 
 
 Note. — k& our intention in this work is to speak to the eye as well as 
 to the imderstandiiig of the learner, we leave him to observe from the 
 examples given several little things which he will the better recollect, 
 from having used his ingenuity in discovering them. For instance,^ in 
 looldng through the declension of nouns he will see that by the addition 
 
 of J ler, the plural is formed. 
 
 OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 [ 21. J The Turkish Adjective is unchangeable. 
 
 '^ J '^f ?. ^*'' g'U''^el Iciz, a pretty girl. 
 
 y^i i}jy guzel M%ler, pretty girls. 
 
 jjli.l Jj^ .J Mr guzel ogUan, a pretty boy. 
 
 Jj^.i (Jj" giJ-zel ogManler, pretty boys. 
 
 But if you use the word as a substantive, it takes all the changes of 
 
 the noun. 
 
 Ex. J'l^i' -), a beauty. Plur. y^j^ beauties, which is declined 
 regularly. 
 
 [22.] The Comparative is expressed by the addition of the word ^i~. J 
 (pronounced daha.) 
 
 Ex. )j1 ayi, good. vj ic=*-'^ dalia ayi, better. 
 
 i^jS guzel, pretty. JjjS ^^^J rfa^a ^iizeZ, prettier. 
 
 [ 23.] There is another mode of forming the comparative much in 
 use, which is by putting the object in the ablative case to precede the 
 adjective. 
 
 Ex. ^\ (oJ^ lendan ayi, better than me. 
 
 Jj»r (mJ>^-^ sendan gilzel, prettier than you. 
 to which we may add Jjl jo'^ lendan evval and iX.^ ij<^^ hendun 
 sonra, 'before' and after me,' /.?., preferred to me,' or coming next 
 to me.' 
 
DEGREES OF COMPAKISON. 
 
 [ 24.] The Superlative is formed by putting the words kJ] en, i $o 
 
 pek, ao^] %iadah, or iji^jli gliayet and dual o-uli gliayet ilah, before 
 the adjective. 
 
 y_ji \S\ an Iceutu, very bad. 
 Li (_X) pek fena, very bad. 
 /»ol juL« ijb J ziyadeh, mallu adam, a very rich man. 
 
 ij-CiJ u:--jIe gjiayet zenguin, very rich. 
 Jt> idjl c:-^_Lc ghayet ilah deli, very mad. 
 
 [25.] Besides the above, the Turks have other methods of expressing 
 the superlative, among which we may notice the following : 
 
 ^JIj-i L-jI ap achik, quite open, i.e., very open, 
 jjl (_->^ ap ak, quite white, «'.«., very white. 
 (joLj »j JflOT layaz, quite white, i.e., very white. 
 ^Liij *j 2/em yesMl, very green, 
 ijil) *J y«m yash, wet through, «'.«., very wet. 
 ijj^^ U^^ dos doghri or doghru, quite straight. 
 •Ijt i—J^ top dolu, very full. 
 ;_j J 1*^ J (Ztj« (?M3, perfectly flat, 
 ij t_-J 7ot^ ^ara, very black, 
 ilw: *~j s«w siah, entirely black. 
 ^'.ytji I— .-^ kip kirmizi, very red. 
 ^ J i_^ io^ ^Mrii, very dry. 
 ^CJ (jjjJ hes liltun, entirely. 
 jJob t—'y yap yaliniz, entirely alone ; om^. 
 i_fiLs i_--v^ «ap ««?■», quite yellow, 
 jjijj /»«J i»»j iosA, quite empty. 
 
 These prefixes, having no separate meaning, may be called expletives. 
 
TURKISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 10 
 
 PEONOUNS. 
 
 [ 26. J Pronouns are of all genders, and unchangeable in this respect. 
 They sometimes take J ler as a sign of the plural. 
 Ex. ]i we, J Jj us {i.e., we in particular). 
 
 PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 
 
 [ 27.J Admitting them to be declinable for the same reason that we 
 have given regarding the stibstantive [15], they would take the following 
 affixes in their mutation. 
 
 SIXGTJLAB. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 Dat. 
 
 Aoc. 
 
 Abl. 
 
 'I' 
 
 ^' len 
 *:o ienim 
 IAj iatM 
 ^ij bini 
 lendan 
 
 U" 
 
 ' Thou. ' 
 . -J sen 
 
 i_J>^. ; seiiin 
 
 lx_) Sana 
 
 U 
 
 Jwj sem 
 sendan 
 
 He, she or it.' 
 , 111 or .1 ol or 
 JIj \ anin 
 15 \ ana 
 
 ijJul andan 
 
 Nom. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 Dat. 
 
 Ace. 
 
 Abl. 
 
 ' We. ' 
 
 i«Jj hizim 
 i]) hizah 
 
 i_jjp lizdan 
 
 Ye.' 
 
 J— J s»z 
 
 ' They.' 
 
 _Lj 1 anlar 
 
 \SjiJ \ anlar in 
 
 ij-j sca/j 
 
 i.JJl anlar all 
 
 ^>;-.- ski 
 ^jL>J_; sizdan 
 
 ^Ijl anlari 
 fj,^J^\ anlar dan 
 
 [ 28. J J J^:.i or i^.^ self,' is a substantive pronoun, and thus declined : 
 
 Wom. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 Dat. 
 
 Ace. 
 
 Abl. 
 
 SINGUL.iE. 
 
 t_jS^ Iccndi 
 >S^j^xS liendinin 
 i^ Jco kendiyah 
 
 ^. 
 
 •xS Icendi- 
 
 ■y« 
 
 u 
 
 u.\j Aii kendidan 
 
 J^Ai^ kendulcr 
 
 >J J_jjc6 kendulerin 
 
 ^J_iAiS kendulcrali 
 
 ^j^yJL henduUri 
 
 ^ijJ^jJcS kendulerdan 
 
I'liONOUNS. 11 
 
 Note. In this word the j or the i_f is used synonymously, according 
 as it may best suit the euphony of the phrase in which it may occur ; 
 and to this regard for the softening of sounds we shall have many 
 occasions to refer in the course of this work. 
 
 [ 29.] There is also another substantive pronoun used among the 
 Turkoman tribes, — it is li.l ixzii,, which has the same signification as 
 .Jci 'self.' 
 
 
 SINGITLAE. 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 _ J Jjl UZiJi. 
 
 Jj Jjl iizuler. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 i_CjJ_ii iizunin. 
 
 Uj!ijjl uziilerin. 
 
 Dat. 
 
 ajj'ijl ilzuyah. 
 
 ijjjj\ uzulerah. 
 
 Ace. 
 
 ^..iji^ fe%». 
 
 ^Jit\^\ uzuleri. 
 
 Abl. 
 
 ^Jjjji uzixdan. 
 
 ^^^j}i uzulerdan 
 
 [ 30.] These two, by adding the possessive afSxes [ 33 ], become 
 pronouns, and may be declined accordingly. 
 
 Gen. Dat. Aco. Abl. 
 
 K'om. 
 
 SINGTILAE. 
 
 
 
 l*jAiS' I myself 
 
 X.j.xi' i^.Ai^ 
 
 ^i^ 
 
 ^S^,s:S 
 
 SLiS^ Thou thyself 
 
 
 Ji^ 
 
 ^^;^ 
 
 ^^xS He himself 
 
 PLTTItAL. 
 
 
 u^:^ 
 
 J^jJci" "We ourselves 
 
 \Syt^^ aj^^d^iS 
 
 l^j^}"^ 
 
 u'^j'^ 
 
 jxjiX^ Tou yourselves vJ^JLjAii' :iji^S:S i^JSJs:^ jjJjxjJ^ 
 ]^X^ They themselves \J^JjS^ iJ^^^S ljJ'^'^ U'i}j'^ 
 
 DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOtlNS. 
 
 [31.] The following have no genders — -jJ hu, y^ slm, this,' andjl o 
 or , U ol, ' that.' They may be thus declined : — 
 
 SINGTJLAE. 
 
 Nom. Gen. Dat. Ace. Abl. 
 
 ^ 
 
 Sly) l^ ij^' u'^^ 
 
 PLtlEAL. 
 
 Norn. Gen. Dat. Ace. Abl. 
 
 [31.] vJil ishhu, this,' is indeclinable, and generally used at the 
 
12 TUJIKISII GRAMMAR. 
 
 beginning of a letter. — Ex. f'j^ ^^^ y^^ islihu mah-i-muliarram, In 
 this current month of Moharrem (such and such circumstances having 
 taken place.) 
 
 POSSESSITE PEONOUNS. 
 
 [ 33.] The separate possessive pronouns which consist of the genitive 
 case of the personal pronouns [ 27 ] are seldom used alone, and the 
 following possessive aflSxes are preferred. 
 
 * m or im, for my '; as, /k\i\) iaham, my father. 
 
 iwT n or in, for 'thy'; as, J^'lj-.i Mtabin, thy book. 
 
 *^_>7e, for his'; as, (_>j^ ferfre^z, his power. 
 
 ^^js'i (after a vowel) as, ^u^.^^ guimisi, his sliip. 
 
 y* miz or 'im{%, for our ' ; as, j-''J^ evimiz, our house. 
 
 l5 ni% or iniz, for ' your ' ; as, JXJ' I atiniz, your horse. 
 
 ^J leri OT lari, f 01 their'; as, ^\i^js~ chizmeleri, their boots. 
 
 [ 34. J A noun with one of the above pronominal affixes is declinable 
 after the rule for substantives[ 15 ]. 
 
 Ex. j\ a house, *j\ my house, |*Jjl my houses. 
 
 
 Nom. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 Dat. 
 
 Ace. 
 
 Abl. 
 
 Singular 
 Plural 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 jJlljj a brother, (-CiliJj thy brother, vJ'JLitjis thy brothers. 
 Nom. . Gen."^ Dat. ^ Ace. Abl. 
 
 Sing. '-Cii^'-jJ ^iJLiiLy ^ ^sJCi^i ^ ^jCilj^ ^jJ^Jil^y 
 Plural J}Li Icy SSjJiJi,\^J, ^J-^Ly ^_Xj_LiLy ^jJil^Ly 
 
 * To avoid the ambiguity which would arise from the use of ^ and 
 
 ^_f^ separately, the other forms, i_Cl and ljJ^'^ , are often added. Thus, 
 
 instead of saying \\ el'i, 'his hand' (which might be confounded with 
 
 the accusative ^\ eli, ' the hand') they say, ^\ cXj^ anin eli, ' his hand '; 
 
 ^_5^JJ^:;a »Jyjl onlartn kitaUeri, ' their books.' The word ^-ijl::^^ is a 
 good example of this ambiguity, as it may mean either ' the bonks ' 
 (accus. pi.), ' his bnnks,' ' their books,' or ' their book.' 
 
PRONOUNS. 13 
 
 Note. — The ^ in this last plural form, iXXi J-iljJ, etc., is intro- 
 duced to facilitate the pronunciation, and contribute to the euphony. 
 
 [ 35.] After the affixes of the thii'd person, the post-positions n and 
 
 i_j become ij and ij, instead of JJ and ,_), according to [16], and ^ is 
 
 inserted in the ablative. Viie [130, 131J. 
 
 Gen. Dat. Ace. Abl. 
 
 ^jj.f^ his ship tS^Mj-f^ i ^ .j jj^ '*^ i^^Mi-yiS i^JC>jaw.«*i 
 ^jjj his power iJlljjJ i^jSi ^ijjjji j^iXxijAis 
 
 Note — It will be seen that the last ,_? is dropped in the writing : thus, 
 JG.**»-^and Jujjjj, instead of Jl-jA.--iS' and tJ3.-JijJi ; this is merely 
 to facilitate the caUgraphy, as the t_j is always more or less pronounced. 
 
 [ 36.] When the separate possessive pronouns are used absolutely, 
 they take the relative pronominal affix ^S, which gives them an idea of 
 particularization. Ex. Sf^. lenimlci, 'my very own,' ^iSL^ seninhi, 
 ' thy very own.' This ~S is of Tartaric origin, and we shall have to 
 treat of it more largely in the Syntax. 
 
 [ 37.] When the word »-« water,' takes any of the possessive affixes, 
 the letter ^ is introduced between it and the afSx, merely for the sake 
 of euphony : for instance, it is easier and softer to say *J )«» sH-yim than 
 A j^ sum ; cXj »«5 S'u-yin than vjj-tf sun ; .jJ j«« su-y'i than (_>•-« su-i, 
 
 [38.] The same relates to j 'one,' and i ^ all,' which become 
 
 Mi J ' one of them,' and ^m»--J!> all of them,' instead of ,«-V and 
 "ju^ which would be harsh. 
 
 INTEEROGATITE PEONOUNS. 
 [39.] *^ or |»-.^ ' who,' is declinable thus — 
 
 
 SINGITLAK. 
 
 PIUKAL. 
 
 Nom 
 
 . _ jS Mm, whom. 
 JLo M-min, of whom. 
 
 J^ Mm-ler. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 ^SjIa^ kim-ler-in. 
 
 Dat. 
 
 A^A M-mah, to whom. 
 
 ijht^ him-ler-a. 
 
 Ace. 
 
 ^^-^ Id-ml, whom. 
 
 ,_5^.L*^ him-hr-i. 
 
 Abl. 
 
 ^,JUi Icim-dan, from whom. 
 
 (jJ^Lt.^ Jdm-ler-dan 
 
14 TURKISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 [40.] ij and ,5*^ what' are also declinable; the latter is pro- 
 nounced Icanglii, and it is sometimes shortened into hdngi and lictnl. 
 JSTom. Gen. Dat. Ace. Abl. 
 
 Singular iJ J-JAJ ijjsj is!,^ u^ or ^^JiU 
 Plural Jj JpJ ^ ^Ju u'^J^ 
 
 Observe that the a is dropped to facilitate the caligraphy, but it is 
 retained in the procunciation. 
 
 [41. J —li how many,' ,_)-ii) 'how,' and jjJ iJ 'how much,' 
 may also stand under the category of interrogative pronouns. They arc 
 used with -a lier, every,' and followed by il.u«jl issa if,' the 3rd person 
 subjunctive mood of j,.;! , which plays a great part in Turkish com- 
 position, being often an expletive [123], but giving peculiar force to the 
 language. Jc and J..^ are indeclinable by themselves. 
 
 fS jii her Mm, whosever. <Uujl- whosoever it may or should be. 
 
 ij Jb her neh, whatever. (Luj\- whatever it may or should be. 
 
 jjj (SJJb Jier neh Icadar, how much i.u.jl- how much soever (it) may or 
 soever. should be. 
 
 —li J!) /jer /ortc/j, how many soever. lUjI- howmanyBoever(they)maybo. 
 jj-^ Jt, Aerndsc/, in whatever (way) ^UuJi- whatever may come or be. 
 
 INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 
 
 J* properly belongs to the class of indefinite pronouns, of which we 
 subjoin a list. 
 
 <Uii^ h'mseh, any one. i_,J!) hej>, all. 
 
 <Lj..^ J Mr Mmseh, a certain person. ^...>a heppisi, all of them. 
 
 . (jlj /e?are, such a one (so and so). (_^i J^ her hess, everyone, 
 
 jjlj J lir felan, a certain person. s^VrH^ ghdiri, another. 
 
 j-«-Jb heppimiz, all of us. ^^-Sb hich, anything. 
 
 * l5*^ lcanghiiak.es sometimes the possessive afiixcs \^cide Tale 61] : 
 iJi*_: 15*^" J-*JJ _5 tea lil-maz hin-ghi-si-dcr, and he knows not which of 
 them it is.' 
 
NUMEKALS. 
 
 15 
 
 [ 43.] The latter {lAch) requires a negative after it with the verb. 
 
 JEx. ,Aji..-»^i»r lUu^ as:^^ ji r^ iS^V^' '^'^ °°® ^^^ ^'^^^ ^°^ 
 
 at any time ;' lit., ' God, at any one time, any one has not seen.' 
 
 (♦^♦i-i ^ii ' I did not go at all.' ^Jt^iT lUu^ ^-Ub ' No one came 
 
 at all ;' lit., Any one did not come.' 
 
 [44.]— THE CARDINAL NUMBERS. 
 
 
 .^ 
 
 (LvmJ 
 
 Jzr \ 1 
 
 «x-z r 2 
 
 iicA r" 3 
 
 diirt 'r 4 
 
 hesh 5 
 
 (zM 1/' 6 
 
 ye(?-(f» >/. / 7 
 
 ««X-te ....'^. y 8 
 
 doh-lcHz 1 9 
 
 oivn 1 • 10 
 
 own h'lr 11 
 
 oivn iJci 12 
 
 own iich 13 
 
 oiim durt 14 
 
 oivti iesh 15 
 
 own al-fi 16 
 
 men yed-d'i 17 
 
 ovm seh-Mz 18 
 
 / 
 
 5J« scIcMz y 
 
 own dok-hu% ... 19 
 
 yir-mi 20 
 
 yir-mi Mr 21 
 
 yir-mi ilci 22 
 
 otiiz 30 
 
 hirlc 40 
 
 el-li 50 
 
 alt-m'ish 60 
 
 yet-mish 70 
 
 seTc-san 80 
 
 dolc-san 90 
 
 yu% 100 
 
 yu% Mr 101 
 
 yiiz ikh. 102 
 
 Mn 1000 
 
 uchMn 3000 
 
 own Mn ... 10,000 
 yiizMn... 100,000 
 
 uz el-li. durt- ■ ■ 1854. 
 
16 TURKISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 The cardinal numbers are indeclinable, and prefixed to substantives 
 in the singular number. 
 
 Ex. CLJ\ J)J is^.l t"^o hundred horses (horse). 
 
 iLuX. Juj _j1 three thousand soldiers (soldier). 
 
 [45.] The ordinal numbers, also indeclinable, are formed from the 
 cardinal by adding ^^jsT inji. 
 
 J one. i^^j! ^^® •'^^^^' i_s^.^ ^^°' l??^ ..^ ^^® second. 
 
 _.l three, ^isis-jl the third, '-^ij'^ four. j^sTj^J the fourth. 
 
 Observe here that the love the Turks have for euphony in their language 
 
 makes them turn the CL> into a t>, d-lirt — diirdunji. And in pronouncing 
 
 ^:£\j>-jl they introduce almost a whole letter (j or ^f), and pronounce 
 
 uchuiy'i.* 
 
 [46.] The interrogative ordinal number ^sn^^lji is thus used: 
 jiC-j j^ti ^.o-jsXs^U' <wiyJy ' Which of (the men in this file) wQl you 
 
 * It is almost impossible to give positive rules for the formation of 
 sounds according to the requirements of euphony ; but we will venture on 
 one for the direction of the learner. — -When a word commences with a 
 syllable containing a j or a damma ( ), a ,_j or a iesra ( ^ ), the vowels 
 or vowel-points throughout the word (if at the option of the speaker) 
 conform to the first or dominating sound. 
 
 ^sn^-;' would be pronounced ii-chun-ji, and not U-chin-ji. 
 ijsTJjjlS ,, ,, dur-diin-ji, „ dur-din-ji. 
 
 Thus also, ^_J:sry „ ,, Ur-in-fi, ,, lir-un-ji. 
 
 i^j^^ ij^y^ I) J) dos doffh-rii, ,, dos dogh-ri. 
 
 the last vowel conforming to the others preceding it in the word. 
 
 iJj^ 1 -J would be pronounced leap liii-rii, and not ku-ri, as written. 
 
 jiGlj <_jI» would be yap-ya-U-ni%, and not yap ya-M-nitz [25], which is 
 harsh and vulgar ; and so on throughout aU words of whatever kind, 
 whether substantatives or verbs. 
 
DISTRIBUTIVE NUMBERS. 17 
 
 beat?' |_Lu-jsn.Aj 'The fiftli.' \Si~ij^^\ ^*u-jsn.r^lj cXJb 'In what 
 chapter are you reading ? (or will you read ?) ' -uj.^ss:'\S^ The eighth.' 
 [ 47.] The ordinals are used as adjectives before a noun. 
 Ex. ^\ (jsnJl the sixth squadron. 
 
 i~j\> (-sT Jij the seventh chapter. 
 When the cardinal and ordinal numbers are used with an affix, they 
 are thus declined : 
 
 i_SJ A certain (person). 
 
 Nom. 
 
 Gen. '^■H.?. 
 
 Dat. ajj 
 
 Ace. 
 Abl. 
 
 
 ' The third (person) ' ' the third 
 one of them.' 
 
 , . 1 h\Xuj^j S\ >- • 1 
 
 DISTRIBUTIVE NUMBERS. 
 
 [ 49.] The distributive numbers, which are of constant occurrence, 
 are formed by adding j to those that terminate in a consonant, -i to 
 those which end in a vowel. 
 
 J one. 1^ one by one. 
 
 jXjJ two. _i!u-Sj' two by two. 
 
 Lij^^ J four. j^j'^ ^°™ ^y ^°^''- [ ^^0 
 
 [ 50.] In using more than one number, the first only takes the 
 terminations j or -1. 
 
 JEx. ;«J js^*\ by three hundreds. «-J-rH -^ t)y five thousands. 
 
 [51. J The use of this termination is to signify each,' or 'to each.' 
 
 1 , ,,Ij J.l i .L« j1 )J To tfacA of these men give ten melons. 
 
 *,^iJ jJ )rJ «rij^«l )J I will beat eacA of these boys — i.e., one by one. 
 
 [ 52.] Fractional numbers are composed sometimes by using one 
 
 Turkish and one Arabic number. 
 
 Ex. ^j j> a quarter. ■%-)j ^t\ three quarters. LiJj J one third. 
 
18 TURKISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 [ 53.] To express ' half,' the Turks use the following words : |*jl;, 
 
 Ex. is^ ^^ half the night. (.::..,£. L ^_^,U half-an-hour. 
 iZ'ji- '•*=<? \jJi^ *s^ piastres and a half; lit., ten and a half piastre. 
 
 [54.] Although the Turks write from right to left, they, like the 
 Arabs, note their figures precisely in the same ^vay as Europeans. 
 
 [ 55.] Of their using the alphabet to denote numbers, mention has 
 already been made under [5, 6]. 
 
 OF VERBS. 
 
 [ 56.] Verbs are of two kinds. Simple or Composite. When simple 
 they are of Turkish origin ; when composite they consist of some foreign 
 noun, chiefly Arabic, with one of the auxiliaries. (_5n-»:ij1 or t^.>.*JJi 
 'to do.' (J^j^ to be.' (J-*^ (used in religious rites, as ^i-«J-! jL«J ' to 
 pray,') and fj^jyj, used out of compliment to persons of consequence. 
 
 OP THE SIMPLE VEEB. 
 
 [ 57.] There are only two terminations in ujC» and ^^«, as tliCti-S 
 ' to go,' 4J-*J^ to see.' But they are both conjugated in the same way, 
 with a difference too trifling to cause them to be thrown into separate 
 conjugations. Whenever the lL5 becomes lSX ^^ A becomes c, just 
 as in nouns [19, 20]. 
 
 [ 58.] The Turkish language is particularly rich in derivatives which 
 may appear complex, but which, if only studied with a little attention, 
 wiU prove very simple, as the system is universal and most regular. 
 
 [ 59. J The following table will show at one comprehensive view how 
 the derivative verbs are formed one from the other. "We take the 
 hackneyed verb CS^y^ ' to love,' as the one which admits of all the 
 combinations, although some of them could not be used in the sense in 
 which they here stand. All other verbs may be formed on this model. 
 
TABLE OF TURKISH VERBS. 
 
 19 
 
 [60.]— TABLE OF THE FORMATION OF TtTRKISH VERBS. 
 
 ACTIVE 
 
 LLN.«i-j sevmeic, 
 
 to love. 
 
 Negative 
 
 L-x-*-^*-: sevmemek, 
 
 not to love. 
 
 Impossible 
 
 LLC*.^ii-j sevehnemeh, 
 
 not to be able to love. 
 
 Causal 
 
 tlis-»;Jij-j sevdermek, 
 
 to cause to love. 
 
 Negative 
 
 CS-A-^j^j-i sevdirmemeh, 
 
 not to cause to love. 
 
 Impossible 
 
 CS'A-^Sji^i^ sevderehmemeJc, 
 
 to be unable to cause to love. 
 
 PASSIVE 
 
 (__X^i-; sevilmek, 
 
 to be loved. 
 
 Negative 
 
 CS^^y^ sevilmemek, 
 
 not to be loved. 
 
 Impossible 
 
 l!_C«^a!2^ sevilehmemek, 
 
 not be able to be loved. 
 
 Causal 
 
 lUw« iJOLj sevildermek, 
 
 to cause to be loved. 
 
 EEFLECTIVE CS-A^y^ sevmmeh, 
 
 to love one's self.* 
 
 Negative 
 
 (_5Cv«Ji-) sevinmemek, 
 
 not to love one's self 
 
 Impossible 
 
 CS^A^iJ'i-i Bevinehmemek, 
 
 nottobeabletolove one's self 
 
 Causal 
 
 CS^j-^y^ scvindermek, 
 
 to cause to love one's self. 
 
 Negative 
 Impossible i 
 
 LlX^^^jjJi^ sevindermemeh, 
 __x,i.^ ij Ju^ sevenderehmemek 
 
 not to cause to love one's self 
 ' to be unable to cause to 
 love one's self. 
 
 EECIPEOCAL uX^-lj-: sevishmelc, 
 
 to love mutually. 
 
 Negative 
 Impossible 
 
 Ci^'^/^.-ii-j sevishnemek, 
 tlX*^ iii i_j seoishehnemek, 
 
 not to love mutually 
 i not to be able to love 
 ( mutually. 
 
 Passive 
 
 i_C*i.ii~j sevishehnek, 
 
 to be loved mutually. 
 
 Negative 
 Impossible 
 
 Li_x.t./«j_i »-; sevishehnemek, 
 tljCt,^ (iLii-j sevishellehnemek, 
 
 not to be loved mutually. 
 i to be unable to be loved 
 [ mutualljr. 
 
 Causal 
 
 ul>^A-l2j sevisMermelc, 
 
 to cause to love mutually. 
 be bappy' ; but it is given 
 
 * &ymmi?/c signifies 'to be pleased', 't 
 as an example of tlie reciprocal form. 
 
 c 2 
 
20 TURKISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 [61.] All these verbs are conjugated in the same manner as the 
 simple Verb tiiC<i-j 'to love,' [99] except the negative, of which an 
 example will be given further on. 
 
 [62.] There are verbs which form their derivatives in an 
 irregular manner, but that is only by reason of the fondness the Turks 
 have for euphony. Thus, when the final letter of the root is J, the 
 passive is formed by inserting ^^, as (J^^J ' to find ;' ^JyiJi^ to be 
 found ;' instead of ^J-*i! V : so again, by changing the J into ^^ , 
 fJ^^A 'to read;' ^J^^j\ 'to be read; instead of ^J^jjj\ , which 
 would sound harsh, and difficult to pronounce. 
 
 [ 63.] The transitive verbs for the same reason change j J to CLJ, or J. 
 JSx. (J.iUjj«_) to speak,' makes lLx^Jj*-; instead of CX^jJjj-j to cause 
 to speak,' which is thought harsh. ^J^yiy to read,' makes ^J^yy, 
 instead of /i.^, J«ijl to cause to read,' which is not so soft to the ear. 
 Finally, by changing i J to i, when the final letter of the root is ijm, ip, 
 r~, ov r~; as lLx-k^I ' to drink,' makes tiX^jsr;! ' to cause to drinl?,' 
 instead of lLC<i A^stI ; but these varieties are unimportant, and should 
 not trouble the learner : in the beginning, let him look upon all verbs as 
 conjugated after the models that follow. [ 65.] 
 
 OF THE COMPOSITE VEEB. 
 
 [ 64.] We have said that a composite Verb is formed by means of an 
 Arabic or Persian noun, and a Turkish auxiliary; the noun remains unchanged 
 through all the moods and tenses. Thus, in LliC+ijI i^b ' ^^ content,' 
 satisfy,' the word i^\j is the same throughout, giving its signification 
 to the verb lLx^J to do.' "We shall, therefore, proceed to conjugate 
 these Auxiliary Verbs, to which any noun may be added by the learner. 
 
 The verb ^_jl/»ij [ ^^ ] being hardly ever used, is not here given, but 
 may easily be formed upon the model of the two following auxiliaries, 
 
 i_x*i)' and ( N^,i . — ^Jk«i»-j [56], is called an auxiliary verb by 
 
 some grammarians ; but it is more frequently used by itself, and being as 
 regular as (J^*^ , it is also omitted. 
 
THE VERB 
 
 C_Ccjl 
 
 TO DO. 
 
 «?1 
 
 
 
 
 CQ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 -j! 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 B 
 
 g 
 
 
 
 
 
 44 
 
 
 ^1 
 
 1— 1 
 
 o 
 o 
 
 d 
 1— ( 
 "l 
 
 
 X"^ 
 
 "o 
 
 i 
 
 
 1— 1 
 
 
 > 
 
 o 
 
 i 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 w 
 
 rH 
 
 
 
 M 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 1— 1 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 t 
 
 9h 
 
 
 i 
 
 
 ft 
 H 
 
 O 
 
 o 
 
 T— 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 T— I 
 
 
 8 
 
 M 
 ^"j 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 p 
 
 
 
 
 
 p. 
 
 
 
 45 
 
 
 1-^ 
 
 
 
 1 — I 
 to 
 
 
 
 
 %^ 
 
 
 S 
 
 
 
 
 
22 
 
 TURKISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 ^'-^- 
 
 = -^- 
 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 ^' P.= 
 
 
 *, 
 
 5 144 
 
 
 
 44 
 
 - i|'-^' 
 ^^^ 
 
 .a 
 
 1 
 
 II 
 
 "0= "0^ 
 
 ^ -- ^ -^---^ 
 
 
 3^-^^ 
 
 
 ^■-^' 
 
 
 •> 
 
 ,w 
 
 
 ^\-^' 
 
 
 
 ^\^= 
 
 II 
 
 
THE VERB 
 
 CS^'i. 
 
 TO DO. 
 
 23 
 
24 
 
 TURKISH GRAMMAR. 
 
THE VERB Lliv.4::jl ' TO DO'. 
 
 25 
 
26 
 
 TURKISH GKAMMAR. 
 
 60 ij 
 
 o o cs d 
 
 fi fi H o3 
 
 "'^4:1 
 
 
 .J 
 
 ^ 
 
 in to 
 
 .9 S 
 '3 '3 
 
 C 
 
 -d 
 ^ 
 
 -^^ i^ -J= -^" 
 
 ( ^n 
 
 V ^- ^: :>; 
 
 
 
 •-c) ^ 
 
 . fco 
 60 a fco 
 
 — — ^ ca 
 
 r^ A ^ a 
 
 >^ P^ >~* tj 
 
 s a s ^ 
 
 . 03 
 
 =r f^= '-<- a 
 
 o 
 
 
 60 
 
 
 rfi .S 
 
 CO 
 
 CI 
 
 
 (3 
 
 3 
 
 -a 
 
 o 
 
 :;3 
 
 03 
 
 TS ^ -^ 
 OJ QJ O 
 
 :S -^ 3 
 
 Pi --cJ 
 
 I ^ .g 
 
 
 60 
 
 c 
 
 3 ^ 
 
 M 
 
 [^ -^1= 
 
 5 'J ') 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 II 
 
 S W 
 
 I 
 
 — . — Tt< '^ 
 
 
 
 CD ^ 
 
 OT "^ CO 
 
 1-1 0^ 
 
 
©7 
 
 OBSEEVATIONS OJST THE FOEEGOING TABLE OF 
 CONJUGATION OF THE VEEB i1^-:j\ and Cji^\ 'TO DO.' 
 
 The first tense has also a future signification, i*)'^^ is used for 
 ' I do/ and I -will do,' equally. It is therefore called Aorist by Mr. 
 Bedhouse. 
 
 This is pronounced as it is written, /♦JjiijJ iderdim, for ^S>\ ,Jol 
 ider idim, etc. 
 
 This is pronounced as it is written, *l),ij Joj idiordim, for i^; Jol 
 A Jul idior idim, etc. 
 
 In this tense the J is not pronounced, hut serves to strengthen the 
 CU preceding it, thus, (>^\ ettim. 
 
 This may he written as one word, ^A-^Aujl etc., thus omitting 
 the all/, but should be pronounced ettim idi, etc. This tense may also 
 be thus conjugated : — • 
 
 This is pronounced lLS^^} ailejelc quickly, instead of as it is 
 written, l-x^A-LI ailiijeh. 
 
 I must confess I do not understand the incongruity of changing the 
 vj'^into a ij, but attribi;te it to an unestahlished orthography, of which 
 there are so many examples in this language. Nor have I been able to 
 discover any rule, as I find frequently one or the other in the same page 
 of any work I take up. 
 
 The ilJ is softened into a i^, and then melted away in the pro- 
 nunciation, — ideji-idim, ideje-idin, etc., ailieje-idim, ailieje-idin, etc. 
 
28 TUBKISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 9 • ... 
 
 It is important to observe this part of the verb, as it is quite as 
 much in use as the common Infinitive. It is formed by taking the infini- 
 tive, making it Luto a verbal noun, and declining it. 
 i.L>~*:^\ the doing 
 i-CliUx) i of the doing. 
 
 ajC^rjl to the doing (which is here called the Dative Infinitive). 
 ^S^} the doing. 
 (jJt^ilijl from the doing. 
 
 This has a future sense also. 
 
 These two forms are in such constant use that they could not be 
 omitted. 
 
 12 
 
 The Gerunds are of constant use, and serve to denote a pause in 
 
 the narrative. 
 
 13 • ^ • ' 
 
 The_j in *SjJ^.iJ is introduced for the sake of euphony. 
 
THK VERB 
 
 CJ^j\ 
 
 ■ TO BE. 
 
 29 
 
 
 1 1 
 
 11 
 
 
 t 
 
 m 
 
 P-i 
 
 M 
 
 ^ s 
 
 M O 
 
 =1 ^ 
 
 s 
 
 W 
 
 O 
 
 o 
 
 I— I 
 o2 
 
 o 
 
 
 I — 1 
 I — I 
 
 e^ 
 
 
 "> 
 
 
 d fi 
 
 
 
 1;" 
 
 IT; 
 
 
 1^ 
 
 
 ^-Ti 
 
 ?| '^■'^ 4*1 
 
 ^ 
 
 1^ 
 
 1- -), 
 
 
 i^t 
 
 4^ <| -^ 
 
 ■^ 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 "ili 
 
 "^—Ti 
 
 -s-^ 
 
 
 
30 
 
 TURKISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 
 1 ^ 
 
 
 ;> —Ti ._^ — r> 
 
 R 11 n 
 
 Pi tr^. <r^ •r^.UTN^ «>,«-^ b^*-^ .^^a^ 
 
 m ^ \} M '11 
 
 S-^^^ 
 
 
 ff 
 ^=^= 
 
 -T- 
 
 ■-a 
 
 M '3= 
 
 '0= 
 
 
 o s: 
 
 
 ri 
 .^ 
 
 -4^_r^ 
 
 S 1 
 
 4 
 
 " -. -^ 
 
 ^IB-Vf 
 
 ri—T' 
 
 
 
 
 
 00 
 
 
 
 ■•^v?l 
 
 "> 
 
 
 
 -5'^' 
 
 f^ 
 
 
 
 
 ^-Ti 
 
 
 
THE VERB CiUlji ' TO BE.' 
 
 ill 
 
 — r-^^ 
 
 ^a M \\ 
 
 '^'-^^ 
 
 ^-^= 
 
 
 . s -^ 
 
 
 i"|l 
 
 43- 
 
 ^r—Ti 
 
 ■4q 
 
 0= — . J 
 
 44 
 
 e; 
 
 ^1 
 
 J- -)= 
 
 if "3 
 
 
 ^4. I ^l ^ 
 
 
 3 
 
 T^_4> 
 
 -4 
 
 -> s 
 
 ^■■ 
 
 ")= 
 
 
 f3 
 
 M 
 
 H 
 
 H 
 Oh 
 O 
 
 "> *> 
 -^-f 
 
 
 CO 
 
 03 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 ^= i 
 
 
 "JVj 
 
 ^i 
 
 9 "3 "3 
 
 
 
 ^_;^ 
 
 
 
 -x^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
32 
 
 TUKKISH GRAMMAB. 
 
 
 
 Id 
 
 i 
 
 ■-a 
 s 
 
 ■?4 
 
 -5-? 
 
 <1 
 * 
 
 
 11 11 
 
 
 5, "3 
 
THE VERB (J^jl ' TO BE.' 
 
 33 
 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 TJ 
 
 -^^-1^ 
 
 
 \^ T 
 
 o 
 
 
 5 
 
 -1-^ 
 
 
 
 * 
 
 ^t It 3^3^ 
 
 *> 
 
 i-i 
 
 OO 
 
 a 
 
 ffl 
 
 6D 
 
 rt 
 
 M 
 
 f? 
 
 
 
 fp 
 
 a 
 
 ,_ - _, 
 
 
 
 ai 
 
 1^"^ 
 
 ll 
 
 
 -•> — 
 
 o 
 
 -J_^ 
 
 la 
 
 
 Ol 
 
 
 ci 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 
 ,J3 
 
 B 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 -^ 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 p4 
 
 
 f^ 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 la 
 
 
 R 
 
 
 fc 
 
 
34 
 
 TURKISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 (D 
 
 bD 
 
 
 
 rO 
 
 
 
 
 bc 
 
 r^ 
 
 60 
 
 bo 
 
 
 
 1=1 
 
 p 
 
 
 
 OJ 
 
 OJ 
 
 C3 
 
 a 
 
 pq 
 
 m 
 
 W 
 
 m 
 
 be 
 
 O 
 
 % 
 
 
 f^ 
 
 .^ 
 p 
 
 r — ^ Cd O 
 
 3 
 
 CD , P 
 
 -^ t:7 2 
 
 m J;-, d • 
 
 ^ 
 n 
 
 .g t* 
 
 "^Ph 
 
 rd i=ij ■:n ^ 
 
 -t-J 
 
 P^ 
 
 
 ■"1 
 
 3 
 
 at 
 
 pq 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 r| 
 
 
 
 
 
 --< 
 
 CD 
 
 n 
 
 r^ 
 
 T-l 
 
 o 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 P^ 
 
THE VEKB f,A 'to BE.' 
 
 35 
 
 60 
 
 a 
 
 
 0) r^ 
 
 t-. 
 
 OD 
 
 
 60 ^3 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 H 
 
 M 
 
 d 
 
 < ) 
 
 -P 
 
 
 .3 
 
 H 
 
 
 s 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 
 b 
 
 CO 
 
 
 fi 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^H 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1^ 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 •43 
 
 o 
 
 H 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 OJ 
 
 o 
 
 1 
 
 ti 
 
 nd 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 J^- 
 
 a> 
 
 fT^ 
 
 -^ 
 
 00 
 
 
 
 .^ =1 
 
 D 2 
 
36 TURKISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 
 
 
 _ 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 a 
 (> 
 
 
 
 
 
 rQ 
 
 
 
 <_ 
 
 
 ^,~ 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 s... 
 
 
 '-»;■ 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 <- 
 
 
 6b 
 a 
 
 o 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 
 
 1^ ^ 
 
 
 
 X 
 
 
 
 
 
 O 
 O 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 1 
 
 
 
 *— ~ 
 
 
 _— 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 ,:=l -1=1 
 
 
 
 ''^^ 
 
 
 J- 
 
 
 1 
 
 p 
 
 P4 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■^^^^ 
 
 
 CD 
 O 
 
 
 
 •4 
 
 1 — 1 
 
 'o 
 
 
 CD 
 
 o 
 
 
 O 
 
 CD 
 
 1 
 
 CD 
 
 
 11 
 
 1 
 CD 
 
 <4h 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 05 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 M (>> 
 
 
 rQ 
 
 1— 1 
 
 1' 
 
 
 1= 
 
 "0= 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 o 
 
 0) 
 
 
 'o 
 
 ■I— 3 
 
 (D 
 
 
 
 4' 
 
 c° -.- 
 
 a — L' 
 
 0) S 
 
 CD ^J 
 
 nd -iJ o 
 -*J o rt 
 o rt g 
 
 CD 
 p 
 
 
 
 
 
 l> 
 'a 
 
 
 -2 
 
 ro 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 1 ^ ^ 
 
 1, 
 
 a; 
 § 
 
 o 
 
 |2i 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 
 o 
 o 
 
 6i) 
 
 .9 
 
 o 
 
 !d 
 o 
 ■43 
 § 
 o 
 
 ,J=1 
 
 a:) 
 
 13 
 
 
 a 
 
 en 
 
 03 
 
 bh 
 
 1=1 o 
 •J3 60 
 
 § £ 
 
 a ^ 
 
 -^ r^ '^W 
 
 '^ \5 x\3 
 
 60 ^-^J 
 
 CB 
 CD 
 
 -5 
 
 O 
 
 H 
 H 
 
 ,__ 
 
 
 „_ 
 
 a 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 
 .a 
 
 c3 o 
 
 g 5 
 
 H 
 O 
 
 O 
 
 O 
 
 J 
 
 
 
 1— 1 
 
 o 
 
 1 
 
 o 
 
 QJ 
 
 * 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 1^1 
 
 • -H CS CD 
 
 o 
 
 
 J- 
 
 
 -r. 
 
 
 H 
 
 m 
 
 
 
 
 jj^ 
 
 cS 
 
 
 
 4' 
 
 
 05 
 
 Si 
 
 
 -tJ 
 
 
 
 
 ^Lr 
 
 o 
 
 
 -^ 
 
 
 1- 
 
 
 t^ 
 
 00 
 CO 
 1 — 1 
 
 o 
 
 4-J 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 C30 
 
 f-t 
 
 O 
 * 
 

 
 
 THE 
 
 VERB jlj 
 
 ' THERE 
 
 IS. 
 
 ) 
 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ % ^ 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 -4^ 
 
 
 (D OJ <U 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 OJ o 
 
 
 - rrT P" -*-^ 
 
 
 O 
 > 
 
 
 •r-( 
 
 •s 
 
 g ^ i 
 
 ^ ;S "^ 
 
 
 ^ 1 fe 'S 
 
 
 ■^ 1 
 
 
 05 
 
 
 g £ ^ 
 
 S 0) m 
 
 
 Jill 
 
 
 
 1— ( 
 
 
 P 
 
 ■5 ■S S 
 
 OJ s ^ 
 
 .5 -9 " 
 
 2 rS ,5^ 
 
 rJ:3 'm ^ 
 
 3 3 S 
 o o .3 
 
 
 ^ ^ -3 3 
 
 
 p a 
 
 CD 
 
 PH 
 
 'a 
 
 •3 3 
 
 a -5 :5 
 
 5^5 
 
 
 .'a f;^ .=a ^ 
 
 
 to have ;' and h 
 in the following 
 
 H 
 
 in 
 -> 
 
 •I. 
 
 ■l4 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 m 
 
 t^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^■ 
 
 
 
 K 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^= 
 
 
 > 'OD 
 
 ?- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 „ 3 
 
 M 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 -, o 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 QJ 
 
 60 O 
 
 W 
 
 
 
 rn to 
 
 OJ 
 
 
 
 rO 
 
 j3 -^ 
 
 s 
 
 w 
 
 
 ■ S -S 
 
 s i g 
 
 • £ 
 
 
 oj 
 
 o 
 
 
 fi 
 
 CO 
 
 0) <D 
 
 ^ £ S 
 
 oj 3 
 
 
 
 „__ 
 
 ^ a 
 
 < 
 
 CD 
 
 
 ^ ^ 5 
 
 c3 q3 
 
 
 oi -^ 5 -^ 
 o ^ '^ '-' 
 
 R ca r^ , , 
 
 -^ rd "m 1^ 
 
 
 o te 
 
 
 o 
 
 O r3 
 
 s 3 's 
 
 2 -c S 
 
 h-f M a 
 
 
 M M M 3 
 
 =M Cm 54-, ^ 
 
 1 
 
 1> 
 
 3 has, 
 Isting, 
 
 P^ 
 1— ( 
 
 i^4 
 
 ^%^ 
 
 
 
 
 60 
 
 to H 
 
 03 03 
 ;3 - 
 
 ^ -> 
 
 W 
 o 
 
 -> 
 
 ^t 
 
 
 r\ 
 
 1 
 
 
 d 
 o 
 
 .2 o 
 
 I — ) 
 
 
 
 
 B 
 
 
 'O- 
 
 cS 
 
 pi -n 
 
 1— t 
 
 
 "~^ ■ '^ 
 
 ^ ■" ^^""* — ' 
 
 ;> 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 M 
 
 TheT 
 ersona 
 
 05 
 
 ; 1 
 
 o 
 
 •5i 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 M 
 
 H 
 
 a 
 
 
 -4^ 
 
 Oh 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 * 3 
 
 o 
 O 
 
 
 
 90.] 
 he ii 
 
 
 5 
 
 CO 
 
 1 
 
 1 1 
 
 1 — 1 
 
 
 0) 
 
 o 
 
 
 M 
 
 P 
 fe 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^^ 
 
 rf^ r* ^ 
 Rh f<H CB 
 
 as 
 
 fq f^ f^ § 
 
 * 
 
 ■H 
 
 
 1— 1 
 
 
 
 1 — 1 
 
 1 1 
 
 ■— ' 
 
 
38 
 
 TURKISH CRAMMAK. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Is 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Pi 
 
 '4 
 
 •<:: 
 
 
 '« 
 
 .§ 
 
 
 r^ 
 
 -« 
 
 I 
 
 kS; 
 
 ■& 
 
 
 
 1^ 
 
 <0 
 
 ~ 
 
 Ej 
 
 ^ 
 
 ~~. 
 
 a 
 
 
 ■^ 
 
 -^ 
 
 •^ 
 
 M 
 ^ 
 
 O 
 
 ^ 
 
 H 
 
 -^ f<S h<l ."S 
 
 ~\ 
 
 
 
 
 •3 .S 
 
 :3 =■:> 
 
 3> ■^ 3j- 
 
 
 
 Rh 
 
 
 l-H o 
 
 ■73 
 J3 
 
 
 
 60 
 
 2 ta 
 
 +3 
 
 1 — 1 
 
 
 if I ho 
 if I ha 
 if I sli 
 
 there i 
 
 •X- 
 
 
 X-t^,3^ 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 M 
 
 ft 
 
 1 
 o 
 
 H 
 R 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 f? 
 
 fi^ 0^ k; 
 
 O '^ 
 
 .1 § 
 
 f |3 
 
 SB 
 
 Oo 
 
 
 ^^ 
 
 
 CD X^i 
 
 
 
 2 bo O) 
 
 ^ ° r^ 
 
 m o ^ 
 l-i o - 
 
 a.sg 
 
 ■■S '-^-s 
 
 CO ^j b- 
 
 a . fe> 
 
 s- §^ 
 
 
 p 
 Sb 
 >;. 
 3 
 
 & 3 
 
 fcc-* 
 rt1 
 
 "*^ -s '^ 
 pa o " 
 
THE VERB 
 
 CS~^ 
 
 lk^^ 
 
 ' TO LOVE.' 
 
 39 
 
 ■a 
 
 CD 
 
 o 
 
 ^ 
 
 f4 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 
 
 <» "S 
 
 
 
 -+J 
 
 -tJ 
 
 
 
 
 
 -id 2 
 
 
 3' 
 
 -Ti 
 
 C3 
 
 
 
 
 
 3 Pi 
 
 .3 fe 
 
 
 ■A 
 
 CD 
 CD 
 O 
 O 
 
 3 
 
 o 
 
 
 <!. 
 
 .1, 
 
 o 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 o 
 
 t 
 
 
 
 
 ed preoi 
 8, if it 
 
 nd 
 
 % 
 
 -tj 
 
 *-+^ 
 rf 
 
 
 
 bo 
 d 
 
 bo > 
 d o 
 
 is form' 
 bearing 
 
 1— 1 
 
 re 
 
 3 
 
 a 
 
 6C 
 
 CD 
 
 a 
 
 C3 
 
 
 Pq 
 
 
 13 
 
 oo 60 
 
 
 '*"* 
 
 ^ 
 
 O 
 
 3 
 
 t;' 
 
 a 
 
 ^1 
 
 T^ CQ 
 
 3 
 ^ 
 
 ^ 
 ^ 
 
 
 > 
 C3 
 
 o 
 o 
 
 1 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 '"S" 
 
 
 o 
 
 -s 
 
 o 
 
 bD 
 
 o 
 
 <1> 
 
 
 -Si o 
 
 Verb in 
 
 bo 
 
 <■ 
 
 fc- 
 
 rO 
 
 xl 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 'a> 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 m 
 
 CO 
 
 PI 
 
 n _ 
 
 H^ 
 
 ■^ 
 
 
 bo 
 
 a 
 
 ^ 
 
 5^ 
 
 
 a 
 
 C3 
 
 ^ =1 
 
 
 
 
 £3 
 
 t> 
 
 ii 
 
 -M 
 
 
 
 t-< 
 
 > 
 
 m 
 -i-3 
 
 -W 
 
 13 
 ^-3 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 ^ 
 
 rl3 
 
 n 
 
 
 
 P 
 
 rr! 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 t 
 
 3:h 
 
 c3 
 
 CD 
 
 n-( 
 
 
 h 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 fH 
 
 p^ 
 
 o 
 
 en 
 
 P 
 O 
 O 
 
 
 bo 
 
 < 
 
 ft; 
 
 
 'TS 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 (M 
 
 fi^ 
 
 cpl 
 
 & 
 
 _fe> -PI 
 
 
 bO 
 
 M .5 
 
 C3 
 
 bo 
 
 Pi 
 
 a a 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^1 -"S 
 
40 
 
 TURKISH GKAMMAE. 
 
 
 <h 
 
 Ji' t^= 
 
 <?> <|> <|> 
 
 
 
 2 ■^ 
 
 a e; g 
 
 a ^ 
 
 -. ^ M M 
 
 .;\^ 
 
 5 
 
 
 1 
 
 p 
 
 i^ I— 1 r-i 
 
 o 
 
 (^ I — 1 
 '^ ,-1 
 
 e O 
 
 v<i> 
 
 ^ CO 
 
 k <k <i>, <k <]>, <i, <1^ -J 
 
 '0= 
 
 I 
 
 F4 
 
 
 .\ <]. ;^ 
 
 
 <*> <J> <a^ 
 
 60 
 
 
 1, 
 
 i 
 
 fcc 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 50 <1 
 
 w 
 
 Os 0, 
 
 s r? 
 
 ^3 
 
 a 
 
 rT3 O 
 
 C3 , — I 
 
 1 
 
 ^ 
 
 X 
 
 o 
 
 ^ 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 n3 
 PI 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 a 
 
 cfl 
 
 >-> 
 
 
 n3 
 
 ■ oJ 
 
 p ■■'\ 
 
 0) -J 
 
 .2 -^ 
 
 (3 
 
 8 >rj 
 
 o J 
 
 ^ o 
 
 1 — ( -+-S 
 
 Fl -^ 
 
 
THE VERB 
 
 CS^y* 
 
 IomJ 
 
 ' TO LOVE. 
 
 41 
 
 CD 
 
 PI 
 
 0) 
 
 ■+^ 
 
 6D 
 
 3 
 
 a 
 
 M 
 
 W 
 
 6D 
 
 .3 
 
 02 
 
 <«> ^3->, <^ <*> 
 
 ^JL^ 
 
 rt 
 
 bD 
 
 
 .g 
 
 "■^ ' 
 
 
 
 
 1=1 
 
 
 
 
 
 PM 
 
 rt 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 -+3 
 
 -^a 
 
 £B 
 
 xn 
 
 a 
 
 •rA 
 
 r^ 
 
 M 
 
 &: 
 
 Is 
 
 be 
 
 
 
 > 
 
 o 
 
 
 •H 
 
 
 
 c 
 
 
 
 nS 
 
 
 
 a: 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 c 
 
 o 
 
 
 5 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 e 
 
 o 
 
 
 P 
 
 
 
 J ^ 
 
 
 i> 
 
 
 
 
 l-A g3 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 5 
 o 
 
 
 m 
 
 
 
 P 
 
 ■4^ 
 
 o 
 a 
 
 
 p 
 
 
 C 
 
 P4 
 
 f-f 
 
 TIS 
 
 O 
 
 
 c 
 
 g 
 
 Q 
 
 ^ 
 
 CD 
 
 o 
 
 
 s^ 
 
 '■+^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 C-i 
 C3 
 
 o 
 o 
 
 ( — 1 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 o 
 
 _p 
 '> 
 c 
 
 ^ 
 
 o 
 
 a 
 
 '"' 
 
 c 
 
 o 
 
 -D 
 
 
 
 c 
 
 
 T— i 
 1 1 
 
 .g 
 
 ,3 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 "h 
 
 -tj 
 
 
 c 
 
 
 
 OJ 
 
 
 
 c: 
 
 
 
 CQ 
 
 ■J 
 
 
 a 
 
 ) 
 
 
 .g 
 
 T 
 
 
 ^ 
 ^ 
 
 £ 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 4 
 
 
 < 
 
 h 1 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 be 
 
 bD 
 
 
 
 
 <i> <*> <*> r^ 
 
 •J 
 
 
 
 
TURKISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 1^ 
 
 
 p- 
 
 
 hH 
 
 , 
 
 H 
 
 o 
 
 <t 
 
 o 
 
 '^ 
 
 a 
 
 'f^ 
 
 w 
 
 ^ 
 
 p* 
 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 3 
 
 f. 
 
 H 
 
 1— I 
 P 
 
 H 
 
 :25 
 
 CO 
 
 o 
 
 <J, sn -i 
 
 •^- -s r 5 -t -^^ t 
 
 
 "j= 
 
 s 
 
 '^ 
 
 ■» ■-§ "J 
 
 it 
 
 a 
 
 
 i X 
 
 X 
 
 <3> 
 
 <^ 
 
 .1. 
 
 <3. 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 -i 
 *_ 
 
 
 li* 
 
 
 
 *_ 
 
 
 "0= 
 
 
 1 
 
 . ft "^^ 
 
 1 
 
 <!> 
 
 <'i. 
 
 .1, 
 
 <J, 
 
 ri 
 p^ 
 
 M 
 
 
 4 
 
 S^ 
 
 ■^ 
 
 ■4 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 "0= 
 
 <J. 
 
 ^ 
 
 O) 
 
 X 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 "j= 
 
 o 
 
 > 
 
 
 rt 
 
 — ■ 
 
 
 'cs 
 
 ^■ 
 
 
 rS^ 
 
 y 
 
 — 
 
 1— 1 
 
 — 
 
 <h 
 
 
 <J> 
 
 ■^ 
 
 ■^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 a 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 ^= 
 
 
 ' ' 
 
 ^^ 
 
 i 
 
 'i 
 
 ;i. 
 
 <j. " ;i. 
 
 <'i. 
 
 i. 
 
 ■^ 
 
 I. 
 
 4 
 
 < 
 
 
 ■i 
 
 f 
 
 '^ 
 
 1 
 
 X 
 
 k 
 
 >S 
 
 1. 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 -^ 
 
 '■^; 
 
 
 -s 
 
 
THE VERl 
 
 EE.B Ll>^i~= ' TO LOVE.' 43 
 
 -0 &**; 
 
 a 
 
 L "J L L L ^ 
 
 <*> <.^ <*> <<r^ <*> <:'*-^ 
 
 4 i f i: -I -i 
 
 ^t 'S A- k- 
 
 <*> ■:«> <*> c:«r^ < -i-^ 
 
 I ^' 1 4, -i 
 i? ^ 4 - 
 
 H ..v3= 
 
 ' 6 ■' ^ P 
 
 ^= :: J= - 4 § I 
 i ^ ^^ a ■-* 1 >^. ^1 1 '0= 
 
 
 '3 
 c5 
 
 •J, «, .\ % .1. " I B .1 J, ,J^ 
 
 ii I i a f i 4 I -I I 4, 
 
 c5 
 
 1 <N -J 
 
 I- 
 
 '^' S i 
 
 -^ X 
 
 d' 
 ■^ 
 
 <*> <-+> <«> ■* <*> ^-J-x 
 
 y] 
 
 
44 TURKISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 <i> <J> <*> <»> <*-( 
 
 1 ^ V ? ♦ 
 
 J ^' t 'L -J 
 
 g . ^ ^ 1 t <J> I <^ 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 >^ 
 
 O 
 
 T 
 
 cS 
 
 1^ 
 
 •A 
 
 o 
 
 Mil -^ 
 
 :k^ ^= ^ ^ i -5-. I ^ 
 
 H ^ ^ ^ I 
 
 4 I 4 ^ -^ 4 'J 1 .j - i 
 
 V) "^ ^ 'T^ 4 
 
 ■Ti 
 
 
 c<^ <*>, H <?> r3 '*> <--> <•'-> 
 
 gi4 -5= o 4 -^ i ^ 
 
 > 
 
 H 
 
 <}. X ^ ;i, <L X <L 
 
 
THE VERB 
 
 CJi*^ ' TO LOVE.' 
 
 4.5 
 
 
 
 6 
 
 
 
 
 % 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 
 1 
 
 5 
 
 5 
 
 
 to 
 
 .s 
 
 V 
 
 C3 
 
 
 -4J 
 TO 
 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 =3 
 
 
 g 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 
 .L 
 
 <1. 
 
 
 
 1^ 
 
 
 to 
 
 a 
 
 fco 
 
 " 
 
 -• 
 
 :3 
 
 ■D 
 
 
 P 
 
 - 
 
 ^D 
 
 i 
 
 1 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 o 
 o 
 
 o 
 125 
 
 1 
 
 o 
 
 J 
 
 3 
 g 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 i4 
 
 
 
 
 -^ 
 
 1 — 1 -t^ 
 
 .1^ 
 
 
 
 
 .3 
 
 5 
 
 s 
 
 
 nd 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ -a 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 I 
 
 CD 
 
 
 
 
 g 
 ^ 
 
 IB 
 
 
 
 
 
 g -8 
 
 a 3 
 
 
 T 
 
 M 
 
 
 
 
 SD 
 
 B 
 
 
 
 
 — 
 
 "S 5P 
 
 
 "^A 
 
 FM 
 
 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 
 
 
 '-I .3 
 
 
 1 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 w 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 O 
 
 1 — 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 S 
 
 ii 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 t> 
 O 
 
 1— ( 
 
 h 
 
 f 
 
 c1> 
 
 
 o 
 1 
 
 pq 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 .a 1 
 
 
 s 
 
 O 
 
 1 1 
 
 \ 
 
 
 -i 
 
 a 
 > 
 
 c 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ID 9 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 f 
 
 
 6b 
 
 
 
 '' 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 _,_ 
 
 5 
 
 
 .3 
 
 
 
 
 =" :3 
 
 •^ 
 
 s 
 
 
 
 
 
 c 
 
 J 
 
 
 o 
 
 - 
 
 :; 
 
 s 
 
 o ^ 
 
 'gi 
 
 M 
 
 H 
 
 
 bh 
 
 n3 
 
 -3 
 
 o 
 
 c: 
 a 
 
 c 
 
 7) 
 
 -3 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 S 
 ^ 
 
 
 p 
 
 1 
 
 
 o 
 
 c 
 
 ^2 
 
 1 
 
 
 1 
 
 t 
 
 
 "i 
 
 
 1 1 
 
 CO 
 
 
 o 
 
 c5 
 
 o 
 
 -(J 
 o 
 
 I 
 
 M 
 
 
 f 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 l- 
 
 Ph O 
 a; ■a 
 
 Hi 
 o 
 
 1-H 
 1— 1 
 
 
 J^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 1 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 •J 
 
 -4— 
 
 H .S 
 
 p^ 
 
 1 — r 
 
 
 1 
 
 i 
 
 CO 
 
 
 <M 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 
46 TURKISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 [ 115.] Many of these tenses are not, of course, in use; the whole 
 will serye, however, as the model of a negative verb. It is difficult to form 
 rules that may suit all the changes, but the principle is evident : it con- 
 sists in introducing the * as the sign of the negative, and sometimes 
 changing the j into J ; but the rules of euphony occasionally interfere, 
 and the ^ or s, or both, are introduced. 
 
 [ 11 6. J Extraordinary as it may appear to ue, the ' Indeterminates ' 
 enter frequently into the Turkish language, even in this negative form. 
 
 JiJx. /*jyj^ ^ jk^^^^iX^Z^ |,ij --;, which would thus stand in 
 English : ' Well, if, after all, you should not have loved me, what shall 
 I become?' or aJ.1 iX^^^^i^i^y^ ^:j ^~j ' If you do not love me 
 I will die.' j*Jji ijJljUi Jj1^a2^A.^j_- '.^ 'l was in darkness 
 until I loved you ;' lit., before I had not loved you.' If, instead of 
 ulXsj— ■, we take some other word, we shaU find it better adapted to our 
 European comprehensions. [43] 
 
 [117.] Example of the Gerund. — J^jJLJJ (.iksnj i.sxii.^'l^ ^uj 
 Since' or whilst you do not love me, why do you treat me in a neigh- 
 bourly manner ?' ^SjaJ::,^^ cdjl ^_ |^(jlj^i^ :o ' He would not 
 have anything to do with me, as long as (whilst) he did not love me' or 
 had not loved me.' 
 
 [118.]— OF INTEEEOGATIVE VERBS. 
 
 Wten a verb is used interrogatively, the syllable -« is introduced 
 immediately before the auxiliary ; in the regular future and perfect tenses 
 it stands at the end of it. Ex. 
 
 I*j_^ I love. i,A ^-ij^ do I love ? 
 
 Aorist, Ajjljl I shall be. ^\ ^j^l^l shall I be ? 
 
 c/i'^ I beat. ^\ ^J;^ shall I strike ? 
 
 vlt^^'^J I shall be beaten. ^^ ^nCS-^ <i^J shall I be beaten r 
 Aorist, (*;A^I will go. ^^-„»jwuf wilt thou go ? 
 
OF INTERROGATIVE VERBS. 47 
 
 NEGATIVE. 
 
 »-*!..' I do not know. ^.jI ^-«uJj do I not know ? 
 
 (♦ iJ.l I read. ^;1 ^.^j^J.l do I not read ? 
 
 i-LS^ <U.^,I lie will not die. c^=r ''^-^j^ «"^^ ^*^ '^"^ &e ? 
 
 ps^ \ yoa did not take. ^jSs^\ did you not take ? 
 
 [119.]— OF THE VERB NEGATIVELY AND INTEEEOGATIVELT. 
 
 After the last examples it will be scarcely necessary to do more than 
 give one or two tenses of this form. 
 
 Li^» i«r to see. i_is.t.^ i»r not to see. 
 
 I* I, jS I see. «,.^j^ I do not see. *j1 ^J^iaS do I not see ? * 
 
 rr^i^V'^ 'y clost thou not see ? 
 c^'j-tS does he not see ? 
 
 X~i^^ytjy do ye not see ? 
 i^yyjy do they not see ? 
 *J).^I saw. /,\^j£ \ did not .see. |^^Ji.^i^did I not see .' 
 
 ^^Syj^ didst thou not see ? 
 
 ^\^^S did he not see ? 
 ^^t.Vo_i eT did we not see ? 
 ^^'Sx^j^ did j'e not see ? 
 ^.»^1j iX^ijS did thej' not sec ? 
 v^js-iijS'i S^i~^t\S \ |«j1 ,^L_i-i^''^;^-^ i)S shall I not see ? 
 I shall see. ) I shall not see. ) iir-"i_5-» ^—^^ '^jy shalt thou not see ? 
 
 ^CS-^ i~-~^jS shall he not see ? 
 j-jl g-^<.L>-:>- l>^-^ \S shall we not see ? 
 ;jC-> ^-T!i__x=^ i^iji shall ye not see ? 
 I i^AiJ (__x=^ "S.-^ lO shall they not see > 
 
 * No doubt it would be more grammatical to say *)i |^«*.«^ and 
 
 .-J -«i_C»i)S', but this being more difficult to pronounce they use the 
 
 above corrupted form. 
 
 \ Of course, in writing, the pen is not always taken off; the word 
 
48 TURKISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 [120.] In short, the ^-^ in the construction of a sentence comes 
 after the word on which the question depends. (See an excellent 
 example in Eedhouse's Grammar, p. 153.) "We will conclude by a similar 
 one, but shorter. 
 
 jX-; ^ 1A-.S ^j\ j-V^ To morrow morning ivill you go ? 
 
 jX-j )Ji-i i<^{-rj^ r • '^° morrow ea/rly will you go ? 
 
 'pi^jXS .l^j\ ^^^■=~ W -^^ ^'^ ^° morrow that you go in the morning. 
 
 SUMMARY. 
 
 "We haye thus laid down in the preceding pages that verba are of two 
 kinds, — simple and composite ; the Simple being the original Turkish 
 verbs, divided into active, passive, negative, impossible, causal, reciprocal, 
 and personal or reflective, of which a table has been given, and which are all 
 declined regularly, after the model of the verb u-C^i-;, with the excep- 
 tion of those which conform to the exigencies of euphony : and the Compo- 
 site being formed by means of an Arabic or Persian noun and an auxiliary. 
 Of these auxiliaries we have conjugated i^js^l and cS-^\ 'to do' or 
 ' to make,' and omitted the other two {^J^jt^ and (J^t^j) as little used. 
 
 ISText we have conjugated /j^jl olmah in its active and passive voices, 
 leaving it to the experience the student will obtain in other verbs to 
 explain the diiferenoe which in English it is impossible to exemplify, — 
 that is, how the verb to be ' can be taken actively and passively : and 
 last, we have given the various forms of "A and ilj. 
 
 Next we have given a model of a regular verb, ijX^i-:, in all its bearings ; 
 after which we have shown how a negative verb is conjugated, and how 
 when used interrogatively; and lastly, how it is conjugated when used both 
 in a negative and interrogative form : and we come to the conclusion that 
 we have sufficiently simplified what has long been a stumbling block to the 
 learner : and that we have brought the use of the verbs within the reach 
 
 would then stand thus — Xu.„^p- X^t ,^i' and .,« .LC^ £L>,e 1.^ etc. 
 
ADVERBS. 49 
 
 of any one wlio will devote a few weeks to the study of a language; 
 barbarous indeed, but which is not without its interest to the 
 philologist. 
 
 OF ADVERBS. 
 
 [ 121.] Besides the regular Adverbs * existing in the language, any 
 noun borrowed from the Arabic or Persian can become an adverb in 
 Turkish. 
 
 I. By adding the termination \ or 1 to the noun. 
 
 Jp- truth. Ifc^ truly. — j_3li content. Ujls contentedly. 
 
 II. By adding the Persian termination <!j\ {or <ijb if the word end 
 with a vowel). 
 
 i.^:_-i-)jl) a friend. iijl:;-jj J friendly, ^j J above. ^Uliji superiorly. 
 
 III. By adding ^J or ^_ to the noun. 
 
 ^j\ early. ^~ljij\ early. j-V^ morning. ^J.&-L.tf early. 
 
 IV. By adding £s>- to the noun or adjective. 
 
 Jj^ji' pretty, -f^shji prettily. — »j1 a man. <i.sr*jl like a man. 
 
 ]}fote. — i^ also belongs to the expletives (of which a list will be 
 given), and is the sig-n of the gerund [72, 83]. 
 
 [ 122.] — OP EXPLETIVES. 
 
 It is difficult in English to form an exact idea of an expletive. The 
 Germans have their words dock and auch, which approach nearest to the 
 expletives in Turkish. 
 
 An expletive is a word, or part of a word, giving force to a sentence, 
 but which cannot be translated exactly in another tongue, although an 
 approximate meaning may be given. 
 
 Some of these may be termed adverbs, some post-positions, some 
 
 * The vocabulary at the end of this work contains the principal 
 adverbs in use. 
 
50 TURKISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 participles ; still, as they are of frequent occurrence, we subjoin a note of 
 them, and, in the course of reading, the learner should endeavour to 
 comprehend them by following the sense of the phrase in which they 
 stand, and comparing it with another phrase where they may occur. 
 
 [123.]— LIST OF SOME OP THE EXPLETIVES OCCURRING 
 IN TURKISH. 
 Jij\ Being. 
 
 i^i^ "Would that it were so ! or ^tLil^. 
 *;^ According, like: as, Hj^^ 'according to me;' ij^\^\ 'like 
 unto him.' 
 
 <uj^ Come ! at least. 
 fjfij] Abeady (used conjunctively), well, in short. 
 i(Jj\j» Come along ! (adverb, interjection, or conjunction), 
 jj J for i-~>^J Having said, he said, said. 
 X< But, only. 
 ^_j»- J, laJ, and iJ, (the latter often used at the end of a word : as, iJjl 
 he also ;' if Jy ' this man also ;'. iA^Jj J ' having said ;' 
 j(JkX-jAjl what a man !') 
 (»Jfc Also. 
 (^UJ& At once, immediately, aE of a sudden. 
 
 iW) I But, sometimes ; (3rd person, subjunctive mood of /J^«l, sign 
 of 'if,' etc.) 
 iJ tUjl But, although. 
 
 SjJ \ (Exclamation of contempt) : as, *j1 sj 'you fellow !' *j\ _,^' 
 i__j.(^j ) you chap!' (interjection.) 
 LLff It is necessary, but, whether. [155] 
 i^--» J, ^jj^-Ktt) Just now. 
 i£fjjj.>j] If only, (of Persian origin) 
 J^stI Except, but, only. 
 
 jib He — God. ^ftl) 'Oh! you sir.' 
 
PREPOSITIONS. 51 
 
 is>- Adverbial termination. Ex. — iJj^jS^ 'prettily;' ^"^.j^ drily;' 
 ij>- i^ji 'in this manner;' <)Ljs**^ 'after me.' 
 i_-vsr'^ Wonderful ; Ljs:^ extraordinary ; i-^sXs^ in an extraordinary 
 manner. 
 <0j Also, and, again, (conjunction) 
 i^ Besides. 
 
 i_jilj Once, a time, in short. Lord! etc. 
 Ijjjj "Well ? what then ? what next .'' After, etc. 
 There may be a few more, not in ordinary use. They wUl he 
 inserted in the appendix. 
 
 OF PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 [ 124.] The Turks have no prepositions of their own, but they use 
 frequently the Persian and Arabic prepositions, of which we here subjoin 
 a list. 
 
 LIST OF PERSIAN PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 jl or J From: as, u-ijs ^} j\ from this side;' .~:j J on the head;' 
 (Jit., ' from off the head.*') 
 i/mJ After; as, ^1 jl ^/.uj after this.' (It is often used as an exple- 
 tive or interjection) [123]. 
 <_3 or <0 In, with, by: as, IssT in place;' -Jj»ij with management;' 
 i_^lisr 'by the side;' <iJJIj 'by God;' <d!l **uj ' in the 
 name of God.' 
 U "With, by: as, ^1^1 b 'with care;' (jSi^jjl V 'by freedom;' 
 
 ^)A^:>- [i particularly.' 
 .J In: as, Jle^ iji.^J'^ 'in this state ;' ^^L^jO 'between,' {lit, 
 
 in the midst.' 
 j\ Under: as, iA^.^^ _ii under the Government.' 
 \j As far as, until: as, ^f-^*)! Ij' 'as far as Smyrna;' (.IkjLjJ U 
 
 ^j>-i until the end of the world.' 
 
 E 2 
 
■ >^i TURKISH GKAMMAR. 
 
 (^u^ Between: as, UjL^ ' between us.' 
 
 ^^-j Before: as, ^jl (ji^ 'before that time;' ^<^jj< {J^, 'to 
 bring ;' a^^rT (ji-^ ' little front tablets to count money on ;' 
 JoJ (A-J under (one's) eyes, in front.' 
 ^ "Without : as, JJic ^j ' foolish ;' ^\)j ^ ' dumb (without 
 
 tongue);' ^J.s- j 'without truth ;' aW ^ restless.' 
 yj Upon, by: as, ^|^ 'upon this;' i.i,^l>^j 'by the hand (of 
 so and so) ;' ii\-^ p according to (one's) desire.' 
 j-s or lijji Beneath: as, ^S^\ Oj J 'to descend;' CSa:^-!} _j J — j 'to hold 
 the head down, to be humble.' 
 jj Above: as, rj^} y,\ upon this;' c:.-^-JJ jJ over, superior.' 
 LliOjp or Jp If ear : as, CShb LlioJli 'near death;' ail t>JJ 'near 
 to God.' 
 
 THE ARABIC PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 ,^ From : as, iJcj ^1 ^« 'from the beginning ;' j_^Ul ^.^ some (of 
 the) people;' ^j.J ^,» or j^ ^ without;' ilSl Jc^ ^-< 
 from God.' 
 
 ^\ To: as, ..^AJ^Li ^1 'to their devils;' tJiyi-Sl ^1 'totheend.' 
 
 ^ From: as, a1J\ j^t ij"^^ ' '^° '^°'' *"™ away from God;' L.fi.f 
 (_Lki£ ' in spite of you ;' C-^^ ^ 'upon this.' 
 ^_jLc "Upon: as, ^_^ ^^ 'on their hearts;' JU- J^ (Jtc "in every 
 way, of course;' ^^j^^^J^ Ic ' God is almighty.' 
 l_ji In: as, ^^ ^ 'in their hearts;' <-^j ^ 'in doubt;' JLsM ^ 
 
 ' in truth.' 
 i_J In: as, Lii-JLJLs'lj 'in truth;' olaiij^Sli 'according to belief ;' jJJlj 
 ' by God ;' ^ jd b ' by ' or ' with a little care ;' lyiy^JLi ' by 
 opposition.' 
 J For. di! 'for God;' ^^_,Ji:i^ t^jjb ' a direction to the pious.' 
 ^J "Without: as, i_::-J^ h 'without cause' or 'excuse.' 
 
rosT-1'osiTioNS. 53 
 
 [125.]— OF POST-POSITIOJfS. 
 
 Post-positions take an active part in the Turkish language, and form 
 one of its difficulties. 
 
 I. First, there are those (which, as we have seen, are joined to the 
 noun) by wliioh the case is expressed : as — 
 
 [126.] vj the sign of the genitive : as, /»jl 'a man,' iX»j1 ' of a 
 man.' But if the noun terminate with a vowel, ^ intervenes : as, Uj J 
 ' the world, '_ i_CLjl> ' of the world' [16] : with, a few exceptions [37]. 
 
 When J3 follows a word that finishes with a ^, the letter may be 
 dropped in writing [35] : as, ^l:i^ 'his book,' JGjL::^^ 'of his book.' 
 Also, if the possessive afSx ^-j or ,_$ intervenes, the ^ is dropped : as, 
 ^^-jlil 'his mother,' J3L-) lil ' of his mother.' 
 
 [127.] i the sign of the dative : as, *j\ a man.' <C«jl 'to a man.' 
 But if the noun terminates with a vowel, ^ intervenes: as, LjJ 'the 
 world,' fjUjJ 'to the world.' 
 
 If <iJ comes after a word that ends in ,_>, the ^ is dropped : as, 
 tj-U- 'river ;' ^;U^, and not 'Uils^ : or, if the possessive affix . ^-j or 
 ^ intervenes, ^j is interposed between the word and the post-position H : 
 as, ^\j\ 'his mother,' Ai_:L)l 'to his mother.' ^j^ ' his father,' 
 tUj f jj to his father.' 
 
 [ 128.] t_f the sign of the accusative : as, /♦r^'^ i^*"-^^ ^' ' I ""'iU 
 strike this man.' If the noun terminate in a vowel, the i_g is doubled : 
 as, ulX^J ijjy jjL-'O^ ' to abandon this world.' After the posses- 
 sive affix ,_j-o or i_£, the ^^ intervenes: as, j_j'ijl; ^_jixu--«-.S' 'he burnt 
 his ship.' i_s'.^ ' ^^^ book,' /*jyj> ^J-J ^ ' I read his book.' 
 
 It often happens that the last i_s is dropped altogether, and it is 
 important to bear this in mind, as in many MSS. we shaU see it will be 
 written ijj\:i^ short for ^;^, ^^.J^^ for ^^J\j], ^j^^,^,.^^^ or 
 ..u^.^^ for -i*u^;.^-»i . 
 
54 TURKISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 [130.] SJ the sign of the ablative : as, jjLj J 'in the world.' After 
 the pronominal affix ^-: or ,_£ , ^^ intervenes: as, ^>^ 'his book,' 
 njjj^ 'by his book.' ^*u--«.»i his ship,' ^fJc^u^^^S 'by his ship:' 
 and also in the plural : as, ^Jj\ ' his houses,' hxjJj] ' by his houses.' 
 i_fj i^'js- ' their boots,' i^Aij J '^'f^ ' by their boots.' It is also a 
 sign of the Gerund : as, if JkiL««Ji.l in reading.' 
 
 [ 131. J |_^J the sign of the ablative: as, ^t.^^ 'from a house.' The 
 same rules are applicable to ^.J as are given above [130] : as, ^J", 
 ^X^\:^ ; -»i>-..»-^, uAi*^,»4«.r; i_?;!j\, \^'^.j'Ji^> etc. It also signifies 
 'by:' as, ijJ^l 'by him.' ^lX^jl)) il lX^jI by the will of man.' Also 
 'through:' as, ^:>as>- (.li-V^ he went out through the door.' It also 
 signifies 'made of:' as, iJ ^t.vx-j it is made of sinew.' It is used in 
 the 'indeterminate' [116]: as, Jjl j^t>ul.>j 'before finding,' — 'before 
 the time or action of finding had taken place.'* iX^ ^^^ 'after 
 having gone,' — 'later than the departure.' iy.^ |^Oj-c^ 'after not having 
 gone,' — after having renounced going.' 
 
 [ 132.] <ij or i^\ is also a sign of the ablative: as, lUJ^iSJ (pro- 
 nounced &z-re«yZaA) 'with a stick.' iJjw-jJ 'with the hand.' <tL::^«J» vjj_j 
 with your assistance.' It is also used with an infinitive : as, ^_^1 to 
 take;' Al-i..tJl taking,' and forms thus a kind of gerund: as, lLC^IS 
 ' to come ;' dlLklS' ' whilst coming.' 
 
 [133.] ilji is used only with an infinitive: as, ajj LliC»i^ 'going,' 
 whilst going,' going together,' or ' all at once.' 
 
 [ 134.] II. We have also Post-positions affixed to the Nominative: — 
 ^f^} For: as, ^^ysrl id!! ' for the sake of God.' After the possessive 
 
 * It appears incomprehensible to English notions that the negative 
 should ever be taken for an_ affirmative, yet such is the locution in 
 
 Turkish ; but if we consider i^^ to possess a negative power, then the 
 rule that ' two negatives are equal to one affirmative ' will explain this 
 nnomaly. 
 
rosT-POSiTioNS. 65 
 
 affixes it often drops the ,^1 of the first syllable : as, i^y^\^\j[j 'for his 
 father.' ^^ysr; li JJ ' on account of what they eat.' 
 
 Hjjj] Upon, for, according: as, ijjj] cul 'upon a horse.' LliOJJS Li 
 isjjj\ CS-y^} ' for to bear witness.' jijil CUjlc 'according to custom.' 
 
 ^^ Like : as, ^-.^ * j1 'like a man.' 
 
 *ijjl On the other side : as, 63y 'So 'on the other side of the sea.' 
 
 ,_syil „ (little used). 
 
 'v-j "Without: as,J.ujjli^ without a book.' y"^^. 'without eating.' 
 
 [ 135.] III. Post-positions used with the genitive case : — 
 
 <Uj1, |-o, and m»=?C^; when joined to pronouns, sometimes take the 
 
 genitive case : as, lU-iUjl 'with him.' ^-SJC*-^ 'like whom?' i-O Aj 
 
 ^^f^y ' for what reason (what for) ?' 
 
 [ 136.] IV. Post-positions used with the dative case : — 
 ^-^J or ilSo to. LLiJ'J^^is until morning. 
 
 fcijU in front. i^J^ ir^ ^^ front of the citj'. 
 
 ^-jjj near. ujrr'H ^^^^^-^^ near the city. 
 
 jr^^ straight. 'j^J° ^J^j^ straight to Smyrna. 
 
 Hj^ according to, like. ijS <t«ol according to a man. 
 
 [ 137.] V. Post-positions used with the ablative case : — ■ 
 IatL. than. IjlcU ^^^jjuy^ besides these. 
 
 jljjl far. ijb'^ W^i^ ^^^ ■^'■°™' ■^^■'^^" 
 
 Jjl before. Jjl |_^iXij before me. 
 
 jy'jl regarding. jJiA ^^:>jy> regarding the light. 
 
 ijLe after. jJC^ ^Ai~) aft«r you. 
 
 (for this last year, for a year 
 j^ since. _.y ^O^j J p^^_ 
 
 * <ijjl on the other side. i3^\ ^^^_ far from here. 
 
 <U.I is also used with the nominative [134]. 
 
56 
 
 TURKISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 [138.] YI. 
 sessive affixes : — 
 
 Post-positions which are declinable, and take the pos- 
 
 
 iPi': 
 
 ji. 
 
 after, 
 under, 
 among, 
 in. 
 
 before, on 
 within, 
 outside, 
 side. 
 
 by, side. 
 
 upon. 
 
 above. 
 
 side. 
 
 place. 
 
 tl^H'^J 
 
 
 the ground. c:_--i'jijl 
 
 
 I went in search of them. 
 
 under the head. 
 
 among you. 
 
 I came out from within it. 
 
 go in front, forward. 
 
 from its interior. 
 
 from outside of the house, 
 from this (his) side to that 
 side; lit., 'its own side.' 
 
 place this by my side. 
 
 upon my head ; lit.,' its upon.' 
 
 he came from above. 
 
 please to come by me. 
 
 from your place. 
 
 CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 [ 139.] As the Turks use no stops, they have recourse to a variety 
 of Conjunctions to point out the end of one period and the beginning of 
 the next; which might rather be styled disjunctives. Many of them are 
 interlarded with, and sometimes added to, the Gerunds, which perform a 
 similar fimotion. [ Vide Syntax. J 
 
 * The word ^Sjy>^ for yjy^_ is the precise counterpart of the Italian 
 fmorisca, for which we have no exact word in English ( favorisca, ' pray 
 sit down'). 
 
CONJUNCTIONS. O I 
 
 The following is a list of the Turkish, Arabic, and Persian Conjunc- 
 tions (some of which have appeared under the head of expletives) y — ■ 
 
 [ 140.] iti, 15^ J) or laj 'also': as, /♦•JJ^J ^^t*-^} lA^-^ 'although 
 I went, I am returned.' i_$'J>" ^'^j^ ' he also came.' 
 
 [141. J J and': a,s, ^j^_ j yiy^ ' to-day a»(Z to-morrow.' 
 [142.] t»l 'but': as, ^^tii Ul Li-^S' 'go, Jm< return.' 
 
 [ 143.] ^\ or ^ ' if,' denotes the beginning of a clause, and therefore 
 divides it fiom the last. It is more used in writing than in conversa- 
 tion : as, i_$Li)j\ii «,*w*i«^ i^l j»i<i ijcjli |j 'l went to him, if I had 
 not gone he would have been vexed.' But it may be omitted, and 
 *.mU:uS' would signify 'if I had not gone,' even without jTI. 
 
 [ 144. J f^'^- or i^j=- 'as, since,' also begins a phrase, and denotes 
 that a stop or breath may be taken before it : as, Jx~yiW ^y>- J-^ 
 ' let us go since you are ready.' 
 
 [145.] ^ 'that': as, irAiL: i^^j '^ )j'^} ^^^}^-^ they relate 
 that in past times,' etc. 
 
 [146.] <i^*1jL« as long as': as, l.::.-^£^tol itC«'jL« f*'^jy is'-' 
 l»jj,\-.^ jiC-j UijJ ' I have struck you ; as long as you do not submit, I 
 will (continue to) beat you' (pronounced vurdum and vururum). 
 
 [147.] b or "J*ii-V. '°r, nor:' as, J^Uj ULu ^^^,_ ■fK'*^ {J"" J'^ 
 iJLJjxiU »saJ j1Cji_Xj jf-**:?^ Jj^ '■'■f Haa'a. art not the Messiah, 
 nor Elias, nor that Prophet, why baptisest thou ?' 
 
 [148.] i_?J>^l 'now, therefore': as,^AjiAJj Ol '-S'^^ 'now, they 
 said to him.' 
 
 [149.] \y\ 'because': as, l/'V.^ Ji^ u"^ 1;:!; J'^^-'^^^^J^ Jj^ vi''^ 
 ' he is preferred before me, lecause he was before me.' 
 
 [150.] /*=<^1 'but,' is disjunctive : as, a^X^j^JuS' Jlrsrl ^i^Ji-^^ 'l 
 was going, lut I could not go ' (was not able). 
 
58 TURKISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 [ 151. J is-.J'l 'if, although,' is the same as S^l. 
 
 [ 152.] Xo/^jj 'if not'; the same as i-Vi^b- 
 
 [153.] ij 'not, nor, neither': as, ^b (0 ^JJw\-*^ ij ' it is not 
 of flesh wor fish.' ^J:^\ ^J*:J'ol^l iX*jl ij (^Jcj'jl^l S^ ij i^Ajli ij 
 jijljij^^ M'H^^ 'they were horn neither of hlood, nor of the will of 
 the flesh, nor of the will of man, (but only) of the will of God.' 
 
 [154.] Ud whether or not': as, »au/C-^ la a**-::^ \^ whether I 
 go, or whether I do not go.' It is also used as an interjection [180]. 
 
 [155.] i-IXj 'it is necessary, hut, whether': as, LL5\i |*ij-.*:i-j' 
 jlV«;1 ' I do not want to, but it is necessary.' iuL«Jjl '~~^ <uJjl tlSp 
 whether it be, or whether it be not.'* 
 
 [156.] j^ 'he wishes': as, fUu-vi^^:!^! iUu::-.^' Ji_jl whether he 
 choose to go,' or not to go.' Let him go, or not, as he pleases.' 
 
 [ 157.] jS or »^ 'that,' is used in old MSS. instead of i^. 
 
 [158.] X» 'except, but': as, ^^ J^^jj il< u! Jk^ U'-V. ^•^^ 'in no 
 other way can (you) go, except by here.' 
 
 ^ .C« is a compound of the two words [145, 158]. 
 [159.] i«oiU ' but if, whilst '; composed of Jl* cw(^ 'Uujl [123]. 
 [160.] »ji both': as, j^|*Ji »j*Js Jott this are(^ that.' 
 [ 161.] (Luj 'but, well': as, lJ'^' l/*^ ^^^^ "'"''^ (what next) r' 
 [ 162.] ^ or ^jL] 'but': as, ^ Jo J_jJ ij\ ^Jj,S^\ J_jJ ij\ 
 ' they did not accept him ; bu( to those accepting him,' etc. 
 
 [163.] \j or i>^\j 'in order that, unfil': as, ^-j ii Sj,X1iJ \j\ l/J^^ 
 jjjiji t_-)l»;^ SyJiAJsT t_0 iS\j lXL)»-S ' then (now) they said unto him, 
 who art thou ? that we may give answer to them that sent us.' 
 
 ■'■' Is it to be wondered at that such a word as this, having so many 
 difiercnt meanings, should be placed by us under the head of expletives ? 
 
COKJUNCTIONS. 59 
 
 ^j^jSj} (o^^ ^^J' (\rj^ is~^ (vr^ ' ■'• '^^^ ^^^* yo'i M?«^2? you call 
 out aman.' 
 
 [164.] \S or wLui as if, like': as, (_/j-*j1 jjI ii\jS jy^^yit ti^J ti 
 ' He speaks thus, as if it vs'ere good' — 
 
 [166.] ^JaLi ()?• JjLi) 'it appears, perhaps': as, JoLi l::^^ HtyJiii 
 jS.\\ Jj-J i-u-j go to him, perhaps he wiU receive you.' i^vjl JoLi 
 it appears to be good.' 
 
 [166.] ii^jL^ may it not be': as, ^^,_j/.l^j1 ti^jL/» ^^^tt!.! 'it will 
 be so ; would it were not !' 
 
 [167.] *i5'^>^ that, in order that ': as, <_Cj_ijLj ^-j^i^-jJ^ Jlc 
 the world knows it ; even you are aware of it.' 
 
 [ 168. J kls 'but, except, only :' as, ajJj ^j kai J^i^fi-S' c_^ 'all 
 went, except I ow/y remained.' ill but: as, <d!l SI :S]1 S 'There is no God 
 iut God.' 
 
 [ 169.] i5^>il or fJ-^i, ' that is to say,' is a demonstrative conjunction : 
 as, lS^Aj ciJjA! !iXj^} <U^v«il LS^. ''-^--"'^-'♦^ *'-v^'^.^ J^' i~i^ i-fi 
 ' but to aU those who received him ; that is, to those believing in his 
 name, he gave power,' etc. 
 
 [ 170.] iJjc (pronounced Baa-da hu), after,' i.e., next': as, ^ Jjl 
 ^ a Sic ' first I, next you.' 
 
 [171.] J-alsM, ten^Jl, <Ua(i]l and iLoL^ 'in short, at last, to con- 
 clude,' etc.: as, ^^-jJjl ^\j J-=Uh (^<J;lj!V. Jjf- L^i-f iTl 'we 
 went to him, begged him much, and, in short, he consented.' ^;snpj\ 
 fjlL^\£J ' well, and what is to be the end of it ?' ' "What is it that you 
 insist upon ' or wish ?' 
 
 * There is an old Arabic proverb which well exempHfies this word : 
 lil ^j ^j^ ^bjii lii=5C ^^ i-^.i>^ J '^V*^' LiJ^lcj jLII CJ;l) 
 ' I have travelled (through many) countries, have lived with many people, 
 and have not seen any one who is grateful, {lit., ' a conserver of friendship') 
 even not I myself.' 
 
(50 TURKTSH GRAMMAR. 
 
 OF INTERJECTIONS. 
 
 Some of the interjections have appeared under the denomination of 
 expletives. We wOl now give a list of them. 
 
 [172.] ^\ !s\, and ^\ 'Oh! Ah!' as.^ljJj J 'Oh! beloved of 
 my heart.' 
 
 [173.] i\y} 'yes, all right;' or aiSl_yl 
 
 [174.] Jjli 'what a pity ': as, j=f\ ^Jjj^, {j^} ji} '— ^ ' ^^° 
 man is well enough ; what a pity that he drints.' 
 
 [ 175. J ^_jJi! or ^, ^_s\ or b 'Oh! ' as, lIjj b ' Oh Lord !' i—iys ^, 
 aJI Ji, or ("^^1^^ ' you feUow !' 
 
 [ 176.] 1—2;^=- and ^ i^^ are like jJjli 'pity!' 
 
 [177.] iob»^ ' for goodness sake : ' as, ^^J^ijii -jLa ^L»l pray 
 take care, (or) you wiU fall.' 
 
 [178.] ^.j'^ (pronounced dfferim), 'Bravo!' as, j5jcj! ^\ ,.,.;-sl 
 'Bravo! you did right.' 
 
 [179.] 0J^» 'assistance:' as, <d!l Jjw« 'God's help.' 
 
 [ 180.] Ito 'be careful; Oh!' : as, L^A-jJ ' Oh friend !' Uts *£j^ ' look 
 out ! I shall strike (if you resist),' etc. 
 
 [181.] J^jJ ' he careful, be sure you do not.' Vide ' Tale of Nasr- 
 ildi'n Khoja.' 
 
 [182.] aUI JU^ UW 'God forbid:' as, dlJl j\x^ ' may God not 
 wish, 'islllj Jyu we trust in God.' <dllj \y:.\ ' I put my confidence in 
 God.' i!i!i\ jSdc~~i\ 'God forbid.' ^\ Lit. ' as it pleases God,' ' may it 
 please God.' <ull li^^l ' if it please God,' etc.* 
 
 * And idlljj aill)^ dill J 'by God!' are all Arabic exclamations, to 
 which the Tiu'ks have recoiu-se in conversation, looking upon the mention 
 of the Supreme Being as beneficial to them, and not dcrogatoiy to his 
 dignity. 
 
INTERJECTIONS. 61 
 
 [ 183.] i_sJ or ^Sj[£>, ^o't.' or l^^O come, come along; what's all 
 that ?' as, j\lit^^ ' Come along, and let us see what you can do,' etc. 
 
 [184.] (djb 'let us see, now you will see.' (Expletive.) 
 
 [ 185.] i_jla> L^lsi of course.' 
 
 [186.] 1)1 'whether? what?' as, ^^^iX-S'M 'will you go.' 
 
 [ 187.] 1-lX.p ' may it please you, youi servant.' 
 
 [ 188.] *U=-^ ' God said to Abraham.' *^_^.ji \_ \^j^ ' Salutation 
 to you. Oh ! Abraham.' 
 
 [189.] ^jl 'how nice!' f 
 
 [ 190.] i_Jj,l ' what a bore !' f 
 
 [191.] Ij what! is it possible.' 
 
 OF DERIVATION. 
 
 [ 192.] In the same manner as in English one word is derived from 
 another [deserve, desert, deservedly), so, in Turkish, words may be formed, 
 and to a greater extent than in any other language, by reason of their 
 having adopted the Arabic and Persian method of derivation and compo- 
 sition added to their own. 
 
 [193.] We have already observed [18] how they take a word, for 
 instance, in Arabic, and give it a Persian termination : thus, *S\ a man,' 
 
 They never say they will do anything, without adding Inshallah, ' if it 
 please God ;' so that, if they do not keep their word, it was because it did 
 not please God they should. 
 
 If you admire anything they have, you are expected to prefix your 
 
 observation with Aill LiL« Mashallah, to keep off the evil eye. 
 
 * This must be an original corruption of CSls- j_^ ' with your love.' 
 It is ia constant use. After a man has entered the room, and taken his 
 seat, he looks round the room, and putting his hand to his breast while he 
 inclines his head a little, looking to each person present, he says 'MarJmia,' 
 to which they all in turn answer, ' Marhaha Mosh giieldin,' ' you are 
 come well.' 
 
 I Eor an exemplification of these two expressions vide ' Tm'kish Tales 
 in English ' by the Author. 
 
62 TURKISH GEAMMAR. 
 
 makes j^Lw< j| ( Persian plural ), ' men, ' and also it is declined 
 in the Turkish form lXjU^jI 'of men.' This must appear very com- 
 plex, but it by no means forms one of the difficulties of the language. 
 A little reading will soon accustom the student to this apparent looseness, 
 which is considered by Turks as an embellishment. 
 
 [ 194. J A little study of the Arabic and Persian systems of derivation 
 is certainly desirable ; but this would lead us into a maze, from which 
 we could not hope to escape in this work. We will, therefore, only give 
 some of the principal rules for the formation of words, and refer the 
 student to Mr. Kedhouse's Grammar, to which the present is intended 
 to form a second introduction. 
 
 [ 195.] ^^- When ^s^ is added to a word it expresses the agent 
 or profession: as, C->~^\ ' bread;' ,s^~^!l 'baker.' ij 'what:' as, 
 ,2£r what is he ?' (of what profession.) 
 
 [196.] —i the root of ^i.^ J to break:' as, ^sT' _»j a breaker' (one 
 who breaks), fjj the root of (J^*^^ 'to see:' as, ^.snju a looker on.' 
 Here the _f is introduced for the sake of euphony. Also C->^^\ 'to do:' 
 as, jsrsi\ the maker' (one who makes). 
 
 [ 197.] lUJ {or (jJ, according to the requirements of euphony) is 
 added to words : as, 
 
 LliJjjiS beauty. 
 
 CJ^yi} kindness (pronounced ai-lih). 
 
 LlioJUsl^ testimony. 
 
 LL>i;^jsr^.| the trade of baking. 
 
 J^IjLjl;^ the trade of taking people in. 
 
 ^jj-ii-j during the winter. 
 
 (Jy-fP-y^ a piece of money of six piastres. 
 
 ^yJUJL' the action of seeing. 
 
 Jj/ 
 
 beautiful. 
 
 ^.^ 
 
 good. 
 
 JJbu 
 
 a witness. 
 
 ^^.\ 
 
 a baker. 
 
 "jV^^ 
 
 a jockey. 
 
 c/^^ 
 
 winter. 
 
 ^^ 
 
 six. 
 
 &^. 
 
 to see. 
 
DEEIVATION. 
 
 [ 198.J iji may be added to the root of verbs : as, 
 
 ^ root of (J^, to see.' O^^ tbe action of seeing. 
 
 Jjj-j „ lLx*L)^ ' to speak.' (jiiLj«: the speaking. 
 CiU^ijl 'to do,' (for the sake of euphony.) /hAjI the making. 
 
 The change of the tU to J, or J to ^, has already been noted 
 [62, 63]. 
 
 [ 199.] ^js>- and L->^ are used to express diminution: as, 
 jjj a girl. ^^;^jji a little girl. 
 
 •jI good. LiJv^jJ I (pronounced ayijih) pretty good. 
 
 Ji>- fc5^ small boy. ^_p»- y^ j^- ) very small ; (the first ^J being turned to 
 (J^y small. ^Js^^^ j _j, for the sake of euphony.) 
 
 (.lio »S a dog. lLxs:?«S a very little dog. (For the same reason 
 
 the lL5 is dropped, or turned into S, 
 and pronounced kerqjehjik.) 
 
 [ 200.] A>- is added to vi^ords, giving them the various significations, 
 as follows : 
 
 jJijl English. ij>-J^SS3\ the English language. 
 
 alSI a man. ^i.s^ j1 like a man. 
 
 i_f ili a woman. ''^^fC;^ ■^■'^s ^ woman. 
 
 yi this. ''•^}^ ill ''his way. 
 
 i_/iLj white. <i^s**Lj whitish. 
 
 [201.] ^ is sometimes added to the above, to express diminution. 
 iLsT* jl like a man. ^-Ls^jl a little like a man. 
 ircij my way. ^J-snj a little in my way (according to me.) 
 
 [ 202.] |J or )! is also added to words, qualifying them in the 
 following manner : 
 
 j*-^j\ Smyrna. j'jt^j^ ^ '^^^ °^ Smyrna. 
 
 JSjj^ his own. X^SS-JjiXJ^ those belonging to him. 
 Jjic wisdom. yjJs- 
 
 a wise man. 
 
6-1 TURKISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 [203.] j-: without,' answers to our un' or in.' 
 t_Jv-«j to eat. r"-'^^! without eating. 
 
 iJjLc mind. \^Ajis■ without mind, — unwise. 
 
 (^Us- life. Jwl^ dead, life-less. 
 
 ijAM to see. jjjJL<,ij without paying attention. 
 
 [204.] ^--c or roj^i ^I'i ijr?^ "'' cJ}' according as euphony may 
 command, aifecting them as follows : 
 
 ^jyt]j\ii to he angry. _^lj angry. 
 
 ^J^tJj\Jii to he bewildered. ^-jLiLi or ^JLili stupid. 
 
 ^J^s-Yi to run away. -jis-vi a runaway. 
 
 [205.] J, J, or ^. The J we have seen is used to form the 
 passive voice : as, LLS~*i~i ' to love ;' LlX*Ii-j to he loved.' Tou may 
 take a noun and form it into an active verh, thus : 
 
 H/-< a seal. i^S-^jy* ^ ^'^^^■ 
 
 yjj\ a covering. L-CJjj.l to cover. 
 
 ip^ empty. ^L»JLijj to empty. 
 
 CJy^ small. u-XtJj^ to make small. 
 
 j-/«J clean. lLC»jJ-/»j to clean. 
 
 ijjy pretty. tliUil uS to heeome pretty, 
 
 hut in this, as in many of the above, the student had better trust to his 
 dictionary, and learn the words in the course of his reading. 
 
 [ 206.] lJ or <0 1 . This letter is sometimes added to a noun after 
 the Persian manner. 
 
 Ll/jlj gentle. ^j\j or .Xjli'ili gentility, 
 
 great. ijjj-^ " ^"^J^. greatness, 
 
 slave. ijwX) „ <(.;ilSjcj servitude. 
 
DERIVATION. 65 
 
 [207.] lL/U and X^, j\j of jj- These Persian terminations are 
 
 also used. 
 p 
 (A-^l hope. (Jj'liii-^jl JiX^iX^jl jIjJl^jI hopeful. 
 
 Jwijj intention. (JjUjuaj Jw«JusJi jljA-ai' intending, 
 
 cu^ijc^ trouble. lI/IJ ci-.is'* J-^(.::-o..sr* jlji-::,.,;^'* full of trouble. 
 
 Fnzuli has said : 
 
 ^_yiX«Jlj l::_^=--1^ i(jk.«j^- i»-Lj *'«J^ il 
 
 ' Oh ! I know not what to do ; in my soul no rest has remained, my 
 eyes are humid, my breast is hroJcen, and my heart is full of trouble.' 
 
 [208.] By adding ^\ to a substantive: as, (jiul 'fire;' ijf^\ 
 ' belonging to fire.' 
 
 [209.] By adding if Jul or if Jo to a participle : as, Jii-uu 'approving;' 
 ifJoAXiuj approved, grateful.' 
 
 But these last forms are only used in poetry. 
 
66 TURKISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 SYNTAX. 
 
 [ 21 O.J Wlien two nouns come together the first is put in the genitive 
 case, and the latter takes the possessive affix ^ or ,5-0. [ 33.] 
 
 Ex. .i.ViJjL^_i iJj L;»:sr; Of John his witness is this.' 
 
 i-CLl J.J ic^y. '-Cj (^} ^/jV '^'-V.^ ^'^ '^'-'^.y. 'l ^™- ^^® voice of 
 one crying in the desert, make straight the way of the Lord.' 
 
 Krst, we see lXjJji iJu (which is a compound verb, consisting of 'lAJ 
 Arabic substantive, and (jOol, the declinable participle of the auxiliary 
 verb lLx*:^!) treated as a substantive, and declined in the genitive case, 
 before i_?i\5^ ' ^'■s voice.' Next, we see Ju 1 ' of the Lord,' the first 
 noun in the genitive case, and i5iI_jJ (for ^iJjj) ' his road,' with the 
 post-position ij, [35] (the ,_? being dropped in the oblique case) ; and this 
 latter of the two substantives |^_jJ "-Gj, that is ls^Uj, is in the accusative 
 case after the verb lXJjI jj J (short for jiCjiUljl wS) 'make straight.' 
 [67, 69.] 
 
 [211. J Sometimes the Persian form is used, then a kesra ( ), or 
 ^^, or ( ' ) is put between the nouns, and represents exactly the EngHsh ('s), 
 but the order is inversed. Ex. 
 iLijl) jJuS\j\ the king's wiU. 
 jjlkL) c:.-^^^xc- the Sultan's orders. 
 
 CjU t_fb the foot of constancy ; {lit., ' constancy's foot.') 
 iL;^! ^/^~ a place of doubt ; {lit., ' doubt's place.') 
 ^_f^,k-;jti ^lij the promises of friends ; {lit., 'friends' promises.') 
 L.il ^is^y^.sr* the collection of things ; {lit., ' things' collection.') 
 (jUaLj 'if J^j the servants of the king ; (W., 'the king's servants.') 
 
SYNTAX. 67 
 
 [ 212.] Wlen two names come together, with, a word between them 
 qualifying the first, no sign is used, it being understood that the first 
 name is put in the genitive case : 
 
 jjiK/t-i y-cji Ij jJ of Jonas the son — Simon. 
 [213.] Two Arabic or Persian nouns (or one Arabic and one Persian 
 may stand together without any sign of the genitive : 
 
 i,^->s'^ JSl) or 1^,-si^ i-<j.v<j" the airs of the beloved. 
 iJ^ I— .-J the borders of the river. 
 i^^Lijji; J _o the chief of the dervishes. 
 
 [214.] Sometimes a noun of number has two genitives preceding it : 
 (Cfj 4_Gj i.-» Jl cXlilL*,./* one of the men of the city. 
 
 Or a genitive and an ablative case together : 
 
 ^_Sj- li)J^';^-'^"_J^^ >^!i^ y. ^ii-y ' of these houses, from among their 
 children otie ;' i.e., one from among the children of these houses. 
 
 [ 215.] "When a name occurs, the word aIj ' by name' is added to it 
 to prevent the possibility of its being mistaken : 
 
 /»U jja*/*j Jjii) Wioodemus (by) name. 
 
 jJLi^L» aU CUjJIJj the marshal, by name Bejnadotte. 
 
 Jj Jcji (.::.-^^J£ (iLij rt--i rf^y^ LLi'^.rt^ 'Jy^ from the city of 
 Hanover to the city of Grottingen they arrived. 
 
 L-JtSA j^y L5V.7V LiriJ passing the river Ehine. 
 
 In these two last examples -^^ city,' and ^J river,' taking the 
 place of /»li name,' as more explanatory : 
 
 [ 216.] In forming a sentence the dative stands first : 
 
 sf^ 15^^ ^}jy. to this place bring the book. 
 J , u-Ciijl IXj to me bread give. 
 
 2 i- 
 
68 TURKISH GEAMMAK. 
 
 [217.] So also if ^^^} be used, the noun or pronoun -whioli accom- 
 panies it, in whatever case it be, stands first in the sentence : 
 jij lLCcjJ (j^tstI^jI give the men bread; (fe'^. 'for the men bread give.') 
 r»^jj^ i-f^^y. u)^}^'^ fo'f (of) yo'i these things I brought. 
 *^]\i^y\^ i^X>^ y> uy=^^^ fo"^ myself these books I bought. 
 
 [218.] u_^l, JL/J^' ^■^' t>JJ^' LS^' J^' ^■^' and some others, 
 must be pronounced immediately after the vs^ord they foUow, as if forming 
 part of it, and a pause ensue : 
 
 came witness to make regarding the light for witness the aforesaid 
 
 A little attention to this will greatly facilitate the understanding of the 
 Turkish construction, which otherwise might appear obscure. 
 
 Observe here that A^~*^.l tUOiXibli is one composite verb, in the 
 dative infinitive,' which answers to our infinitive. 
 
 [219.] In the natural course of Turkish composition the adjective 
 precedes the substantive, and remains unchangeable, as has been already 
 observed [21] : as, jjijjj^, jjlcjlJj^jS 'a pretty girl,' ' a pretty boy.' 
 But in using foreign words the order is inverted : as, (— r ;hi Oy* a 
 gentleman ;' and then the adjective agrees with the substantive in gender 
 and number. 
 
 Ux. aUIc i^jAsi-i powerful kings. 
 
 '^j^J^ Jl^^ things already mentioned, 
 ^ti-isj luU-*' an elegant woman. 
 [220.] Titles also follow the noun : 
 
 i^JujJis>- ilil) His Excellency the Pacha. 
 Except whien speaking of God, the Prophet, and saints. 
 
 iJUj" jjj>. LUj-ds- God Almighty. 
 aLUI <l1c- ^jJ lUj^As- His Highness the Prophet, on whom be peace! 
 (_^Jai CJpoa- the Holy Saints. 
 
SYNTAX. 69 
 
 [221. J "Wien Turkisli or Persian numbers are used, they precede 
 the noun; if Arabic, they follow and agree with it in gender and number : 
 J J a place. 
 ^j1 (jiu five men. 
 jfSi] iji^^ijfc seven climates (the whole world). 
 <Uji1 *Lajl the four divisions ; {lit, 'the divisions /ojw') [Arabic]. 
 
 [ 222.] When a noun is thus preceded by a number it remains in 
 the singular : 
 
 SjiiW_ a hundred camels (camel). 
 CjT (ji.^1 sixty horses (horse). 
 
 But if an Arabic number is used, the noun is put in the plural : 
 
 ■Jjt—j *J1j1 the seven climates. 
 
 [ 223.] The Turks avoid the use of the personal pronoun of the 3rd 
 person singular by placing in its stead a word signifying ' the aforesaid ' : 
 as, lyj^, ci^r^i AjjIjUu.* etc. Vide 1st Eeading lesson, verses 
 6 and 7 of St. John's Gospel. 
 
 [ 224.] The pronoun of the 3rd person plural is generally under- 
 stood to be implied in the verb : as, rlj jl> they came ;' unless it is 
 wanted to particularize that they themselves came, then it may be used : 
 JjaIS^JjI or Jj Ali JjAii they came or they themselves came. 
 
 [ 225.] In writing or speaking elegantly they avoid the pronoun of 
 the 1st person by using jXi-^J your friend,' or\^\s.J 'he who prays 
 for you,' meaning myself.' 
 
 [ 226.] And the pronoun of the 2nd person is expressed by 
 ^iJlc CjU or ijf^Lp- luIj 'the person of your Excellency,' i.e. 
 you.' 
 
70 TURKISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 [ 227.] The possessive affix is used in a peculiar manner in Turkish, 
 and it forms one of the difficulties of the language, unless it be clearly 
 understood and defined. 
 
 Examples of the use of the Possessive Affix. 
 
 j'jpjt ikJjl vJjXi jjl "We sat before (in front of) your houses, 
 vjjl (substantive) the front,' ,^^1 'its front,' i^j\ 'to its front ' (the 
 i_f being dropped as usual). [ 127.] 
 
 ^-jj J <0 i>iiXjL>- iSjStSi^ What sayest thou of thyself. .AiS self,' 
 3^xS ' thyself,' J^d^ ' of thyself.' J=.. ' truth,' cO^ ' thy truth,' 
 i jJUis». ' in thy truth.' 
 
 iji-j A,^^ Jjj l>-^lj 'his shoes' latchet.' ^^b 'a shoe,' ls^y\j 
 'shoes,' ^Is-v^ 'his shoes,' i_Gj Is^.jli 'of his shoes.' ^U^^ij 'the 
 latchet,' ,;^»»~; iU-aJ' or (^^— = ^.*«aj its latchet,' in the accusative. 
 
 i^jTsrl -^i^\j\ jJbUi ilLjl^l To be made manifest to Israel, {lit., 
 ' for his being made manifest.') 
 
 * J_i^ j^^iAj jjjt jl/t;^ I saw it abiding. (Z«Y., ' its being upon.') 
 
 <)UJ lyl "-C*^ upon whom,' (/«<., of whom, to 7»»s upon,') ^J.l taking 
 the possessive affix his ' or it ' ( t_f ) drops the ( is ) and being declined 
 becomes isjjjj\ in the dative case. [ttijijJ, 35.] 
 
 ^jjyJC^] icJ:i\ Behold the Lamb of God ; {lit., ' of God his lamb.') 
 ^jy on taking the possessive affix of the 3rd person ^-j changes the 
 ( |_f ) into (_j ) for the sake of euphony and becomes ^••jy . 
 
 (_f Jl i_C 1 Of him his name. Here we have two pronouns Jj 1 ' of him ' 
 [27] (used as a noun, and put in the genitive case before i_?cM), and ^_s 
 the possessive pronoun of the 3rd person [33], and not the post-position, 
 sign of the accusative case [128]. The learner is requested to mark 
 this double use of pronouns, and to refer to [210.] 
 
SYNTAX. 71 
 
 [ 228.] The affix ^ seems to have a demonstrative power : as, 
 Ji |ji :sjSc^^\ the cap that is upon your (head). 
 <iLv.C;) ^ i,\AJ b the chair that is near me. 
 [ 229.] It has also a povs'er of particularization and appropriation : 
 i—jlui |P 1*^ my own hook. 
 ^_fjli ^^iiJljjJiJO he came to his very own. 
 _jJ or J|^i_GjiXo J and his very own. 
 [ 230.] It is used also to specify any time particularly. 
 f^^ ^ 7- W lJ^'^ uyj' ^°* *'° ^^y (^"^t) ^^* "i^y of to-morrow. 
 JtX-Li is'^c-U'^Li-^^ci.''^ ^"^^ ^^ ^^'^ ''^y °^ yesterday that you came ? 
 [ 231. J The verb always agrees with the 1st and 2nd person of the 
 singular and plural of the pronouns : 
 
 aJJS ^j3 I came. kjjls ^-j thou camest. 
 
 (JJaIS' Jj we came. JjjJi' j_j ye came. 
 (The personal pronouns are only used when precision is required.) 
 
 [ 232. J But when the subject of the verb is in the 3rd person, the 
 verb may be put in the singular, although it refer to a plural number : as, 
 ^d\^ li}j\ 'our horses came' (singular), and not JjjJi'. 
 
 [ 233.] "When addressing a person, you use the 2nd person plural 
 although mentioning him in company with others : as, 
 ^jxu-^ i»^J^ J *-^^V i c?-^ ^^^ y" ^°d your father and my son ffo ? 
 
 [ 234.J "When you mention yourself, then the verb must stand in 
 the 1st person plural: as, JiA^ Alj\ j ^-J bb • jl ; ^ j ^^J 'land 
 you and he, and your father and my son, lae will go.' 
 
 [235.] The 3rd person present of the auxiliary verb >jI may be 
 added to a verb or omitted. It is generally added when one wishes to 
 express an action positively : as, 
 
 jOlm-*i»t ^^J'.'^JJ^ (J^^ '^"^ (indeed) of God they were born.' 
 
72 TUBKISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 [ 236.] otherwise in speaking it is generally left out : 
 .^^} y^^ «« your health good. 
 J I LliO it is very good. 
 
 [ 237.] The verb is always placed at the end of the phrase, except 
 in poetry, when it is permitted to he placed in the verse : as, 
 
 J.4jlj»J i^jlS' j^jJjjlj-ol from Constantinople a fleet is come.' 
 
 [ 238.] ''-u^J, the 3rd person of the conditional of the verb *j ', is 
 often used expletively, and means now, but, as to, vsdth regard to : ' as, 
 ^JjJ j^^jlkX-^^::^^ iLxjl (j*^ ' Now, Philip was of Bethsaida.' 
 
 [ 239.] <Uj.j\ is (like (.i)^^ and others) a disjunctive post-position 
 [218]. It is generally, however, a sign of the subjunctive mood, and 
 signifies 'if :' as, i(J*Aujl {^jL^jJJt\ ' if I had sat down.' Ve may as well 
 observe, with regard to the JJ, which here occurs after the verb, and is 
 so often used in conversation, that it is purely expletive. 
 
 [ 240.] It (that is, liS) is, however, sometimes added to infinitives or 
 verbal nouns, to give the form of a participle active. [ Vide Eedhouse, 
 sect. 591, p. 160.] 
 
 ^•pjk^J-j iJ^uiS 2(J<l..»i-S have you not done going and coming. 
 jJ2f jJL«jjjl he is about (employed in) reading. 
 
 [241.] We have already stated that the infinitive mood is declined, 
 and that the dative of this infinitive answers very frequently to our 
 common infinitive. 
 
 Besides this form, the post-position uj\ and iSj is often joined to the 
 infinitive, giving it the force of a gerund: as ^^l-^j j;*^^ sJ\Ll>^j . 
 aIA*!)! (J^. and the Jews' passover leing near ; ' {lit., ' on its being 
 near.') Jk»Jj^ changing the j into d, in consequence of its being 
 followed by Ai\, which is contracted into <iJ. 
 
SYNTAX. 73 
 
 [ 242.] When participles are declined, they stand in relation to verbs 
 the same as nouns : Ex. 
 
 idCti^ ij^"^ '-^Ir^J ^°^ when they wanted wine ; ' {lit., 'and 
 the wine hecoming short or wanting) ; (_LC*i^ (being the Turkish 
 auxiliary verb used with the Arabic word ^^l»aiij ) is the infinitive to 
 which i\ contracted from <dj\ is added. [ 241.] 
 
 jlV (SjSj^^ *iJ this is he of whom I spoke;' (lit., 'my having 
 spoken, this is.') 
 
 J, i—j\is^ ^SUs.^\ijya answer what I have asked;' {lit., 'of my 
 having asked, give answer.') 
 
 jlj ijXij^ 'look at that man who is afraid,' {^j^, participle 
 deoUned). 
 
 Ai^Jj \ i_^.s*^ ^i*«.4~ji i-C Uj ' I am astonished at the going (swift- 
 ness) of (the man) mounted (on horseback).' 
 
 i!\j\ j\a=^1 [rj'^'^i-^.,^ ^^ careful of what I have said; ' {lit., 'of 
 (the) my having said, beware.') 
 
 [243.] "We have said [139] that the conjunctions or disjunctives 
 are often interlarded vdth or added to gerunds, and denote a pause in the 
 sentence by dividing it. Let us give an example : j-^\ ,_ji-j _ ICj ^j 
 Xu-^ j^\ oliii^l -Ui=f^ fi'^..'^ ^^J^ ^^^ tKi^UT {lit., 'I to 
 thee [first the dative case, then the gerund] for my having said I saw 
 thee under the fig tree, thou believest ?') 
 
 [244.] We have already noted (pages 28 and 56) [139] that the 
 gerunds represent a pause in the sentence, and serve to divide a phrase, 
 only one direct or personal verb coming at the end. We will now give 
 an instance of this, which will exemplify the style, and show where the 
 difficulties of construction lie. 
 
74 
 
 TURKISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 , cJ^iiL^^l f-:'.^ i-::--J!j C>^^ 'rfj^-"^ ciL^JiJ iiljj l::-^;.?-_jJ j 
 
 <^-._jj _j .ui^jjl u^=^ L^.j'^ u'^l/W^ i_s^ ^J-'y jj^- i'!/ 
 
 The literal translation of wHob. would be as follows : 
 
 the difficult roads 
 descending 
 to the country of the- 
 
 of the black mountains 
 and the valley of the Danube 
 
 Therefore 
 
 leaving 
 
 ^Jo 
 
 j1 1 ij' _y, 
 
 leaving on one side 
 
 of the- 
 
 and 
 
 our entering 
 
 in a few days 
 
 the parallel waters 
 -Eleotor of Bavaria 
 
 ' i^^\\. Observe that this participle [71] serves as an auxiliary to 
 the two Arabic nouns CJy and Jjjjj . 
 
 * i_/jliu';^ is simply equal, even : ' hence it has been used for 
 'parallel,' a word not existing in Turkish ; but it would require a conjuror 
 to divine that it meant 'parallel,' if met in a Turkish phrase unaccom- 
 panied by a translation." 
 
SYNTAX. 
 
 75 
 
 at the same time avoiding also 
 
 the finding ourselves some days' march 
 barely 
 
 and 
 
 -passes of the Tyrol mountains 
 on the heads of our enemies 
 
 time to lose not having 
 
 in this -way 
 
 the soldiers of the enemy 
 
 Ai-C;^^;! ,^,.ilir ^jxi j^j^ljyl ^J^ * lL5>^^ Jji *; }/ J 
 
 to save himself (themselves) by hard running and to run away 
 
 our wonderful movements 
 
 which are invented 
 
 and in this way 
 
 and 
 have been set forth. 
 
 ' Therefore the difficult roads of the black mountains leaving, and the 
 parallel waters that enter into the valley of the Danube leaving on one 
 side, in a few days the country of the Elector of Bavaria (on) our entering. 
 
 ' —jls'* a place of issue ;' erffo, a pass.' 
 
 ' Here the auxiliary participle cLi^Aji to the Arabic substantive 
 
 <__)liip-\ ' on one side,' is understood, and <uj coming immediately after 
 
 it (indeed forming almost one word with it — <iJ^cLi?-i), answers the 
 purpose of the auxiliary. [ 133.] 
 
 ' ljMt}\ is the Arabic plural of ;jjj\j a head.' This word is used 
 with the possessive affix, and the sign of the ablative case ^^ ; but it 
 is far-fetched, which is considered elegance of style. 
 
 * Lit., 'to flight a face to show,' ' by total flight.' 
 
 * Zit., ' our wonderful movements having been invented by us.' 
 
 'jAA-*Jj' 
 
 jI) . i_i-rclj. This phrase is of constant occurrence at the 
 
 beginning and end of Persian and Turkish letters : 
 jb abbreviation of JJili 'let it be.' 
 
 :Ij ' the cause ;' 
 
76 TURKISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 and the passes of the Tyrol mountains (our) avoiding, and at the same 
 time on the heads of our enemies some days' march (by) finding our- 
 selves, in this way the enemy's soldier barely time to lose having, and 
 by hard running himself to save, in this manner (thus) our well- 
 concerted extraordinary movements have been (are now) set forth.' 
 
 "We now subjoin the French original, from which this Turkish version 
 has been made, by a person evidently quite competent to the task, it 
 being as correct a translation as the language will permit ; and we would 
 defy any scholar to re-tiirn it into as elegant French (or English) without 
 having the original to guide him.* 
 
 Ce grand et vaste mouvement nous a porte en pen de jours en Bavarie, 
 nous a fait eviter les Montagues Noires, la ligne de rivieres paralelles qui 
 se jettent dans la vallee du Danube, 1' inconvenient attache a un systeme 
 d' operations qui auraient toujours en flanc les debouches du Tyrol et 
 enfin nous a place a plusieurs marches derriere I'eimemi qui n' a pas de 
 temps a perdre pour eviter sa perte entiere.' 
 
 * We do not mention this to discourage the student, but in order that 
 he may be aware of the perfect impossibility of representing civilized ideas 
 in so barbarous a language, which is devoid of aU terms, save those of 
 primitive use for the common necessaries of Ufe. 
 
APPENDIX. 77 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 COMPOTJITD TENSES OE A VEEB. 
 
 [ 245.] Tlie following are the compound tenses to whicli we have 
 referred, as being formed with, the present, past, and future participles, 
 and the verb (J^jl [76]. 
 
 Let us take [ I.] j^%^ reading,' [ II.] ij^^^ ' having read,' and 
 [III.] ^_j>-<oJ.\ about to read.' 
 
 AiJjl ijj.l 'l read,' or ' I become one who reads.' (This tense bears 
 also a future signification). 
 
 *i»Jjl ijijl I am reading,' or 'l become one who reads.' 
 
 *L> J.l j^t\ ' I was reading,' or ' I became one who reads.' 
 
 /»t)i4j.l i«Jjt ' I was reading,' or ' I was becoming one who reads.' 
 *jj.l i«jj«l I read,' or I became one who reads.' 
 ^Sj\ a jJjl jy>j\ ' I had read,' or ' I had become one who reads.' 
 
 »A^j\ jyi)\ 'I have read,' or 'I became one who reads.' (This 
 tense, according to Eedhouse, has a doubtful signification.) 'l suppose, 
 or fancy, I became one who reads.' 
 
 *JoJ (_/u-4j1 jyj\ 'I had read,' or 'become, etc. (with a dubitative 
 sense also.) 
 
 Jt>-4t\ j}ij\ ' I wUl read,' or ' become one who can read.' 
 
 * jujb>- "Sljl jyj\ ' 1 was about to read,' or ' become one who was in 
 the act of reading.' 
 
 •jljLtJjl jjjjl 'I must read,' or must become one who has the 
 quality of reading.' 
 
78 TUEKISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 ^AjI A^.l iJ.l 'I must have read,' or 'become one who is in the 
 act of reading.' 
 
 ^lij.l j)Jil ' That I may read,' or ' become one who has the quality 
 of reading.' 
 
 aAj! Aj\ jy_jl 'That I might read,' or 'become one who is in the act 
 of reading.' 
 
 f^j^'\ jj'j^ If I may read,' or become one who is in a state to read.' 
 
 «jjjl jyj> ' If I should read,' or ' become one who is capable of 
 reading.' 
 
 l» jjI iLJjI j^j\ ' If I had read,' or ' become one who is competent to 
 read.' 
 
 Jjl iy_jl ' Do thou read, or ' become one who can read.' 
 
 ^J^J\ ji>j^ ' To become one who can read.' 
 
 <ijt*J.l jyij\ ' To the becoming one who can read.' (Dative infinitive). 
 
 . . . I 'Reading,' or ' becoming one who can read.' 
 ^ -^ ^' -^ ' 'Having read,' or 'become one who can read.' 
 
 ■^ -^ ^-' '' \ About to read,' or become one who can read.' 
 
 (j^^ (J^^J^ J^i^ '^° become one who is about to be able to read.' 
 J_)l jjtXJjJ_jl jyj\ 'Before having become one who can read.' 
 iS^ ijAJJ jJji j_jJ;i After having become one who can read.' 
 
 . , , , Becoming a reader,' or one who can read.' 
 \. . , . , \ Becoming a reader,' or one who can read.' 
 
APPENDIX. 79 
 
 ij^f\ jjij\ 'Whilst becoming one who can read.' 
 
 ^Jt^j\ jyij\ 'The having become one who can read.' 
 ^i]j\ jyj\ ' Since becoming one who reads.' 
 <uJ}l j}>j^ ' The action of becoming one who can read.' 
 J Ji!_j\ jyj\ ' The action of having become one who can read.' 
 
 <J^ 4?^ J^J^ ''^^^ action of being about to become one who can read.' 
 
 [246.] — II. (jii^jjjl 'Having read.' 
 
 I* ijljl (jii^^jl ' I become one who has already read,' or ' become a 
 reader.' Also Aorist. 
 
 ^jy^^ (_^Mi-<jJijl 'I am becoming one who has already read,' or 
 ' become a reader.' 
 
 (« Jijljl (jV«J«l I became one who has already read,' or ' become a 
 reader.' 
 
 I* J;jJjl (ji^jijl ' I was becoming one who has already read,' or 
 become a reader.' 
 
 (♦jj.l (ji^Jj! 'I became one who has already read,' or 'become a 
 reader.' 
 
 t_jiX)J (♦jJjl [J^^i^ 'l had become one who has already read,' or 
 become a reader.' 
 
 *j1i^;1 iJu^Ji^ 'I have become one who has read,' or 'become a 
 reader.' 
 
 * JjJ (jjj^jl (ji-^yjl ' I had become one who has read,' or ' become 
 a reader.' 
 
 *«>-<i>!.l (jii^Jjl I shaU become one who has read,' or become a 
 reader; 
 
 AiA-Ap-aJjl j_^it^»i'j! 'I was about to become one who has read,' or 
 ' become a reader.' 
 
 >jl»L*l.l //L«jji.l ' I must become one who has already read,' or 
 ' become a reader.' 
 
80 TURKISH GKAMMAR. 
 
 aJjI }1-4)^ ij^jij^ ' I must have become one who has already read,' 
 or become a reader.' 
 
 *jlaj.l fjL^^^\ 'That I may become one who has ah'eady read/ or 
 ' become a reader.' 
 
 AiXilitljl (jiL/»»ijl ' That I might become one who has already read,' 
 or become a reader,' etc. etc. 
 
 [247.]— III. J^<Oy_,l 'About to read.' 
 A Jjl jj^ij_^j\ ' I become one who is about to read.' (This has a 
 future signification also.) 
 
 I* (jjjl fjs^ij^^^\ ' I am becoming one who is about to read.' 
 (^■^\ij\ (J^^.i^i^ ' -'- ^6come one who is about to read.' 
 aJjjJjI ^_^<U »jj\ ' I was becoming one who is about to read.' 
 *jjjl ^Js^ijyj\ 'I became one who is about to read.' 
 ^iXil A jJj^ (J^^.yj^ ' -'• ^^^ become one who is about to read.' 
 jjiytit\ (J^ij^^A ' I have become one who is about to read.' 
 A,Si\ iA^.l ^:5-£b jjijl ' I had become one who is about to read.' 
 j,xs^i!ij\ ^Jj>-i)j J.l ' I shall become one who is about to read.' 
 All these tenses can be used when required; but, of course, regard 
 must be had to the dictates of euphony, which might, perhaps, forbid the 
 use of the 3rd person of this last tense, as it would be , ^ <)Jjl ijj>- <U y ,1 
 but the rules of grammar would not prohibit its form. 
 
 rNDECLINABLE GERUND. 
 
 [ 248. J There are three kinds of gerunds, which are formed with the 
 three participles — ^present, past, and future; and the gerund ^^1 'being' 
 of the defective verb ^1. 
 
 ^xj\ j^^\ whilst reading.' 
 ^j\ fjL^^^ whilst having read.' 
 ^Cil ^J>-Ajyjl whilst about to read,' or 'to become a reader.' 
 
APPENDIX. 81 
 
 [ 249.] Another kind, of gerund, much in use, is formed with the 
 infinitive, which drops the j; or lLS^ and takes i or c^, with the addi- 
 tion of the preposition <iJ or <djl : as, ij^yj\ ' to read,' makes i\x^^j\ 
 by reading,' ' by reason of reading,' or, as we should say, ' by dint of 
 reading.' [ 132.] 
 
 [ 250.] The verbal noun, on taking the particle is>-, forms an 
 indeclinable gerund much in use : as, J JjJjl the having read,' (verbal 
 noun) makes <J^' J^^l as long as, whilst having read.' 
 
 [251.] There is another gerund which is also indeclinable : it has a 
 negative form but a positive signification. It is formed from the 3rd 
 person, present tense, of the indicative of a negative verb, and the particle 
 post-position Jj^^^J or H^^^^lI: as, ijy%^^^ 'not to read,' f^^^ 'l 
 do not read,' S^y*^i^ thou dost not read,' j^y «1 ' he does not read.' 
 Jj^U'^J^^'j^ 'before reading;' {J,it., 'before not having read,') J^_jJ_j1 
 sS^^^ 'after reading;' {lit., ' after not having read.') 
 
 [ 252.] This gerund is often written and pronounced |_j_,A^»jjl, in 
 order to shorten it, or perhaps for the sake of euphony ; and among the 
 Tartars the ^^J is sometimes made j^j J, which it is well to recollect, 
 as this form might puzzle the reader of old MSS. 
 
 DECLINABLE GERUNDS. 
 
 [ 253.] The verbal noun takes the post-position a^, and forms 
 another gerund, which is declinable : as, /^'^^^ the having read,' 
 (verbal noun) makes ^ji Jjjjl on having read,' i ji^»jy •^^^ ' on my 
 having read,' «iW-xJ Jyjjl on thy having read,' etc. (the i_f being 
 introduced for the sake of euphony.) 
 
 [ 254.] Also a declinable gerund is formed by the verbal noun taking 
 
 G 
 
83 
 
 TURKISH GKAMMAR. 
 
 tr^ (jii or Jjl ^.,J after it: as, ij^^siii^^ 'after having read,' 
 ifjiCnJ Ji^tjyJjjj! 'after my having read,' iJC^ aX^ Jjijl after thy 
 having read,' etc. Jjl jjJii'Jy_jl ' hefore having read,' jji\-iijL5yjl 
 Jj\ ' before my having read,' Jjl ^jjXi.|J^jl ' before thy having 
 read,' etc., vi'hich we have denominated indeterminates.' 
 
 Let us now take the auxiliary verb /^-wj^ in all the preceding forms — 
 indeclinable and declinable, — and attach to it the present, past, or future 
 participle of ^j^^^, and we shall form some idea of the possible varieties 
 of the changes of which a Turkish verb is susceptible. 
 
 nroECLINABLE. 
 AUXLLIABY. 
 
 PEESENT 
 PABTICrPI,E. 
 
 [248] j^J jjljl whilst being 
 
 ^SS\ (ji-*Ij\ whilst having been 
 ^ijl ^_p»-iiJjl whilst about to be 
 [249] iljL«Jjl by or on being 
 [250] <ts:''jJjl whilst having been 
 
 [2511 1 '^f u'^'*^J!^|^ef°''e ^ei'ig 
 i,iX^ (jjuljlj ^fter being 
 
 DECLINABLE. 
 
 [253 J ifAJJjJjl on having been 
 
 f Jjl j^AJs jjji"! before having been (8) 
 
 l^ijx^ Jj jJjl J after having been 
 
 Ajud their declinable derivations : — 
 i(Jix»*j jJjl my having been 
 Jjl ,jA-«joJjl before my having been (9) 
 Hji^ i^A^i^j] after my having been (10), 
 
 (2) 
 (3) 
 (4) 
 (5) 
 (6) 
 
 (7) 
 
 )jyy iJ^yy J^'^y' 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 P 
 
 a 
 
 CD 
 
 to 
 
 (D 
 
 4 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 t!' 
 
 t!' 
 
 P- 
 
 O 
 
 O 
 
 O 
 
 4 
 CD 
 
 i* 
 
 m' 
 
 §. 
 
 
 & 
 
 
 CD 
 
 o 
 
 
 P 
 
 t^ 
 
 
 fb 
 
 c-f- 
 
APPENDIX. 
 
 Now, if we tranBlate backwards, we shall arrive at the meaning 
 of each. 
 
 NTTMBEB 
 
 Present ^^\ j^^ j^^ whilst being a reader. 
 
 Past ^Sj\ jji^ (jiu/«jjj' whilst being one who is or 
 
 With 1 \ has been a reader. 
 
 Future iif^} Ji'y O^^.i'i^ whUst being one who is 
 
 about to read. 
 
 Present ^^\ (_^A^l jy_jl whilst having been a reader. 
 
 Past ^^\ \J^j\ (ji-<jji_jl whilst having been one who 
 
 has been a reader. 
 Future ^^\ (_/a/*!j^ j;^<tj»ijl whilst having been one who 
 
 is about to read. 
 
 Present aJjmJjI j^j\ by being a reader. 
 
 Past <UjL*!j! {JL^^j\ by being one who has been 
 
 4 ^ a reader. 
 
 Future (djtJjl jjs^ij^^j\ by being one who is about 
 
 to read. 
 
 ,, 10 Present yJCa) Jt^jtjoJj! ^y>■iJ(^^\ after my having been one 
 
 about to read. 
 
 And so on in the same manner with the other participles, ringing the 
 changes in an endless variety ! 
 
 2 G 
 
84 TURKISH GRAMMAE. 
 
 SUMMAEY. 
 
 We propose to lay before the student a Table of Gerunds, whereby be 
 may be enabled to make out any form of gerund he may meet with in 
 his reading, and which will be either in this table, or derived from some 
 one or other of these combinations. 
 
 GEEUNDS or A VEEB IN C<.—CS^jf 'TO SEE.' 
 
 t— >ji ji seeing or having seen. 
 lLjjSj^ whilst seeing (in an active sense). 
 
 . ^ / on seeing (whilst or when). 
 
 *)_ji seeing. 
 
 i^rS^jS having seen. 
 
 y^jy since seeing. 
 
 i^i^^ having seen. 
 
 The three Participles. 
 
 ^^J)f or ^JJ\ jj^ whUe seeing, 
 
 liTV.' U"^J^ whilst having seen. 
 
 ^^1 CS^Sj^ whilst about seeing. 
 
 * The Turks take each gerund in succession as fast and as often as 
 they can lug them in, right or wrong, no matter ! This first form is 
 scarcely ever used, whilst the second is in eternal use : with some 
 people it is brought in at every dozen words, (tsTJol, is^,^, ilsiL', 
 ArsTjIj, IsTS^, etc. 
 
GERUNDS. 85 
 
 The three Ferial Nouns. 
 }!^t^j^ on seeing. 
 x^^jS or asJi^jS on taving seen. 
 
 idis>-ij^ on being about to see. 
 Kinds of Ablative Infinitvoe. 
 
 ixS^j^ or AL^j^ with seeing. 
 ^JiC« ijS or i:iLy*jS in or by seeing. 
 
 Jljl ^'^y*jS \ ■)> I before seeing. ) lAt., before, or after not 
 
 •> %s } or ^■^^jf\ \ 
 
 SX^ i^^j-*jy ) ( ^ft®' seeing. ) having seen. 
 
 Prom the Infinitive Gerund iiC^tjS on seeing,' is derived: 
 
 iiifS^^jS on my seeing. 
 
 ls!iSS^j^ on thy seeing. 
 
 d!^,S^jS on his seeing. (?) 
 
 <ih^».C^^ on our seeing. 
 
 (iJjjX«iji on your seeing. 
 
 A)\\L^jS on their seeing. 
 
 From ihe Ablative Infinitive i^iL^j^ on seeing,' is derived: 
 
 Hii fS-^jy^ on my seeing. 
 
 iO SS^j^ on thy seeing. 
 
 i J ,S~*j^ on his seeing. (?) 
 
 Hii yt^^j^ on our seeing. 
 
 Hii 'SS^jS on your seeing. 
 
 ajji^j^ on their seeing. 
 
 From the Participial Gerund HJ \Jii^j^ on having se n,' is derived : 
 iJ J^jS on my having seen. 
 id SmJL^ ,^ on thy having seen. 
 
86 TURKISH GKAMMAE. 
 
 i( J fjL^j^ on his having seen. 
 
 iJ Cj>Ji^^jS on our having seen. 
 
 ifOjiL-)(jlu* ijS on your having seen. 
 
 idjfju^j^ on their having seen. 
 
 From the Participial Gerund SS^J,^ 'on having seen,' is derived : 
 
 Hii fSi^jS on my having seen. 
 
 Uti iXSjiij^ on thy having seen. 
 
 *L> ^tiijS on his having seen. (?) 
 
 !iO\aSjJjS on our having seen. 
 
 ISJpSMiijS on your having seen. 
 
 2(J As Jio on their having seen. 
 
 From the Future Gerund is,iSs^ ij^ ' on being about to see,' is derived : 
 
 i J*Cp- ^jT on my being about to see. 
 
 ifjXX:^ Sj^ on thy being about to see. 
 
 irAAi:>- iijT on his being about to see. (?) 
 
 Hiiy^S^ HjS on our being about to see. 
 
 idSS^ Hj^ on your being about to see. 
 
 s J,Jil=>- ^jT on their being about to see. 
 
 From, the Gerund sjLa or Jjl ^jd^dj^ 'before or after having seen,' 
 
 it^lLa or J_j' jjJ*i JjjS before or after my having seen. 
 
 iji^ or J_jl i^jXi^J^jS' before or after thy having seen. 
 
 tr^ """ Jj' [J'^i^i'^jy before or after his having seen. 
 
 ijLa or Jjl (jJj^iyi^ before or after our having seen. 
 
 ny^^ or Jji ^li^Stdjt^ before or after your having seen. 
 
 sy^^ or Jji ^JySjiijy before or after their having seen. 
 
GERUNDS. 87 
 
 GEEUNDS OP A VEEB IN J.— J-^iT 'TO TAEE.' 
 
 t_>jSt 
 
 taking. 
 
 jj"^' 
 
 whilst taking (in an active sense), 
 
 
 1 on taking. 
 
 "iJT 
 
 taking. 
 
 cr^T 
 
 having taken. 
 
 _j!a1T 
 
 since taking or having taken. 
 
 is^jJT 
 
 having taken. 
 
 The three Participles, 
 t^ji \ or rf^^j^ ' whilst taking. 
 
 ^^\ l/u-*!! whilst having taken. 
 i^\ (Js^ i^ \ whilst about to take. 
 
 The three Verbal Nouns. 
 isXi I on taking. 
 ij>i^! or *AijJl on having taken. 
 
 iJiib>-<0! on being about to take. 
 
 Kinds of Ablative Infinitive. 
 (Slil I whilst taking. 
 ijjJuJ! or irJJUjI in or by taking. 
 Jjl M'^j^^ I 1- ( before taking, j Lit., before, or after, not 
 
 !i\^ i^'^l ) ( ^fter taking. ) having taken 
 
 Vide note *, page 84. 
 
TURKISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 From the Infinitive Gerund lUjt*! 1 ' on taking,' is derived : 
 
 iL^jt^l I on my taking. 
 idxX»! t on thy taking. 
 iLjt^lt on his taking. (?) 
 ^iJujc*] 1 on our taking. 
 iSljJut^ I on your taking. 
 ^1 JjuJi or aJJjUJl on their taking. 
 
 From the Ablative Infinitive *AiUJ I on taking,' is derived : 
 
 iTiX^XiJl on my taking. 
 
 2f jXjL*]! on thy taking. 
 
 i(jLj*4Jt on his taking. (?) 
 »JJ-*jLJ I on our taking. 
 i^'S.Jt^ I on your taking. 
 
 « J,LL*! I on their taking. 
 
 From the Participial Gerund isO (_>u-*] I on having taken,' is derived : 
 
 Hii |»A/»J I on my having taken. 
 Hii iJ-uJL*l I on thy having taken. 
 
 Hii (jM^ I on his having taken, 
 i J (3^i^ I on our having taken. 
 aJjSjMji^ 1 on your having taken. 
 
 SjIA^ 1 on their having taken. 
 
 From the Participial Gerund ifjjjJT on having taken,' is derived: 
 
 )iSAk>S\ I on my having taken. 
 i'jXijjJl on thy having taken. 
 iiX-A) jJi on his having taken. (?) 
 
GERUNDS. 89 
 
 !iJ\Axj^>x\ on our having taken. 
 itJjiGo jJ 1 on your having taken. 
 jriMj jJ I on their having taken. 
 
 Fi-om the Futwe Oerund i.i (J^T'^ll ' on being about to take,' is derived : 
 
 i(J«-i.r»-<iJ 1 on my being about to take or receive.* 
 
 iMJts^i^\ on thy being about to take or receive. 
 
 !S\Jt^i]\ on his being about to take or receive. 
 
 ULiyMis^ dj 1 on our being about to take or receive. 
 
 iSiiy^^Jis^ <ij I on your being about to take or receive. 
 
 !Siil&s>-ii\ on their being about to take or receive. 
 
 From the Oerund sJSLs or Jjl ^jAi'jilT ' before or after having taken,' 
 
 is derived : 
 
 sJLa or Jjl j^JujijjJl before or after my having taken. 
 
 iX^ or Jjl ^jJCejJl before or after thy having taken. 
 
 iJSia or J_}\ ^jJjjtijJl before or after his having taken. 
 
 uSia or Jjl ijJj-^jJl before or after our having taken. 
 
 sJCs or Jjl j^JjiCjLijJl before or after your having taken. 
 
 ajSia or J_}l ijjpJjJl before or after their having taken. 
 
 * The future of (Jyti\ is used in the sense of 'having to receive' (a sum 
 of money): as_, jjjji j'j *«>-<y| >jj I have to receive so much;' 
 j\j J^x>-i]\ cXLj thou hast to receive,' etc.; therefore the gerund of 
 this form will imply the same thing. 
 
90 TURKISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 COMPOSITION. 
 
 We will suppose that the learner has gone oai'efully through the 
 present work, has endeavoured to retain all the rules laid down in 
 it, and can decline and conjugate every noun and verb that he may 
 meet ; that he has, further, learned the first chapter of St. John by heart, 
 and that, while covering with a piece of paper the interlinear translation 
 under the text of the ' Tales,' he can read the whole or any part of them 
 with ease. Still there is a great deal more for him to do before he can 
 arrive at facility of composition. We will in this chapter give him some 
 hints how best to attain his object. 
 
 "When we learn a dead language, we are generally satisfied at being 
 able merely to understand what has been written in it by classic authors : 
 hence it is that many students learn Latin and Greek so very imperfectly 
 that they very soon forget what little they acquired in their school-boy 
 days. The plan we propose to our pupils is, to ingraft the language 
 they have selected on their mind, so that it may become as familiar to 
 them as their mother-tongue. This is by no means difficult, and if the 
 following plan be pursued, we have no doubt that ninety-nine out of 
 every hundred will, sooner or later, attain the object of their wishes. 
 
 In the first place, they should lay a good foundation by acquiring 
 a great many words, and they cannot do better than gain a perfect 
 knowledge of the two thousand different words which are supposed to be 
 contained in St. John's Gospel. Such a number would alone suffice to 
 enable them to speak. While reading carefully the Gospel — which they 
 
COMPOSITION. 91 
 
 stould be able to do in tbe cotirae of twenty-six days — they onglit also 
 to master tbe verbs and tbe simple declensions of nouns, etc., getting up 
 tbe etymology of the Grrammar at the same time ; so that when they 
 have read St. John's Gospel once through, they may find no difficulty 
 in recognising the case and tense of every noun and verb. They should 
 then go through the ' Tales, ' and, while doing so, they might every day 
 read again one chapter of St. John, and analyze it with the assistance 
 of the Syntax, which we have made as comprehensive as we considered 
 necessary, without being too prolix. 
 
 By the time they have finished reading the ' Tales,' it is presiuned 
 that they will have succeeded in familiarizing their minds to the peculiar 
 construction of the language. They should now go through them again — 
 copying out the text — and endeavour to translate it into literal English — 
 more literal than the present translation — on separate pages, so as to be 
 able, when they have done, to re-translate them into Turkish. In 
 this interval — which will be the third month of their study — ^they must 
 contrive to learn at least thirty dialogues such as the author has already 
 published, and which they are supposed to have acquired in their primary 
 introduction to the Turkish language. 
 
 If the learner have followed strictly the injunctions here laid down, he 
 will find himself, at the end of his third month's study of this work, pretty 
 well advanced in the language. During all this time, in his leisure 
 hours, he should have endeavoured, first, to form Turkish phrases in 
 English words : then, by degrees, he will be able to put them into Turkish ; 
 and he should never go to sleep without learning some line or two by 
 heart, shoidd repeat the same on awaking, and during the day spout it to 
 himself, till it is perfectly familiar both to his mind and to his tongue. 
 
 Still he will find some difficulty : — ^when he endeavours to speak, 
 the words will not come fast enough, and he would also require some 
 one to speak to. Of course, if he were in Turkey, with the information 
 
92 TURKISH GRAMMAK 
 
 abeady acquired in the fourth, month, he would soon obtain a facility 
 of expressnig himself ; but we will suppose him to be stUl in Eng- 
 land, and anxious to make further progress. Let him not despair, but 
 recollect that he has, in three months, done more on this plan than the 
 generality of students do in seven years with Latin or Greek, which are 
 languages far less difficult than the Turkish, and on which so many 
 elementary works and books to assist the learner have been written. 
 
 We repeat that it is indispensably necessary to our plan, that pupils 
 should learn as much by heart as possible. Either with the use of their 
 reasoning faculties if they can ; or without — after the fashion of a parrot — 
 if they cannot; still learn ly heart they must. We believe that there is no 
 one who, having the wish, can fail to learn by heart, either by the first or 
 the second means ; if by the first, of course, it is best, but by the latter also 
 a great deal may be done. Let us see how. Most pupils find that they bave 
 got up the first line or two of St. John's Gospel much better than the 
 first part of the chapter, and this latter better than the last part; that they 
 can read the first chapter better than the second, and the second than the 
 third — ^why is this ? simply because they have gone through the latter 
 less frequently. Let them have the patience to go over the last part as 
 often as the fijst, and there is no reason why they should not learn it as 
 weU as the fitrst Hue of the first chapter ; it is for this facility that we 
 contend. Let them not despair at the necessity of frequent repetition, but 
 rather recollect that they are called upon to concentrate the practice of many 
 years into that of four months. During the early years of their childhood 
 they heard the words of their mother-tongue very often over and over 
 again before they learned them; let them repeat these strange words 
 mechanically and " spiritually" as often, and they also will become as 
 familiar. 
 
 "We will now suppose that they have reached the end of the fourth month 
 of their study of this Grammar, that they have a store of full three thousand 
 
COMPOSITION. 93 
 
 words at their fingers' ends, or rather, at the tip of their tongue, with 
 a competent recollection of the rules here laid down. "WHLe they will now 
 certainly find themselves in a state to speak, with a little hesitation 
 and occasional mistakes, they will still not be able to compose. For this 
 we give them two more months, during which time they should read 
 some selections of Turkish Hteratuie, such as the author proposes to publish 
 with notes and grammatical references, bearing the number of the rule 
 or tense in this grammar, which throw most light on the word, or subject 
 marked. Such selections should be carefully translated, and retranslated, 
 both ways. 
 
 We have now conducted the pupU through five months of his career, 
 and brought him to the sixth, wherein we hope he wiU acquire sufficient 
 knowledge to enable him to compose, and at which stage he will certainly 
 possess more real acquaintance and familiarity with the language, both 
 practically and grammatically, than is generally obtained on the old 
 system in as many years. 
 
 We recommend this system to the serious attention of all teachers 
 and students ; convinced as we are that the acquirement of any language 
 is a mechanical operation, which requires not so much an effort of memory 
 as a simple desire to leaxn, and much perseverance. Of course, some with a 
 good use of their mental faculties will learn faster than others ; but all 
 will reach the goal of their ambition, if they wUl only take care not to 
 despair in the first few months of their studies. 
 
 Those who expect to leam a language by merely reading an hour or 
 two a day, and then turn their attention to something else — either business 
 or pleasure — should not undertake it, as they are sure to fail. But all 
 who wOl set their minds upon it, wiU think of nothing else, and continually 
 repeat to themselves what they are learning, must inevitably succeed ; 
 and when we think that, instead of wasting our time in the trifling 
 insipidities of the daily course of an artificial state of life, we can in so 
 
94 TURKISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 short a time, and at suoli little cost, acquire a new language every year, 
 and that too so perfectly, that it will he as impossihle to forget as our 
 mother-tongue, it is astonishing, that, in the days of universal communi- 
 cation hetween men of all nations, there should not he among us a greater 
 desire to acquire languages, that thus we may he enahled to learn what 
 others may have to impart of their experience, not hy means of a 
 translation, hut in an idiom which has become as agreeahle and 
 familiar as the one to which we were brought up. If society were 
 only persuaded of the truth of what we now advance, and of the 
 possibility, nay certainty, of success — languages would he more generally 
 studied than they are : but the experience of common life has led them 
 to doubt the possibility of such a result — they imagine that languages 
 must be difficult, because thousands fail in acquiring Latin or Greek, and 
 even Prench and Italian — while the fault is really in the system and not in 
 the matter to be learned. A lad is kept for years to the study of gramma/r 
 without having the matter or words wherewith to put the dry rules he 
 learns iato practice ; and, of course, they do not make any impression on 
 his mind : he is then dragged through ' Virgil,' and called upon to 
 make out the sense of a phrase with no assistance but his dictionary; he 
 thus loses another two or three years, during which time he has only 
 read one book, while the same time would have sufficed him to have gone 
 through two or three hundred books of a similar size had he had 
 translations to carry him through as fast as he could read them. "We ask 
 — ^Would he not — on our system — have had one himdred times more 
 experience in the phraseology of the language and in its construction, 
 and learned more words by reading two or three hundred volumes, than 
 by wading darkly through the one, the unexplained difficulties of which 
 have almost sickened him with a language he might otherwise have been 
 led to love and admire ? Grammar is, indeed, useful, nay indispensahle, 
 to the perfect acquirement of a language — but the rules of grammar can 
 
COMPOSITION. 95 
 
 be of little or no use to one who has not a capital of words and pliraBes 
 wherewith, to exercise them. 
 
 "When once the student is master of, say three thousand words, and has 
 made the construction of a language and its modes of expression a part of his 
 mental constitution (if we may be allowed to go so far for the force of our 
 argument), it is easy to bring those rules into play which he may have 
 been getting up daily ; and he will find the use of the dictionary, which 
 before was a mere impediment and trouble, by no means irksome to him. 
 
 Let us now see if we can lay down some rules or outlines of exercises, 
 whereby the student may lead his own mind into the current of ideas 
 requisite ' to flow through the meadow of his conceptions,' in order to 
 express himself, not in his mother-tongue, but in his newly-acquired 
 language. 
 
 He must first divest himself of aU original and preconceived notions of 
 construction, and assume the one he has been studying and engrafting on 
 his mind. He must try to thinh in the language of his adoption. This 
 he will not be able to do at the outset. He must not therefore attempt to 
 translate the phrase mentally with English words; but must rather 
 endeavour to employ the towrnure of the language ia which he is about to 
 compose. Let us, for instance, suppose that he wishes to say — ' Come 
 to-morrow morning, when I have breakfasted.' Recollecting the necessity 
 of putting the verb at the end, and the dative case first ; bearing in mind 
 that he should present to the attention of his hearer what is most 
 important first, and adopting the system of reversing the English phrase, 
 he would form the following representation of this idea, which he could 
 easily — with his knowledge of words, declensions, and conjugations — 
 — ^put into Turkish, — 'Thou to me to-morrow after my having eaten, 
 early in the morning, near me come.' 
 
 san ha-nd yd-rin ye-melc yi-di-gim-dan-so-'H.-ra er-hen ya-nim-da gel. 
 
96 TURKISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 Would it not be more satisfactory — nay, wotild it not sound more poetic 
 to have tlius expressed himself, than to have said — 
 
 ffel Id-nd yd-rin er-lcen wakl-la len yi-melc ye-dim ! 
 Of course : because more in consonance with a style he has by 
 this time learnt, not only to lite, but to look upon as the most 
 natural for the expression of his ideas in the Turkish language. Let 
 us proceed with this dialogue : — ' I shall be most happy to do so, if not 
 otherwise engaged.' ' Upon my head, if of me other my business 
 there should not be, without fail I will come.' This construction may 
 appear strange to a novice, but we are addressing only those who have 
 attained such a degree of proficiency as has accustomed them to see 
 nothing extraordinary in the above, and who will be able immediately 
 to turn it into such Turkish as will be found to run. quite smooth. Let 
 us see how it sounds — 
 
 ha-shim us-til-nah i-ger le-nim lasJi-lca ishim ol-maz-issa mut-lak ge-le-rim. 
 Let the student take the Tales of the Khoja, put them into good fluent 
 English, and then, shutting up the book, let him first write an English 
 representation of the ideas in Turkish phraseology, and then let binn put 
 the same into Turkish, and compare it with the original. He will soon 
 fall into our plan ; and, if he have been dUigent and attentive, we doubt 
 not that, with a little practice, he will be able to compose correctly in the 
 Turkish language at once, and will have acquired the great desideratum, 
 that of having learned to thinh in this language. 
 
97 
 
 PEONUNCIATION. 
 
 The author has endeavoured in the present work, as far as it was 
 possible, to represent ia italic characters the words of difficult pronunciation. 
 He does not, however, flatter himself that he has perfectly succeeded. The 
 Eoman character is akeady the representative of so many different sounds 
 in each of the European languages, that one can scarcely hope ever to 
 bring the minds of all persons to appreciate any peculiar adaptation of 
 the sounds of letters which may be selected to form a system for writing 
 the Eastern languages. This is a vexata quaistio with Orientalists, and one 
 which will never be brought to any final decision. Some adopt the 
 plan of representing each Turkish letter by a corresponding one from the 
 European alphabet, and thus render it impossible to pronounce it correctly; 
 because, for instance, the letter \ has four or more sounds, a, a, i, o, 
 and &,' and sometimes, moreover, it is mute. Others endeavour to represent 
 each word as it is sounded ; but the powers of the organ of hearing are 
 certainly comparative ' in each individual, and the conception each 
 person has of the value of the Eoman letter is certainly different, not 
 only in different nations of Europe, but even in those professing to speak 
 one and the same language, whose pronunciation, notwithstanding, more or 
 less differs, as in the Scotch, Irish, etc. Indeed, among the inhabitants 
 of the same city, a person with a good ear wiU discover an invariable 
 variety of sentiment,' or appreciation of a letter,' in each individual 
 he meets. The consequence of aU this is, that each will spell differently 
 when not tied down by some stringent rule which forbids his transgressing 
 the laws of custom. 
 
 Thus, then, when many persons form each a different idea of the 
 value of a letter it is impossible to get them all to agree in pronouncing 
 the word presented to them in the same way. All that can be done 
 
98 
 
 TUEKISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 is to lay down a system as nearly correct as the ear of the composer 
 can imagine, and require the learner to conform thereto. The author 
 cannot hope to satisfy everybody. One will say, why did you not place 
 au to represent the alif in ^jl ani, — another will maintaia that it is 
 better to write it with an o, ijl ord: both are wrong and both are 
 right. They are wrong, because, in the first case, it is inconvenient to 
 have double vowels ; in the second, because the sound is nearer o than au. 
 They are both right, because, in the first case, the a and « would repre- 
 sent the \ and the ( -^ ) ; in the second case, because the letter o cannot 
 represent an i alif. Thus we may perceive it is a hopeless case to suit the 
 Eoman characters (with their present powers) to the conception of every one. 
 As a proof of the impossibility of getting any two persons to write 
 alike the Turkish sounds of words with Eoman characters, the author 
 requested two of his pupils to note down from his dictation the following 
 dialogues, which he had himself previously written, not upon the system 
 he has followed in this work, but from his conception of the value of 
 European letters as best adapted to the expression of Turkish words. 
 The following is the result : — ' 
 
 ORTHOGEAPHY 
 
 OF THI! ArTHOE. 
 
 hir ilci iabah Tiia- 
 ghaz dwit %lah 
 halam giiettur. 
 
 lir maJd&h yazaim. 
 
 liiyur effendim. 
 
 ne hu ? murahlcab 
 yoTc. 
 
 lana neh ? 
 
 nichun lajcmadin. 
 
 hen Jcatib ieyilim. 
 
 OF FIEST PUPIL, 
 
 lir ilci tabik Ica- 
 ghaz dayvit illdh 
 hjialum goetur. 
 
 lir myhtitl yazain. 
 
 lu yUr effendim. 
 
 naylu muralclcal 
 yolcedir. 
 
 lananL 
 
 nieJtun lauhnadin. 
 
 hen hatel day- 
 yellim. 
 
 OP SECOND PUPIL. 
 
 hir ilci talak lcara% 
 divit ilia halum 
 getteur. 
 
 lir malctu yazyim. 
 
 lour effendim. 
 
 ney lou mouralcah 
 yolcdir. 
 
 hanane. 
 
 niehun lahnadin. 
 
 len Icartih dayelim 
 
 THE TUEEISH TEXT. 
 
 
 
 
 
PKONUNCIATION. 
 
 99 
 
 OETHOGEAPHY 
 
 OP THE AUTHOR, 
 
 ishim deyil der. 
 hash laldrdi etniah. 
 
 khalt etmah. 
 suss, hoh-y6mih. 
 chiapuh charsln- 
 
 -yah guit. 
 murelckeh all guel. 
 dw. 
 ohok seui- 
 
 -lama. 
 hirmizi m'S.m nigeh 
 
 oldi. 
 hUTddah idi. 
 shirndd guewdum. 
 isMeh h&ldum. 
 mum yah. 
 yahtim. 
 lagiin aidah hatch- 
 
 dir. 
 hana sorarsini% ? 
 neh helirim. 
 nichUn san ishelc- 
 
 -misin ? 
 lir shei lilmazsin ? 
 lilmam. 
 
 guit ha maMuh 
 postaya gueu-tur. 
 chapHk guel. 
 
 OF PrilBT PUPIL. 
 
 day yilder. 
 laker di etma. 
 
 Tcault etma. 
 suce loJci yemma. 
 choppuh cliershiya 
 
 gbeth 
 muraJceh olgel. 
 iazar erahdur. 
 haiday chock su 
 
 elerma. 
 khermazee moom 
 
 lurada idi. 
 
 shimdi gurdiim. 
 
 ishti bul dum. 
 
 moom yoch 
 
 yockfm. 
 
 lu gyun aida 
 
 kotohder. 
 hand surarsiniz. 
 ni hilerim. 
 nichun san yshek- 
 
 misin. 
 hir shay bilmasin. 
 helmam. 
 geet hu mektuh 
 
 postaya goetur. 
 cMppuk guel. 
 
 OP BECOND PUPIL. 
 
 ishim deyilder. 
 hosh lakade etma- 
 
 khalt etma. 
 sus hokeyhma. 
 
 gyte. 
 mourakil ol guel. 
 hazar irakdir. 
 hiday chock suil- 
 
 lema. 
 kurmasemum nij'a- 
 
 oegi. 
 hourada idi. 
 shimdi gourium. 
 ishter buldum. 
 
 yoktim. 
 hoogun 
 katchda. 
 
 nehilerim. 
 
 nitchun san eyshk- 
 mesin. 
 
 hir she hilmasin. 
 
 hilmam. 
 
 guit humetuh post- 
 aya geuteur. 
 
 shapeuk geld. 
 
 THE TUEKI5H TEXT. 
 
 , '.•«->- ^ Jo Lib 
 
 SS.J\ 
 
 u'' 
 
 i^. 
 
 ljks»-lj 
 
 J J " J>t 
 
 >v V 
 
100 TUEKISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 In pronouncing the Turkish, care should be taken to give each letter 
 its full value (a knowledge of the word, and some habit, will enable the 
 speaker to supply the vowel-points) ; but each letter must be well pro- 
 nounced, and each syllable in succession, without bearing upon one more 
 than another. The English learner, in particular, should bear constantly 
 in mind that there is no accent in Turkish. Of course the double letters, 
 and particularly the Sj,* will cause the weight of the preceding and 
 following syllable to fall on them, and a kind of accent will be the result ; 
 but the learner must endeavour to divest himself of his English accentua- 
 tion as much as possible : we say, as much as possible, because Englishmen 
 — indeed, Britons in general — carry the peculiar clipping accents of their 
 language with them wherever they go, and in what language soever they 
 attempt to speak. 
 
 Although the orthography of the Turkish is not yet settled, the 
 vowel-points are by no means left without the bounds of certain esta- 
 blished rules consequent on the origin of the word, — but these rules 
 have not been laid down ; and to follow them up to their source, in the 
 languages from which the words are borrowed, would involve the 
 necessity of studying Arabic and Persian etymology. It would require a 
 separate treatise, and much time, to enter into this subject, so as to lay 
 down any rules that could be of material advantage to the learner. We 
 consider that the best thing he can do is to learn by heart a great many 
 pieces of poetry or prose, dialogues, etc., whereby he wiU accustom his 
 ear to the word, and he will then be laying up a stock of observations 
 far more useful to him than any rules, which can never be definite — 
 because they cannot stand without exceptions. The only letters and 
 vowel-points that appear to us to have been left occasionally to the 
 choice of the speaker are j and ^, damma (') and Icesra ('): — for these 
 
 * ^J.ytJSj\ dt-dir-7nak, to cause to be thrown ;' CS^j^j\ ei-tir-mek, 
 ' to cause to be done,' etc. 
 
PRONUNCIATION. 101 
 
 we have given the only rule we could lay down (page 16), and the ear 
 of the speaker must do the rest to obey the calls of euphony. 
 
 Thus, we see, ^y^j:S let him take,' is pronounced ^?i-ifitr-w«. ITow, 
 it may he written either with the j, or the ( ' ) may take its place ; but 
 it is evident that the ,_? would be mal-d-propoa, except at the end, when 
 it may be used to soften the word after so many .'s : as, r^jtj^ for 
 jX^jy^ take ye.' 
 
 Then, again, JSi^Uj\j\^\ may be written with a i_^, or hsra ('); 
 but it is evident that j here would be out of place, because a soft word 
 cannot require to be made hard : on the contrary, it is still more 
 
 softened by <Uuj1, and made into i-C-jI Ujlijl jS I, the two (jw's being 
 
 blended into one on the introduction of 'Uj i into the word. Vide note 
 to Tale 44. 
 
 "We further recommend the pupil to pay attention to the pronunciation 
 of words as noted in the Vocabulary : he will find that . sometimes 
 stands for w and sometimes for v. For this his observation will soon point 
 out two rules : when . is followed by a vowel it is sounded like a v, 
 otherwise it remains w; if it is a Turkish word it is generally a v, if an 
 Arabic a w. But the exceptions to these rules are of frequent occurrence 
 by reason of the exigencies of euphony, and the student had better leani 
 each word as he sees it written in the Vocabulary. Again in regard to 
 the vowel-points : some are e or i, just as the speaker pleases ; but the 
 rule (if there be a rule) would be that Arabic words would use the e, and 
 Turkish words the i : as, i_.^i--L5 saheb, Arabic. rjSj^ cMrhin 
 Turkish. But for this there is no better direction than the ear and 
 (as we have already said) the study of the words as they are laid down 
 in the Vocabulary, taking it for granted that the author has given the 
 best sound to each word which his personal experience of twenty years 
 amongst the Turks has enabled him to form. 
 
this was the advantage (arising) from his reading the- a religious man 
 
 -Koran (after the system of) Eadurf 
 abundant mercy May God have mercy on him 
 
 ■ o p p o t^ 
 
 or 7i: as, ^i ^ uTi) '^-■^^ f^<>' ^ Lf^"*" '^ntilthe clear evidence 
 had come unto them, an apostle from God.' Some would pronounce the 
 third word here la-yi-ndh, others ha-yl-na-tH,, without stopping, and run 
 it into the next word, la-yi-na-tH-ra-sH-lun, etc. Vide Koran, chap, xoviii. 
 
 Again, lower down in the same chapter, we have liis^ j^ jJ\ ^ ^-.^aLs." 
 
 exhibiting unto him the pure religion, and being orthodox,' which 
 the followers of one of the learned men would enunciate hii-na-fd- d, and 
 others hil-na-fa- an, and so on throughout the Koran in many other little 
 peculiarities, of which the above will serve as a sample. Mr. Bleeck, of 
 the British Museum, formerly one of the author's pupils, translated a 
 tale entitled ' The Cadi and the Eobber,' which appeared last year in 
 'Ainsworth's New Monthly Magazdne,' in which the other six names 
 of the leading men are given as follows : — lill^j^^i, -is^l, jjlj, 
 
 ' L_.^^..La ^.z-^Ji 'a man possessed of miraculous faculties.' It is 
 imagined that by dint of reading the Koran one may acquire super-human 
 powers : such, for instance, as that of raising the dead. The second 
 chapter of the Koran is considered so divine, that if it could only be read 
 without the smallest error or mistake, it would not fail to effect this miracle. 
 "We see, on the whole, that Nasr-il-deen Khoja is a much more 
 respectable person, in spite of his Little oddities and eccentricities, than his 
 European counterpart, the wretched Eulen Spiegel.' 
 
if they should say we will read lessons Eadiiri ' on their requesting 
 if they should- the end of the Koran he would make them read 
 that say some people he would not make them read it -ask (to read) 
 he became a knower of futurity, and- by reading in the Kaduri way 
 
 ' i)y;l. The indicative mood, present tense, 1st person plural of 
 J^y.l, used for the future, as is very common. 
 
 ^ j_^)iL^_l jjjjj^l casual of ^»^_jl. Here we have the present participle 
 (which, by the bye, if alone, would have been m JjJ:_5', but the secondj is 
 omitted, w& note 2, page c'); and the second perfect of the verb ^\\, 
 forming a compound tense. Vide [245]. 
 
 The short chapters which are at the end of the Koran are usually 
 first taught to children, as they serve to be introduced in the part of 
 their prayers where they are required to recite a small portion of the 
 book. It seems, therefore, that Nasr-U-deen Khoja was too proud to 
 undertake the office of teaching that which the common mullas could 
 impart to their pupils. 
 
 ^ Kaduri is one of the seven various recognized ways of reading and 
 interpreting the Koran. By altering the punctuation, diiferences of the 
 hiatus have arisen in the reading of this book, which have been proposed 
 by seven learned men, who have each had their followers, and the system 
 of each has taken the name of its founder. Each of these different 
 ways of enunciating the Koran is acknowledged to be orthodox by 
 the other six followers of the learned mullas, but they all of 
 course prefer their own. By hiatus is meant a certain pause caused 
 by the tmiween or the i, which latter may either be pronounced t 
 
on an apricot-tree in the garden of some one one day The Ehoja 
 Ehoja ' comes its proprietor -whilst eating the apricots mounts 
 my soul ! ' says the Khoja having said there what are you doing 
 the gardener I sing in the apricot- tree I am a hulbul do you not see 
 to trill (like a bird) the Khoja ' let me see (hear you) sing' says 
 the Khoja of song is this ? what kind ' laughing the man begins 
 
 he said trills thus much the foreign bulbul ' replies 
 
 J»L« HSytXCjii dj>-\j:i~ (*_p-r^ jy^J^ '~--^.bj [^M 
 
 excelling in every knowledge Khoja the late related It is 
 
 a lesson from him to the students but was perfect and in every science 
 
 ^ Vide note 7, page 27. 
 
 lU.I the imperative of CS^j\ ■kt-meJc ' to sing ' (applied to birds). 
 
 ' i5-<>-*J J'. The Arabic substantive t,J3 ' song,' has the interrogative 
 particle ^^ added to it ; lit., such trilling can (it) be ? ' 
 
 Jja ^^^^ ^Ajami iuliul. Here now we have ^^Ls^ used in 
 its primary signification, strange,' foreign.' 
 
 * i._-Jlt is the singular, ^..JJs the plural, and iJils the Turkish dative 
 plural, ' seekers-after-knowledge,' hence, students. 
 
* (./l^.J JiJ *iJ J_jJ ^/IS! ji^J LS*°^ lA^.'^ J' 
 
 he said ' it is not mine no Ho ! ' says the Cadi he said ' take 
 
 as (he was)- an incompetent harber the Khoja One day 
 
 hia head that he struck at awry (stroke of the) razor -shaving (him) 
 
 (kept) attaching cotton place that he cut (at) every cutting 
 
 (on) to the half- you fellow Oh ! ' to the barber the Ehoja he was 
 
 the (other) half I also you have sown cotton -of my head 
 
 * i^;J ^\ J^ 
 
 he said let me sow flax 
 
 ' The Turks give the terms cAjami,' Persian, to any one who may be 
 strange, hence, apparently to them, ignorant and awkward. This arises 
 from giving way to first impressions. Strangers may seem curious to us, 
 when, on better acquaintance, we find them rational beings like ourselves. 
 This is particularly the case in this instance. The Persians are superior 
 to the Turks in many respects; but as they are not much seen in Turkey, 
 their demeanour and accoutrements look strange,' hence the word 
 jAjami,' to which afterwards was added the signification of 'curious,' 
 awkward,' ' ignorant,' stupid,' , 
 
 jjo Juj*i past verbal noun of CS-amS with the possessive affix i_s, 
 at every place of its having been cut.' 
 
 (jijI^AAj b. Here, again, we see the force of this compound 
 tense [245]. 
 
 ^'•^V-- ' ^° ^''^ haM' [35], the j and ^^ being interchangeable. 
 It may also be written <),i^ iL, 
 
he sees coming at that place had gone out to promenade day that 
 the Khoja at once lies and senseless drunk (the) Cadi that 
 the ferejeh the Khoja he went away taking his ferejeh 
 
 rising the Cadi on the other side (hereupon) wearing on his hack 
 he commands to (his) officers coming (is) not the ferejeh that sees 
 
 hring to me taking you find it on whom see ye my ferejeh 
 they bring to the Cadi taking seeing upon the Khoja they also 
 
 ferejeh ? that hast thou found where Khoja ' says the Cadi 
 aU of a sudden I had gone out to the promenade ' replies the Khoja 
 
 6^^ i^'^jl jyV. <-r'jij^ i-;:-^ -s^r" J. f*'-^/ 
 
 uncovered (open) his back lies being drunk Softa a I saw 
 it should be yours if (and) went (away) I took the ferejeh and I 
 
 ' Here the gerund denoting a pause is particularly useful. 
 ^ Pronounced is-nmr-lar, from ^JLa^jA^x to order.' 
 
 note 2, page T" . Short for iJi-jcj. Vide [40], 
 
here a little while you he says to these (them) he leads them 
 entering within (his house) saying that I may enter I wait 
 the wife dismiss these men now 
 
 J^J 
 
 'rfj^'^ 
 
 jJjI 
 
 go 
 
 wife ' 
 
 he says 
 
 ^.^ 
 
 J^!} 
 
 ^y^ 
 
 :hoja' 
 
 says 
 
 going out 
 
 say the men is not come (home) the Khoja ' 
 
 t_fjJii jAji '"-^? (Ss>-\y^ jjjy^ fj^ y 
 
 came together with us the Khoja what kind of word is this ?' 
 
 saying he is come ' the Softas he is not come ' the wife 
 
 was listening from above the Khoja but they make much dispute 
 
 fellows oh you' putting forth from the window his head 
 
 from oneof them are two the doors perhaps why do you (thus) dispute 
 
 he said he may be gone going out 
 
 t''«^^y ^.^ij^ J^i^ ^^,^ ^/^ [1^] 
 
 Cadi a debauched (of the city) of Sur-Hissar One day 
 also the Khoja he lay being drunk in the garden one day there was 
 
 Viie note 2, page X ' . 
 Imperative of ^J^jl*? sav-mah. 
 
upon this the Khoja come down replies the poor man he says 
 he said charity I want on saying what dost thou want' descends 
 
 mounting up stairs the poor man come up stairs replies the Khoja 
 why while below Effendi ' he says may God give you ' 
 
 while I was upstairs ' the Khoja having said you did not speak 
 he said didst call me down why to me thou 
 to these met of Softas a troop Khoja One day 
 
 ^0 the door of the house {expletive) we will go to my house please come 
 
 Pronounced d-sha-gha. Vide note page 16. 
 
 ^ ij; :dll. Although much pestered by mendicants, the Turks do not 
 send them away gruffly, but merely say Allah ve-ra,' and the pauper 
 passes on, knowing that he would lose his time by further importunities. 
 
 ^ This is not j^Juxl-il, but short for sajJcAIjI ^^Lil, 'being below,' 
 otlit., 'having been below' [253]. Here we have a good example of 
 the use of the expletive Uls, which, in conjunction with a verbal noun, 
 forms an expressive and useful gerund. 
 
 ' "We see that CS^ '•::~^j requires a dative case iji::^^^. Vide 
 note 1, page \r. 
 
 vJTj-j. Vide note *, page 56. ' Favour me with your presence.' 
 
and anything brought- is there any rice is there any butter in the house 
 
 lady ! ' having said you ast (for) soup that is there -by you 
 
 to the Effendis at once taking saying give me soup-bowl that 
 butter in our house if let it be no shame Effendis ! ' coming 
 
 1 would- soup to you with this bowl there had been (and) rice 
 
 he said -have brought out (to you) 
 (at) the door whUst in his house Effendi Nasr-il-deen One day 
 what dost thou want ? ' from above the Khoja knocks a mad" 
 
 this form ; but the Khoja is not particular when speaking to his wife, 
 and blends the two tenses into one, forming an expressive but un- 
 grammatical compound. This is not unfrequent, particularly amono- the 
 illiterate Turcomans, who, speaking among themselves, may wish to give 
 force to their expressions. 
 
 jXj,_j::^the past participle lL^^j^^ in the possessive affix of the 
 2nd person gu-tiir-di-gin, 'thy having brought,' the ^ in di being 
 introduced for the sake of euphony. 
 
 ^ ^^j' ^^°''* ^°^ s/'V.^''^J^ ; mufili in use. 2nd optative [78]. 
 Or ^sJis^!>J'A^. Fide 2nd future [76] ' I was about to bring 
 out (to you).' 
 
 9 2 
 
in the darkness are you become mad the Khoja that I may light it 
 he said should I know how its being whole I 
 some (seekers- coming to his house the Ehoja One day 
 this evening Effendis ! ' he says he met -of knowledge) students 
 wewilldrink(eat) atmy house baba-soup let us go to us (my house) 
 
 falling (following) after the Khoja having said ' very well' the students 
 
 *ii»o iLjl '-r-'ji'^ ^-Cy^ ^J^ ^i^ 
 
 to his (upper) room saying Pray be seated ' they come to the house 
 
 I have brought some guests wife ! ' says enters within he mounts 
 
 Effendi ' the wife that I may give (them) a bowl of soup 
 
 -^li pL) 'how should I in the dark know what is whole ly me' — 
 only an excuse in order not to have the trouble of getting up for it. 
 ./♦jLi means 'in my possession,' as above. — 2(A;Jb does not mean 'by 
 you' exactly, but ' in your keeping.' 
 
 ^ cl-^-)K is a Persian adverb signifying 'straight,' hence cL^.^li'i.r-wjlj 
 ' to meet,' CS-^jf^ c:.-u<:[^ ' to lead straight,' i.e., to succeed.' 
 
 3 K 
 
 Vide note 2, page r ' . 
 Pronounced o-dd-si-ndh. 
 * This should properly be jJ^J imperative let us give,' or *J,*;Jj 
 ' that I may give,' 1st optative [67]. There is no tense that can give 
 
K Lfi^\ ^t>3L^ i^\y^ cJulio) 
 
 j-^. i- ^"V 
 
 does not suffice the water making ablution Khoja One day 
 they say he stands on one leg like a goose when(he)lDegantopray 
 this' the Khoja what are you doing' Effendi Khoja that 
 
 he said ' has not (had) its purification leg of mine 
 becomes (his) guest coming a man to the Khoja One day 
 the light after a little while lie down (to sleep) these (two) (by) night 
 
 the light Efi'endi Khoja says the guest is extinguished 
 
 1 yS j^y^ I* y* ^ ^^ ^J Q Us t^ Ju amj 
 
 briag (if) you have any whole candle has been extinguished 
 
 name of Ayfib, ' Jacob,' into ip,' a word of one syllable, meaning a cord 
 to hang him by.' This was intended to censure the clipping of words 
 so common among the Tartar as well as in the Hindo-Germanic races, and 
 to which we have already adverted ; as Dr. Johnson is reported to have 
 reprobated the pronunciation of the word wiud,' as now commonly 
 pronounced, by saying, I have a mmd to find why you call it wind.' 
 
 ^j:-*L4-ijlj 'to begin.' jjJiLjIj the past participle taking the posses- 
 sive affix becomes ijJWjJ-ilj his having begun,' changing the ^ to c, 
 on coming in contact with a liquid letter. 
 
 CS-*^^^ su-yun-meJc has an active form and a passive signification. 
 ^Jjyi or ^S^^ij^ silndi or su-yind'i, (the light) is gone out,' as we 
 should say. 
 
 9 
 
remaining (coming) late to lesson Hamad our ' what is it 
 
 he perspired (and) by his running [expletive) that I may reach (in time) 
 
 he said ' dropped (some drops) upon me 
 to you Mosolmen mounting to the pulpit Khoja One day 
 beware you should have children if there is an advice from me 
 Khoja they said do not name (put) Ayub their name 
 
 Ip (a cord) making use (of the name) the people because ' Why ? 
 
 he said ' it would become 
 
 ^ Lli^-^sjXj ' to run,' past participle CJSJ^f^ [71], declined with the 
 post-position ^ of the 3rd person. ^^J^ 'his having run,' in the 
 ablative case ; ^^^jj^ ' by his having run ;' and the ^ in 
 ...jCiili jjX»; is introduced to facilitate the pronunciation of this jaw- 
 breaking word, sy-gret-ii-gin-dan. 
 
 ^ In the accusative singular, instead of accusative plurali — ■ j.j I,*-;', 
 because he is speaking collectively. 
 
 ' Vide note 2, page f " . 
 
 ^ iJJjJol (JUjti-;!. Note what we have already said, that this gerund 
 implies action, as well as ' whilst' — is-te-mal i-de^^rek, whilst preceding 
 on or continuing.' In their use of the name, as they are speaking, they 
 would clip the first letter of the second syllable, and convert the child's 
 
the Khoja they separate their horses laughing everyone he replies 
 
 it is his own horse that knows then finding his horse seeing 
 
 on the horse placing to the stirrup his right foot quickly 
 
 Oh ' they say comes to the horse's croup his face mounting 
 
 I ' the Khoja you mount backwards the horse why Khoja 
 
 * (_^ui^J lAJiilt.^ Cl-M ii~^^ (»iSJ iyj*'-^ 
 
 he said is left handed the horse but wrong am not 
 
 was an Abyssinian one from his disciples of the Khoja 
 
 upon the Khoja onfe day they called (him) Hamad and his name 
 
 this EfFendi Khoja that they asked (him) being thrown ink 
 
 Pronounced d-'i-rir-ler, from t.Lx*!jl a'i-ril-mek ' to separate ' or 
 divide.' 
 
 ^J»!1l»j' lit., quickly from hand.' This latter word is not down in 
 the list of expletives, as it. is a word that, by itself, 1ms meaning ; but it is 
 here used quite expletively. 
 
 It may be well to observe the effect that (ji.^jl has, when combined 
 with the present participle : (ji^J J J ' he imei to say,' or ' was in the habit 
 of saying;' ^JLjJ\ j^ ' he used to come,' ^JL^\ jj^ ' he used to see,' 
 etc. Vide [245]. 
 
 Pronounced mu-rak-kah du-ki-lup. 
 
the Ehoja these (people) a little later goes out (and) goes away 
 
 c_jyt^ terjljl '-r'i^} 1^^ )y*^i^. ''''^j5^1 
 
 coming after him dispersing about they cannot find seek 
 
 they say are you going where come Khoja Oh ! ' they find him 
 
 has eaten whoever the food of the marriage to-day the Khoja 
 
 he said should enter he that it is right 
 
 with a- going "to travel the Khoja One day 
 
 it becoming- tying up his horses put up (at) in a place -caravan 
 
 cannot find his horse from among the horses the Khoja -morning 
 
 in his hand {expletive) all at once which of them it is and knows not 
 
 ' I am determined ' ' do not fire ' the men taking the bow (and) arrow 
 
 ' Why should I, who have not partaken of the feast, sit with you ; 
 let him who has eaten of it enter into the house.' Ge-reh-der, ' it is 
 necessary,' an impersonal verb. Vide Vocabulary. 
 
 I-«J I or Aaj\ dt-niah. K'ote the unestablished orthography here. 
 
 Verb compounded of the Arabic substantive c:-~iIe. extremity,' and 
 the auxiliary CS~^\. Here it is perverted to the use they require, and 
 signifies I am desperate, and determiped to kill some of these horses, so 
 let each take his own away.' 
 
he replied ' is water water's the hare's this ' the Khoja 
 
 finding a tortoise while ploughing Ehoja One day 
 
 to his girdle (middle) tying a string to its neck seizing (it) 
 
 do not call ' the Ehoja calling out but the tortoise he suspends 
 
 he said you (will) learn to plough you stupid 
 
 ^JU 'J.\ j^ aJjI i^\j^ ^,/^ [1 .J 
 
 the people had agreed (nolens volens) the Khoja One day 
 
 .bi:=-lj^ t=ra|-^]^liLi "■'i^_ L_:j,lf J-i->> jJvJ-^J^'^ 
 to the Khoja they begin to eat coming his neighbours to feast 
 
 1 .'jLi .Us iS^liki- JUwO ifJ i(Ai-; iji 
 
 getting angry the Khoja they do not say eat you also come ' 
 
 ' Pronounced ie'i-U-nah. Vide [35], 
 The composite verb is fj^>y\^\ dsd-ho-mah, to place hanging,' i.e., 
 to suspend.' 
 ' Pronounced u-ra-nur-sm, from iL>-^S\ u-ran-mek, the i.^.f being 
 softened down as much as possible. 
 
 ^ j^j\ (J^^'Jj^ ' JSTolens-Tolens,' 'willy-nilly,' lit., 'it will be, it 
 is,' which is sometimes better expressed J^jlj^ijl 'it will be, it cannot 
 be ;' whether lie lihed it or not, as we should say. 
 
 ' He invites the people to a feast unwillingly, and at their repeated 
 request. The verb jjjl, in its positive form, shows the conclusion of 
 the sentence. 
 
 The 2nd person imperative of l—n/*-; ' to cut.' 
 
he replies person I am the hare-hringer ' man that saying 
 
 some men after a few days receives him again the Khoja 
 to them (these fellows) the Khoja they ask (want) to be guests coming 
 neighbours- bringer's the hare ' they having said who arc you r ' 
 
 ^^j [2.3,22a,_£,^ ^\^^ ^j i^^^f ^J^ J^,J imy,. 
 
 also a set of men again a few days after they said -we are 
 
 having said who are you ? ' the Khoja to them also coming 
 
 they reply we are neighbours neighbours' bringer's the hare ' 
 
 ys 2fjL) {JtJ^ J '•'"'"'''-^ fi-^^ ^-^J^y. '~^i'.'^ J^.'^ L/^i^ 
 
 of clear water a bowl before them saying you are welcome ' 
 on their saying what is it ? this ' seeing these he places (brings) 
 
 ' The participle ^ <j:^ gu-til-ran of the verb k^S-^jj^ ge-tur-mek used 
 substantively. Lit., ' the hare-bringing person I am.' 
 
 ^ ySJiijC^. The participle is ^jjy^ gL-tii-ran, the genitive would 
 then be iSJijC.'i; but as the fatlia ( ' ) over the j is lost in consequence of 
 the i^ being disjoined from it and attached to the post-position sign of 
 the genitive case U7 the hiatus would be broken without a vowel, the n 
 therefore is introduced in the pronunciation, and thence finds its way into 
 the orthography, iSJs :i ,yi^ gu-tu-rd-nin for Sljjj^ gu-til-ra-nin. No 
 rules can be given for unestablished orthogTaphy, and the student must 
 trust to his ear. 
 
^-^ j-<^^f" iJ^j..o ^*j\JLj>. ^ ^'j^ ^\yS- 
 
 ' you cannot mount' having said will mount I' coming the Khoja 
 
 thrusting into his girdle his skirts at once the Ehoja they reply 
 
 in the tree EfFendi Khoja ' he puts in his pocket his shoes 
 
 the Khoja on their saying what will you do (with them) the shoes 
 
 the shoes with me near may turn up a road further up perhaps 
 
 '■ > 3 .1 
 
 he said let them be found 
 to the Khoja coming man a from the village One day 
 
 entertaining him to the man the Khoja brings hare a 
 
 but he comes again after a week feeds (him with) soup 
 
 who are you?' his having been a guest of his had forgotten the Khoja 
 
 fj^iJLj>- chilc-malc, to mount,' ascend,' etc. Vide [60], and observe the 
 unestablished orthography here of the 1 for the i. 
 
 Aorist. 
 
 Pronounced bi-lin-ah. 
 
 ^yu*J^, the passive form of ^J/^ljj- Videl&Q, 80]. 
 
 1*1^1 J Ci^ treated him with esteem and regard,' that is, 
 ' politely and hospitably.' 
 
to fish they go with some men the Khoja One day 
 
 himself the Khoja (also) they cast the net in the sea 
 
 what have you done ? Effendi Khoja' they say he throws in the net 
 he said thought a fish myself 1 ' Khoja 
 come ' to each other the lads of the neighbourhood One day 
 
 his shoes then let us make to mount to the tree the Khoja 
 coming under a tree the children saying (which) we will steal 
 
 (and) standing saying cannot mount any one to this tree' 
 
 jl is ' sport,' jl ^b 'fish-catching' — instead of following rule 
 [210] — the first word used adjectively to the second, which here takes the 
 possessive affix ,^, and is in the dative case to agree with the verb 
 LlX*:^-^ ' to go.' Vide note 1, page \ T . 
 
 it.=srl il. Here, again, we have another kind of exception to 
 rule [210]. It might have been nx^} Jil, but as the verb ^_^'T 
 requires the dative case, it is easier to make one word of it, and say 
 Au:sr\ ci aqh-'i-chi-nah. 
 
 i^Lsr"' ' a place,' is Arabic, and therefore not subject to the Turkish 
 rule. Vide [213]. 
 
 l^liLij-, from ^^y^^is.;s^ cM-ha-ma-mah, the impossible' form of 
 
Khoja oil ! ' calling out his wife he carries it off snatching 
 on her- ' has taken (off) the soap the kuzghun overtake (assist me) 
 his upon him nevermind Oh, wife!' replies the Khoja -saying which 
 ' let him wash (therewith) let him alone is dirty than us 
 he goes to the harber was bald head the Ehoja's But 
 the next week he gives penny one takes out (of his purse) gets shaved 
 before him the mirror they shave him again he goes again 
 shavings two is bald its half head my ' the Khoja they place 
 
 he said will it not do ? (for) one penny 
 
 LliC*.jljj is to reach,' hence ' to overtake.' 
 ^ A word much in use, composed of the 2nd person imp. of ij-i^ 
 'to leave' (to put down, to place), and 3rd person imp. of jj^ i|j ' to go,' 
 ' do thou let him go.' 
 
 The mirror is presented to him in order that, after taking one satis- 
 factory look at his beard, etc., he should place on it the barber's pay for 
 shaving him. 
 
 Here the pronoun is in the genitive case : if the pronoun were 
 omitted, the noun would be inflected : ^jj^j il) iXiiilj la-shi-min ijd-ri-s'i. 
 
kJjjji J<^ ■~r'')li^ ^•^} Jj-^*^^ ij:.^\ -;-:yJU 
 
 his wife he locks up placing into the box the axe rising 
 
 the Khoja do you hide ? from -fl-hom the axe ' says to him 
 
 ^J^ jsA ^^j'f- cJ^^ cJ'V.'^ J'^d 
 
 the cat ' remarks the wife ' I hide from the oat ' replies 
 
 a cat that- replies the Khoja ' what will it do (with) the axe ? ' 
 -^aUj C^i^'\ j\^ *^-Ai ^sA ^ ij^ CJ^i^\- 
 
 will it not take an axo (worth)- -covets two pennyworth of liver 
 
 -forty pence 
 
 to wash linen his wife with the Khoja One day 
 
 on the ground the washing they go at the head of a spring 
 
 -(jC?-ijj\ ci,yiL^ HjJAas^ ^y^ sA>^'^ '^J^5^^ 
 
 when they were going- to wash placing the soap having thrown 
 
 the soap coming a black bird of prey all of a sudden -to begin 
 
 Pronounced ko-yup, from (J^y- 
 
 From {_lX*l Ji-.^^^, pronounced Ici-lit-le-mek, the J being softened 
 
 into 
 
 3 
 
 Vide note 7, page 27. 
 
 Zj^., 'two-penny's (worth of) liver-coveting cat.' Vide note 1, 
 page P, and for (__n!, W& [197]. 
 
 ^Ioc^ULj ,».iiUj-. The firstword is generally pronounced cha-ma-shir ; 
 the latter word is the dative infinitive of ^^U;^^ yt-ha-mah, ' to wash.' 
 
sees the Khoja after some time (are) not in his head his senses 
 
 wife ! ' the Khoja weeps near him his wife that 
 
 now at least f expletive) but I have suffered much weep not 
 
 he said I have (had) taken my longing desire 
 
 <tijj' [j^j ^ j^ o''-^^ A>-l»=- Lor" J 
 
 to his house how often soever (whenever) Effendi The Khoja 
 
 ilj>-Ur=- lA'^VtIJ (tx^Ujjl i^ujjXi f'"^-' J— ; ) I j:xS " /"^ 
 
 the Khoja used to give to her friend his wife he would take ali^er 
 
 ^-■AsrU ^^.ri. t35]^^5^| i\Xijj/ ^j l«lAri-l 
 
 pastry before him on coming (home) in the evening 
 
 every day I wife ' he enquires one day she used to place 
 
 the wife do thej' go ? where these (livers) I bring one liver 
 
 ^jl-iA i^\^i- y.,J^ '-/'^ io>V '-ifr^^ '^ jy.J '-t^Ij^ 
 on this the Khoja snatches the cat all them ' replies that 
 
 ^ tliUXs- is ' to draw/ but it is used with l::-,,*^; to signify ' to 
 suffer.' 
 
 " jy;,<^ in the singular. Vide [232]. 
 Pronounced M-dl. 
 From (J^^^, vulgarly (J-^ylj ha-par-mah. 
 
Lir 
 
 ft>LJ\ ^^>^\j.^ ^\}^ l_Jo\la3 
 
 A1 
 
 J^ 
 
 j'our back you go before me 
 is better to mount 
 
 if you will fall (come) 
 
 '^^^■y. 
 
 in this way 
 
 now 
 
 fails 
 
 ^CtbIs it <^ 
 
 behind me 
 
 that there was ox 
 between- so much so (that) 
 from the flock 
 
 Ujys 
 
 always 
 
 (expletive) 
 
 coming 
 
 saying 
 
 J* Jo J I,.' 
 
 (and) sitting down 
 
 'J: 
 
 to the ground 
 
 to my front 
 
 he said 
 
 Of Nasr-il-deen Effendi 
 
 exceedingly its horns 
 
 it was possible to sit -the two horns 
 
 if I could sit between its horns of this ' on its coming 
 
 one day he kept thinking 
 I have found an opportunity ' then the Khoja lies down 
 
 mounting between th e two horns of the ox coming 
 
 a^lti- 4«_;Ji!U ^.jji^ fVJ 
 rising upon his legs 
 
 ^j^i^ 
 
 before the house 
 
 i>J>!_jJ 
 
 an old 
 
 J 
 
 large 
 
 the ox 
 
 the Khoja 
 
 the ox 
 
 ^^Ui> 
 
 __5jJuf ^'^"'^iSUzX^^ 
 
 })jts- Sj&s>-\ 
 
 at once 
 
 for some time going from his head the senses of the Khoja throws 
 
 lies (or lying) the Khoja that 
 
 V9 
 
 comes 
 
 ,li 
 
 ^•l. 
 
 his wife he lies 
 
 Pronounced hu-'i-la-ja. Vide [123]. 
 
 Pronounced d-u-la. 
 
Ae 
 
 Lfo^\ ujc'^^ 
 
 i-^\^L. L-fl.'Ua3 
 
 [^« ^.■^j\i 
 
 to his wife 
 take and bring 
 
 stands extended his hands 
 
 a man 
 
 in the garden that 
 
 my bow-with-arrow 
 the arrow the Khoja at once 
 
 my 
 
 that 
 
 ^ 
 
 -Ul 
 
 J 
 
 Jj) 
 
 Jj:^! 
 
 wife ! ' he saya 
 gives it bringing the woman also 
 
 i'J^ s/'i'^"'^^ 
 
 ifAXi 
 
 I) iJj, 
 
 on the other side 
 
 ,1^ 
 
 he came 
 
 then passed (on) 
 when (and) lay down 
 
 he saw that 
 crying out sitting down 
 
 i.<J)jj\ 
 
 what he had struck 
 
 if 
 
 thanks 
 
 Lord 
 
 L 
 
 piercing 
 fastening 
 
 going 
 
 : — -'• i>Ji' 
 
 ■ ^Jj -J 
 
 his gown 
 carefully 
 
 shooting 
 the door 
 morning 
 
 it became 
 
 he said 
 the MuUas 
 mounting 
 backwards 
 
 ' I would have been dead 
 going to give lesson 
 
 u-^J?- 
 
 wrong ways 
 
 thus 
 
 why 
 
 was his own gown 
 long ere this had been in it I 
 the Khoja One day 
 
 to the donkey the Ehoja after him (were) 
 
 i.^\^ i_jl _^j'^jj P^-^ j'^ 
 
 Khoja Oh ! ' say the Mullas was going 
 
 iSy* 
 
 you 
 
 I should mount 
 
 straight 
 
 
 the Khoja 
 
 do you mount 
 
 This word is quite expletive, and used adverbially : lit., ' from the 
 one,' ' immediately.' 
 
 Pronounced mi'dla-leri, ' the students in law.' 
 
LSiX^\ 
 
 .^V 
 
 .io.-\. 
 
 (MfL^lwU^ i^]^ L-JLi 
 
 b\y 
 
 out taking 
 
 on his back 
 
 the quilt 
 
 ■ J- 
 not listening 
 
 ^\ij\ "-"^Uju d^^j^., '-r'ijf 
 
 him 
 
 (to) his wife 
 a man he goes 
 
 from off his back at once the quilt seeing 
 shivering feeling cold then - the Khoja runs away taking 
 
 the cause of the noise 
 it must be (that) 
 
 Effendi' 
 
 his wife 
 
 (<uJ.l Aj) ^;^jj 
 what can it be ? ' 
 
 entering 
 having said 
 
 into the door 
 ■what was it 
 
 the noise 
 
 they took 
 
 the quilt 
 
 ■was 
 
 for my quilt the noise 
 
 he said 
 
 was finished 
 
 ■'ii. 
 
 lib 
 
 ^ijl::ij tXj<tj>-ud 
 
 [210] 
 
 ,*mJ ilj LXj"l>-l«ri- i-ty r> ['•] 
 
 ■washing his gown of the Khoja wife the Khoja's One day 
 
 4 
 
 ,U-^ 
 
 he sees went 
 
 out 
 
 the Khoja 
 
 as 
 
 hung up 
 
 in the garden 
 
 Pronounced Ain-la-ma-yup, from t.L>s,4i5j ' to listen,' to hear,' 
 which makes in the gerund t__>^-15L> , thus by the insertion of the 
 negative particle * we have t_;j-./»i5L5 . 
 
 We might well call this an active gerund, as it implies motion : 
 vide note 3, page W ; it comes from the simple Turkish verb Cjityj 
 ' to tremble.' 
 
 ^ Zif., ' placed hanging.' LjT or i^\ is a Turkish substantive with 
 which is formed the compound verb J^-a^Lsl 'to hang up' or 'suspend' 
 anything. 
 
also a part of his head falling upon his hack making the eiFort 
 piece of linen cloth a to his head on this the Khoja is wounded 
 men two those he sits in his place coming again tying (up) 
 you fellow!' the Khoja they relate their dispute coming also 
 the head also falling but not only - biting (it is possible) 
 
 he said to get wounded 
 lying in his house JSTasr-il-deen Khoja One night 
 says the Khoja he hears noise a before his door in the street 
 his wife ' that I may see this light a candle rise wife ! ' 
 the Khoja she says ' in thy place remain man be quiet ' 
 
 Lit-, ^jj^ 'whilst standing,' and '~-P^^=;~ 'drawing,' from 
 L-S^-iy-f- to draw or pull.' 
 
 From JuJjb ' to wound,' a simple Turkish verb in the active form, 
 'he wounds.' 
 
 JU. Arabic substantive, ' state, condition.' JU- jJ 'thus,' ' in this 
 wajr,' upon the occasion,' etc. 
 
 / 2 
 
L5tMi\ ^.^tiJ^,,^^ ti^^Lk L-fijlD Af 
 
 to beat the drum-sticks also the drummers they should beat 
 
 on seeing Timur become two-legged the geese on their beginning 
 
 '^\y>- ^^..'^ yh'^l^ L^VJ j^i^} 
 
 the Khoja and remarking it they had become legs two by two 
 
 you would be legged four if thou shouldst eat thou that drum-stick' 
 
 * (jit/tj J 
 he said 
 Jj^\^ ^ ^] I'-'J-A ^[i ^-joil J,^\j^ ^^=^^, [t=A] 
 came persons two when Cadi Effendi Khoja The late 
 
 that has bit my ear my man this ' says one (of them) 
 
 bit his own ear he did not bite I no ' says other man 
 
 answer to you come ye a little later ' says the Khoja 
 
 the Khoja upon which go away these (that) I may give 
 
 saying can I bite it ' seizing his ear comes to a quiet place 
 
 ' ,^i^jS. The expletive ^-S here signifies, 'immediately on.' 
 
 Jdu-J [67] yi-san, ' if thou shouldst eat,' or do thou eat.' 
 ^ ,^^j^^. Vide note 7, page 27, and [76J. 
 
 * The nominative of which is ji!»j — with the possessive afBx ^ii!»j- 
 ' his ear,' and ^iiilJ the accusative case. 
 
J3<^-l_j^ ijj_jj i^j-^ ^ijf ^l&Litib 
 
 of the Ehoja in the road as he went he was taking to the King 
 
 onarmdng- he eats taking off thigh of it a gets hungry the stomach 
 
 Timurlane he places before him the goose -in the royal presence 
 
 he gets vesed (expletive) is deriding me the Ehoja' on looking 
 
 having said is it gone ? where the (other) leg of this where ' 
 
 ['»'] =JL(1j^l.1 ""^jjljl t^oM^ijbj^ ^''"VAi^-" ^^.j^:^ fj^ '^-l'^ 
 
 if youdonotbelieve are one-legged the geese of our country' theKhoja 
 he said look (at) the geese being at the fountain-head there 
 that were (of) geese a flock at the fountain as it happened 
 
 commands on this Timur were standing upon one leg all of them 
 the drum-sticks to the drums together all the drummers that 
 
 ^ jy^i"^' pronounced zevlc-la-tii-or, regular simple Turkish verb; 
 hadine,'' as the French would say. 
 
 •X^^Ij^LjI. The word is i-fL^Ujl; 2nd person, present, indica- 
 tive mood, of the negative verb ^J-t^LiJ 'not to believe.' <Uol is 
 introduced to express if,' upon which the two (jjj's are blended into 
 one, and the a is dropped in writing, but pronounced with the \J^, thus : 
 i-nan-maz-i-san, ' if thou believest not.' 
 
 / 
 
everyone it rains again with the permission of God caTises to mount 
 remaining with horse bad, sorry ' that the Bey runs away 
 
 very much to his word of the Khoja and gets wet like a crane 
 
 /..^ Vj'^V ^.^^^ c;/l5^j' jhj^ 
 
 he says causing to he called the Khoja the next day gets angry 
 
 of God me speaking lies that is it beseeming to (in) you that 
 
 to the Bey the Khoja you should wet me in the rain in his plain 
 
 of your own is there not of your judgment any do you get angry why' 
 
 and you should sit upon them taking off the clothes (like me) 
 
 * (ji-*J.'^ ^'^ ^^'J^ '~r^yf t^"i(X^Jk^J^ijJ;_y^^ 
 
 he said you should come dry putting on after the rain had ceased 
 
 having caused to be cooked a goose the Khoja One day 
 
 jA'i^ hin-de-rir from (.iCoiAiJ, the causal of (J_Ckuj 'to mount on 
 horseback.' 
 
 ^ t_Jj J^W gerund of Jf^j Jfil>-, softened into ^j;^»j-cl>-, the causal 
 of ^J.-*J^\s>- ' to call.' 
 
 ^ ^-jirjiLffl, pronounced is-la-Ae-dn, first optative [67] of ^_^'Lal, 
 simple verb active, which changes the CU to J in its inflections. 
 
 * <)^JL:. This should surely be ^. Vide [229]. 
 
i^Aji i_jj!l c'^JaiJl i^'^.^y^ '-r'h^ ohr ^'r^.r' 
 
 himself taking under him his clothes becomes naked undressing 
 (having) fallen the whole of the rain he sits mounting upon it 
 says the Bey he arrives to the Bey he dresses dry he gets up 
 the Zhoja ' you came you were not wet how extraordinary ! ' 
 
 made me fly me was very swift extremely horse this ' 
 
 at the head- it (the horse) the Bey having said ' I did not get wet 
 going to hunt again the Bey on another day tied -of the stable 
 to another horse also the Khoja mounts horse appointed that 
 
 That is, upon his clothes,' which he has made up iuto a parcel to 
 keep dry. 
 
 i_f t)^ «1, from ^j^j=>-'j\ to cause to fly,' from the simple verb /I/tj^.l . 
 
 ^ OjY*^. This word is out of place. The narrator has no word 
 to express specifio or iientical, so he takes the first Arabic word that 
 comes into his mind, and which signLfles promised, established,' — this 
 he thinks near enough, and converts, or rather, perverts to his use. A 
 Turk would, from the context, understand what is meant, and would not 
 stop to question the propriety of the word, or know any better. This 
 only shows in what an unsatisfactory state Turkish literature is. Let 
 us hope that, in time, it wiU. improve ! 
 
t/tM-J^ ^jJ(^\j.^ ^\jk. ( Cj\\a3 
 
 VA 
 
 all these figs commands also the Bey he takes taking 
 
 of the Khoja these but they throw to (at) his head of this man 
 
 Khoja!' made (expressed) thanks the Khoja striking to (on) his head 
 
 answers the Khoja on their saying ' do you make (recite) thanks why 
 
 a man these (figs) in the way I was bringing beetroots many 
 
 my head I had brought beetroots if instructed me (to bring) 
 
 would have been split 
 this (him) the Bey goes to the Bey again one day The Khoja 
 as they- mounts (him) on a sorry horse but takes to the chase 
 
 )}J A-^T ^j. J^..ji^.. ''^'J')^\- 
 
 ran away with the horses every one it rains -were hunting 
 the Khoja quickly does not get on this horse (that) does not gaUop 
 
 Pronounced vH-rur-Ier, from ij-^jy vur-mak. 
 
 2 
 
 Vide note 7, page 27. 
 
 Pronounced hal-te-han, a man of bad repute.' Persian substantive, 
 here used adjectively. 
 
they come to (the) faith from heart (and) soul also two and those 
 become servants to the Khoja also the three 
 three upon (of) tray large a once Effendi Wasr-il-deen 
 
 to his presence of the Bey taking a present to the Bey placing plums 
 
 Jij (_j>jJl)J lis- ^^,Ai>jJ;ij::i'(JJ^l i_Cdj5-l»ri. ijj 
 
 many being pleased from-his-bringing-the plum of the Khoja places 
 
 having come to his house the Xhoja presents (him Tvith) j)enoe 
 
 i^jjj'^ <^ ^, '-r'ji'\ y¥^^ J^'^ij'- '^J^'^^ Tz^y. 
 
 taking to the Bey again taking beetroot a many after some days 
 
 to whom these things' he says to the Khoja meeting man a 
 
 to the Bey ' having said I am taking to the Bey ' ' do you take 
 
 acceptable more take-thou figs to take these (things) 
 
 ^^^ \.d/\ "j' -^J '~r'i}i ^^i^ J.^ ^ j^ 
 
 (of) figs some - sprigs goes the Khoja he says ' (they will) pass 
 
 t_,>^, pronounced Tco-yilp, gerund of ^J^.^i ; another instance of 
 unestablished orthography. 
 
 ^ ' (Eather than) these things to the Bey to take, (it is better that) 
 thou figs (shouldst) take.' The words omitted are implied from the 
 context. 
 
^.0 J-^J^ ^} J^J (_M f-^ '■'^■'^■'^l^-:'.^' 
 
 he says so many there may be hairs how many in his tail 
 
 Oh ! ' the Khoja (is it) known? whence' the hermit replies 
 
 the hermit he says count come if you do not believe my soul (friend) 
 
 you- if says the Kloja does not agree to this condition 
 hair one and from thy beaid hair one come -are not satisfied 
 
 it will come how let us see let us pluck out from its tail of the donkey 
 from God- it is not likely work that sees (the) hermit having said 
 
 Lo ! I' to his fellow-travellers then roaches (him) direction -Almighty 
 he brings (pronounces) the Taw-hid saying ' I came (am come) to faith 
 
 ' i)J J ka-H-la, ' to this word,' promise,' condition.' 
 
 ' It won't do.' 
 
 Prom tLJi^J^ji} i-rish-mek. 
 
 The •i'^^^y is the declaration of the Unity of God, particularly 
 that in the 112th Chapter of the Koran: — Say God is one God; the 
 eternal God : he begetteth not, neither is he begotten, and there is not 
 any one like unto him.' 
 
 J^\ \^ ij ^^.1) J _j jj_yj J J jJj J i\.*^\ <dH Jir>-1 (till jJi Jj 
 
are (they) how many the stars on its face heaven this Oh ! ' coming 
 how many upon it of my donkey ' answers the Khoja he says 
 says the hermit he says so much there may he hairs 
 if count come if thou helievest not ' (is it) evident ? whence ' 
 
 he says speak then it should come (he) less 
 
 hairs upon him of thy donkey Oh ! ' says the hermit 
 
 stars so many Oh ! ' says the Khoja ' (can they he) counted ? 
 if coming forward hermit other that are they countable ? 
 
 all (of) us thou knowest to give answer to my question my 
 
 he says 'let us see speak' the Eloja he says we will come to faith 
 of my heard of me this Khoja Oh ! ' replies the hermit 
 of my donkey my count' also the Khoja are there howmany hairs 
 
 It should be i^^iilj, in the singular. This is a curious mistake, as 
 it is made by an Arab printer at Boulac, who must have known better. 
 ' We will adopt your religion.' 
 
the circumstances Ala-il-deen the Sultan what is it ? your wish 
 ■what are they ? your questions ' says theEhoja upon this relates 
 question my says coming forward one of the hermits upon this 
 where is it ? its centre of the world worshipful Effendi ' 
 
 the fore hoof of the donkey with his stick at once the Ehoja 
 
 ""^i__jiljl S^ilA ^^^ji^ cCLjj asJiil 2r^^ 
 
 the foot of my donkey its centre of the world there ' points (to) 
 
 whence' says the hermit he says it is the place of its standing 
 &;^l tXluj' J,«cyl tiLcj:\ jSl jAjI djs-ljri- ,*V-«^ 
 
 
 there thou dost not believe if' replies the Eloja ' (is it) known ? 
 in conformity to it it should come less more if measure thou 
 
 forward also one of the hermits upon this he says speak thou 
 
 ^JLiJi*!?, the past verbal noun Jf^jy' of the verb fj^j^, with the 
 possessive affix i_j, and the jj changed into i, in consequence of its 
 coming in contact with a liquid letter ; the first 1^ might have been a « 
 quite as weE. : ,i^^j^ dur-dil-gM.. 
 
 ^ Vide Note *, page. 45. The <U*j1 is introduced with the ^\ to 
 give stUl more force to the expression, and it is blended with the {jm in 
 ^SL:'.AZj\ et-maz-san, which is short for jLoJ-«ijl [128]. 
 
 ^ Pronounced i-Uri or i-Uru. 
 
sitting down is shewn a place to the Bloja receives it in return 
 by calling (of) me ' he says making a prayer for the Padishah 
 
 \j^^ uA'**^' ^- C^ '^'^ O^ !>^"sr^ {»^y-= ""^^ i^;^ Jr^ liT* (^ 
 And say not unto him who saluteth you, thou art not a true leliever, 
 seeking the accidental goods of the present life, for with God is much 
 spoil. Such have ye formerly been ; but God hath been gracious unto 
 you ; therefore make a just discernment, for God is well acquainted with 
 that which ye do': Sale, vol. 2, page 113, chap, iv., verse 96. This 
 generally silences a fanatic if it does not persuade him that the salam 
 does not exclusively belong to the 'Paithful,' as they consider- it a 
 sin, according to the above injunction, to doubt the sincerity of any 
 one giving the salam. The Turks now say, in esculpation of their 
 allowing Europeans to give them the salam — for no Christian Eaya 
 would dare to do so — en badinage,^ that it is, 'God's salam,' and 
 that God said to the Prophet, (cr-^^ ^i^} ^--^■"!t^-^ /»1^1, and being 
 God's peace it belongs to all his creatures. When a Mosolman has there- 
 fore said tUsJ-c a^IaJI or fS-^ aLJ! in the plural, the answer he gets 
 is idll Li--^«.=-j _j *lLJ! («X-J-c or tlXJx on you be the peace of God and 
 his mercy.' Above we have one word, lIX-Lc, for the whole phrase, as we 
 might say, — receives the 'alaik, etc' 
 
 In this kind of narrative the language is naturally very loose : 
 jj-^S he shows.' It is understood, of course, that it can only be the 
 king who points to a seat, and, therefore, the narrator does not stop to 
 say so, but merely says, ' he shows,' although the king has not been men- 
 tioned. Viie [223]. The Turks avoid, if possible, the use of the 3rd 
 person singular, particularly when speaking of people of a higher rank 
 than themselves. 
 
he mounts Ms donkey he takes (as a) support his stick saddles 
 
 ^^_.x!l'ic i^UaU *Li>c^ '-r^^„'J '"^^^ L/'J'^ i)^'^ 
 
 Ala-il-deen's Sultan straight saying ' precede me ' to the Tartar 
 
 gives the salaam enters the presence of the Padishah coming tohis Sarai 
 
 Pronounced i-ihr-ld-yHp, the tS^ heing softened down as much as 
 possible. 
 
 This is a corruption of the Arabic word LiJ thend, ' bending over :' 
 hence a stick.' 
 
 Pronounced diish-u-ni-mah, lit., fall before me.' 
 
 Pronounced dogh-ru, vide page 16. 
 
 When a Mosolman comes into the presence of another, he gives the 
 saldm or pass-word of distinction among the faithful, at the use of 
 which by one who is not of their religion, the Turks feel much 
 offended. This distinction does not truly exist in the regulations of the 
 Mohomedan faith, because the Arabs of the desert — who are unsophis- 
 ticated by contact with the false civilization of Turkey — give and take 
 the salam indiscriminately. The author imagines that this first arose from 
 the Christians considering it a sin to give the salam or to repeat the 
 profession of faith as the Mosolmen do, and the Turks afterwards 
 assumed this distinction to themselves. Some years back it would 
 have been dangerous, as it is stiU. not prudent, to give the sah7n to a 
 fanatic. The following passage from the Koran should be quoted to 
 
 them against their present prejudices: /►^LJl S^\ \J^\ ^^ U JiJ' ^j 
 
being under my government my this ' comes to anger Ala-il-deen 
 any one from among the sages the wise men of the country 
 saying (which) should give an answer (that) to these not to be found 
 any one to these questions ' says some one being in regret 
 Effendi Nasr-il-deen Khoja except cannot give answer 
 
 commands the King immediately he may give answer 
 
 quickly they send forth a Tartar to Nasr-il-deen Effendi 
 
 he speaks command the Padisha's finding (out) the Khoja arriving 
 his donkey Nasr-il-deen at that very moment at once 
 
 * This is evidently a mistake. ^_^^jj can never make iiio Jk,«jJ»j. as 
 the ij must be turned to i, and therefore it should be iJuSA^y ; but 
 as everything is sacrificed to facilitating the pronunciation, the tS-f is sub- 
 stituted for the i in this instance, it being easier to say hu-lun-md-di-ga 
 than T)u-lun-md-di-gha. 
 
 This word might have been placed in the list of expletives : it is a 
 Persian adverb, signifying on the contrary.' 
 
to his country Ala-il-deen Sultan passing over (it) travelling over 
 
 jj jSj\ LZJyiJi <U»0 ^^ "^]i(j ilijU Jjjlj 
 
 these invites (them) to the faith these also the king they arrive 
 
 (his) question a one of us each of us" they say also three 
 
 we will enter to your religion you answer (us) if there is (we have) 
 ^^_jjrL. ^ILL P"^AJl _^_jjjl ^J,\j i]^ y Jjy 
 
 Ala-il-deen the Sultan upon this consented to this word these 
 
 to their questions of these assembling and his sages his wise men 
 Sultan were not competent one of them to give an answer at all 
 
 ^^oJl ■'Ic. Observe that both this word and the one just above it, 
 t^Aiil, which should be in the genitive case according to rule [210], 
 are not changed, because of rule [213]: both being Arabic words, they 
 are not necessarily subject to the Turkish construction. It would not 
 be incorrect to say i;A:JL«j JGoAiil nor '!^}j <_GjjJl *lc., but it 
 would be too complex, as both are preceded by an Arabic qualifying 
 noun [212], which suffices to make the sense clear. 
 
 ^=-.1 v hU-li-cM. We have already had occasion to observe the 
 use of the demonstrative pronoun in the singular, with a noun of number. 
 This remark properly belongs to the Syntax ; but it is impossible to note 
 every little peculiarity of a language so capricious as this, without entering 
 into wearisome details ; besides, something must be left to the intelligence 
 of the learner. 
 
 Pronounced 'u-lu-md-sin [128]. 
 
11 
 
 Lfi>^\ (^t^\wwaJ i!^]^ cJylirJ 
 
 J 
 
 J^ 
 
 retains not 
 
 -rfj]/ 
 
 runs away 
 
 a]/ 
 runs to the pond 
 
 to cry out the frogs from the pond 
 
 back 
 
 pond-birds 
 go ye ' throwing (into) the pond (of) pence 
 
 and eat them (you fine fellows) 
 
 oh! 
 
 bravo ' 
 
 resistance seeing 
 at the place of falling 
 being frightened the donkey 
 
 the donkey 
 
 catches 
 
 going 
 
 the water 
 
 at once 
 
 begin 
 
 the Khoja 
 
 handful 
 
 give (this money) 
 
 a saying 
 
 4. 
 
 hermits 
 the world 
 
 three in his time 
 
 -'j'^^ J^if^ 
 
 Effendi 
 
 appeared (in the world) 
 
 ISTasr-il-deen 
 excelling 
 
 for sweetmeats 
 he said 
 Khoja 
 in every science 
 
 (J^ to remain.' ^_^.*-»Ij negative form, t_5)-,«lji the gerund 
 translated positively, — The donkey, on seeing the water, to him (power 
 of) resistance remains not.' 
 
 ^ Pronounced sy-gir-dir, from lIX^jX-j sy-girt-meh 
 
 Pronounced -kr-giip, from t.lC*iijl urlc-mek. 
 
 Instead of giving drink-money, the Mohomedans very properly make 
 presents of money for a better purpose than that of poisoning the objects 
 of their generosity. 
 
at once the Khoja dirties mud to its tail going (along) 
 
 ij\j\j '-r'_^ a^rsrl JTJ ijj» '^^^ i^'^.A^ «-OLj1 
 
 to the bazaar placing into the sack cutting its tail of the donkey 
 
 without a tail this says man a they making auction going 
 
 its price you ' the Khoja use is it ? for what donkey 
 
 he said it is not in the desert the tail look ye make ye 
 
 -his donkey coming from a distant place the Ehoja One day 
 
 but comes to the side of a pond suddenly got thirsty very maoh 
 
 donkey the Khoja's was high very pond's side this 
 
 [210] 
 
 US" 
 
 ^ ^ J J ' tail ;' ^ijj }j ' his tail ;' or rather -kj^jji Tco-'i-ru-gM, as 
 being easier to pronounce, ili-ij j J Ico-i-ru-gM-nah, to his tail' [35], 
 the « and ^ being synonymous letters. 
 
 Prom iy^^_ 'to stick to,' as mud might do. This word is also 
 used to express the act of infringing quarantine. ^,L:i^jj ' they met 
 together,' or contaminated each other.' 
 
 Pronounced hal-M-nin-'i-chi-nah [210]. ^ 
 
 ' Whilst they were making the sale by auction' [248]. 
 
 LuJjj jJ M-i-rtJc-sii, tail-less.' 
 ^ For l^Jol t-ii-ni% [69], and ^jj^ g{i-run, for j5^jS'. Vide note 
 2, page r • . 
 
1v ^rt>ci\ (^t>3\^ i^\^ u^iy 
 
 Hs feet his hands ' having said ' do you know (him) whence 
 
 the Khoja One day she said ' I know (it) from this get cold 
 feet his hands (and) going to (the) mountain to (out) wood 
 saying ' am dead I Lo ' {expletive) the Khoja got cold 
 
 to eat his donkey coming the wolves he lies (down) under a tree 
 to the wolves in the place (where) he was lying the Khoja thfey begin 
 he said ' a donkey (whose) master is dead you have luckily found ' 
 taking to the bazaar his donkey the Khoja One day 
 
 ' From (l^^ ' to get cold,' which would make j^ya in the second 
 person, present tense. The i is put ia to facilitate the pronunciation, 
 so-ghur. 
 
 ^ Pronounced u-du-nah. 
 From ^Jk^jl" to lie down.' iJJ^'V. P^^^ verbal noun, with the 
 possessive afSx, ^^xj Jjli ' his having lied down,' the ^j changed to i 
 because coming before a vowel, and the first ^ introduced to facilitate the 
 pronunciation. 
 
 Lit., 'his master dead,' forming a compound adjective to 'donkey.' 
 
 e 2 
 
-<)Jjl ^[i ^Jt^.•^ ^^-^^ i^\^ (ji^jl ^\i 
 
 his being about to- thou sayest truly ' the Ehoja ' become a"Cadi 
 
 a lecture in the colonnade I because knew (it) I -become a Cadi 
 
 listened sticking up its ears donkey that whilst giving 
 
 he said 
 
 the donkey coming a man to thehouse-of the Khoja One day 
 
 is not in the house the donkey' replies the Khoja asks (for the loan of) 
 
 says the man brays within the donkey it so happened (that) 
 
 is>-\^ y.^V ^'^ij^^ CSJjS l/*^^ i)j5-lv&- ^U 
 
 Khoja ' is braying within the donkey Effendi Khoja Oh ! ' 
 you believe to the donkey you must be what an extraordinary man ' 
 he said you do not believe me with my grey beard 
 " a dead man wife' to his wife Khoja One day 
 
 Arabic. 
 
 Pronounced idmhsh, from lLCwjI ■klmek, ' to die ;' past participle 
 [105], used adjectively, with ^^^til adami, in the accusative case after 
 ^^jyU hi-lwr-sin. 
 
striking a (blow with the) whip to the donkey placing on his own back 
 he said thy saddle take my wooUen (pelisse) give 
 on the donkey taking off his woollen (pelisse) also day One 
 the woollen (pelisse) at once was watching him man a he places 
 (at) that moment the donkey takes to run (away with it) taking 
 
 to call (or) please to bawl please' says the Ehoja begins to bray 
 
 ^i«J J^l.>- t_Jj-E.lj ^v^J^ '^•^ •— ^7^" iJ^ LS^ *-VA' 
 
 and its bawling crying of this one's But the man it is useless 
 
 placing into its place the woollen (pelisse) brings back hearing 
 
 * 
 
 J^yf- 
 
 runs away 
 
 ^_>JJol i_^U ^^^^ t_fjkiil ij>-\y>. ^fj irw 
 
 losing his donkey Effendi Khoja One day 
 
 in such a place I saw (it)' replies the man enquires to a man 
 
 ^ Pronounced yu-rii-y'i, from ilS^j^^ yurumek. It should therefore, 
 properly speaking, be ^ ^ ''^jji ' ^^ gi^BS to running;' but it is 
 shortened into yliri verir. 
 
 ^ Dative infinitive of /ytyAj. 
 For ^J^\ [128]. 
 
 3 
 
within (his house) from thence saying (which) ' I will lend (him) 
 
 he says (and) coming remaining (away) a certain (time) entering 
 
 also and has not been (does not choose) the wish of the donkey ' 
 
 if you- into hands (of strangers) me" that says the donkey tome 
 
 of you and they will strike to my ears my -should give (lend) 
 
 they will curse to your wife 
 Ajd^^b i-ij:^; t35]^<^| <i^l_p- ^^/ J, [rv] 
 
 to the garden mounting (to) his donkey Khoja day One 
 
 his pelisse from his hack having something to do on the way going 
 
 a thief he places to its npon of the saddle of the donkey taking off 
 
 the Khoja and goes (away with it) steals the woollen (pelisse) coming 
 
 is not (forthcoming) the woollen (pelisse) that sees comes 
 
 taking (off) its saddle from its hack of the donkey o;jx\fM-j {expletive) 
 
 ' Here, again, theunestablished orthography of this language is evident : 
 (JjCil would make JCCii, and not as above. ^ For ^^y^^ Vide [128]. 
 ^ Lit, ' that hour,' mr Vinstant, as the French would say. 
 
ties it again he spoils (Hs turban) again does not suffice its length that 
 the muslin gets vexed the temper of the Khoja it is too short again 
 he gives (it) in sale by auction in the bazaar coming he takes 
 the Ehoja becomes buyer comes a man the sale taking place 
 take care brother ' approaching to the man secretly quietly 
 
 he said is short (the) length of this muslin because do not buy 
 asks his donkey coming man a to the Khoja day One 
 (to) the donkey let me go stay here' {expletive) the Khoja 
 should be (so) his will of the donkey if that I may consult 
 
 it is spelt two ways in the space of two Unes : ^y^ and i-jj. V^ide note 7, 
 pape 27, on unestablished orthography. 
 
 Lit., it comes not,' from L.!jC«iS. 
 
 Pronounced sy-M-lur, from ,1X^3^ sy-hil-mak. 
 
 Properly speaking, this should have two O's. The ablative case of 
 i^y* would be i^c\yt ; but they would not like to write or pronounce 
 the two, so they clip one. * Pronounced gk-lu-jah. 
 
 Pronounced yalc-la-shup, from ^J^tji^lib yalc-lasli-mah. 
 
 Pronounced i-sM-y'i-ni: the accusative of C.^\, with the possessive 
 afBx i_s- 
 
^^^ Jjl J^ Jjjj^ ^W? 't-j'VJ c\f^ 
 
 year that but they take (bring) food making compliments (to him) 
 
 to himself drinks eats the Khoja it was famine 
 
 from one (person) and 'it is a town cheap(ness) very (to) this town ' 
 
 ury. ijt"^!r^ ur^ ^'^ ^. J'^}' ^'^ J>^ J'^} Jlj-- 
 to-day are you mad ? you fellow !' says man that makes question 
 
 in their houses (homes) according to his means every one it is Bairam 
 
 is abundant the food for this reason (and) they bring they cook 
 
 (if) it were Bairam day every would to God (that) ! Ah ! ' the Khoja 
 
 he said 
 
 he finds he ties a muslin Effendi Nasr-il-deen day One 
 
 I note 7, page 27. 
 
 " Each man brings what he can, according to his means,' to the room 
 where strangers are entertained at the common expense of the town or 
 village, so as to avoid a person in power, or a Bashi Bo2ut, from taking 
 violent possession of a house, which he would be sure to do, under the 
 excuse that there being no inns, they are bound to supply him with pro- 
 visions, both by the laws of hospitality and by the law of the strongest. 
 
 ' tj-Jol<uJjl [78] ' If it might be !' 
 
 4 c 
 
 Pronounced sarar, from (J-^j-^ to tie up' (a turban). Observe that 
 
1^ (J'jci^ ,.yJjJ\»-^3 <;^~^\»i^ L_0.j\^ 
 
 ^yJ^W-^-* 
 
 V 
 
 from the door him he goes to the place of the feast 
 
 c_>vJ ^Ji:Ji is>-]±s>~ ^-^'ji^ ^iri^j^ 
 
 saying ' Eifendi Khoja please be seated ' (they) came to meet him 
 
 seating him at the head of the table with honors and compliments 
 
 also the Khoja they say Effendi Khoja pray be seated ' 
 
 my pelisse please be served ' takes hold of (its) sleeve of the pelisse 
 
 what- to the Khoja looking the people he says 'to the food 
 
 now the honors apparently ' Khoja on their saying -doest thou 
 
 he said let (it) eat (it) also the food to the pelisse 
 
 that sees goes to a town one day Effendi Nasr-il-deen 
 
 they see to the Khoja (are) in eating and drinking the people 
 
 1 
 
 pronounced hu-yu-run [56], vide note, page 56. 
 
 ^ Viie [69]. Thej and ^ being, in many cases, synonymous letters, 
 they change about according to note *, page 16. 
 
 3 
 
 Vii.e [253]. Here it is the present participle or verbal noun, with 
 the post-position JO, and therefore it must be translated by the present 
 tense: 2(JkC«jsr;l 'are (about) in drinking' [130]. 
 
 Vide note 1, page \X : they look to him.' Dative case. 
 
$(X^\ /.t-<^\t*2j 'i^i^^*^ I fl-)\ii)J 
 
 ^<>JK.»,5J 
 
 > 
 
 at once having said my Lord are mine these also ' the Jew 
 
 ^Jjjl^jl ajjlib '-r'ii.'^ hf'^J\'^' '■^A ^'^■^ i;^ 
 
 beating on his head exclaiming Jew-malice Oh ! what ' 
 
 vjj^ ^J>-»Ju is^\j~~ Jjiij\l^ ijJi^ ^L^iUils^ 
 
 the pelisse now theEhoja they turned out from the Mehkemi 
 
 they have said went to his house accepting also and the mule 
 
 jA-f C35]a^l^ ^^j ^s:^\ i^\yi~ ^f J ^S''^'\ 
 goes to a marriage feast Effendi Khoja day That 
 
 they do not- not looking (to) him old the clothes upon him 
 at once it is useless that sees the Khoja -pay him respect 
 putting on his pelisse coming to the house going out quietly 
 
 iiX^ ij or isS i_cU) is a very common expression, to which they 
 add the qualification they think appropriate, such as JlS iS^ ^la 
 'what a scamp of an infidel;' (.S^j^ i''^ '-/^' '^^ ''■^J other equally 
 respectable denomination ! Sometimes it is only UssA-i t/^i ^<'^' yz-t?^- 
 /jfl / which is said in a tone of approval, ' What a clever feUow !' 
 
 ^ ili.l Gerund [83], pronounced v&-ra-rak. 
 
 Of course in the accusative case. 
 
 Or y^i\ 3rd person of the present tense faoristj of the negative 
 /iA>^t\, of the simple verb J^Sjl it does not do.' 
 
 ^ aLI J%-«^ (Arabic) the plural of J-.«l, and used in Turkish some- 
 times to signify 'in a quiet proper manner,' gently,' as above. 
 
0^ LfSi^\ ijjJl>^\j^ i!^\y^ («_iL>\k) 
 
 tlie Cadi Eftendi having said he denies now -gold-has-taken 
 
 ever I my Lord ' the Khoja says turns (looks) to the Khoj a' s face 
 He has given (them me) I kept asking 1000 from God Almighty 
 
 the giver of so much gold if so (be) one less (I found) I counted but 
 
 ^^jJi (.^.J j^;j ^i-J ^^j^ 
 
 the gold pieces I said he will give also the one (remaining) 
 
 the pelisse on my back now Jew this my Lord but I accepted 
 
 having said which will claim (I dare say) also and the mule I ride 
 
 ' jj>j aorist, bearing a future signification, which is veiy common in 
 Turkish : indeed, the future is oftener expressed by the present tense 
 than the real future. 
 
 ^ aXiJvXi, past declinable participle lL/jc.', of the verb l!_Ccj, with 
 the possessive affix of the 1st person * [33], the i_s introduced for the 
 sake of euphony : *-Sj Ai-J, and pronounced Vin-di-gim. He should have 
 said^lji ^S a-Ij Jvi,», but that was too long, so he lays stress on the ^ 
 of fXj,'^ instead. These are little niceties, which a long practice and 
 attention can only render evident to the student, and for which it is 
 impossible to lay down any special rules. The Turks are naturally 
 desirous of giving all the force and emphasis to their speech with as few 
 words and as little trouble as possible, and that is why, in this instance, 
 he clips the ^ out of J?lj ^> j»Aj AiJ, and lengthens the first instead. 
 
 ■' iliir^ i ^\^, lit., ' he will turn out to he the proprietor.' 
 
Khoja my soul ' says the Jew ' (have) thrown ? the gold 
 I did ( it ) ( expletive ) that it should be a joke to you I 
 let me see you had said I will not take (it) if it be one less 
 do not know a joke I' Khoja ajokelmade {expletive) wiUhetakeit 
 the Jew having said )whioh) have accepted the gold pieces I 
 the Khoja he says ' let us go to the Mehkem^h come along 
 the Jew ' I will not go on foot to the Mehkemeh I ' replies 
 but good' says the Khoja brings mule a for the Khoja 
 also pelisse a the Jew is necessary a pelisse (fur) upon my back 
 they go to the Cadi Eifendi in the Mehkemi rising these (two) brings 
 
 so-much- man this ' the Jew having questioned him the Cadi 
 
 ' Is it likely you would have thrown me the gold ?' 
 
 Here we see *^ I properly spelt, vide note 4, page ' 1 . 
 
 1st pluperfect, indicative mood, 2nd person plural. 
 * (jbLi, a Turkish substantive, a man on his legs,' ' foot-man,' in 
 this sense, not in the sense of ' servant.' 
 
 L '' a J (UJj!, pronounced ar-ha-mah lir TciirJc, — ^lit., to my back a 
 pelisse ' — is necessary for a person of my respectability. 
 
for to make trial hearing this the Jew was 
 
 oftheKhoja placing in a purse (pieces of ) gold 999 
 
 purse of gold a that sees the Khoja throws down the chimney 
 
 jU-1 |JiUu-^ '-r'j^.'^ ir:^'^j' Jjr^' ulcj J^^ 
 
 he opens the purse saying has heen accepted our prayer ' stands 
 
 the (person)- one less (there is) that (and) sees he counts the money 
 
 2 
 
 saying which will give the (remaining) one also -giver (of) this ' 
 he rises at once gets iidgetty the Jew now (this time) he accepts 
 
 j_j-i\:j1 lk>^\^ ^jj*Jj' _»;=- JXj^L-tf C-JelU^ ( ,J.«j) _-^»^ 4_C<X^1»^ 
 Effendi Khoja good morning' knocking to the Khoja's door 
 
 ^■■'-^'^yd: ^^i^ j.^ J. 3 ^>^^ cji ^ 
 
 to the Jew the Khoja he says give (me) pieces of gold my these 
 from God Almighty I have you become mad merchant ' answered 
 to me (can) you in what proper way gave He I had asked 
 
 t_J«-j, pronounced ho-yup. 
 ^ ^jrli) the declinable present participle of CJ^tJ ^ . 
 
 Vide note 7, page 27, and [76] — 2nd perfect, indicative mood. 
 First pluperfect, indicative mood, [99] of CSa ' 
 
that he sees going to Sur Hissar the Khoja Once 
 
 -Ai^ i^\y^ Jj'J^, <0l '-r'^J^ tr'*^ J-^til ^\} 
 
 what an- ' the Khoja look at the moon assembled men many 
 
 as large as a sieve in our country for is this -extraordinary place 
 a moon the size of a crescent but here and care nothing for it they see 
 he said they look (at it) assembled how many men 
 Oh Lord ! ' promenading in Akshehir Effendi Nasr-il-deen 
 
 if one less (than the 1000) but give piecesofgold 1000 tome 
 
 ^jjA^jJJ ^Li^^jJ iSj^\y>. (_/l/».j!_Ji> /»U| 
 
 neighbour a Jew of the Khoja he was saying ' I will not receive it 
 
 ' As there are many towns of the name of Hissar, which means a 
 fortified city,' they distinguish this one by Sur,' another by Kara,' etc. 
 
 ^ .5!.^ 3rd person singular, present tense, indicative mood of (_^jl, 
 ' he or it is,' signifying ' it may be, or can be,' or must be.' 
 
 ^ aJ ^;)S- The iJ here is an expletive of course [123]. 
 
 * *UJT. This word ought to be spelt |»^ I , the negative of ^J-«JT, but 
 the insertion of the 1 gives a longer sound to the negative form, and 
 implies that he wiU not accept it on any account. 
 
 ^ iJLaA j J, the present participle of (__C»j J, with the 3rd person of 
 the 2nd perfect of the verb (Wl|[76, 245]. 
 
in the place where- also theEhoja (nothing) remains of thy life' 
 
 the people he remains saying I am dead behold ' lies down -he was 
 
 in it they bring a bier assembling at the head of him 
 
 on the road saying let us take to his house ' they place (him) 
 
 ' shall we pass in what way ' they came to a muddy place going 
 ^™^^^^\j ^Ju_jjb' i.:>-\yi~ ij}~*^ r/-^ Air-" 'r-'y.'^ 
 
 his head from the bier theKhoja all at once whilst (thus) talking saying 
 
 he said I used to go by this road when I was alive (well) ' raising 
 
 Here the verb denotes the requisite pause. 
 
 2 
 
 Pronoun cha-mur-lu yi-ra. Vide note *, page 16. 
 Here we have the 1st person plural of the imperative mood having 
 a future signification, and yet no other part of the verb could have 
 answered the purpose this does. We must suppose that they were talljing 
 to one another, one saying ' Let us pass this way,' J i^ ^^ ,^i (imperative) ; 
 on which some one, using the tense of last speaker, asks, J^LsS' ij.S'dj 
 ne ffU-nah giclie Urn ? in what way let us pass,' that is, ' shall we pass.' 
 It is customary for one man to take up the words of another, and use them 
 himself, as if he had said — Tou say let us pass here (why that is impos- 
 sible on account of the quagmire) ; in what way (can you say) let us 
 pass here,' and that the narrator wants the reader to understand that he 
 is quoting the words of the people is clear by his adding i— >yj and 
 ^$_i<dj^ whilst they were thus talking.' 
 
 4 , 
 
 Thus we see this tense implies being in the habit of doing' [65]. 
 
on its being out the branch now what art thou doing you stupid man ' 
 the Khoja to him. (to this man) he having said this 'you will fall (as) 
 the tree at once all of a sudden does not give answer any 
 then (from that place) he falls to the ground the Khoja just as it is cut 
 my falling thou you fellow ' running after the man rising 
 this man's saying (which) thou knowest also my dying knewest 
 says does not find liberation the man he takes hold of to his gown 
 
 -_>S' is an adverb giving much force to a phrase. It here (being 
 used expletively) implies immediately upon its being cut,' the primary 
 signification however is simply, like.'' 
 
 ^ i^-»jjJ)jj. "We have already observed, page 27, note 7, that we 
 cannot explain the incongruities of Turkish orthography imless indeed by 
 considering it as unestahlislied. The second person present of the indicative 
 mood is in some books written ^, and in others, as above, f^jy^. We 
 fancy that the narrator imagines he gives more force to his word by 
 introducing the (_$■, as if speaking with emphasis, du-sher-sin instead of 
 dii-sher-s n. The use of the present for the future has been noted before 
 and is very common. 
 
 ^ ^ Jj . Adverb composed of j and Ijs J once again,' ' at once,' ' all 
 at once,' as we should say. 
 
 >-^<tJ.l. Here we have the future verbal noun [106] with the 
 possessive afl^ of the first person singular [33]. 
 
in a caffass (cage) his fowls the Khoja Once 
 
 are in prison poor (fowls) these ' going to Sour Hissar filled 
 
 1 
 
 all of them saying I wiU let them go a little Lord ' 
 
 from one side (to another) each one of them the fowls having let loose 
 the cock taking stick a in his hand Khoja runs away 
 in the middle of the night ' (and) pursuing driving (him) before him 
 of your day why Oh ! you know that it is morning 
 
 'you do not know the road present (is coming upon you) such a fate (time) 
 
 he said 
 
 -^^Pji'i" ^J^ ^^'^J ^^^y^ -^/y T"] 
 
 the branch on which- mounting on a tree the Kloja Once 
 
 '^'"'"u^v-f^ i_ii^^ ^J>-iLil Jjij *,st^ ^lb- 
 
 passing a man from below he begins to cut -he was sitting 
 
 ^ Observe the use of the optative for the indicative mood, ' that I may 
 let them loose,' for ' I will let them loose,' or ' let me liberate them.' 
 ^ (JJciJ pronounced dei-neh. 
 ^ Vide note 2, page o ' . 
 Dative infinitive. 
 
also the Khoja they go (away) flying and they run away 
 
 <_>_._^yjl t^'"a^V. ^'^, ^yT ^<^'^ JI/:* '^l 
 
 sitting near the spring taking bread some in his hands 
 
 comes a man and whilst eating (it) dipping bread in the spring 
 
 duck soup ' theKhoja having said art thou eating what' 
 
 said he ' I eat 
 
 to the comers- had a sick person Effendi Nasr-il-deen 
 
 ^ 2 
 
 i^X^ t**i? 
 
 he was well in the morning ' says the Khoja -to ask after him 
 
 he is dying now 
 
 plural noun arises, in the opinion of the author, from its being considered 
 more poetic and outre, and therefore expressive. Attention is attracted to 
 it in the same way as when some eccentric person of education makes 
 use of any peculiar ungrammatical expression. 
 
 ^bip- cL^jl . It should be, according to [210], JCSjj.! 
 -jI) ij5>-, but as chorba is a foreign word it is treated like an adjective 
 [219]. This looseness of style is very common. 
 
 ^ ^\~>. is an Arabic substantive, signifying wishes,' hence, by 
 inference, ' state of health.' ^j^jys Jo\~>- ' to ask after one's health,' 'to 
 inquire regarding any one.' iMjya dative infinitive to ask.' 
 
that sees the Khoja attacks on the Khoja the dog 
 
 ^ t'^iti/ "="^jUj!) lL^st^'-V.^ '-^' o^.'^ 
 
 go away' to the dog on. which will be worsted he (himself) 
 
 he said go along I am overcome (conquered) 
 
 took to his house caught stork a the Khoja Once 
 
 (saying that they were long) and its legs its nose with a knife 
 
 * vjj ijib <tiy i_f A^^ Axi)l i—>jJ>jyj\ i JJ CJ^y,j^ '~~'}'^ 
 ' thou art /«/:« a bird now lo ' causing it to sit in a high place he cut 
 
 he said 
 
 many at the head of a spring that sees the Khoja Once 
 
 sajring ' that I may catch (one) ' runs Khoja ate playing ducks 
 
 (»JiJL) from tU^-iJo ' to conquer,' the passive form of which is, 
 by the insertion of J [107], tli^-^ixj : — It should therefore be properly 
 ^ jJJG ' I am conquered ' ; but as this would resemble the word t.LC«JXj 
 pronounced ye-ni-le-meh to make new,' the J is softened into ^, and 
 thus a useful distinction is made between the two words. 
 
 Observe the use of a gerund to indicate a pause. 
 
 Causal of (J^J^j^ C'^O]- Lit., to a bird thou hast resembled.' 
 
 Pronounced punar instead of pu-na-rin. 
 
 jlij )1 liO^jl. The habit of placing a verb in the singular to a 
 
 2 d 
 
you do not believe its dying you believe to its making children Oh!' 
 
 he said 
 
 Jj/ ^""^Jjf ^'">^iiJ^\j\ SjUjJ^ i^\^ j^/^ [fej 
 he sees walking about amongst the tombs Ehoja Onoe 
 
 the Khoja lies on a tombstone an old dog that 
 
 wishes to strike the dog he takes a thick stick in his hand gets angry 
 
 Infinitive mood ^J^t^jJ, declinable participle ^JJ^.J, with the 
 possessive affix of the 3rd person |,£j,ijJ (the ^j being turned to p 
 [57] before a vowel), and in the dative case ^UxJyi.LJ the i_> being 
 dropped on the intervention of the ^ [35, 127]. 
 
 " Sandah is an expression of contempt : i^Jc«) /» jl you stupid man ' 
 [123]. It is curious that this word smida, in common parlance, is 
 contracted into sdnd, and then it is only a term of familiarity (not of 
 contempt) to draw the attention of the person you address, nx-^ /^ 
 pronounced hai sdna ' look at me,' i.e. listen to me.' if^X^-j (b J pi'o- 
 nounced dih sdnd ' do thou speak.' We have had frequent occasion to 
 mark this system of contracting words among our aboriginal cousins 
 of the Hindo-Germanic race, at which we ought not to be astonished, 
 considering how much Europeans indulge in it, particularly in the 
 English language. 
 
 ^ iti^jjjl. This is precisely in the same form as the itixj-c.j, the 
 
 original verb (_liC*J)l only having its termination in lI/ instead of the 
 
 ••• of ^J^-CiJ, and of course the (J^ becoming (.s/ where the ^ had 
 
 become p [57]. The • here and the ^ above are for the sake of euphony. 
 
one day the proprietor of the kazan (and) makes use of (it) brought (it) 
 has not come (back) the kazan (waits) sees days five 
 
 the Khoja knocks at the door going to the Khoja's house 
 
 the kazan ' on his saying wantest thou what ' coming to the door 
 is dead the kazan may you remain well ' replies Khoja ' I say 
 
 [™]^j^$'jj^J t""j_j^jy_jl ^j' ,^ S/'^'^ i^\^:>- l_Jjy:^ 
 
 on saying which can a kazan ever die ? EfFendi Khoja ' the man 
 
 ^ jj^ j\h. Two Turkish verbs of the same meaning together, in 
 order to give force of expression — • he looks (about him and) sees (that it 
 is not returned).' 
 
 Jjl iUs ^ ' May you be preserved ! ' is the phrase of condolence 
 on the death of any one. 
 
 (*_j=-^» is an Arabic adjective meaning defunct,' because ' taken 
 into God's mercy.' When speaking of the death of a Christian they 
 use, contemptuously, the same word as they would if referring to the 
 death of a horse or cow — J^ murd ' he died,' from the Persian 
 verb ryiV* to die.' 
 
he said ' have we not removed ? to this house we (I) why' Khoja 
 large kettle (caldron) from his neighbour Khoja One day 
 into the (said) kettle after having done (seen) his business taking 
 on giving it to the proprietor he took placing saucepan small a 
 saucepan small a in the kazan that sees the proprietor 
 the kazan' answers Ehoja he says what is this' there is 
 again accepts the saucepan the man ' has made a little one 
 to his house took (it) asking for the kazan Khoja another day 
 
 ' Pronounced giich. 
 
 * It should be pronounced, at least- — if not written — Ico-nu-shii-sin-dan. 
 Vide the note on the rules of euphony, page 16. 
 
 ' C^jS (ji^J. To see to a matter is as good as doing it, and 
 often better than getting it done. 
 
 ^ Lit., ' The man who was the proprietor.' 
 
 ^ jy^y^ from ^J/«^jJ. The Arabic word JjJ 'acceptance' is made 
 into a simple Turkish verb. 
 
t^v 
 
 ci'jci^ ^jOU^ ^\^ t__aj\i^ 
 
 'has burnt who these (clothes) ' they say to the Khoja has become 
 
 JU«j1 lUi.'ij] ^" 
 
 H^ 
 
 .u 
 
 l^J^ 
 
 i;:^!, 
 
 clothes was to rise the day of judgment to-morrow' (the) Khoja 
 
 \'i 
 
 Wi^ 
 
 he said ' is required ? (for) what 
 
 entered 
 loading 
 
 a thief 
 
 C'-io] j^.jl 
 
 Jj it^l 
 
 into his house of the Khoja 
 
 .\ij\ 
 
 -r'Jjr^J'- 
 
 colleoting 
 
 the remainder 
 
 also 
 
 on his back 
 gathered up 
 entering in his house 
 
 knocking 
 having said to the Khoja Effendi 
 
 the thief 
 the thief's door 
 
 there was 
 
 the Khoja 
 
 (fell) he went 
 
 One day 
 
 whatsoever 
 he went out 
 
 ^•^'^f 
 
 after the thief 
 
 after him also the Khoja 
 
 \jrrlr^ 
 
 ij 
 
 Jtr- 
 
 ' wantest thou what ' the thief 
 
 ' i_jlj Jb an expression composed of an Arabic and a Turkish word, 
 both having the same meaning, but which together might be considered 
 to give strength of expression, the remaining things that were left.' 
 
 ^ -ijj from tliU.-ijJ 'to fall,' but frequently used for 'to go in 
 pursuit of.' 
 
 ' Vide note 7, page 27. 
 
 ^ Here we see particularly how necessary it is to attend to the pauses 
 which the gerunds indicate : if we were not to make a pause at this gerund 
 [253] the sense would be lost. 
 
\ys^ ^\y^ (.Julia) ^f^ 
 
 kills tiielamb thinks (that he is in) earnest (the)Khoja he speaks thus 
 
 one of them placing (the lamb) on his back the Khoja then 
 
 then he begins to roast the lamb lighting a fire then 
 
 consignment to the Khoja their coats undressing his companions 
 
 they go to play to a different direction each one of them making 
 
 bums casting to the fire the whole of the clothes also the Khoja 
 
 on their coming back having promenaded after a little while 
 
 cinders burning the whole of their clothes that they see 
 
 ' That is, his friend, who does not think that the Khoja will take the 
 thing in earnest. 
 
 ' t_J« 1.1 pronounced vii-riij) from iy»jj^ pronounced vHr-mak ' to strike,' 
 thence ■ to throw,' ergo to cany ' : lower down it is to cast (into the fire).' 
 
 ' Vide [128]. 
 
 * ilCil and !s\S\j are both Persian adverbs, signifying 'then,' 'at 
 once,' upon this,' suddenly,' afterwards,' etc. 
 
 ° Dative infinitive. 
 
 ^ Note that [210] ^^iL^^ '-^V^ ^^ ^®^^ *'^® nominative to the 
 active verb '-r'y V. ' burning ' ; just above it was in the accusative case 
 
(and) his head upon him of the Khoja coming out with force the water 
 for thy thus- so ' getting angry the Khoja at once getting wet 
 he said they have stuck stick this -running mad(ly) 
 
 there was (he had) lamb a of Eifendi Wasr-il-deen Ehoja 
 friends some one day he (used to) bring up with much (care) that 
 let us eat ' taking from his hands of the Khoja the lamb assembling 
 to-morrow Khoja ' says coming first one of them they say 
 
 bring what will you do (with) this lamb will rise the last day 
 
 ^^ ^J 'yJ^\ '^-[p- '™y<^:rJ ""si^ 
 
 coming [expletive) (will) not believe (it) Khoja ' let us eat this (lamb) 
 
 ' wbV, is ^ Persian word, with a Persian plural termination. Vide 
 [17, 18]. 
 
 ^ i^Jy would make ^^,j^i [16], three ,_> together, which is too 
 much, so the first is turned into a , — j . ;.jj 
 
 ' Vide note 7, page T [128] . 
 
 * "Will not consent to it,' or ' will not believe him to be serious.' 
 JLvUjI is 'to believe,' thence, by inference, 'to consign one's self into 
 another's hands,' thence to consent.' ( ! ) 
 
do you not see ' on being asked I coming the questioning angels ' 
 
 lie said ' I will say is an old one even my tomb 
 
 the people goes out wearing black Khoja One day 
 
 jiijS U J^ ^ i_S'^\ <^-l_j:>- '-r'jy i-^V 
 
 black from (for) what death ' Effendi Khoja seeing this (him) 
 
 the father of my son ' Khoja on their saying have you put on 
 
 he said ' I hold his mourning is dead 
 
 himself coming from a distance Effendi Khoja One day 
 
 to the mouth-piece of a- that he sees seeing (felt) took warmth 
 
 water ' Khoja they had stopped it (with) a piece of wood -fountain 
 
 on his pulling it out drawing the wood saying that I may drink 
 
 ' Eirst perfect, indicative mood [76]. 
 
 - ' Do not accuse me, the sins you charge me with are those of 
 another — see, this is not my tomb, it is an old one belonging to another.' 
 
 ^ .v^y for ij'-y^\- Vii^e [128] the accusative [35] after ^j^Jis. 
 
 * ' Which is like a pipe' ^j! ; lit., ' to a fountain its pipe.' 
 
 ^ (J^ya is, properly speaking, 'to stick up into.' 
 
 6 ^ ij J.Ub-. Here ^^^ ' like,' has certainly the place of an 
 expletive, 'on,' 'as soon as,' 'immediately on,' etc. 
 
pr 'TrOsii\ ^jo3\j-o.3 i^\jk^ L-fijiy 
 
 upon it taking thick stick a in his hand seeing Khoja 
 
 the ox week the coming (nest) runs away the ox going 
 
 is>'\^ ^jS^ (jii-«-ijji ^.^.j^ y J^- 
 
 the Khoja (was) going having harnessed to an Araba a Turk 
 
 taking stick a in his hand straightways seeing the ox 
 
 ^j. ^y ^jji^ Hi^ ~^y ^)f^ f*^^<_j;j^ 
 
 Oh ! ' the Turk strikes blows some to the ox running after 
 thou ' having said wantest thou what with my ox man 
 
 that (ox) dog you ignorant (interfere and talk nonsense) do not mix 
 
 *JUjO j^ "" (^,)^,-::;rv.L• 
 
 he replied ' knows its fault 
 
 that charged (his followers) Effendi Khoja One day 
 
 place me (in) to an old tomb me (at the) time (of) my dying I ' 
 
 Khoja on their saying do you speak thus why ' the people 
 
 ' 1^^' ^^°'''^ ^°^ SLsr^ ge-U-je-gin, genitive infinite. 
 * Pronounced vH-rur. 
 
 ' jX^jl. Verbal noun. tlSlx!^! 'having died,' with the personal 
 affix I* , and the i_j introduced for the sake of euphony. 
 
i\ ,.v."t>3\ 
 
 L^JC*51 ^t>JK-«5J "^r^]^^ ' ^ 
 
 J^'^ 
 
 fr 
 
 -!T- 
 
 seeing him the gardener enters into (the garden) -drawing it 
 
 [253] ^j^jjj_J ^j\j] ij iJOU • <JZuyt~S ^ 
 
 seek you what here and who are you ' 
 
 is^ 
 
 1^ 
 
 'I sell 
 
 the Khoja having said 
 
 ladders ' says coming 
 ' (is it sold)" do they sell ladders 
 in any place a, ladder man 
 
 <Uilj i^ljjp 
 
 <iLc 
 
 -^ 
 
 near to the ladder with velocity 
 
 iJu,J 
 
 J 
 
 ^J\ 
 
 here ' replies the gardener 
 
 <SiS-l»ii- 
 
 oh ! ignorant ' replies Khoja 
 ' (saleable) is sold 
 
 »«^^ "«^^,)^^jlt ^/ ^ ^aJI ^.Jl^ [IV] 
 
 one by one his fowls day one Effendi Nasr-il-deen 
 
 and passing (it on) piercing of cloth piece a to their necks seizing 
 
 [210, 36] 
 
 near of the Khoja the people 
 
 \i 
 
 Ap-l»ri. J lA:'.'^ 
 
 -u 
 
 let go taking hold (of each) 
 
 Khoja ' they said ' has come what to these fowls ' assembled 
 
 he replied they hold mourning died the mothers of these 
 )f^\ ^ t2io:,t;^5)y X;^lyi- ^fj [lAj 
 
 in his ground of the Khoja One day 
 
 J^ J. 
 enters ox 
 
 has come 
 
 J.liJj, ' In any place that may be ' [79]. 
 A Persian word. 
 
 a^ulaU 
 
' (how I should like to)- (his face) man's this if I should bring out 
 
 he said -make hlack 
 
 in the bazaar Eifendi Nasr-il-deen Khoja One day 
 of the month to-day' the Khoja meeting to a man walking about 
 I do not know ' (he) having said ' is it the fourth or is it the third 
 he replied (I do) not and (my) selling it taking the moon 
 carrying taking ladder a on his shoulders Khoja One day 
 up then mounting up leaning it on the wall of a garden 
 
 ' It is here intended to show the barefacedness of the Khoja, who 
 talked of making black the face of a man who was tormenting him by 
 his lamentations, when his own face ought to have been black for stealing 
 the heifer and eating it. ' What if I should do so and so.' 
 
 ^ *ij JuUj. The verbal noun or declinable participle jJu'La changes 
 the ^J ^ 9 and takes the i_s for euphony, and the possessive affix » ; 
 lit., the action of my homing soli and bought it there is not.' 
 
 ' Pronounced mer-de-hdn. 
 
 * dujjl^J ''^■'^y- It should be properly iJji«:-'^ij, but a little 
 looseness of style is admissible, when the sense does not suffer, and 
 where it sounds better. 
 
 * Pronounced da-ya-nUp from JU,.'Lt. 
 
''''jj JJ 
 
 agreement for one pul (penny) for the passing of them one by one 
 one of them passing them across one by one these Khoja make 
 
 the blind men carries away overpowering its water the river 
 
 j^ Ife jiLj^JuJ jliy uy?^ its-l.^ jIA^V '^^V^t* 
 
 one lo! do you make crying why' Khoja begin to call out 
 
 he said give ye less pul 
 
 meeting heifer a promenading in the plain Khoja One day 
 
 (^iA^jj)j^jJ ^J_jJjli^ c-Jj^i^ taw^jl uf/-=^ '^^^4;' 
 
 its skin killing taking to his house straight seizing upon it 
 
 lamentation and complaints the proprietor of the heifer he hides 
 
 Khoja coming in front house of the Khoja's making 
 
 the skin of this heifer wife ' to his family 
 
 ' The simple form of this verb tlC*^^ ' to pass/ which would inake 
 its causal CJ^\\^ [60], but this is also pronounced short i^X»/f or 
 (jX»,fcS . Now if we inserted the jJ it would be too much to 
 pronounce, the J therefore is dropped, and thence J'jjy4' '^^ gerund. 
 
 '^ '^ (pronounced sU-'i/'i) J^^',' ■ 
 
 2 Persian substantive in the dative case. 
 
 ' Pronounced ii-m-nah ; lit., to its front' [36], 
 
t^jjjl lip- (_;jJs<U)jjJiJ IL ijO ij:'.^ 
 
 he has done suifering how much to me camel treacherous 
 
 that I may- seize for me camel perfidious this have the kindness 
 
 he said -cut his throat 
 
 for one akje (a piece) ninety of eggs One day 
 
 he sold ten of them going to another place taking (huying) 
 you sell ten of them (you) buying ninety why ' to the Khoja 
 
 J 
 
 JoJiJu 
 
 U HA'J A^\y^ C253] jjJ^J^j J 
 
 it is more advantageous ' Khoja they having said ( to him ) 
 
 ijM.AJi^ Jjft*oto iS^jiJj ijM^\ (.^-Xij^jj y.::«*3«J 
 
 he said ' they may see in commerce us also (me) (in order that) friends 
 
 <^jjj ^"^'^j^ o^j} J. u^y. ^.^l-^ ^^i^ tin 
 
 going to its banks river a one day Nasr-il-deen Khoja 
 in the river with the Khoja and como blind men ten sitting down 
 
 note 7, page 27. 
 
 - <0'l> j^.i. Pronounced tdni. In expressing numbers a qualifying 
 noun is often added: if speaking of men they say ri) ;»J — «1 or Ji^ 
 ' three hundred persons ;' if of animals they would used the word , ili : 
 as, (_5)jJ (_^lj LS^-^J^- ' "'^^ hundred and two (heads of) lambs'; ;J.l 
 j^V 0"L' ' thirty heads of horses. If of arms or instruments <ulij ; 
 if of small or unimportant things, <!jlo a grain': as, l!JC*!}J»- ij\j p 
 one empty flower-pot.' We may suppose that poor blind men faU under 
 the last denomination in the opinion of the relator of the story ( ! ). 
 
lSiX^\ ,.i^C>i\ Y*oJ i^::^]^ lJu^ TA 
 
 ^JjOU.*iS-) 
 
 V 
 
 new the month' they say that to the Khoja One day 
 
 j^} ^^y^ ^ ijji) ^)JJ^ '^J ^-^ ^^j^ 
 
 replies Khoja what do they do (with it) month the old is become 
 
 they make stars they break (it) ' 
 to go going out from the town with a caravan Khoja One day 
 
 to himself he had a camel (his) of this (him) but intended 
 on this camel rather than if I should go on foot Lord ' says 
 mounting to the camel then I may go with pleasure I may ride 
 
 the ground the Khoja stumbling the camel going with the caravan 
 
 -diili "'^Jul jIj^ (Ir^l^j^ ^/.^r ^''"^'^.jj^ ''^iJi' 
 
 the people- calls out the Khoja mounting upon him throwing 
 
 of the Khoja after a little while save this person (him) -of the caravan 
 this did you see Mosolmen Oh!' coming into his head the senses 
 
 ' ,j| the accusative of ^^T a month': the ^ must be considered a 
 consonant in this word [8], declined likejl and not like bb ; it would 
 be difficult to pronounce three ,_? together, ic-:?jT, therefore they pronounce 
 this a-'i, ' a month,' ay'i accusative, and not ay'iy'i. 
 
 ' Pronounced vurup ' from ^J^ ,j\ to throw, to beat,' etc. 
 
JUjj '^ ,_^_/; Jj] Ul t='"__,j.--^li 
 
 it was fifth the twenty of the month hut how much is it 
 
 saying ' I will see make (wait) patience little a ' Khoja 
 
 jj^ jLtf ^_jJ j_^C<Jj=^ ^-'_J" *i^ 
 
 sees counts (the stones) upsets the vase coming to (the) house ' 
 
 if Khoja ' have become stones 20 100 that 
 
 they wiU say (call) foolish to me I should say aU of this (number) 
 
 '^^ u/y '^•^^ ^i^ "'"j:!'^ 
 
 of the month to-day ' to the people (and) coming saying this 
 
 Oh !' answer these saying (which) fifth it is the forty full 
 
 the forty- you days (is) thirty complete month a Ehoja 
 
 (UULijl ^ jS-A As>-\yi^ '-^A'^ J'^t^' 
 
 (in) to moderation I ' replies Khoja sayest -fifth it is 
 
 ^\Sy> 'lXLhIJu iXijLur^ (__X+J.^ S\ *Ja1.i^ 
 
 to-day you look (according) to its account the vase if I spoke 
 
 it is its 120th 
 
 ' i^ij short for ^sXuij [45]. 
 - vJ3j1 for lTjjI [69]; and see note 2, page T ' . 
 ' For |_^iU^ [210]. ^ 2nd conditional [102j. 
 
 ' For jjLjliu [79]. 
 
 ° JV one hundred,' -'<Xi ' twenty (the i<=r [45] is not necessary 
 in summing up) ^ the possessive affix of the 3rd person [33] its 120th.' 
 
" JjjJ_Sj_ ' <l^J A^J <Uj1 L^.^y^ 
 
 ' they feed (beating) beating a man (with) sweetmeats 
 to himself (it) being holy Eamadan Nasr-il-deen Khoja 
 imitating the people necessity what to me' making thought 
 
 in(to) the vase day by day making use of vase one to fast 
 
 ^1^ "»l.Ai^jl .U ^,/ JJ,1 ^^yl^j ^Jilt ^ 
 
 Bairam having been complete days thirty I will leave stone a 
 
 to leave (in it) stone one day by day to the vase' saying ' I will make 
 
 ^.|S J ^ i-^y '-^■J^\^ 'liUj'V A-^V 
 
 day one the daughter of the Khoja It happened (that) he begins 
 
 another day leaves (of) stones handful a to the vase 
 
 Jul i^y y. ^ A''VJ J^)*^ ^.^^i^ 
 
 of the month to-day ' that they make question to the Khoja 
 
 ' The gerund [105] is here repeated twice to give a better emphasis. 
 
 ^ Causal of CJ^_ [60]. 'Where whilst beating a man they feed him 
 with sweetmeats.' 
 
 ' Vid,e further on, note 2, page T'\. ■* Ablative case. 
 
 ^ Pronounced dash. 
 
 " Dative infinitive of (_^Uj ' to leave '; the jj is changed into a 
 c [57]. ' An Arabic adverb. 
 
 ^ ,_j is the possessive pronoun affixed to ji [210]. 
 
 ' Lit., ' From days a day ;' un de ces jours' as the French would say; 
 a few days later ;' ' a little whUe after.' 
 
in my hands all (of it) I could seize what cast to this (place) 
 'filled who in the sack these Oh!' the gardener 'remained 
 
 when you I was in this thought I also lo yes' having said 
 
 he said came 
 toKoniah may God have mercy on him ! Eifendi Khoja One day 
 in the name- at once entering to a shop of a seller of sweetmeats going 
 
 the sweetmeat-seller he begins to eat the sweatmeats saying -of God 
 
 <lsaJ_ilj 'a>U^J |^JA^-Ij>ri. i--Jy;;J '',_^^-o;L; <ij '"'^aIjI i^ 
 
 beginning to beat the Khoja saying 'doestthou what Oh! man' 
 
 where Koniah this a town is how nice that ' says the Khoja 
 
 ' (Uuji |*Juu;u ij for a^' AJ whatsoever;' the verb Ajulijb comes 
 between, as in English we would say, 'how desirous soever I might be,' 
 the word howsoever' being divided by the verb intervening between how 
 and soever. 
 
 ^ Pronounced dol-dnr-di. 
 
 ^ When the Mohamedans sit down to a meal, before breaking bread 
 they say Bism ilia,' to themselves, and if any one is present, they invite 
 him, with the same phrase, to partake of their repast. 
 
 ^ See note 7, page 27. " Dative infinitive. 
 
 2 c 
 
he said I had come forth to you here now only 
 
 J ir> j^J ^ijS -i-i^jJ ^^J. '^-'jp-C'^] 
 
 and (name of a herb) some entering to a garden one day the Khoja 
 
 ^^i^ ^uj' v^ '-^-'^Ji '''-^J ^'^i'. ^J'' (»*^ jl^ 
 
 in a sack a little of it he plucked up he found whatever turnips some 
 
 Si^ '--^^ ^J=f^i'. Jjy ^rij Ujy J 
 
 him (this person) coming the gardener placing in his arms a little of it 
 
 being confounded Khoja having said seekestthou what here seizing 
 
 wind a strong during the night ' not being able to find an answer 
 
 having said threw bringing here me wind that blew 
 
 says Khoja plucked who these Oh ! ' says the gardener 
 
 from that (place) me by its being strong veiy the wind' 
 
 ' <Cajl belongs to ijjts : im.;! iJJb whatsoever.' As the learner will 
 not require detailed analysis by the time he reaches this part of the work, 
 we shall content ourselves in future with noting in the text the numbers 
 of the sections in the grammar that bear on the word, and to which we 
 may desire to refer : thus, '"I 
 
 ' rjjT y is short for ij:', J^ J' r^i Turkish and Persian, a little of this,' 
 or cS! j^J; with the ^ intervening [35, 128]. 
 ^ See note 7, page 27. 
 
rr '^1^'^ i^i^\j^ <!^\^ LjiJdb^ 
 
 akj^s ten Oh! God come' Effendi Khoja they gave 
 
 make (them) nineteen come ' again he said make thon (them) 
 
 in his hand 
 
 his eyes 
 akjes 
 
 that he sees (he) awaking (and) contending saying 
 
 extending 
 
 his hands shutting 
 
 again 
 
 there is nothing 
 
 he said 
 
 ' let it be 
 
 J- 
 
 ijii 
 
 -^J^ 
 
 J. 
 
 >y^ 
 
 whilst going 
 
 going out 
 
 JJ. 
 
 -^ 
 
 to the desert-plain 
 
 nine Oh ! Lord give ' 
 Elhoja 
 
 J^J 
 
 lies down 
 Oh! man' 
 
 One day 
 in front suddenly 
 making haste Effendi Khoja 
 entering in the hole of a tomb 
 near him 
 
 made themselves seen (appeared) horsemen some 
 his clothes coming near a cemetery 
 
 naked 
 
 coming 
 
 ij^ 
 
 seeing 
 
 the Khoja 
 
 taking off 
 the horsemen 
 
 ui-vy 
 
 jb 
 
 <Uj ^'AJ>J 
 
 a single Effendi Khoja on their saying ' dost thou lie why here 
 was one of the inhabitants of the tomb I ' 
 
 not finding word 
 
 ' _jj J, for ^Ji^O [123]. 
 
 ' ^^1, for ^J Ul [128]. 
 
 ' ^^1_^1, for ^\y\ [128]. 
 
a that sees looks above from below man a he begins to read 
 makes reading glorification out of time in the minaret person 
 out of time with such a detestable voice you ignorant (man) Oh ! ' 
 descending down Khoja at once dost thou read glorification 
 
 here a charitable person (if) what (harm) would it be Ah ! ' says 
 from this bad voice us (me) (expletive) should build a bath 
 
 he should free (me) 
 
 pieces of money nine in his sleep to the Khoja evening One 
 
 : (^\ jI) 'you fool.' i^ljlj, Persian word, 'ignorant.' !iX.^,lit., 
 ' you also.' This latter word' is constantly in use with * jl. ' "What a man 
 you are!' iX^^S\ [123]. 
 
 2 io<-j)Vy^l — for 'S^j^_^^\, 2nd present, indicative [76] — which 
 would be too respectful a mode of address to a man one has just called 
 a fool. 
 
 ^ i_f jjjl ij, short for ^^Jol ^tJjl ' if it had been,' 3rd cond. [79]. 
 
 * t^J>jl "ULi, short for ^dj\ -UjI) ' if he had built,' 3rd cond. [79]. 
 
 = u^Jo\ ij^j^, for l/^vJ <Lj;ljjy 'ifhe had liberated,' 3rd cond. [79]. 
 
how many I looked at Akshihir ' says Khoja ' did you know (it) 
 there is ' so many also here (expletive) there were stars 
 
 any one that sees enters to the bath one day the Khoja 
 
 he begins to speak to the bathman is vexed his mind (there is) not 
 
 <);$' J J ajjjci' t_jjci' 'c_jjiS' lAP" i^wIjus iu_i^\^ 
 
 that says to himself appears (comes) agreeable his voice to the Khoja 
 
 ^iJULs rc^'^ C^^ J'^ J^J (*1Ju5 '-rJ_^ ''^. ):' (*-^ °''^>r" 
 
 77irti-for-the-beard-of-the-people I have my voice nice so of me since ' 
 
 to a minaret straight going out from the bath immediately 
 
 glorification (it was- 12 o'clock in the limes of the day) ascending 
 
 ' (♦J.iliu. First imperfect [99]. 
 
 ^ jAiJ tor jSiiJ how many' [41] ; jJ^'v «>" ^J^Jjl 'so many.' 
 
 ^i^\j\j. Expletive [123], 'how many soever they may be.' i^\ 
 ' if it were,' conditional mood [87], page 36. 
 
 * jr^, from CS-^j^ ' to enter.' 
 
 '■ L-jy-JLo. Gerund, translated positively. 
 
 '• i(x*1j^. Dative infinitive. 
 
 ' i-tV^. We shall no longer note this kind of gerund, translatable 
 by a positive tense, as by this time it must become obvious to the learner. 
 ' ALi^r>- [144]. 
 
t/j>Li^ ^^j3L-Ki5J "^^W^^ L_iL>\i^ 
 
 #' 
 
 let them teach to those of you not knowing those of you knowing 
 Mosolmen Oh ! ' says EfFendi Nasr-il-deen Khoja One day 
 
 wings to the camel that make ye thanks many to God Almighty 
 
 '^^^V. i ' y^Ji' ^'■rf'^h^ iJ^^J ^^ cA-^^i 
 
 or and on your houses it had been given if he did not gi^e 
 
 # i^J;^i. ijXJ^Liilj ^_£^J^^ ^jLiJajs-li 
 
 it would rain on your heads it would perch on your chimneys 
 
 ascending to the pulpit in a town Effendi Khoja again One day 
 
 the air of our town with the air of this town Mosolmen Oh ! ' says 
 
 whence Effendi Khoja that say 
 
 ' jiG JjJj Analysis : ^b declinable participle of the simple verb 
 i_C«ij [105], J sign of the plaral, jX) possessive pronoun [33]. 
 
 '^ Jo jLi-^/kL, the negative form of the above [114]. ij^y^ or ^-^1-;, 
 the ,_? introduced for the sake of euphony (pronounced Mlmaydnleriniz). 
 
 ' i^tuJ^i, imperative of CS^^^y- 
 
 * vjjol, short iov jfsi\ [69], w'(?e note 2, page T ". ■ 
 
 ° lS'^} 4j^ U^'-^j^-i j' short for i_f J^J ^-iJjl 'if it had been given' 
 [246], 3rd conditional [79]. As^l comes before, this tense will not be 
 mistaken for the optative [78], 
 
 ° jjXj Jjl. Dative case plural. ' ,^s^i^ \Sj^.J:i. Syntax [210]. 
 
once again arrived at astonishment (the) congregation going 
 
 ' do not know some of us know some of us ' if he should stand up 
 in the manner one day again Khoja they-determined to say 
 
 tr" u'- )-^'^\^ o'^ j'^i}' ^~'_}'^f- ^i^-j "z^y^ 
 
 to you I brethren Oh ! ' says mounting to the pulpit explained 
 some of us ' they say they also do ye know shall say what 
 
 nice how' says Khoja do not know some of us we know 
 
 ' A=fr^i. Gerund. 
 
 ° L-jjj\j. Here is a good example of the expediency of translating 
 the gerund by a positive tense in English. The Turks accept this uncer- 
 tain term for what it is worth, and understand by it that the story is not 
 concluded ; but it does not leave in their mind any vague idea which the 
 literal translation of several gerunds one after the other might cause to a 
 European. 
 
 ' y^^ or \.'}yl: [108, 119]. The first is the softest, and of course 
 preferred. 
 
 * AL«jt,\ Dative infinitive. 
 
 ' JJ^}- This one auxiliary serves the two Arabic nouns ,lj . J J. 
 
 " ZiJ^ J^^V^ [124]. 
 
 ' J^ <yV.^ "^ C^ ^.y^> 1st future [99]. 
 
 ''JU^j^ [118]. 
 
 " j^^-*^- — ^'*^ ^^ -^ Turkish adjective, to which the possessive 
 pronoun of the 1st pierson plural is affixed [33]. 
 
what to you I believers Oh ' said mounting to the pulpit 
 Effendi Khoja no' that say the assembly 'do ye know I shall say 
 to you I not knowing ye Oh!' (said) the Khoja 'we do not know 
 again Effendi Khoja day one he said ' shall I say what 
 
 what to 3'ou I Mosolmen Oh ! ' says ascending to the pulpit 
 
 jj^ i^ Jj^^ (^=UJ) ''^(O^l ^i^^jyj Ji:>-<L'_J 
 
 we know that ' they say also they do ye know I shall say 
 
 shall I say what to you I since you know Oh ! ' Khoja (says) 
 
 t_JjL.=^ C_>^_1 " ^-iLi^ |^Jv--j^ ^r-'}i.^ 
 
 going out descending (he) down from the pulpit saying (which) 
 
 ' iJol is the 3rd person, present tense, of the indicative of (_lX,«cjl, 
 an old-fashioned word, now represented by (__N^J 'to say.' 
 
 ' j-^, 1st person plural, present tense, indicative mood of the nega- 
 tive verb l!_C«^ [108], and short for jjlj^, vide note to [119]. 
 
 ' j^aAjj^ or A.itdjj»! [101], Ut, 'may I say.' 
 * iJiJ-A. Expletive [123]. 
 
 ' sX.sJJ^a!j. Indeterminate [105]. The verbal noun of the participle 
 Liilxb (of the verb l1^^) 'having known,' with 'the addition of iJia^,J. 
 See [116, 131]. 
 
 " ^iLil, pronounced ashagha. See note, page 16. 
 
rv 
 
 PLEASING TALES 
 
 KHOJA NA8E-JL-DEEN EFFENDL' 
 
 Effendi 
 
 Nasr-il-deen 
 
 .^ly 
 
 of Khoja Jokes 
 
 ^13^" 
 
 ,liT 
 
 ,,^iiU 
 
 ,l^\ 
 
 u^)v 
 
 tellers of tales and (of) events 
 stories in this way (face) and 
 
 reporters and news Eelaters (of) 
 
 'V 
 
 aL 
 
 '■j~ 
 
 j%j 
 
 narration thus experienced (persons) 
 
 for preaching 
 
 day 
 
 one 
 
 Effendi 
 
 Nasr-il-deen 
 
 that 
 Khoja 
 
 they say 
 
 [1] 
 
 ■ Nasr-il-dcen IQioja was the mt of his day, anil to him arc attrfjutcd many 
 witticisms and eccentricities that do not belong to him. He is supposed to 
 represent the Jehya of the Arahs. Hans Andersen has immortalized him in his tale 
 of the ' Grossc Glaus imd die klein Glaus,' which is taken from an oriental tale, and 
 transformed ingeniously by this talented writer. The original of this tale will appear 
 in the author's work entitled ' Turkish Tales in English,' to which the reader is refen-cd 
 for a further account of Nasr-il-deen Klioja. Among other contradictions related of 
 Nasr-il-deen Khoja, the Tiu-ks say that 'such were the contradictions in his chai-acter and 
 thi'oughout his whole life — sometimes appearing so learned, sometimes so stupid, etc. — that 
 even after death these contradictions were kept up : and th-at ' his tomb has now an iron 
 grate, with a large gate and lock, hut no railiiir/ round it.' The author has, however, 
 visited his tomb at Aekshahir, and can attest that this is ' a vulgar error,' and that it is 
 a simple unassuming monument, with an iron rniliiuj ruioid it, and a sniidl gate and 
 lock like the i-cst of the tombs of the Mosolmen near it. 
 
halckan hahlcan dedihl and va gurejeJcsin sheiler 'dzim 
 
 trtdy truly' said that to him And ' thou Shalt see things great 
 
 heni-aiamin va achilmish giigi shimdan-sonra derim sizali 
 of the Son of man and opened (the) heavens after this (time) I say to you 
 
 gii,reh-siz meleklerini Allahin inan chikup iizermah 
 
 you shall see (his) Angels of God descending ascending upon him 
 
 ' liL>. Us- or lie- Ui-. Adverh [121]. 
 
 ^ L-j ij«^. Here again we "have the optative for the future tense 
 'SiuSs>- Sj^, but as a superior addressing inferiors, Christ uses the 
 abbreviated form \~i SjS. See note 2, page T ' , on lXju iJJ6 
 instead ofJXiu jxis. 
 
fc ^^^-^-^^ u^"^^ 
 
 .Li A$l;jo.i iTl i_,;^^;_, <_j1_j=- ^_^^.> J^-- 
 
 PUlippos ' (UdiM ana veriip jawah dahhi ' Yisa 
 Philip' said that to Mm giving answer also Jesus 'doyoulcnow 
 
 bilursin 
 
 .01 
 
 tken 
 
 Jl^Ul 
 
 c-" 
 
 'J.^ 
 
 ^-yl/v 
 
 seni 
 
 Jew t'/cera altindah agliaj'min enj'ir nan chaghirmandan evvel 
 I being underneath it of tree fig thou before calling thee 
 
 Habbi ya ' 
 Rabbi oh!' 
 
 iTi 
 
 didiki ana 
 said that to him 
 
 ['•1 
 
 Jesus 
 
 aghajenin 
 of tree 
 
 hu7ilardan 
 
 (_j.^j i^"!^ J-jUL'I) [P"^] |«^s_^ i_y~' 
 
 «;«rt</i jawah Nailianayil gur-dmn seni 
 giving answer Nathaniel I saw thee 
 
 Allahin san 
 of God thou 
 
 JL js^ ,n,,i^i 
 
 o'-' - 
 
 Jl.^1 
 
 s/« meleld Isra'ilin 
 
 san 
 
 oghlii-sin 
 
 art the King of Israel 
 
 thou 
 
 the son art 
 
 "1 ^_ji^ _ l£_: 
 
 cr^ 
 
 enjir 
 fig 
 
 thee 
 
 Sana 
 to thcp 
 
 dediki and 
 
 said that to him 
 
 verup 
 giving 
 
 jawah 
 answer 
 
 i' Ulead dedugim-ichun 
 than these dost thou make r belief for my having said 
 
 idermisin ? 
 
 gurdum altindah 
 I saw under it 
 
 ' Jjl ^^^~'}^J-^■ 'See [116, 131, 251]. 
 
 ' j^XjI- Here we see the use of the gerund as denoting a stop, with- 
 out which we could not make sense of this phrase. PoUowing our rule of 
 seeking the gerunds in their turns we have Jjl ' before Philip's calling 
 thee,' |j-C;l ' thou being under the fig tree, I saw thee,' ^'^jf the verb, at 
 the end. 
 
 ' i^yscl *^»X;J ' for my haviijg said, thee I saw under the fig tree,' 
 Analysis: cJ^JoJ verbal noun [106] » the possessive aflix [33] ^.,*i^l 
 disjunctive post-position. See [243]. 
 
U*:^.- O [V^s:- I 
 
 rp 
 
 and dalchi 
 to liim also 
 
 lidbilmidir 
 
 Nathandyil ' Yisay'i Nasaretlu oghla, Yusufin 
 
 JSTathaniel ' Jesus the Nazarene the son of Joseph 
 
 chikmak 
 
 ii. 
 
 J- 
 lir 
 
 Nasaretdcm ' 
 
 dediki 
 
 ' is it possible to come forth thing good one from Nazareth' said that 
 
 ' Yisa 
 Jesus 
 
 i [Fv] 
 
 And 
 
 dedi 
 he said 
 
 hak 
 
 ' see 
 
 va 
 and 
 
 jr 
 
 ITI ij-'-Ar' 
 
 ana 
 to him 
 
 ''V.j'^ 
 
 Philip and 
 
 Nathanailin 
 of Nathaniel 
 
 ««OT g-krmehlah yddugini 
 
 of him seeing (the) his coming to (him)self 
 
 Israellu lir Jiakikat-dah Ishtah' dedihi lukindah 
 
 an Israelite one in truth (Behold) there ' said that in the truth (regarding) 
 
 ■H' • " " *^.. .. ^.. 
 
 liem' dediki, and Natlmnay'il yokdir hiUh andah 
 from whence me ' said that to him Nathaniel ' there is not guile in liim 
 
 ^JS/ 
 
 ' Jj.jlj. See. chapter on ' Derivation ' [202] for the use of •! or J. 
 
 ''jJi-^ljj 'is it credible?' The Arabic adjective JjlJi signifies 
 receivable,' hence acceptible to belief,' thence credible.' 
 
 3 ^.Jji'or <l;-JAi^. See [28]. 
 
 * '^i,^. Let us analyse this word. Infinitive (J_C«lS' ' to come,' 
 past verbal noun tlijlS' ' the coming,' ^S^^^ 'his coming,' (the^ being 
 introduced to facilitate the pronunciation j, ^^ the possessive pronoun [33] 
 ( ij ) the termination of the accusative case [35], the ^ intervening, the 
 first i_f is dropped, and we have ^^iS^jJi' in accusative case [128]. 
 
 Alt-Cj/" [132, 249]. '^jLjl^-l [202]. 
 
 ,jj_jj [94]. 
 
f^e(fz ^^^ ardimjah ' and va biildi Philipposi, ister-ikan 
 
 he said ■ come after me ' to him and found Philip wishing 
 
 hutros-in va Andreasin Beit-saida-dmi issah PMlippos 
 
 of Peter and of Andreas from Bethsaida (expletive) Philip 
 
 diiilii ana b&lUp NatJianaUi Pliilippos idi shehrindan 
 
 said that to him finding Nathaniel Philip was from (the) town 
 
 hahindali anin hi liildik kimesnayi 61 li%' 
 
 inhis truth (regarding) of him that we have found person that we' 
 
 *L5^: 'J-:.'^j^: )j^^. J ^'^^.j^ 4'--r' 
 
 ya'm yazdiler Paigliamberler va sharia't-dah Miisa 
 
 that is to say have written the Prophets and in the law Moses 
 
 upon is to rise up and be doing', thence ' to go.' We have here a 
 good example of the recourse the Turks — by reason of the poverty of their 
 language — have to inference in order to form their words. But we must not 
 be astonished at this. Was not the English and all other languages first 
 formed in this way? and the word, once accepted into the language, lost its 
 origin : for instance, ' to con- tend,' (strive with) from the Latin ; and in 
 the German, which is now a rich language, we have, for example, an 
 original word, um-lringen, to bring about,' accepted and established as 
 ' to kill.' 
 
 ' ,J^\j^\, gerund of CS~*:^\ [105J. 
 
 " iu^\, See [123, 238]. 
 
 ^^■V.'^jV. 'they wrote,' third person plural of the perfect tense, 
 indicative mood of ^_L»jl) ' to write' 
 ■* |_y-«7;- Arabic conjunction [169]. 
 
dalcht ' Yisa gk-turdi 'yisaya ani va bulduk demek dir 
 
 also. Jesus he took to Jesus him And we have found (it signifies 
 
 sa-iia smn-'Un-stn oghla yfma san' dediki lahup and 
 to thee Simon-axt (his) son Jonas' s thou' said that looking to him 
 
 (_/*il2j ii.^_jl ''"♦•^j ^■~*^ _j- ■''^liijJ (jwli^ 
 
 butros olunsah terjimeh kalimeh bu ' dinlah Kef as 
 
 a stone if it should be translated word this 'shall be said Cephas 
 
 'LliUxil =.:^^._;c aU^ ^..^ i^f ^^i:iJ\\fr^'J^^ 
 
 etmek 'azimet Jelilah ' Yisa ertas'i-gundah dSmek dir 
 
 to make departure to Galilee Jesus In the next day signifies 
 
 ' JjJjJ jJiC»j J. Here we have two verbs evidently independent of 
 each other; they must therefore each have a sentence of their own. On 
 looking closer we shall find that the first belongs to the phi-asc in 
 parenthesis, and the second to the original phrase. 
 
 lb I-OA^ [16] dative. 
 
 '^J[140]. 
 
 ' uy^ J^i" ^^. [212]. 
 
 ° idxO from lIxJ-^.J 'to be said' or 'called' (irregular verb), which 
 is the passive form of the active L»n-4jO ' to say' ■ it would be difficult to 
 pronounce (__x.*ijJ according to rule [lOVJ, so ^ is inserted in forming 
 the passive [62] : here the optative is used for the imperative. 
 
 •^ 1 J tiX*JtJ {lit., ' to mean is.') 
 
 ' lLx*:^_1 c:^^ jr.. The accepted signification of this composite verb 
 is ' to go,' applied to persons of rank to imply that they honoured a place 
 by their presence. It is a perversion of the Arabic Ll^^ '.-, which, for 
 one of its meanings, has ' to determine or intend,' therefore to resolve 
 
*(?« An(h-eas Jcarmdashi Sam-'iM-BMrosm hir'i ilcmin 
 
 was Andreas the brother of Simon Peter one of (the) tw 
 
 a»d JiJZmp Sam-'a-m karindasM Mndii. evvela ma/rhum 
 
 to him finding Simon brother his o-wn firstly The aforesaid 
 
 Kkristos olunsaJi terjimeh Id MessiM Hi didild 
 
 Christ if it should be translated that) (the) Messiah we said that 
 
 aiil.«jjL This gerund [241] should in English be translated on making 
 ' then a pause), as the sense of the phrase here shows. 
 
 ' i_5 J, Let us take the sentence backwards from ^J and we shall 
 have ' One of the two (who were) the goers after Jesus on hearing from 
 John the word' ; and then let us go to the end of the phrase {^^\) and 
 read backwards up to {i^j) and we shall have the sense complete. 
 ^Si\ etc. ' was Andreas, the brother of Simon Peter.' Generally the best 
 way to make out a complicated sentence is first to find out the gerund and 
 read from it backwards up to the beginning, then to go to the verb and 
 read backwards from it up to the gerund. If there are several gerunds 
 you take each, of course, in its turn, and last of all the verb of the 
 sentence to which it is the winder-up. We shall be able to exemplify 
 this better as we proceed. 
 
 - *_ji^. See [223], 
 
 ' Sjl Adverb [121]. 
 
 '' ^yc*-:. The accusative case after <__>J».'. 
 ■^ lUuiU. 2nd conditional of ^^J.\ [''^]- 
 
terjamch M ) RabVi ya ' and dakhi onlar ' neh arar sini% ' 
 translated that) 'Rabbi 0' to him also they 'What seek you?' 
 
 ol dediler otttrursin neradah' demehlur mu'allem ya olunsak 
 
 He they said 'residestthou where' (means master oh ifit should be 
 
 'ifJiy i-rJjj^J vJ^'^ J^^ '^•^■^ ^ Jiilj Jili* ijj\ i_^>--> 
 
 nehradah varup dakhi onlar dedi 'baJdn gelin' anlarah dakhi 
 where going also they he said 'see ye come ye' to them also 
 
 durdiler yanindah giln ol giirdik-dah oturdugJiini 
 
 they remained near to him day that having seen his having remained 
 
 suzi ol idi yaldn own sa'at-ah o-zaman zirah 
 
 word Tlds it was near to(the)ten(th)hoiu' (at) that time beoau'e 
 
 gidan ardinjah 'yisanin istima' etmeldah yehjadan 
 
 going after (him) (of) Jesus on (making) hearing fi-om John 
 
 ' it^iji where,' adverb of place, short for ^^J;J<iJ ' in what place.' 
 
 ^ i-Cu uDi' short forJxJL jiii . This abbreviated form of the imperative 
 mood is much used in common parlance — it implies familiarity, or rather 
 that the person speaking is of higher rank than those he addresses. 
 
 ' -xijJJjl past verbal noun J,^y^ 'having sat,' declined ^5^5^/^ 
 'his having sat,' J^^JJjl, the accusative case after the verb seen.' 
 ^.i.tiJ.^ i-iiy i-e. the place where he had remained — they saw.' 
 
 ' iji^Ji^'on their having seen,' a gerund which must be translated 
 in English by ' they saw.' See note on this subject, page \ 1 . 
 
 ' c Lc-;! 1 Arabic substantive and composite verb with the gerund. 
 ^Ccjl ) &<; [132] 'whilst, 'with,' 'by,' or 'on hearing.' 
 
^^ ^y u^^ 
 
 sliakirdlerindan va IcenclH durdi yenih yehja ertisi ffiin der 
 
 from his disciples and his stood again John The next day is 
 
 allaMn Isldeh ' ^oX-itji ' Yisayeh ghan va clalcM ilci si 
 
 of God Lo ! ' seeing Jesns passing And also two of them 
 
 sea-i-la-dugini anin shaMrd ihi va-ol ded'i kuzusi 
 
 his having spoken ofhim disciples two And that he said 'the(his)lamb 
 
 t_jy_.J ^=^J Jj«^ [rA] Jo j.iij' "a.sTJjl ^^j^!^ "isTJC-il 
 
 du-niip dalilii ' Yisa gittiler ardinjah ' Yisanin isliidinjah 
 
 turning also Jesus thej- went after him of Jesus hearing 
 
 dedihi onlarah gur-meklah gueldilc-lerin'i ardmjali ra anhrin 
 snid that to them seeing their coming after him and of them 
 
 ' ^Ai^^i. See [47] accusative after the verb durdiler, understood. 
 
 ' ^^jT. The participle used adjectively to ' Jesus.' 
 
 ■* J^Li ij^} J^^ _5- Here we see again the demonstrative pronoun 
 used indeolinably with the two disciples.' jSTote that the last word is 
 in the singular [44, page 16]. 
 
 ■" ^ui^jJj^-; past verbal noun, cj3il-; »-j ' the action of having 
 spoken,' S}~^,y-^ 'his having spoken,' (thcj introduced for the sake of 
 euphony), ^■•i.jJj_j_j the accusative, the ^ being dropped and the ^ 
 intervening [35] . 
 
 * tiLsTjcil ' On hearing.' Here we see the use of this gerund, which 
 implies something more than simply ' hearing.' 
 
 •^ i^J)j\ after him.' If we analyse it, we have Jjl 'behind,' a 
 Turkish substantive ^ or ^, possessive pronoun, As- expletive, adverbial 
 termination [123]. 
 
 ' AL.j/. See [132] 'on seeing.' 
 
 2 b 
 
«»« ben ta gurdum oldighini her-karar uzerinclah anin va 
 him I And I saw having been in abode upon of him and 
 
 Uj _ ^jSjS dx+ijl '^-y^ ™.V^ — is*^ ^^ f**^/*^ 
 
 hana gundoran eimegah ta'mid sH-ilah bini amma bilmaziim 
 
 to me the sender to baptise with water me but did not know 
 
 ijjjjjl *(__>jijl '-^J!J '' ^jji^ •-^-^ ^l'^..'^ 
 
 uzerindah enwp RHihin iizerinah kimin dediki 
 
 upon him (the) descending of the Spirit ujion of whom said that 
 
 61 ta'mid idan Ruh-il-Kudiis-ilah guriraan kaldiighini 
 
 that baptiser ■ndth the Holy Ghost thou shalt see the (its) remaining 
 
 o^/i&' allahin etttmki shahadet va gur-dum. ben va dir 
 he the son of God gave-that witness and saw I And is (he) 
 
 ' iAJijj^ [134] ijj}\, ^^ysT'l, aij I, |cr^, j-;, "tJ^l, and some others 
 amalgamate with the preceding word, and serve as a kind of stop and a 
 conjunction. Here it is declined, and the requisite possessive pronoun 
 introduced [210] (Jit., its upon,' or Ms upon.') Vide note 7, page T 
 
 '' J\j J . Persian and Arabic. 
 
 ' -:.ijjj_jl past verbal noun JoJ;^ [84] |^;jJjl 'his or its having 
 been,' ^'^jjej-djl or ^jijujiljl (or for the sake of euphony , jiijjj.l, 
 page 16), the accusative after the verb giirdum, I saw.' 
 
 * <iij ijjl i-C*^. Here we find the use of the post-position i^'n\, denot- 
 ing a pause, otherwise the sense would not be so clear. 
 
 * c—'j^J '-^W- -A-Uother pause at the gerund. 
 
 " ^.jdi ii\!j\j\ stands as one word in the accusative case after 
 gurursan, and requires a hiatus nearly equal to a comma. 
 
 ' (oi-V.^ A.^<u'. A composite verb [64], the verbal noun of the 
 declinable participle of iJ->^^'^} [71] ^^} doing,' ergo ' the doer.' 
 
 ' iXi-j\- This word is pronounced jii.1 for reasons given in page 16. 
 
hilmazdim am hen va idi lendan evvel zirah oluntaisMur evel 
 did not know him I And he was before me because be was before 
 
 sH-ilah ben ichun olmasi zalier hrayileh amma 
 
 with water I for (that) he should be manifest(ed) to Israel but 
 
 ^ <tGjJJ ^ii^} CIJlJI^^ ^s^~^ ^^^ •' '*'^ ^'-^'^.^ J-.4JU' 
 fo;j ' dediki idup shehadet va yehya gzieldim ta' mid-idereh 
 
 I ' said that making witness And John ' I came baptizing 
 
 etdigini nizUl gii-wer-jm- gibi samddan Muhm 
 
 its making descent like a dove from (the) heavens of (the) Spirit 
 
 ' *t>ui^', short for aAj^ uLj, Ist imperfect, indicative mood of the 
 negative form, LLX4.-«i-J, of the active verb CS~*^^ to know.' f"*^, 
 ' I do not know.' (-^yj^. ' I did not know ' [108, 119]. 
 
 = ..^J ^^.^ JbUi iJjL^l. The conjunction ^f^iS joins all 
 the preceding words together, and they run one into the other till you 
 come to ^sfs^\, where you .stop; lit., to, Israel — manifest — to be — for, 
 I came.' 
 
 ' lI/iAj^ A-^wL'. The gerund lLS^AjI 'doing,' with the word *J!^ 
 ' 1 came,' conveys an action being done wliilst walking, — as I walked 
 along, I came baptizing.'* 
 
 * ^S is one of those post-positions which, like j-ty^} and <Uj1, are 
 amalgamated with the word preceding them. 
 
 * jXi JCLil pronounced et-digini or et-dilgini. Here is the appearance 
 of an accent on the first syllable, hut it is only on account of the double 
 letters td coming together, which of course throws the weight of the 
 syllable on the preceding vowel. 
 
 * This gerund as well as three others [72] are translated by the word 'doing,' there 
 being in English no exact equivalent for each; hut they do possess a different power and 
 use too slight to be explained, but which a little practice and attention will best point 
 nut to the learner. 
 
1/ehya ertasi giln ta'm'id-iier-idi yeJvya oradah va valc'eolup 
 
 John The next day was baptising John there and took place 
 
 ^jj^ iX^,Ul ^lijil «A$lijoj 'i^.j^ ^)^,^c ^^ ''V.j'^ 
 
 hu%iisi allaliin Ishteh ' didila guriip ' Ysay'i gelan kendilyah 
 his lamb of God Lo ' said that seeing Jesus coming to (him)self 
 
 — HXm^ J_j1_jJ _jJ r- J Jot ^j ' ^:jj>U^ JjLjO i^ 
 
 leimesna ol der lU raf'-ider giinahini dilnyanin hi 
 
 person that is This takes up (away) (its) sins of (the) world that 
 
 j^Jcj i<, j_j-if /♦^T^ ik^f*^ ~ iL^S:_C! ^ ^^} ^ Si\ ^ 
 
 lendan lA gueliyor hir-adam 'akhimja dedim-ki anin-ich-ij.n ben 
 than me that is coming a man after me I said that for of him I 
 
 ' *j1jj\ ' there,' adverb of place ; short for ij j j\ ' in that place.' 
 ^ ^»r i^^ujjjl, an adverb of time. 
 
 ^ ijj,X-i. See [28]. It is easier to pronounce kendilyah than 
 kend'iyah. 
 
 * ^Is, the declinable participle of iJ-CkSi. It is here used as an 
 adjective to 'Jesus,' which is in the accusative case, after i—i^jS. 
 
 ° i—!^jif, the gerund of CS^j^ ' to see.' It serves, like a comma, 
 to denote a pause in the sentence, vide [243]. Observe, also, how the 
 dative case stands first [216], to himself ih^ coming Jesus he saw.'* 
 
 ° itCi jjl> said that.' They generally take occasion to breathe here, 
 and make these two words one. 
 
 ' ^lifiXLjJ. Syntax [210]. 
 
 « J,^l S)\. See [135]. 
 
 * So that, as we see, geninds may often, if not always, be translated as an active and 
 positive form of the verb — ' he saw,' not ' seeing,' which latter, in English, giyes the sense 
 an indefinite idea, which becomes puzzling in a long sentence. The learner should take 
 note of this observation, and practice in translating any long phrase he may come across, 
 of which he will find abundance, particularly in letters, where the writer endeavours to 
 make the whole letter as one period, to be read through, merely di-amng a long breath 
 now and then where the gerunds occur, to enable him to proceed to the end ! 
 
anin len ohmmisMer hendan evvel Id dir ol gilan 'ahlimjah 
 of him I he was before me that he is that coming after me 
 
 '^}\^\ yM^'\ ^J (jj) '^JiT 'j~''>-^^ '^^.J^i^h 
 
 ahwal ha. ' dey'ilim layek cliuzmegah tasmasini labuchlerinin 
 
 matters This ' I am not fit to loosen the latchets of his shoes 
 
 Beit 'alradali olan otahsindah Ardanin va leifiyat 
 
 in Eethahera (being the other side) of Jordan and circimistanoes 
 
 ' iLs'V^. Is^ An adverbial termination. See [123]. 
 
 ^ 1^, the verbal noun of the participle ^^ coming,' — -' the comer.' 
 
 ' Jj^ U-^- 'S'«« [137]. 
 
 * ^ <U»2J' Jcj Jjs-jjil) uC! 'of him of his shoes its latchet,' vide 
 Syntax [210]. Here we have first, iXil, the first substantive in the 
 genitive case, before JCIj ji.»-jju, which has the possessive pronoun ^ 
 not dropped. Next we see i_C1j jls-»ju >_D1 as one word, the first sub- 
 stantive in the genitive case plural, before ic^~: i^^^', which has the 
 required possessive pronoun i^--, with the ^ dropped, and the ^^ 
 inserted [128]. It wiU be observed that we are often referring to this, 
 and that we have placed this rule at the head of the rules in the Syntax. 
 It forms one of the peculiarities of the language, and it is desirable that 
 the learner should be well grounded at first on this point, as it will 
 save him a great deal of trouble as he proceeds in his reading. 
 
 '^ i^\^, dative infinitive, vide note 9, page 28. 
 
 ° JU=-^ )J- Here, again, the demonstrative pronoun »j is used 
 as if it were indeclinable, and has much more force joined to an Arabic 
 plural. 
 
 ' ^Jij^ i'Ai-: ijj\ >SjJ>j\, vide Syntax [210], 'being on its other side 
 cf Jordan.' 
 
imdi ' dedilerlci ana idivp su al una anlar va 
 
 no-w ' said that to him making question to him they And 
 
 deyil Paighmnber ol yalAod va Elia yalcliod Messih san eguer 
 not prophet that or and Elias or (the) Messiah thou if 
 
 !{p\ ^ji-<^ jj-*=<:[ri] Ji^j>jl s^^ uyfs? ^S^\ 
 
 onlarah dalcM yehya idersin ta'tnid nichtin isin 
 
 to them also John ' dost thou make haptism why if thou art 
 
 amma ta'mid iderim sU-zlah hen ' dcdild vcrup jaioah 
 
 hut baptise with water I ' said that giving answer 
 
 henim iilmazsiniz am Id diirur Mmemali Mr aranizdah 
 
 Of me you do not loiow him that stands person one among you 
 
 ' t)^V. 3 ^^"^ °'''' ^^° conjunctions for one [147]. 
 
 ^ t-C^ujJ short for ij'iwj, which would be difficult to pronounce ; the 
 a is therefore dropped: iJlujl issin (note, page 16) with Ji^j is often 
 made one word, and pronounced deyilsin for deyil issin, if thou art 
 not;' [123] and this can here be done perfectly without incurring the 
 risk of its being taken for deyil sin, the affirmative, thou art not,' be- 
 cause it is preceded by jS 1 ' if,' vide [143] ; *.jA^t,:i«S' for a.uj1 ja:u^. 
 
 ^ ^}ye 'with water.' iLl is one of those post-positions like t^f^}, 
 which, when they occur, are joined immediately to the word, and form 
 one with it [132]. 
 
 * sCi'S\j\, Lit., 'from the middle (of) you.' \j\ is a Turkish substan- 
 tive, yS the possessive pronoun, 2nd person plural [33], and iJ post- 
 position [130]. 
 
 * JX-w-uLj, the 2nd person, present tense, indicative mood, of the 
 negative verb tJ_C».^J-j ,' of the simple verb lLC^I-j ' to know,' 
 vide [108]. 
 
aj)«z» Mj(ffl idanin berriyedah ' dedild dakhi ol dersin ne 
 
 avoice of ci-ying iii(the)desert ' said that also He ' sayest thou what 
 
 Paigliamher JEsli'aya nijeh M diiz eileyin yolini Rabhin im 
 (the) Prophet Esaias as straight make his road thy Lord's I am 
 
 idiler Pharisilerdan Icitnesneler gutiderilan ol va seu-i-ladi 
 
 were (of )from(the)Pharisees persons sent those And ' spoke 
 
 tm-ned to _• for the sake of euphony. It may be also JJCjjo.^", as the 
 speaker chooses. The vj^of i(Ji5oi=- is the possessive pronoun required 
 by the rule in Syntax [210] : '0/ thyself in thj truth.' 
 
 ' i_C Jul Iju, composite verb [64]. \dJ Arabic noun; i_C>Jo! deoHna- 
 ble participle of u-^^,1 [71]. ^^Jol ' the doing;' J3 Jul 'of the doing,' 
 genitive case. 
 
 ^ LJ^^. "^'j- ^"^ Syntax [210]. ^_jj 'his road;' ^_yJ_JJ or 
 ^-!)j the accusative case [35]. 
 
 ' >-Oj\ JjJ, composite verb or not, as we please to consider it. ;• J 
 is a Turkish adjective, meaning 'flat,' and used as a substantive, with the 
 auxiliary tlCilii ; or we may call it a separate word 'straight,' and 
 JtljJ, short for jiC- <uljl, or j> iAj}, or j> A}\, the 2nd person plural 
 imperative, make ye ' [69]. 
 
 ^ AS 't.s^j, adverb of comparison, 'as.' 
 
 * Jjl Here we have Jjl used as an indeclinable demonstrative pro- 
 noun, and placed before^ Ai*wf-^ ' persons,' in the plural. It has much 
 more force than if it were declined, when the J would be dropped. 
 See [27, 31]. 
 
 " fjj'^ft tbe passive of the declinable participle ^j-ijS, which is 
 formed by the insertion of J, vide [107], ' sent.' 
 
jjj' " Jwj ^.» LLi _ ijr«j *,«S -J ,_5iX4jl lii ' Jj L>j J.15 \s\ 
 
 ol ' Mia mi sin Mm sin san imcW hi sordiler and 
 
 he ' Elias art thou ? what art thou ? thou now ' that asked to him 
 
 jaivah yoh ' Paigliamhermisin ol san ' &'&' diyilim ' &ttj 
 
 (he) answer 'No' ' Prophet art thou that thou' said 'I am not' also 
 
 li%i ta liV dedihr him sin san' ana imdi verdi 
 
 (of) us in order that' they said 'who art thou thou' to him Now gave 
 
 halcin-dah Icendunin vireJi-yiz jaivab gunderan-lerah 
 
 regarding (in thy truth) of thyself we may give answer to the senders 
 
 ' JjJjij^ \S\ 'to him they asked.' There are some verbs that take 
 the dative case, some the ablative. Grammarians have given a list of 
 them under different heads («;«(?« Davids, page 112). "We have not inserted 
 any list in this work as, practically, it is of little use, and would have 
 served only to occupy much space : the sense generally, and a little habit 
 and practice, will soon lead the learner to make the distinction, as soon 
 as he has entered into the construction of the language, and idealized it, 
 which he will best do by reading as much as he can, first with Hteral 
 translation, and next with free translation, until he is enabled to under 
 stand whatever is put before him. 
 
 - i_r_j -<Uj1. The ^-1. is the sign of a question asked [120]. 
 
 ^ i_?J p» < L^\^ [64]. It will be observed that many other Turkish 
 verbs are used as auxiliaries, besides those noted in the Grammar. 
 lLSC^j. '-r'''^y>- 'to answer.' ^ t_fjj, accusative [27]. 
 
 ^ iij.AijS', verbal noun of the declinable participle (^^, Jjji 'the 
 sender') of the verb CS^j^^ ' to send ;' Jt the plural termination ; 
 b the sign of the the dative case [127]. 
 
 ^ UMAs- lX15.JC$^. See [30]. Genitive case of i-C J,^, the ,_$ being 
 
lawiluhr va imamler oraslialim-dan yahudiler Icaclian 
 
 Lcvites and (Imams) priests from Jerusalem the Jc-r^s wlien 
 
 sM-aZ (^eyw «?'re X'm» s«re ' and Tci gunAerdiler 
 
 question saying ' art thou what thou ' to him that they sent 
 
 inlcar etmadi ilcrar edup daklii ol ideler 
 
 denial did not make confession making also He they should make 
 
 dahhi anlar ihrar eiladi deyu deyilim Messih hen' va 
 
 also They he confession made saying ' am not (the) Messiali I ' and 
 
 noun, and not, as it might at first be taken for, the particle post-position 
 i_S, sign of the accusative case : Of John his witness, this is.' 
 
 ' (jLs:^ is a Turkish adverb of time, not much used ; they prefer using 
 i^^V^j at the time that;' ergo, when.' 
 
 ' .J J is short for ^-'^; J, gerund of (._C*.0 ' to say.' It is put at the 
 end of a quotation, as we would in English at the beginning— he said' so 
 and so. See Expletives [123]. 
 
 ' JiiJoJ Jl^) composite verb [64]. Jii^\ is the 3rd person plural 
 of Ist optative of LlC«iJi [67J. 
 
 ^ L-j^S^\j\ji\. See [64]. (^^.Jol, gerund of i_C*::-;l [72]. 
 
 * ^S^\j\ij\. &«[64]. iJ-A^;l is the negative form of Cji^\, 
 3rd person singular, 1st perfect, indicative mood. See [108]. 
 
 "^ *.'! J^J, negative form of the defective verb ^;1. Sec [89]. 
 
la 'ynayet ammd verildi musd-ilah shar'i'at zirali 
 
 and grace but was given by (or with) Moses (the) law Because 
 
 V* 'lS-V^^ '^^■^^ -f-^ (^) - ^}'^.'^ ir^ u:^iLi=- 
 
 AitfA allahi geldi hizeli 'ysa masih-ilah hahihat 
 
 any God came to us witb (or by) Jesus the Messiah truth 
 
 oZara Icqjaghindah Babanin gitrmamish-der Icimsah valut-dah Mr 
 being in his bosom of God has not seen any one in (at) time one 
 
 l-a dir shahadeti yaliya-nin va eiladi layan ani oghul yehaneh 
 this is the witness of John And has made manifest him son only 
 
 ' ^.^j, the passive form of lLC»^j ' to give [107]. 
 
 ^ ffJJl, the accusative case of tdll. 
 
 ^ ^<jb. ride [43]. 
 
 ■* iSijAs^Ji i-Cblj. See [210]. The first noun is in the genitive 
 case, and the second, r^^y, takes the possessive pronoun ^, changing 
 J into f [19] ^U-_jJi ; and the ^ intervening between it and ^<:>, the 
 the i_s is dropped' and it becomes i:.uil?-jjj [35, ISO]. 
 
 * (O^^l, declinable participle of ij^}\ and here the person' being is 
 understood, which person is immediately afterwards explained. 
 
 ° Jx.l iUUl) 'the only son.' As they use the Persian word ( Cs}, 
 
 they have given it the Persian form. luUl) is a Persian adjective, 
 meaning unique.' 
 
 ' ,_f jJjI ^jL). S«e 'Composite verbs' [64]. The auxiliary is the 3rd 
 person singular of the 1st perfect of CS^\ [65], 'he did,' or 'he made.' 
 
 » CiJJ^--.r=<:. See [16]. 
 
 ' ^jL^. See Syntax [210]. This ^ must be the possessive pro- 
 
^J:^ UW^\ 
 
 ffl^(?«i ^ynayet 'ynayet-ichun liem dolu-sindan anin 
 
 have taken grace for grace both from his fullness of him 
 
 ' ^Ai-:Jjt Si\. Vide Syntax [131, 210]. 
 - »j», conjunction [160]. 
 
 ' iJaSI, 1st pers. plural of the 1st present, indicative mood of ^_^ I 'to 
 take.' There is no word in the Turkish that comes nearer to the meaning 
 of ' receive.' (j-^i' is ' to catch.' In a late version of St. John's Gospel, 
 the translator has tried to convey an impression of we have been 
 favoured,' i.e., it was granted to us,' by using ^jJjl -^ii^, but he has 
 bungled it, probably from not knowing the true meaning of the Arabic 
 word j-^rii^, which, with the auxiliary ijy^^, can only be interpreted 
 we were manifested.' He might more properly have used the passive 
 ^J^i^ and ^S:}i\ j^^k:^ nj: it was made manifest to us,' that is, 'we 
 were favoured,' hence, we received.' This wiU show how difficult, if not 
 impossible, it is, sometimes to express the simplest idea in this barbarous 
 tongue; and the more elegant the language, the more confused it becomes, 
 as the same expression may mean half-a-dozen things, till, by inference, 
 it is brought to bear upon the sense. As we have already observed [note 2, 
 page 74] it requires a conjuror to divine the sense of their diplomatic 
 sentences, which not two Turks would interpret alike, each explaining the 
 phrase according to his appreciation of the Arabic words used ; and, as most 
 Turks have but a limited idea of this language, they generally contrive 
 to pervert the original meaning of the word, and turn it, very awkwardly, 
 to signify what they wish to express. In the same way as it is related 
 of a scribe, who, on being asked to write a letter, replied that ' he could 
 not, because, being lame, he could not accompany the missive to read it, 
 no one being able to decipher his writing.' — So, when anything out of 
 the way is expressed, the composer, or a man on his part, is required to 
 accompany the document to explain it ! 
 
nida-idtip va ider shahadet ana yeliyah gurduk jellahni 
 crying and makes witness to him John we saw the glory 
 
 hendan evvel gelan 'akhimjah ol dur lU dedligim lenim dediki 
 before me coming after me that is this my having said of me said 
 
 lieppimiz hu va idi hendan evvel zirah olmisMer 
 
 all of us we And he was before me because (he) has been 
 
 J substituted in the pronunciation for the sake of euphony. Vide note, p. 16. 
 ' cLiJ.^ giirduh, and not gurdik. Vide note page 16. 
 
 * L_;^Jol L\j. Vide [64, 72]. Observe here that the last letter of 
 t_jjJol is written indifferently, with one or with three dots; but this 
 gerund is generally pronounced with a p,' idwp, although more often 
 written with a ' b.' 
 
 ^ *^JiJj is the declinable participle (JJSiii 'having said,' (of the verb 
 
 lIX+j J ' to say,') which is also a verbal noun, and to it is attached the 
 
 possessive pronoun a, vide [33], and the . is introduced and the lLj 
 
 turned to ^.^ for the sake of euphony. /»^JiJJ ' my having said,' i.e., 
 
 spoken of by me.' 
 
 * Jcs'V*^- This analysed is t__-Jic Arabic substantive, behind,' after;' 
 * possessive pronoun, <!^ expletive [123]. 
 
 * Ji', declinable participle of lLCJS' ' to come ' [71]. 
 
 " Jj^ ii.i'^j ^*^-' i^^''^ me before,' or from me before,' the particle 
 ^J being the sign of the ablative case. Vide Post-positions' [131]. 
 
 ' jj ij!j-^j\ he has been,' 3rd person of 2nd perfect, indicative 
 mood of (J^j^ [76] ; j J is added to be more precise in expression. 
 Vide [235]. 
 
 * U-Jb. — L—^ is a declinable adverb with the possessive pronoun j • 
 [33]. 
 
V L^jj ^^\ 
 
 heni-adam kalam ol doghmusMer-der allahdan mijak iradetindan 
 
 man word That they were bom from God but from the will 
 
 mahan aramizdah mash-hii,n va hakikatleh va 'yinayet oldi 
 
 a place among us full and with truth and grace became 
 
 oghlinin lir yaliniz habanin jdlaUni anin va hiz tUtti 
 
 of son one only of the Father his glory of him and we held 
 
 count of rule [210], which is dropped, as the ^ intervenes between (_>o]_;l 
 ' its will,' and the post-position ^^ J. Vide [131]. 
 
 ' ils:^\. A disjunctive conjunction ( 1 ) 
 
 "jJ^^_jJ. ride [235]. 
 
 ■^ |«ol^'-j is Arabic, and means the son of man.' The Turks often 
 adopt composite Arabic words, in order the better to express their 
 ideas, just as we might do in English by drawing from the Latin 
 or Greek, — with this difference, that in English almost any word we may 
 require has been already introduced, whereas in Turkish it is being 
 adopted out of dire necessity. 
 
 * iLiJi=-_j c:_~i_l:^ J. The a! serves here for both nouns. 
 
 ^ Jjuljl ' ly aiuoug us.'' »J is the post-position, sign of the ablative 
 case [130]. 
 
 ^ lS'^'^ froDi (Jy^i^t OT& model [65, 76]. 3rd person, perfect tense 
 of indicative mood. 
 
 ' ^_5Ji>- ^\. Vide Syntax [210]. Ji^, the 2nd (Arabic) noun, 
 has the possessive affix: ^f, which is dropped, the ^ intervening [128] 
 iJL»- 'his glory;' |_jJ^ 'his glory' (accusative case) [35]. 
 
 " J'ilijl. Here again lit. ' oi his son.' ^X^j^ 'his son;' Jc— iijl 
 (pronounced oghlunin) of his son;' [35] the ,_s being dropped as usual, and 
 
^^■^^J:} (Us-'^ 
 
 ( inananlerah ismineh 
 (to tte believers to Ids name i.e.) 
 
 aw?rt/ olaler oghuller'i alUhin 
 
 They they may be the children of God 
 
 adamin ni wadetindan lahmin 
 
 of man nor (by the) from the wiU of flesh 
 
 y^ani) jumleh-sineh idanlarin IcahUl 
 to all of those mating reception 
 
 hi 
 
 verdi 
 
 that he gave 
 
 4j 
 
 Icandan 
 
 Icudret 
 power 
 
 ni 
 
 nor from blood neither 
 
 ' ^JyjjJi, a declinable participle of i_C«ijl. lo'^^ 'doing;' used 
 substantively, the doing,' or ' doer;' JjiXil 'the doers,' nominative plural, 
 and <SjLiSi\ of the doers,' genitive plural [71]. 
 
 ^ ii^iL*^, Arabic noun, takes the possessive affix ^-j, because it is 
 the 2nd of two nouns coming together. Syntax [210]. The ^ is dropped, 
 and 1^ intervenes between the noun and the post-position a. Vide [127]. 
 
 " ^_ji*j. Vide [169]. 
 
 ■* <U/»^1. Let us analyse this simple word, in order to fix on the 
 memory the use of the possessive affix. *-;\ a name ;' i^-*--;! ' his 
 name ;' iUx»-<j1 to his name,' [35] the ^_5 being dropped and the ^ 
 interposing [127]. 
 
 ' iJjUlijl, declined participle of fjXi\uj\ or (_»-♦.; lil 'to believe.' 
 
 j_^lilijl 'believing;' used substantively, ' believer.' JjULjI 'believers,' 
 (nominative plural). isAjlilijl 'to the believers' (dative plural). 
 
 « i^)i^j\ J^\, vide Syntax [210], 'Of God his children.' The o 
 is the possessive affix, which the second noun takes when the one pre- 
 ceding it is in the genitive case. 
 
 ' }^^\. 3rd person plural of the lat optative mood of (j^^\ ' to be.' 
 Vide [78]. 
 
 " ^JcJjli^ JCks'. Observe once more the possessive affix ^5, on ac- 
 
U«^.»j (L^- 1 
 
 kendiinin-lci-lerah o hilmadi oni va dilnya Ichalk olundi 
 
 to his very own He did not know him and (the) world was created 
 
 ani liken etmadiler kabUl ani va kenduninkil'i geldi 
 
 him But did not make reception him and his very own came 
 
 ' ^_j'jJ.l (_^i-. A composite verb. (_^=-, an Arabic noun and the 
 auxiliary ^_^-«Jjl, of which this is the 3rd person of the 1st perfect, indica- 
 tive mood [76]. Vide also [56, 64]. 
 
 ' (Jl. The learner will perceive that the word is written ani and oni, 
 the sound of the \ being between the two. Throughout this work, when a 
 word can be pronounced different ways, it will be written differently in 
 different places, and this will accustom the student to learn by analogy, 
 and induce him to use his reasoning and comparing faculties in other 
 instances, so as to make discoveries for himself ; — for example : In 
 one place he will find the post-position iJ translated by,' in another 
 it will stand 'in;' he wUl thence naturally infer that it means both, 
 according to the place it holds in the sentence. 
 
 ^ * J_».CL)_jJc^. Let us analyse this terrible-looking word and we shall 
 find it a very simple one. ^d^ ' self,' [30] JZj^ ' of self,' ^J ' own,' 
 [36,228, 229], J the sign of the plural, s the post-position, s'ign of the 
 dative case^ [127]. 
 
 * ^LiXjj.x:^. The ^ or Ji, when added to a word, denotes pos- 
 session. Fide [202, 229]. 
 
 ^ Jj_S^\, the negative form of the verb i-lCcj.^ ' to ^°>' ^^^^ [S'^'\- 
 It is the 3rd person plural of 1st perfect, indicative mood, thus : 
 ^li JcjI ■ they did ;' JjS^\ ' they did not do ;' and J^ is the Arabic 
 substantive forming a composite verb with the auxiliary iJJ^^il, or 
 rather its negative tlX*.^! [56, 64]. 
 
adami Tier gelan dilmjayah hi idi 
 
 man every coming to tlic world that was 
 
 = <dLt UJj ^jsi\ iOLijH'J 
 
 anin lah va iiinya idi diinyadah 
 
 by him and (the) world he was In the world lightens (makes light) 
 
 i^ 
 
 jy 
 
 .. r 
 
 
 
 nilr 
 
 hah 
 
 he 
 
 Hght 
 
 True 
 
 
 J^.^ji.r^ 
 
 
 tenw'ir ider 
 
 ' Coming-into-the-world-every,' is a phraseological adjective to the 
 substantive man,' which is in the accusative case after the active verb 
 lightens.' This construction shows the Hindo-Germanic origin of this 
 Tartaric language, although the connection between it and the tongues of 
 Western Europe may be prior to the first departure of the tribes from the 
 plains of Hindustan. The author ventures to observe, on the authority 
 of Dr Latham,* that the Huns certainly existed in and about the Turkish 
 Empire full 1200 years B.C. f ; so that the separation from the European 
 branches (which went more north, and afterwards overwhelmed the 
 Eoman Empire with Goths, Visigoths, etc.), must have been anterior 
 to that epoch ; and during so long an interruption of communication be- 
 tween the northern and southern cousins, many changes and mixtures of 
 race must have occurred. This would also account for the striking 
 difference between the Tartaric and European languages, which has 
 induced philologists to imagine them to have had a separate origin. In 
 regard to the Semitic languages, however, there are too many conflicting 
 dissimilarities, and they are too diametrically opposed to admit of the 
 belief of their having had any connexion whatever with the Tartaric 
 until the Turkish was engrafted in later years on the Arabic. 
 
 ^ <dLl. ride [135]. 
 
 * Vide Lecture delivered by Dr. Latham at the meeting of the Royal Asiatic Society, 
 2lst January, 1854, and published by the Society. 
 
 f In regard to their identification with the Khita (the Hittites of Scripture) vide the 
 chapter on Ethnology, page 208 of the author's work entitled ' Lares and Penates.' 
 Ingram and Cook, London, 1853. 
 
r \^j, ^\^\ 
 
 '^ J3\ '^iLi^^J)^j\ 
 
 i^ ' ^j^. c:j jI^^ 
 
 anin sebebilah adamlerin-jumlhi 
 
 /a shehadet vereh 
 
 by means of him the whole of men 
 
 that that he may give witness 
 
 «J^\ °i_^j-*!j\ jy Jjl 
 
 
 anj'aJc olmayHp niir ol 
 
 kendusi inaneh ler 
 
 but not being light that 
 
 Himself should believe 
 
 >»^-jol Ji.^jl JL,P^^j=cl _ti;Cc-;l 
 
 «Ll.<!j^Li V^'^u^-l'^Jj' 
 
 olunmush idi irsal eimek-icMi,n shahedlik ol nij.rdan uturii 
 
 had been sent for to make witness regarding that light 
 
 ' a J J ciJjLjj. A composite verb, i^.; , is the 3rd person of the 
 optative mood [101] of lLC»Jj 'to give,' which serves as an auxiliary to 
 the substantive CLJjl^-i. 
 
 ^ ^.^Aas^ \SX^ii\. The first substantive is in the genitive plural, 
 and the second Arabic substantive takes the possessive pronoun ^^^. 
 Vide Syntax [210]. 
 
 3 ,)j,.„.,.,i lJ31 {lit., 'with or by reason of him.') Vide [132, 135], 
 and Syntax [210]. The i_f in dJ-..— ; is the posses.sive affix, to which il 
 is added. 
 
 ^ ^j:^ 'he himself.' Fide [30]. 
 
 ' i—jy^j\ is the negative form of the verb (J^j^, the gerund of 
 which is i-rjjij^- Vide [83]. 
 
 " J=rl. Vide [123, 150, 153]. 
 
 ' jy'jl. '^Jc?* post-positions used with the ablative case [ 137.] 
 
 * Lli3jJ!iLi. Fif^e 'Derivation' [197]. 
 
 ' Ui=f)- '^^^ [134, 135]. 
 
 "> ^Jj\ iji^j\. Vide [76]. This is the 3rd person of the 2nd 
 pluperfect, indicative mood of ^J^A. 
 
 2 a 
 
var-idi haijat andnh yaradilmadi an-siz shei yaradilmuh 
 
 was (the) life By him was not created without him thing created 
 
 ziilmetdah dahhi nUr idi niiri adamlerin va Tiayat 
 
 in (the) darkness also (The) light was the light of men and life 
 
 «&A &M etmadi idrak oni va zulmet dia-verdi 
 
 From God did not make comprehension it and (the) darkness light gave 
 
 idi yshya ddi va onin var idi adam hir ersal ol&nmish 
 
 was John (the) name and of him was man a had been sent 
 
 Vj^ U'liy ^^ ^ T?^ 'UJ^^ t^l-'OL;^ '^yij^ [v] 
 
 nourdan ilturil ta Tci geldi shehadUich'&n marhiim 
 
 regarding the light in order that came for mtness The aforesaid 
 
 ' y^\. Vide [203]. 
 
 ^ ^■X*^\ lLS\jO\. a composite verb formed of an Arabic noun lL/!iJ1 
 and the negativeform of the auxiliary uX^rijl. Vide [64]. 
 ' JUJjl JL;l r* [64 and 82]. 
 
 ' ^jli-Cl 'of him hia name.' The double use of the pronoun 
 and possessive pronoun together is one of the peculiarities of the Turkish 
 language. Vide Syntax [210, 227]. 
 
 * Jg^sT. The \ is placed over the last ^ to denote that is pro- 
 nounced ( a ). 
 
 " AjJ r^. This word is used to avoid having recourse to the 3rd person 
 singular t\ 'he,' which would not be so respectful. Vide Syntax [223]. 
 
 ' i.^\ Whenever this word occurs it is pronounced in conjunction 
 with the word preceding it as if the two formed one word : it admits of 
 a hiatus equal to half a comma or a comma, according to the sense [134]. 
 
 * . J)l. The same observation holds good for this post-position [137]. 
 
THE FIEST CHAPTEE 
 
 GOSPEL ACCOEDINO TO ST. JOHN. 
 
 ^^jj^ 
 
 L^ll*^ 
 
 
 u 
 
 l^\ 
 
 iitirah yazdtighi yiiliannanin engil 
 
 aocordinff to the "writina- of John, — The Evangile. 
 
 allahin Icaldm va 
 
 of God (the) Word and 
 
 ibtida-iah hu idi 
 
 ill the beginning This was 
 
 Tcalam iMida-dah 
 
 (the) Word In (the) beginning 
 
 allah va idi 
 
 for /jzfo^ »(J yaradildi an-dan shei her 
 one any and was created by him thing Every 
 
 var-idi 
 was (being) 
 
 Am Tcaltim 
 
 he (the)W"ord God and was byhis side [near] 
 
 «W yanindah allaliin 
 was near of God 
 
 ' ij-ijJjV. is ^ verbal noun JjiJiV.) of the verb (_f^jV. 'to write,' the 
 ij is turned into i [19, 57], thej introduced for the sake of euphony, 
 and the ij is the possessive affix taken by the 2nd substantive, the first 
 of which is in the genitive case. Fi'& Syntax [210. J 
 
 ^ ijU:;jl r«rfe[16.] ' O'^l^jls- Fi'rfe [90 and 91.J 
 
 ' iJ^JJl genitive case of Allah. Vide [15] and Sjmtax [210.] 
 iAxjL — j^b side,' eiV. '^^^ side,' jfAijli ' by his side' ; the ^ of (Jl) 
 is dropped, and the ^ intervenes between the word and the post-position 
 JJ. F«*[130.] 
 
 j>. Expletive. Vide [123.] 
 
 
 r«(?e[43.] 
 
POWERS OF THE ROMAN LETTERS. 
 
 "We must request the learner to observe that in representing the Turkish 
 words by italic characters, we have, in order to avoid, as much as possible, 
 the use of the double vowels, adopted the plan of using the 
 
 u to represent the French 
 
 in 'deux.' 
 
 il „ ,, u as in the article ' du. 
 
 furore,' or like oo, in ' boot.' 
 fino,' or like ee, in seen.' 
 
 it „ Italian u in 
 
 i „ „ i in 
 
 i ,, French e in 'et^.' 
 
 a ,, „ a like o in 'father.' 
 
 g always for the hard, and / for the soft sound. 
 
 gh will represent the Arabic i guttural. 
 
 hh ,, ,, ^ like the German (guttural) ch. 
 
 s always soft. 
 
 z always sharp, like the s in reason.' 
 The letter Q, when strongly aspirated, is introduced in the word on 
 the system followed by Eichardsnn ; but, if clipped in the pronunciation, 
 it is represented by ( , ) , and the hamza ( . ) wiU be denoted by ( ' ) over 
 the letter; thus, Ubj Una' an. 
 
 All the unmarked vowels have the same value as the a, e, i, u, in 
 the English words iat, let, lit, hut, etc. ; and note that the i is neijcr 
 used in its English power of I ' (personal pronoun). 
 
 In reading Turkish, the learner is requested to bear in mind that 
 there is no predominating accent on any particular syllable of a word, as 
 in English: thus, extravagant and communicate would be pronounced in 
 Turkish extravagant, communicate, almost without stress or emphasis on 
 any special part of the word : at least, it is better, at first, to read each 
 syllable quietly, than to put an accent on a word according to English 
 ideas, as it would be almost sure to fall on the wrong syllable. The only 
 
 1 
 
a POWERS OF THE ROMAN LETTERS. 
 
 accent we know of in Turkish falls on the vowel preceding double letters, 
 particularly the Jo ti : as, /»iXj1 etdim, pronounced it-tim; ^JoJcj\ 
 etiigini, pronounced et-tigini; and iJI^JJl dllahin, pronounced dlldhin. 
 
 The Turkish orthography, as represented in italics, according to the 
 above powers of the letters, may at first appear capricious in its irregu- 
 larity ; but the learner must take it upon trust as the best representation 
 of the actual Turkish pronunciation. It would be impossible, in a work of 
 this sort, to enter into an explanation of all the reasons for these changes ; 
 suffice it to say, that the laws of euphony are very stringent. The \ is a, 
 c, i, and «, with the same consonants, without any evident reason ; but, 
 on closer inspection, we shall find, that the modification is used to make 
 the sound agree with the following letter : as, at-ma-jah, e-shelc, it-ti-fah, 
 H-siil, etc. So also eh and ah (i) at the end of a word accords with the 
 preceding predominating sound in the word. The dead u is denoted by an 
 English u, as in ' but,' cut,' etc., simply because it is impossible to give 
 a more perfect representation of it: as, j j\ u-fu-rii, jL>. hu-lcilm, etc. 
 
 The student will perceive also that i .'A is represented by ami, because 
 
 it is thus enunciated, and it would be difiioult to pronounce it otherwise. 
 
 In short, if the learner will strictly adhere to our system, he will 
 acquire a pronunciation as near that of Turks of the present day as it is 
 possible for a European to arrive at ; and certainly nearer than any other 
 system of Eoman characters can bring him without the assistance of a 
 master. In conclusion, the author is desirous of remarking, without 
 any undue assumption of merit to himself, that the Arabic and Turkish 
 languages being familiar to him from his infancy, he has been enabled 
 in this Vocabulary to insert several words not to be found elsewhere, 
 and a vast number of extra meanings which represent the Turkish word in 
 its common signification, as used in daily parlance at the present time in 
 Constantinople and all over the empire, and which signification wiU not 
 be found in any dictionary yet published. 
 
YOCABULAEY. 
 
 \ 
 
 V <_j| ah, -water. 
 
 r Ju I d-bdd, a house, habitation ; a 
 city; culture. 
 
 A lA:xjl ib-ti-dd, the beginning. 
 
 T (__Wji ip-Uk, thread. 
 
 T LU\ dt, a horse. 
 
 T CLj\ et, meat. 
 
 T ul d-td, a father, ancestor. 
 
 p ijmj\ d-fesh, fire. 
 
 A Jjlij'l it-ti-fdk, by chance, it hap- 
 pened that. 
 
 T iJ.Sj\ a-teh, hem of a garment. 
 
 T is>-\Aj\ at-md-jah, a sparrow-hawk. 
 
 T (__X4jl dt-inah, to throw. 
 
 T CS^\ et-mek, for lLCcjJ, to do, 
 to make. 
 
 T ilS^\ et-meJc [pr. ek-mek] bread. 
 
 T ^'1 d-ti-nah, Athens. 
 
 A j\ ith-er, a sign, mark, trace ; a 
 history. 
 
 A lU! d-tlidr, events, signs, histories. 
 
 I iSjJl etli-nah (from a t-ij' tlia-na, 
 
 J^ 
 
 support), a stick to lean upon. 
 
 A uji eth-na, middle, midst, interval. 
 ^x. iJuJl )j iii-eih-nd-dd, in the 
 mean time. 
 
 A i~r'\y\ eth-wab (pi. of ^-JJj), a gar- 
 ment. 
 
 T _ I dj, hungry, famished. 
 
 A i-.'^-l i-jdl, answer, consent. 
 
 A c:-^'l:>-l 4y(f-J«<, consent, agreement. 
 
 A J.:^! 0^-/0 ^j fate, appointed time; 
 death. 
 
 T /iL^^t dch-hlc, hunger. 
 
 T (J.A=>- 1 d-cMl-mak, to be opened. 
 
 I i^y^s-X dch-mak, to open. 
 
 A J U::^*- 1 ?78-^«-HjaZ,bearing,possibility 
 
 A ^Lis-l ih-ti-ydj, need, want, re- 
 quirement. 
 
 A j^Uu3-l ih-sdn, benefit, favour, 
 courtesy, charity. 
 
 A ily^^ ah-mah, stupid, foolish. 
 
 TA ^dix>.=-l ah-mah-lik, stupidity, 
 foolishness. 
 
 A JUi^l «A-M'd/, circumstances, aifairs. 
 (pi. of Jl»- state, condition.) 
 
Lib 
 
 TUKKISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 ^J 
 
 A (l-ri-1 akh-ldr, news. 
 
 A .L:iri-1 iTili-Vi-yar, choice ; power. 
 
 T ^ jLi»-l ihh-ti-dr-lih, old age. 
 
 A j>-l d-hhir, the end ; at last ; finally. 
 !i^jjs^\ akher-in-ieh. Vide\Z5]. 
 
 A CJyi-l d-lM-ret, posterior, last; 
 used for the other world,' and 
 then pronounced d-lche-rd. 
 
 >'^= 
 
 d-lclior, a stable. 
 
 T \J\ d-dd (and <i!b\ d-tdli) an island. 
 J Li it \ii\ d-dd tdS,-$hd-m, a 
 rabbit. 
 
 A L_.'t>\ «-(?flJ, civility, morality, re- 
 spect, custom. 
 
 lAJvujjjl a-dah-siz, uncivil, without 
 respect. 
 
 A CS\jCi\ id-rdh, comprehension. 
 i-drah-et-mek, to comprehend, 
 understand. 
 
 T Jjl at^-Zii, named, called, celebrated. 
 
 A /»wM d-dam, a man. 
 
 T *t>l a-(?i«m, a step, trace. (*J| jt-M 
 d-dum d-dum, step by step, (this 
 is a corruption of the a j»Ai 
 ha-dam, a foot, a step.) 
 
 A f^^^ i-zdn, the call to prayer. 
 
 A i^^LcjI iz-^n, intellect; judgment; 
 obedience. 
 
 A ^Ji izn, permission. 
 
 A c:-^ jl a-%i-yet, hurt, ill-treatment. 
 
 I \j\ d-rd, the middle, midst, between. 
 iJl^M a-r a-miz-deh, in iho midst 
 of us, among us. 
 (.LiCAf AjIjI d-rd-yeh gel-mek, to 
 intervene. 
 
 A l1.;j1j1 i-rd-det, will, desire, com- 
 mands. 
 
 T fji\j\ d-rd-Uk, interval. 
 
 T /J-^mI d-rd-malc, to search. 
 
 A j-Jjl ar-laf., four. 
 
 T Aj j^ ar-pah, barley. 
 
 T ijy»y}' ar-ter-mah, to increase, aug- 
 ment, advance. 
 
 I (Jjj\ ar-tilc, more (expletive), 
 already. 
 
 A <_->liJj! ir-ti-lcab, mounting on 
 horseback; attacking; interfering 
 with. 
 
 T (J^j\ d-rit-malc, to purify, redress. 
 
 ■^J 
 
 art-male, to increase. 
 
 T lL>^j\ i-rit-meli, (v. trans.) to 
 
 dissolve. 
 I Ajj' er-i^, the morning. i^Yie-^^j^ 
 
 er-te-si giin, the nest day. 
 I J.1 ard, behind. 
 A Juj;' ir-sdl, an embassy, sending. 
 
 Ir-sdl o-lin-malc, to be sent. 
 T ,^^j\ ars-ldn, a lion. 
 T ijjl d-reh, lean. 
 T ijj\ ar-kah, the back, behind. 
 lIj i' <:-r)l;, a plum. 
 
t^\ 
 
 VOCABULA-KT. 
 
 r 
 
 t.\ 
 
 I (_ytj\ ir-mah (and also Jji^^), a 
 
 river. See (j^j^}- 
 T \\ dz, some, a little. 
 T j\ i%, from, ijs J t «z-/i;M-ya, whence? 
 
 k_j is 1^ ;t this way. ^^^.j^ if 
 
 only. 
 T (i^M d-%d-jih, a very little. 
 p jljl d-zdd, free. 
 
 T ^_f^jl dz-mak, to wander, go astray. 
 T l1,x<j1 ez-niek, to break, to pound 
 
 in pieces. 
 A luL;1 a-sa-et, a crime, sin. A-sa-et 
 
 et-mek, to hurt. 
 p f^\~i\ d-sdn, easy, convenient. 
 A c-jL-jI as-bdb (pi. of c_^-.-:), cause, 
 
 reason, means. 
 T ijt^[:~^\ «s-te»8-MZ, Constantinople. 
 T V.'V-*'^ is-tri-di-a, an oyster (from 
 
 the Greek arplSi). 
 T >\i«-.jl is-tigh-fdr, pardon, repent- 
 ance. 
 A cLc-jI is-ti-mac, listening, hearing. 
 T JUjti-jl is-ti^-mdl, use, service. 
 
 — et-meh, to make use of. 
 A ci-JLiJ-jl is-ti-ma-let, civility, 
 
 politeness. 
 T (_1X«j-j1 ia-te-melc, to wish, desire. 
 A Ui,;^-'^ is-tih-zd, joke, jest, derision. 
 I jX-j1 ««-/«, old. i-Cuj |_5>— =' 
 
 ^l-«Jl as-^« za-md-nin d-dam- 
 
 ler-l, the ancients (/«i., the men 
 
 of olden time'). 
 A *-j1 ism, a name. 
 I (JjC*-.ol es-melc, to blow. ^— s' Jj 
 
 yil i-ser, the wind blows. 
 T ^1 is-si, master ; hot, warm. 
 A -^1 a-sir, a captive, prisoner. 
 T CS!L^\ is-si-lik, heat, warmth. 
 p i^il (isA, meat, victuals, soup. 
 T (Jjl esh, a companion, equal. 
 T <)>iLi)l d-sha-ffha, also ^^ Li) d-sjta- 
 
 ffhi, below, down. 
 A ijLil i-shd-ret, a sign, token. 
 A iL::-il ish-ti-hdh, doubt, comparison, 
 
 resemblance. 
 T clX^i-iil i-sMt-mek, to hear. 
 T it-i)l ish-teh, look! see! there! lo ! 
 
 behold ! 
 T Li-i^ MA-ii-Zia, desire, wish,appetilc, 
 
 avidity. 
 T ,^^"^1 dsh-chi (also, vulg. ^^^'1 
 
 al-chi), a cook. 
 A jli^l ish-fdh, compassion, pitying, 
 
 affection. 
 T i_N-i)l e-sheh, an ass. 
 T jULil d-shi-Mr, clear, manifest. 
 T LlC^J-il ish-let-mek (causal of 
 
 (J-N'^l-il) to cause to work. 
 T LLx'+Jwiil ish-U-meli, to work. 
 T (^.Ci-il esh-mek, to go together. 
 
 (obsolete) 
 
f- 
 
 TURKISH GRAMMAK. 
 
 :i\ 
 
 A iJ^l «-«j7, cause, origin, kind. J^o; 
 nd-sil, for J-^ 1 ij nek as-sil, how ? 
 
 A 1^] as-lan, not at all, by no means, 
 pronounced as-la. 
 
 A JLo\ as-Mh, good; reconciliation. 
 
 I ^^L«l is-ld-mdlc, to wet, bathe. 
 , iy»J'^l is-lan-}7Mh, to be wet. 
 
 T ^i-i]p*«s' is-mar-la-mah, to recom- 
 mend, enjoin, call for. 
 i!\jA^\ jjji hai-veh is-mar-la, order 
 coffee (to be brought in). 
 
 T ^J^^ as-mah, to hang. 
 
 A (J»««l ■a.-sul, quietly, manner, in a 
 proper way. 
 
 A J--«»l a-«z?, noble, of good origin (a 
 horse or man). 
 
 A Lil a-tui-ia, physicians (the plural 
 of i_.>;^ ta-Vib). 
 
 A I jl Jsl at-raf, sides. 
 
 A iolcl i-^a-net, assistance, help. 
 
 A )L:u;i u-ti-ldr, esteem, honour, 
 confidence. 
 
 A oUiil i^ti-mad, faith, confidence. 
 
 A oU:!^' iz.-ti-kdd, belief. 
 
 A (jiJcxI 'U-ti-dal, justice. 
 
 A ;Kxi i^-ra%, the action of honour- 
 ing and paying deference to. 
 
 A Icl ai^la for jJ-c', the highest, 
 most esalted (vulgarly J I d4er, 
 very good). 
 
 A J^-*£i a^md, blind, a blind man. 
 
 I 6 1 agli, a net. 
 
 T _.Lc\ d-ghaj, a tree. 
 
 T ^»jliT d-ghar-mah, to whiten 
 
 (obsolete). 
 T j-cT d-gUr, heavy, weighty. j~^ j^^ 
 
 d-ghir d-gliir, slowly. 
 T i_«pil agli-ri, grief, pain. 
 Tjil a-gha%, the mouth. 
 T /^.♦iil agk-la-niali, to weep. 
 T J 4il o-ghour, [augury] lucky omen. 
 
 i^.\jj:.\ o-ghur oh, luck to you! 
 
 a happy day to you ! 
 AjLkrLsl if-ti-l:hdr, glory, honour ; 
 
 well met, etc. 
 A LLjl if-rdt, excess. i\j\ LUil 
 
 extremely, 
 p ijJ rsl d/-rSra, bravo! (rather d-/«-n») 
 T ^Axsl ef-fen-di, master, sir ; man 
 
 of the pen. 
 T jl ale, white, b'o ri\ all la-la, a 
 
 vulture. 
 T i^\ alc-cheh, money, a piece of 
 
 money. 
 Ajlpil i]:-rar, affirmation, promise, 
 
 confession. 
 A ,^^ji\ ih-rdn, peers, equals. 
 A /tUuil alc-sdm, divisions, parts ; 
 
 oaths. 
 A *-JJi ah-lim, climates, divisions of 
 
 the world. 
 
 cr 
 
 dJc-mak, to flow. 
 
cJ\ 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 *'<1 
 
 T (_f J^l d-Mn-di, the current of a 
 
 river. 
 T <S\ en, very, most (a particle used 
 
 in forming the superlative). 
 Vide [24]. 
 A^S I ah-lar, the greatest. 
 A ^J^\ ek-the-ri, for the most part. 
 P^i e'-yer, if. 
 
 A (♦Uj I ik-rdm, honour, respect. 
 T LliviJ^l i-ir-la-mek, to saddle. 
 
 (gerund t_jj-Ls 1). 
 T (JJs^l ek-sik, fault, defect. 
 T |J.>-u*S I ek-sik-Vi, a woman. 
 T uJv-»iS 1 i-il-mek,, to bend, incline. 
 T LlX*iS 1 eg-U-meh, to detain, amuse. 
 T lLx-w1 ek-mek, to sow, to plant. 
 A i_jL^l ek-naf, sides, (plural of u-ii'X 
 
 ke-naf) 
 I (j^^ ^-&w, seed. 
 
 T ^sn-S^l e-km-ji, a sower, husband- 
 man. 
 Tj*u5l dn-sh, suddenly. 
 T Ji «?, a hand. 
 T Ji il, another, a stranger (for JjJ 
 
 a country). 
 A ^1 il-Ia, if not, unless, but. 
 T A (_5i! I d-ld-'i, a battalion, or troop 
 
 of soldiers, squadron (of cavali-y). 
 A <tjJ! a/- Ja<-teA, certainly, assuredly. 
 T i.::-Jl dlt, below, underneath. 
 T (li^Jl dlt-miih, sixty. 
 
 T (_^»J1 dl-tun, gold. 
 
 T jjl a?-fo', six. 
 
 T ^_^LJt dl-ti-lik, a piece of money 
 of six piastres. 
 
 A J«sls 1 il-hd-sel, finally, at last, in 
 short (comp. of the Arabic article 
 Ji, and J-£>ls-). 
 
 T ^Jk^JjJI dl-dat-mak, to deceive. 
 
 T ^jAJsA aZ-^M-mai, to deceive one's- 
 self, to err, to be deceived. 
 
 T ^_i.*jiJi a-lish-mak, to become accus- 
 tomed. 
 
 A e:-%i]l ul-fet, friendship, intimacy. 
 
 I ijj31 ilk, the first. 
 
 T ^\ el-li, fifty. 
 
 I ^_^l al-mah, to take. 
 
 A JI i-la, to, unto, e^c. 
 
 T ^^ JL! t d-li-ko-mak, to retain, stop, 
 a/so, to leave or let go. 
 
 A L»l ani-ma, but, however. 
 
 A ^u.::^! im-ti-ndn, gratitude. 
 
 A Jli-<\ im-thdl, fables, parables, 
 (plural of Jl^ me-thal) 
 
 A jix»l im-ddd, prolongation, exten- 
 sion, assistance. 
 
 A r^l amr, an order, command. 
 
 T lIX^I e-mek, fatigue, work, labour. 
 
 I L!-C»Ji-<i e-?«e/i:-fe-«je/:, to work, toil. 
 
 T /y»^l Hm-mak, to hope, expect. 
 (•_<jl ii-ma-rim, 1 hope. 
 
^j' 
 
 TUKKISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 ,^' 
 
 A .»-<r^ u-mur, business, (plural of^\ 
 atnr, an aifair) 
 
 p A*.»l u-niid, hope, desire. 
 
 A (j:;.-*! a-m'm, safe, free. 
 
 T Ul and, a mother. 
 
 T .liirUlil d-nakh-tar, a key (pro- 
 nounced a-nah-tar). 
 
 A iLjl am-lar, granaries ; fodder ; 
 decks of a vesoel. 
 
 A cliiJl iii-ti-fa^ gain, utility, profit, 
 use. 
 
 T /^stI an-jalc, only. 
 
 I jisTi j're-^M, a pearl. 
 
 I i'^\ in-jeh, fine, subtile. 
 
 p j^rr^ an-j'vr, a fig. 
 
 A (jUuJI in-sdn, mankind, a man. 
 
 A LU-^Uujl in-sd-ni-yet, courtesy, 
 humanity. 
 
 T J*ujl en-siz, narro'w. 
 
 A I sUaii in-sdf, justice, equity. 
 
 A *Ujl in-<,am, a gift. 
 
 Ajlxj^ in-lcar, denial. 
 
 p iliji un-gah, then. 
 
 T t.Lx<Jl en-melt,, to descend. 
 
 A ^_/»-.;J I a-nks, a friend, companion ; 
 tame. 
 
 Tjl dii, the chase. 
 
 T jl «f, a house. 
 
 T Ijl o-va, a plain, a valley. 
 
 p jlji d-va%, the voice. 
 
 T LlJjl o<, a herb. 
 
 T ^J-»jljjl ii-tan-mak, to be ashamed, 
 
 to blush. 
 T (jyy^ o-twr-mak, to sit down.. 
 T uivy ii-iur-u, because, on account 
 
 of, upon. 
 T ry-Jji o-tlilc, herbage. 
 T lL^^'«1 ut-meh, to sing (Kke a bird). 
 T fjytjy^\ o-tur-malc, to sit down. 
 T '.jjil o-tuz, thirty. 
 I ijy. o-tah, beyond, on the other side. 
 T _ «' uj, extremity, summit. 
 Tj^j\ u-juz, cheap. 
 T ^\^t\ a.-juz-lik, cheapness. 
 T |ji=fji u-jah, the hearth. 
 T , ^^j^ "i-'-jh a chasseur, sportsman, 
 
 falconer. 
 T — ,1 ucTi, three. 
 I ^JU.r=>-jl uoh-mak, to fly. 
 T |^^r»-jl ixcfi-un-ji, the third. 
 T ^j;/«-i/j:i-.i ohh-slia-mal:, to flatter, 
 
 caress, (for ^jA-Li^ o-hish-mah) 
 T ^\)'^y o-doun, wood. 
 T isJil o-daJi, a chamber, hall. 
 T ijUj) o-rd-dah, there. 
 T Vijj\ or-ta, midst, centre. 
 T Jjujjl or-tah, partner, a friend, 
 
 companion. 
 T tl>-*^Mjl urt-meh, to cover, veU. 
 T ^Z^j^::^,\ a-chur-maJc, to cause to 
 
 fly-' ^ 
 
 T Cjo 1.1 ur-dok, a duck. 
 
u^j\ 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 r 
 
 ^\ 
 
 9 
 
 T t_x,*iS>.' ur-hut-meh, to frighten. 
 T CSSjj^ iir-huk, fearful, timid. 
 T CS^jy wrh-meh, to be afraid. 
 T ^J^Ji^ or-mdn, a wood, a forest. 
 T lIxs^jjI ii-rum-jih, a spider. 
 T (_j^j_jl Hr-malc, (pronounced vour- 
 mak) to beat. 
 
 u-rHj tat-niah, to fast. 
 T (j;^'!jjl a-zdt-malc, to stretch out. 
 T Jjijjl ii-%ak, distant. 
 '^JJy ^^^ tVJ* u-%er and u-ze-rah, 
 
 upon. 
 T^; •' lii-zii, self. 
 T (^•jji a-sun, long. 
 T (J-Jji' u-zen-gi, a stirrup, 
 T l::-.>-jj1 itsi, above, upon. 
 T liz^yi os-tra, a razor. 
 T Jj'-ii' H-sMk, a servant, a chap. 
 T l1X«j^j1 ii-shii-meJc, to grow cold, 
 
 be cold. 
 T /^Lajl u-san-nmh, to be tired. 
 T ^JI^Lcjl ogh-ra-malc, to go, to meet. 
 T /y-«J -c.) ogh-ril-mah, to seize, to rob. 
 T (oAij^ ogh-lan, a son, a boy. 
 T ^.1 0^, an arrow. 
 A Tj jJi jl o-ha-dar, so many, (for Jjl 
 
 iJj ol-ha-dar) 
 T /^jj.i o-hu-malc, to read. 
 T i/u^Jjl o-lcu-mush, learned. 
 T OTl M», before, in front. 
 
 T CSXif^ ii-g-rcn-mek, to teach. 
 
 (pronounced ii-ren-mek') 
 A Jjl w-w?, first. 
 A Ujl ev-la, (for ^Jjl it-Za) better. 
 A J^il av-ldi, children, descendants. 
 T lIX^-.s',! idch-melc, to measure. 
 I AjJJiljl ol-lca-dar, as much as, so 
 
 much. 
 T ^Si}j^ ev-vel-lci, the first. [36]. 
 T (j^^\ ol-mak, to be. 
 T u-N-Wj' id-meTc, to die. 
 T (JL^Jji o-lin-mah, to be, to become. 
 T l!-X-»Jj' ev-len-melc, to marry. 
 Tjljl o-Zii, great, (obsolete) 
 T (j^j\ k-mak, to hope. 
 T J.<;! o-muz, the shoulders. 
 T Jv^_j' u-miii, the shoulders. 
 T -^i 024'M, ten; itm, flour. 
 T ^J-^y u-nut-malc, to forget. 
 T j;.*jljjl ii-yan-mak, to awake. 
 T ^JL^Jjj »' H-yiit-malc, to go to sleep, 
 
 to put to sleep. 
 T liujl u-yu-hu, sleep. 
 T cdjjl u-i-la, thus, so ; u-i-la, 
 
 (vulgarly {i-i-lan), 12 o'clock. 
 I (_^*J_5l u-yu-malc, to sleep. 
 T (i-^'.jl o-i-nash, a prostitute, a 
 
 lover. 
 A (Jl&l d-Jia-U, people, inhabitants. 
 A ALc-il ili-ti-mdm, care, solicitude. 
 A JUdSi ih-mdl, neglect, delay. 
 
10 
 
 i^\ 
 
 TURKISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 tv 
 
 Ti_fT d-i, month, the moon, d-i/i, a 
 
 bear. 
 T ri\j_\ a-ydlc, a foot. 
 A l::-JM a-yd-let, province, country; 
 
 dominion. 
 T tlXtojl et-meh, to do. (also (.iX^'l) 
 T CS~*^;\ et-melc, to say. 
 T #f^l ioh, the interior, within. 
 T iJjC* jstI i-cher-meTc, to give to 
 
 drink. 
 T .^jstI i-clie-ru, in, within, (pro- 
 nounced i-c/i«-n). FV(^epagel6. 
 T tLC*:=sr\ ich-meh, to drink. 
 T <lj_(^ ir-teh, to-morrow, j^'i^ 
 
 ^—jdJ j\ ia-sar ir-ti-s'i, Monday. 
 T fj^j\ ir-la-mak, to sing. 
 T /v*Jr;t d-i-ril-mak, to he separated. 
 T (_^^T d-'ir-mah, to separate. 
 T lJ^ rl^ ir-mdJc, a river. 
 T (_^^J ir-malc, a river. 
 T i_jv.l i?"^) large, great. 
 T 'j\ i%, sign, trace. 
 T A*uj1 is-sah, if, hut. FjtZ« [123]. 
 T (jSjjI SsA, work, business, occupation. 
 T tlX-t.^ijiul i-shit-meh, to hear. 
 A (jl^.i 4-sa?, sending, causing to 
 
 reach. 
 T ^s^ijl i-ldn-fi, the second. 
 T ^Ai\ji i-kin-d'i, the first time of 
 
 prayer after mid-day — about 3 
 
 p.m 
 
 T ,J^\ i-^i, two. 
 
 T •'Xil i-le-ru or i-U-ri [vide p. 16], 
 
 in front, forward. 
 T lLnIjJ ^-'i-lilc, kindness. 
 T tliCiJjl i'i-le-mek, to do, «fc. 
 T aLI i-hh, with, «fo. 
 T ^^U-|t i-mdn, faith, belief. 
 T ^Ji^l im-di, now, then. 
 T /^.^LjI i-nan-maTc, to believe, trust. 
 T iJ_C«>ijl en-meh, to descend, 
 p <Lol d-\-neh, a mirror. 
 T ^\ i-y'i, good. 
 T lLn! }j I i-yi-lik, goodness, excellence. 
 
 A c_;lj ^aS, a gate. 
 
 T Ijli la-ha, a father. 
 
 T ^JK*j'u hat-male, to immerse. 
 
 p <S^u bd-Jeh, a chimney. 
 
 p jU idr, a time, once. 
 
 T /^-♦-i lU ia-rish-maJc, to agree, make 
 
 peace, 
 p iljb Id-idr, the bazaar, market. 
 p |0>^3 V Id-zir-gdn, a merchant. 
 T ^L hash, the head. 
 T /i-«Li)l> hasli-la-malc, to begin. 
 A ,Ji'lj ha-tel, false ; useless, vain ; 
 
 injustice. 
 T cb id^/i, a knot, joining. 
 
JV 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 J-V 
 
 11 
 
 p ib hagh, a garden. 
 
 T '(^"Ij hagh-cheh, a garden. 
 
 T ^JL-<^£\j hagh-ir-mah, to cry out. 
 
 I fJyi^iJl^\i Id-gMsh-la-mah, to give, 
 
 grant, concede. 
 T ^t^\i.\i lagh-ld-mah, to tie. 
 T *l-=u lagh-luoT lagh-li, tied,attaclied. 
 T Jk*jIj halc-maJc, to see. <tij ;j^ 
 
 ^_^jflj sii,-zi-neh hah-mah, to 
 
 listen to his words. 
 A ^u Jcf-^-J, the rest, remaining, 
 
 permanent. 
 p (-Li b hdk, fear. U J jj _. i-L$'lj |J 
 
 ii Ja7; t'a hi perva, fearlessly, 
 
 boldly, (lit. without fear or 
 
 solicitude.') 
 A (Ju hal, the heart, soul, mind, 
 
 remembrance (pr. like Baal '). 
 p Jb lal, a wing, an arm (pron. like 
 
 'baU'). 
 T Jb T)al, honey, (pron. like h6V) 
 p ^b la-U, height. 
 T (tJb hal-tah, a hatchet. 
 A id.«js'b lil-jtim-leh, altogether, in 
 
 general, in short. 
 T /^-s'b lal-ohik, mud. 
 T ^b Id-lih, a fish. 
 T ^^sr^b Id-lilc-ji, a fisherman. 
 A iJi3b hil-kul-li-yeh, altogether, 
 
 entirely. 
 T JJb lal-lii, honied, made of honey. 
 
 uy 
 
 T Jk«Jjb Id-yil-maTc, to faint. 
 
 T CS~^p^_ li-tur-mek, to finish, com- 
 plete. 
 
 T lLC«jj lit-melc, to grow, increase ; 
 succeed. 
 
 -tun, entire, complete, all. 
 \^y ^j^, iu-tiin giin, all day. 
 
 ur^. LH ^'^V- 
 T , slssT li-chak, also lU-chaL a knife. 
 
 T lLx*^ iich-mek, to mow, reap. 
 
 A^.air JaAr, the sea. 
 
 A ijisT Ja - /;M/", smoke, incense, 
 vapour, exhalation. 
 
 p ci^^oi^ haJAt, felicity, fortune, hap- 
 piness, good luck, fate. 
 
 p ^yu..j.ugc7 baJch-sMsh, a present, gift. 
 
 A ij-;^^, la-khil, avaricious, covetous. 
 
 A T ^dLjsT ha-khil-lik, avarice. 
 
 p lSo J«(?, had. 
 
 p j^u-jJj he-des-tdn, also ia-les-tan, 
 the bazaar. 
 
 T J iSr, a, one. 
 
 PjJKj he-rd-dir, a brother. 
 
 T ^J^ V Irdk-mdk, to throw, to 
 place, to leave. 
 
 ij J hir-er, one by one. 
 
 T lLCo ie-ze-mek, to adorn, embel- 
 lish. 
 
 T lIXO iez-mek, to be tired, ennuye. 
 
 T lLx+I^uJ hes-le-me]c, to nourish, 
 bring up. 
 
12 
 
 > 
 
 TURKISH GEAMMAll. 
 
 J^ 
 
 T ijUjj lesh, five. 
 
 T CS^yjy^_ li-shur-mek, to cook. 
 
 T <U»jaJ Ms-mah, printing office, press, 
 
 impression, etc. 
 A ifAjti iaz-da-hu, then, and then, 
 
 after, etc. 
 A (»ic iscJ, some, a certain (number). 
 T o'^'^ logh-da-'i, corn, wheat. 
 T ^J^tLitij ha-ffhish-M-mdk, to present, 
 
 give. 
 I LLx*lij lagh-la-malc, to tie. 
 T ^X) leh-ri, drunken, a drunkard. 
 T ilS-y^^ le-gin-meh, to agree, ap- 
 prove, please, (pr. M-yen-mek) 
 T jJLj J«»3, a face. 
 T 1 jjo len-%er, like, resembling. 
 T lLC^iX) len-ze-mek, to be like, 
 
 resemble. 
 I ij^^' ia-Ia-idn, great, large; a 
 
 falcon, the largest of the three 
 
 in the nest. 
 A J-Jj iid-hul, the nightingale. 
 I l!-C»iAu lil-der-meh, to cause to 
 
 know, 
 p iS\j Id-k'i, but, perhaps, nay, rather. 
 T jUj hel-lil or ieZ-/i, known, certain. 
 T t_Xti.' Ml-mek, to know. 
 T CjJj ifd-ut, a eloud. 
 T b Jj hel-lut, an acorn, an oak. 
 T LliyJ o>" i-!_n1)J Jc-fe/,- or iu-lik, a 
 
 troop, a regiment. 
 
 A ^L ie'-Zj, yes. 
 
 A lij J»-)W, a building, edifice, con- 
 struction. 
 lL^! J ^Lc 'l^ hi-na-an A-ld za- 
 leh, therefore. 
 
 I lLC»^ lin-meh, to mount (on horse- 
 back), to ride. 
 
 A ^~> le-ni, children, a Jl ^^VJ le-ni 
 d-ddm, the descendants of Adam. 
 
 T jltV bii-ddJc, a bough, branch. 
 
 T t.i'JjJ ia-di, the thigh. 
 
 T "^lit^ iu-rd-yah, here ! this way ! 
 
 T ilS^jy^ lu-ru-ineh, to cover, wrap 
 up ; disturb. 
 
 T (J iv' hur-un or ij^rw, nose, a promon- 
 tory, cape. 
 
 T ly* i »j hoz-nidk, to spoil. 
 
 p i^^y hos-idn, a garden. 
 
 p T ^srl:;i„:jj los-tdn-j'i, a gardener. 
 
 T (jiv hosh, empty, useless. 
 
 T jli»j lo-ghdz, the throat, neck. 
 
 T (_^jlc»j lo-ghaz-la-mak, to kill, cut 
 the throat. 
 
 T (Jy JoZ, large, vast, abundant ; 
 urine. 
 
 T ^L«JiSjj hu-lash-mdic, to he troubled 
 (as water), to dirty; to touch, or 
 infect. 
 
 T ^j iJuS)J hu-lan-dir-mak, to stir up 
 (as water), to mix. 
 
.-J 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 Lri 
 
 13 
 
 T (JJ'^jJ lu-ld-nih, troubled, thick, 
 
 muddy; heavy weather. 
 T ^Jk*J_jJ hul-mah, to find. 
 T ^^ lii.4 or io-i, length, height, 
 
 stature. 
 T ^--ji lu-i-la-Jah, thus, in this 
 
 manner. 
 T yj^ ho-i-la, tall of stature. 
 T aJj^ h{i-{-la, thus, so, in this way, 
 
 in this manner. 
 T ^^._jJ lo-yin, the neck. '-Cj'jV 
 
 Ai.ijjj hd-ld-nin ho-i-9ii-na (swear 
 
 by) your father's neck! (♦bU 
 
 <U:o_jj, I swear, «fc. 
 Tj-iJ^ io-{-m<s and jjAij .J , a horn. 
 p L^ 5a7ja, value, price, 
 p T jlL^ hd-hd-lu, dear, valuable. 
 T cOl^ ha-kd-fieh, pretence, excuse, 
 p^^ he-Mr, in each or aU. 
 T ^^J he-hai, (interj.) you fellow! 
 p J hi, without. r~iJ |cJ ^2 na-zir, 
 
 without equal, unparalleled. 
 A ^Lj la-ydn, explanation, proof. 
 A (*i rr^ lai-rdm, the feast of Bairam. 
 T i-tlj Jm, a thousand. 
 T <d^ hilehjBee <tL, also, even, again. 
 
 (expletive) 
 T fj^j^^_ lu-yur-malc, to order, com- 
 mand [56]. 
 T i^^_ hii-yulc, large, great. 
 I CS^yJ M-ytik-lih, greatness. 
 
 T i_Lx.»Ji^ l-Q.-yiik-lan-meh, to pride 
 
 one's self. 
 T i_lxuj*j li-yH-meh, (pron. hu-yu- 
 
 meh) to increase, grow large. 
 
 T -__^u pd-hUoh, a shoe, slipper. 
 T ^sr^jj[i pd-lUoh-ji, a shoemaker. 
 TssAi pan-jir, beetroot, 
 p il.i jL» pd-di-shah, a king. 
 ^_pJt Li) jb^a-^'-s/w/j-^iT;, the empire; 
 
 royalty, imperial dignity. 
 T <15>-_)U par-cha, a morsel, piece. 
 p nyo pa-rah, a piece, portion, morsel, 
 
 l-40th of a piastre. 
 T (__X-«Ji;L) pd-rd-le-mei or pa-ra-la- 
 
 mali, to break to pieces. 
 T i_^u i?a'-;, a part, portion. i_cl) 
 
 CiOcji, pd-i-et-mek, to divide. 
 p ^l) i^a'-i rank, grade; salary. 
 p J j7Mr, full ; often, sometimes, 
 p iJj per-dah, a veil, curtain. 
 p i.ii-^-y:' pur-ust, a worshipper, iji-^j 
 
 l::-^^ hut piirust, an idolater. 
 T ^Jk*/ par-mah or iar-maJc, a finger. 
 
 ^_^^ jJllj JasA par-mak, the 
 
 thumb, 
 p (jj*j ^es«, then, after, but. 
 
14 
 
 J 
 
 13 
 
 TURKISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 IxJ 
 
 T uX^-jij pkh-melc, to cook, to ripen 
 or to be done (as in cooking), to 
 gain experience. 
 CS^jyijJ pi-shur-meh, to cause to 
 cook, to roast, 
 p ^l4.;oij pe-sM-mdn, repentant. 
 p Jtixia pesht-mal, a bath towel, 
 
 cloth. 
 T lLnj pelc, firm, solid ; very much, 
 
 very. 
 jIXj pU-nar, a spring, a fountain, a 
 well. 
 T ^Yj pi-Vij, a chicken. 
 JwJj pem-leli, cotton. 
 -»xi pi-nir, cheese, 
 p Ijuj pa-i-da, discovered, created, 
 
 found, manifested, etc. 
 -Pjfj pir, old. 
 
 cli^-J pir-UJc, old age. 
 P jlX-J pi-nar ot pu-nar, a spring. 
 p 'Ou-j pi-md-neh, a measure, a cup. 
 
 p b' ia, as far as. i^\j ta-lci, in order 
 
 that. 
 A j_jIj ta-liz^ a subject, a follower. 
 I ijO tar-la, a field. 
 V ijVJ td-zeh, fresh, young. 
 T LLXIijb' ta-zeh-lik, ivcsimess, youth. 
 
 U ta-as-suf, regret, sorrowing. 
 s_. A ,\"t ta-'al-luf, composer; the being 
 accustomed, familiarized, 
 
 T l.lj' ta-va or ta-wa, a frying pan. 
 
 A j^-.*uisr tah-s'in, praise, approbation. 
 
 A J.-.^j^sT' tah-sil, gain, acquisition. 
 
 A , '^JissT tah-h'ik, truth, affirmation. 
 uuiLxT' tah-JA-han, truly, certainly. 
 
 A Jj »isr tali-ivil, change, return ; 
 money made over to another 
 person. 
 
 p Li_^isr' tahht, a throne, a bed, a bed- 
 stead. 
 
 A *rsr tulchm or tu-khUm, seed, grain ; 
 also used for ' boundaries.' 
 
 A (j^-^.ir takh-inin, thinking, con- 
 jecture. 
 
 A Ll/ilAJ' te-dd-reh, preparations, pro- 
 visions; care. 
 
 A^jJ ted-bir, advice, arrangement, 
 management. 
 
 A iPy ta-rash, shaving. 
 
 T 'i-K>jJ' ter-je-mili, interpretation. 
 
 T (_/«P' <«■«, backwards. 
 
 T i_j^j' ifMr-/;?, a song. 
 
 A p ^y tur-lci, a Turk. 
 
 T CS^Ji !!er-Ze'-?«e7;,tosweat,perspire, 
 
 T i^iy ta-zi-yeh, or i^-p^ tez-jah, adv., 
 quickly, as soon as possible. 
 
 A J^;^>-=J' tas-dilc, truth, faith. 
 
 A ,_J*-'«J' ta-^-la, supreme, high. 
 
Ui 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 <J^ 
 
 15 
 
 A (_.->js*^ ta-^aj-jub, astonishment, 
 admiration. 
 
 A i_i) jO'-<flj^-ri/, information. 
 
 A *-l*J' tay-lim, instruction. 
 
 A JiUj ta-gha-fel, negligence, care- 
 lessness. 
 
 A (JT^'^ taf-s'il, explanation. 
 
 T /il_«aJij taTc-sir-lih, fault, omission. 
 
 k ~S3 ia-/MJ-5Mr, pride, vanity. 
 
 T CS~A^jS3 ta-hab-lur-lan-meh, to 
 pride one's self, grow proud. 
 
 kj^S^ tik-rdr, repetition; again. 
 
 T ^J^j\S3 tiJc-rdr-la-malc, to repeat, 
 renew. 
 
 A i^jlli^ ta-Jcal-lef, trouble; ceremony; 
 invitation. 
 
 A cjLJilj tah-lif, ceremony. 
 
 Aj-^jJO" ta-la-mi%, disciples. 
 
 A /n*--ij' tal-lis, the action of clothing 
 or covering ; hence used for 
 fraud, deceit.' 
 ' "' " ta-laf, ruin. i}-^y i— aJj, to 
 perish. 
 
 A aUj ta-mdm, whole, entire; end; 
 completely. 
 
 A (J-i-*J" tam-thil, comparison, alle- 
 gory, resemblance. 
 
 p ^ tan, the body, person. 
 
 p J-^' tam-lel, idle. 
 
 A <U»ij tan-Uh, order, command. 
 
 A Jjij ta-na%-%ul, descending, con- 
 descension. 
 
 p Laj' ten-hd, alone. 
 
 A j_)^jj td-wd-he^['Q\. of ^U td-he-S) 
 a follower. 
 7-^^y ta-tvdd-dui, humility, sub- 
 mission. 
 
 1 jy toz, dust. 
 
 I ijj Mz, salt. 
 
 T ^J^jy tuz-la-malc, to salt. 
 
 A Jfiy ta-wah-lcul, faith, trust, con- 
 fidence. 
 
 T L-S-y^y til-Jcen-meh, to finish. 
 
 T i_sy tui, feather, plumage. 
 
 pj^' tiz, sharp, acid. 
 
 T J-j tez, quick, swift. 
 
 A i_iJlJ thd-letk, the third. 
 
 A ^.K»lJ thd-meii, the eighth. 
 
 A ijlj thd-ni, the second; in future. 
 
 A d-Jliij ^/j^-Zia-Zei, weariness, fatigue, 
 ennui. 
 
 A c:_Ju thd-hat or sd-Jcat, faith, con- 
 fidence. 
 
 A L:;-^iJu thik-ht or syh-ht, heaviness, 
 trouble. 
 
 A J-iJ tha-hil, weighty, grave; a bore. 
 
16 
 
 W?- 
 
 TURKISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 ^^ 
 
 p [:>■ jd, a place. 
 
 A ills- jd-bet, an answer. 
 
 A <U il=j- ja-ri-^eh, a damsel, girl, 
 servant-maid. 
 
 p joW" J"-'"'' Boul, life. 
 
 I Aj W jan-lii, lively, animated. 
 
 p ]\y>\=^ jan-war or ja-na-wwr, an 
 animal, a wild beast. 
 
 A JjSi^- jd-hil, ignorant. 
 
 A \i\:^ j<i-ye%, lawful, permitted. 
 
 T L?- ja-ld, a gift, present. 
 
 f^ j\s>- ja-ldr, great, proud; a con- 
 queror ; a tyrant. 
 
 A -»:>- jalr, compulsion. 
 
 A lU A j^ jira-' at, courage, audacity. 
 
 A I* ^jurm, crime, sin, fault; tyranny. 
 
 A t^)>- juz-ioi, or ij>- j'UJi'-'h a part, 
 a little, a small portion. 
 
 A ij ws- je-sd-ret, presumption. 
 
 A \ss^ji-fd, rejection, trouble, injury; 
 refusal of a lover, torments caused 
 by tbe beloved. 
 
 p i>p- ji-ger, tbe Uver. 
 
 p A JSj>- jal-ldd, an executioner. 
 
 A (Jibf je-ldl, majesty, power. 
 
 A l:: — cuj^ ja-md-<,at, a crowd, an 
 assembly, the people, congrega- 
 tion. 
 
 A f-*^ ji^'m^ assembling ; a troop ; 
 the whole. 
 
 A i>l^L::-A-jt4.>- jam-Ji-yet-gah, a ren- 
 dezvous, a place of assembly. 
 
 A iHi^As^ jum-Uh, all. ALi^^'L alto- 
 gether. 
 
 A ^-♦^ j'a-mi^ aU, the whole. 
 
 A c_jLp- ji-nab, majesty, power, ex- 
 cellency. 
 
 A ^:»- jin, a jinn or genie. 
 
 A (>u.^ Z"^^! kind, sort, species. 
 
 p I.SJOJ?- ^aray, war. 
 
 p »:>- yafi, barley. 
 
 A <__ili>- ja-wah, an answer. 
 
 p A Jiilj?- ja-wd-her (pi. of Jbji^), 
 
 jewels, precious stones. 
 k j^jur, injustice, violence. lb>-. 1^:5- 
 
 y«ur «/«/-/«, the torments of love. 
 A J-^^ yt(/'i, ignorance (pi. of Jj^l:^ 
 
 jahil). 
 A |«^^y«'-7je»-Mflm(IIebrew Gehenna), 
 
 HeU. 
 A ^_j-A-.Y=r j^-hk-di, endeavour, study, 
 diligence. 
 
 T (jUJ'li>- chat-mah, to run up against, 
 
 to be knocked together. 
 T jK»JjU-(;/'ar^-«iaZ:,tobeat violently. 
 
-Lr^ 
 
 VOCABULAEY. 
 
 17 
 
 V !ij\s~ chd-rd, a remedy, cure, help ; 
 
 method, 
 p T cU- chdgh, time. j\^\>- j^to) 
 
 he-man chd-ghi-der, now's the 
 
 time ! 
 T /JijjiW chd-glii-rish, invitation, the 
 
 action of calling. 
 T fJ^J^iji. Is- chd- glii - rish - mah, to 
 
 challenge one another. 
 T ^J^j£.\:>- cha-ghir-mah, to call, in- 
 voke, invite. 
 T JxU^ chd-ghil, a buhble, murmur, 
 
 noise of flowing water. 
 T /^jiLcls- clia-ghil-da-malc, to mur- 
 mur (as water). 
 T v^U- chan, a bell. 
 T ^jaJ^JAs- clm-lish-mak, to work, toU, 
 
 labour, endeavour. 
 I ^js'lrs- cTia-li-j'i, a player on an 
 
 instrument; a robber. 
 T ^J^Us- chal-mah, to strike, rob. 
 T ij/»U>- oha-mur, mud, dirt. 
 T i_f ^ c7i,a-i, a river ; tea. 
 T jU- cha-yir, a meadow, prairie. 
 T -.i) J _)l=^ cha-'ir-ku-sM, a lark. 
 T i^L^^ chi-ldn, a swelling, an abscess, 
 
 a buboe. 
 T (j^L^=^ cliip-lak, naked. 
 T ^ilJLi..;^ ohip-lah-lilc, nakedness. 
 T L-xs-^^ clii-cheh, a flower. 
 T ^^ys' chert-ldlc, a grasshopper. 
 
 a spring, a 
 
 p T &.*Jjjj>- ehesh-meh, 
 
 fountain of water, 
 p l::— i:s- chift, a pair. 
 T L::-.vi>- chift, a field ; a plough. 
 T i-liiC»)»-j Lii^vi^s- cAi/i! sur-meh-lik, 
 
 agriculture, ploughing. 
 T i^^xis- c/j}/i!-yi, a labourer, a peasant. 
 T cS^-f^SiS" chift-ji-liJc, agriculture. 
 T u-N-Kiiliis- ehift-lesh-mek, to be 
 
 re-united. 
 T (__$3j:a=>- chift-lih, a farm, country 
 
 property. 
 T (j;.<jliL=- chi-har-mah, to draw out, 
 
 carry away. 
 T fj^s'- chih-mak, to come out, to 
 
 mount, (^-kii^- itib la-sheh 
 
 chik-mak, to be even with, to 
 
 obtain one's aim). 
 Tj^=^ chu-kur, a hole, a valley. 
 T f7^^ che-kij, a hammer, a mallet. 
 I L^S-'^M-'^-^' che-kisJi-mek, to dispute. 
 T lLC»3-^-s^ che-kil-mek, to be led, 
 
 drawn; to retire. 
 T L,S~4^-^>- chek-mek, to draw, attract. 
 T tiil^i^ls- che-kin-mek, to be with- 
 drawn. 
 T -.aSo- che-kich, a hatchet. &e ,*r~?". 
 I L-nLs- chi-lek, strawberries. 
 T ly^Xy^.s- cha-ma-shur, washing. 
 
 J^i 
 
 chA-val or chu-wal, a sack. 
 
 r T ^bjjs- chii-ldn, a sbcph(;rd. 
 
 2 
 
18 
 
 U^^ 
 
 TURKISH GKAMMAK. 
 
 V> 
 
 T J^^ chii-juh, a child. 
 
 T ^j^ chor-id, broth, soup. 
 
 T LJ^^'its- clm-riXt-meh, to cause to 
 putrify, spoil. 
 
 T CS^ lis- clie-fir-meh, to surround, 
 to turn. (i_C«ii5- ^rp^ Icha-'i- 
 rah-cM-vir-melc, to turn out well). 
 
 T Jji=- chev-reh, the circumference, 
 all round. 
 
 T lLX<;»5- chiiz-meli, to untie. 
 
 T jL*JLi»i^ cho-gha-lat-mah or cliogli- 
 lut-mah, to multiply, to increase. 
 
 T jijj^ cho-gM, the most, for the 
 most part. 
 
 T Jj_j^ c/i(5i-, much, numerous, very, 
 many. 
 
 T ^y>~ cIio-ImIi, cloth, drapery, hang- 
 ings (corruption of a ^%^ ^ii/^A, 
 cloth. 
 
 T i__C»i:5- cliid-mek, an earthen pot. 
 
 T jjUtjj:- chU-mah, a drumstick. 
 
 T jjiL;=- clia-'i-lalc, a kite, a hawk. 
 
 A *J'W. hd-tem, a liberal man. 
 A c^-N^U>- hd-jet, want, need. 
 A ^^U- hd-j'i, a pilgrim. 
 A 3'«=''^^ ha-sil, produce, profit, gain. 
 (J-;lsM al-Tid-selj'vn. short. 
 
 A^W hd-zer, ready, present, pre- 
 pared. 
 
 T /JuJ^U>- ha-zir-la-male, to make 
 ready, prepare. 
 
 A (*$^U-A(?-/:«w,governor,a commander 
 
 A Jl.r- Ml, state, mode, condition. 
 
 iii.l Lii-lU- tJ hii, lid-let u-ze-ra, 
 ^^j J- 
 
 upon this. 
 A ^Is- lid-la, now, at this moment. 
 A c:^!U- lid-let, state, condition ; a 
 
 thing. 
 A (_/u-=- AaJs, a prison. 
 
 i_r 
 
 ha-ha-sM, an Abyssinian. 
 Tiat-ta, until. 
 
 A ^^^ 7i(5j;', a pilgrimage to Mecca. 
 A (-jIS" M-jdh, a veil, modesty. 
 A <i^ liuj-jet, a decree ; an excuse. 
 A Jio. hadd, limit, a boundary ; 
 
 strength, force. 
 A J Jo- Jiazr, caution, prudence. 
 A ci,'>j\j^ lia - ra - ret, heat ; great 
 
 thirst ; rash or irruption of the 
 
 skin. 
 A ipj=- hars, greediness, ambition, 
 
 avidity. 
 A L:L-~S.i- ha-ra-het, motion, move 
 
 ment, disturbance, action. 
 A *.=.. ha-rem, the harem ; forbidden, 
 
 sacred, 
 p i-jL; ,!>- lie-rif, a fellow, an indivi- 
 dual ; a hn.sband. 
 
r 
 
 ^ 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 iU. 
 
 19 
 
 hi-sab, computation. *lc 
 i— ' Ws.- t.ilm-i hi-sdh, arithmetic. 
 JaujLus.- hi-s&h-su, innumerable. 
 
 A t_,,*ti=- hash, computing; number. 
 
 A 4\*u3- hd-sad, envy, jealousy. 
 
 A (j*u^ Am««, beautiful, beauty, ele- 
 gance. 
 
 A Jj.i.u r» ka-sud, envious, jealous. 
 
 A jLic.- hd-sdd, harvest. 
 
 A iL:2=- Ms-sah, a portion, part, lot. 
 
 KjyA=- hu-zHr, presence. 
 
 A lis-. Jiazz, rejoicing, gladness, happi- 
 ness, contentment. 
 
 TP Aii=.- haf-td (for <tiiJ» hef-ta), a 
 ■week. 
 
 A ^=>- Jiah, truth ; worthy, suitable ; 
 according to. 
 
 A (j=- halck, an attribute of God. 
 ijllxj /is- ^a/c^ ta-'jM-la, the 
 Most High. 
 
 A r^'^ ha-lcir, vile, contemptible, de- 
 spised ; your humble servant. 
 
 A id.^AJi^~ ha-TA-Tcat, the truth ; 
 really, in truth, verUy. 
 
 A l:i-uU1&- M-ha-yet, a tale, story, 
 relation, history. 
 
 A *io- 7»mX-w« and hu-hiim, command, 
 science, wisdom, knowledge, 
 dominion. 
 
 A L^i-o. hih-met, wisdom, art, science; 
 a prescription. 
 
 i5^r>- hii-M-met, dominion, em- 
 pire. 
 
 A (»:^^-=- ha-Mm, a wise man, a phy- 
 sician. 
 
 T t_$X»-Xa. ha-lAm-lik, the science of 
 medicine. 
 
 A (Siils- ha-la-ka, a ring, a circle. 
 
 A ijJ-=^ hal-wa, sweetmeats, confec- 
 tionery. 
 
 A L::_oU.r.- him-d-yet, protection, de- 
 fence. 
 
 A /»L«.>- ham-mdm, a bath. 
 
 A ii\y>- hd-wd-leh, consignment over 
 to another, an of&cer who collects 
 the taxes. 
 
 T ^^ ha-H-l'i, a court yard, a house. 
 
 A LuLa- ha-yat, life. ^j\i ijL^ 
 lia-yat-i ha-hi, the life which en- 
 dures, eternity, future state. 
 
 A c- g ;,, -^ ^^y/, pity; injustice, tyranny. 
 
 A <ii;o.- hi-hh, artifice, trick, ruse. 
 
 A ^^y^ lia-i-van, an animal; an 
 exclamation of pity. 
 
 A *l'l»- hka-tem, a seal. 
 
 APT^tJ'l=-7iA(l!-i!i»(alsO^/JkJ Z-ff-i 
 
 a lady, matron, mistress. 
 A *jl=- hha-dem, a domestic. 
 
20 
 
 L? 
 
 •ilk 
 
 TURKISH GRAMMAE. 
 
 Jb 
 
 innate quality, 
 
 A ii»«tfl>- Ichas-s'i 
 
 property. 
 A iUi- Mia-tir, will, desire; heart, 
 mind, affection; memory. JG—: 
 ^j^sTl vjTiLi.. se-nin Icha-ter-in 
 i-clmn, for your sake. JaUi- 
 ^j^^y£ Ma-ter sor-mdJc, to en- 
 quire after any one. 
 
 A ^'■^ hha-Vi, empty. 
 
 A ij-'li. klia-'en, treacherous. 
 
 A — :i~ liha-har, news, fame, story. 
 
 p lA::?-. hlio-da, God. 
 
 A ctXri- hhadz, deception, fraud. 
 
 A ij:.-^^^ hhid-met (and vulgarl}' 
 ^J:-^^u5^ Miz-met) service, office. 
 
 A '-r'y^ Mii-rab, ruin, devastation. 
 hha-raj, tax paid hy the 
 Christians. 
 
 A iT^j^ hliarj, expense ; revenue. 
 
 Tl^j^ khir-siz, a robber. 
 
 P ijj^y^ Ichar-man, the harvest. 
 
 p T {^•.ji. Jcho-ros, a cook. 
 
 p isjj^ Icha-zi-neh, a treasury. 
 
 p Ar^.i.ujs- Ichas-tah, sick. 
 
 A (»'^=^ U,asm, an antagonist. 
 
 T *-ii^ Mi'swz, a relation. 
 
 A i__)lla~- hJii-tdh, speech, discourse. 
 
 A ^jsi~^kha-lds, liberty ;safety;health. 
 
 A_l. 
 
 A ]Aj>. hhalt, mixture. 
 
 J 
 
 Aj' 
 
 LU. 
 
 MaZ< «-(?cr, he talks nonsense. 
 A (_jJ-=^ /c/jflfl, the people, nation. 
 
 A /^i^ Iclmlk, the natural character 
 or disposition, custom. 
 
 A jj\u~- hhm-%ir, a pig. 
 
 A ^Ai^ hhan-dalc, a ditch. 
 
 I i iir^ liho-ra, a dance. 
 
 p tVi- /;Ao(?, self. 
 
 T ^1*=- IcMr-lih, vileness, contempt. 
 
 p ij^y^- Ichosh, beautiful, excellent, 
 good. 
 
 p JyJbp- Ichosh-nud, satisfied, con- 
 tented, gay. 
 
 A i__jyi-. Tchauf, fear. 
 
 A JL=^ Jclia-ydl, fancy, imagination. 
 
 A -»ri- IcJiair, good, well, excellent 
 (used politely to express, No). 
 
 AjiJ ddr, a house. 
 
 PjIj (Zar, signifies possession, when 
 
 added to a noun : as, ,1 J JL» 
 
 mal-ddr, possessor of riches, i.e., 
 
 wealthy. 
 T (Jl J (?d/, a bough, branch, 
 p (^»'J da-men, the skirt of a robe, 
 
 or border, 
 p ulj dd-na, learned. 
 p Ajlj da-neli and td-neh, a grain, a 
 
 berry. 
 A^lJ dd-yer, revolving. 
 
J' 
 
 ,ii 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 C^i 
 
 O) 
 
 A *jlj dd-yem, pBrmaaent, eternal. 
 
 A *ujiL> dd-yi-man, always. 
 
 T c_jj diji, the bottom. 
 
 A iljj dab-ldgh, a tanner, currier. 
 
 T lLnLj d'lb-lih, foundation. 
 
 T <Uj J dep-meh, a kick. 
 
 T CS^^J^ di-tir-meJc, to tremble. 
 
 T |C=*- J da-lcM (usually pron. da-ha), 
 
 and, also, again, etc. 
 p J_)J &r(?, pain, sorrow, grief. 
 A {jMji^ ders, reading, instruction; a 
 
 lesson, 
 p ci-wjJ dii-rilst, straight; entire; 
 
 safe ; sincere. 
 T («_x*j lO ter-la-melc, to sweat. 
 p 1^1-.^ I J dor-ma-ydn, in the midst. 
 
 a-JJ" 
 
 e-riin, within, the interior. 
 T i_f;J (^e-rz, the skin. 
 X j_^J &-ri, alive. 
 p bjJ der-ya, the sea. 
 T i-Q jJ de-r'in, deep. 
 p l::,-mjJ &s<, the hand [metaph., 
 
 power, authority). 
 p c:^^ J (^csAi!, a desert, plain, 
 p T (^^*-iiJ dush-man, an enemy. 
 T Llilx/«-ijJ dush-man-lik, hostility. 
 A IrJ <?M-c.a, a prayer, an invocation. 
 JLcJ du-^a-ler, sA\ea.\ [Z«<., prayers 
 
 (for you).] 
 A l>r J da^wa, a lawsuit, an affair. 
 T ^?-Wj dazr-wa-ji, the plaintiff. 
 
 A iJUjcJ day-wet, a prayer; a com- 
 mand ; an invitation. 
 
 A ^ij (?«/c., repulsion, hindrance. 
 
 A (UJJ def-z.at or def-cd, one time, 
 once ; a payment. 
 
 A ,iJ defii, burying. t^iCfci'l ^J 
 (^e/w et-mel, to bury. 
 
 A jjJ daM, striking; dahk ot-, to beat. 
 
 I LLi3 &/i, up to, only, such a way, 
 until, even, etc. 
 
 A ajjj dik-hat, diligence, care. 
 
 A i^o J duk-lidn, a shop. 
 
 I rfff-^ de-yir-mdn, a mill. 
 
 T -sX^oJ de-gir-man-ji, a miller. 
 
 I t^Cijio J de-gish-mek, to change. 
 
 T (JiJ de-gil, no, not. 
 
 T Llis-*S J dik-mek, to plant, establish ; 
 to sew. 
 
 T LLN:>i-> de-'i-nek, a stick, a staff. 
 
 T 1>J de-niz, the sea. LjJ ^1 ci^ 
 di-niz, the Mediterranean (Zii., 
 White Sea) ; l3j »-j Z-s-ra (?e'- 
 nh, the Euxine (Black Sea). 
 
 I (.L>^-«i5J din-le-mek, to hear, to pay 
 attention to. 
 
 T (.lil.«jJ3 J din-len-mek, to repose. 
 
 T Jj (?«7, the tongue, language. 
 
 p Jo dil, the heart, soul. 
 
 A T (j3j dal-ldl, a public crier, auc- 
 tioneer, broker ; a guide. 
 
 I I sIj di-lek, a demand, prayer. 
 
d^yi 
 
 TURKISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 c.-^ 
 
 T CS^ii de-lih, a hole. 
 T ^c^i^ dil-lci, (pron. til-k'i) a fox. 
 T l1X*1 J di-h-melc, to wish. 
 T lLx*] J dil-meh, to bore. 
 T . Jj <?^-K, foolish, mad. 
 Tytii de-mir, iron, an anchor. 
 T ^:>-jytJ de-mir-ji, a smith. 
 A Lj J dun-ya, the •world. 
 
 c^. 
 
 ijj dwo-ril-mek, to be turned 
 
 about, be upset, «fc. 
 T Jy J diir-lu and «! i J (commonly 
 
 pron. tilr-lii.), kind, sort, species. 
 •!_yj •' ijL> tilr-lu tilr-lu, of all sorts, 
 
 of every kind. 
 T J^_^i^J dUr-mak, to stand, to be, to 
 
 remain. 
 T i.LS^j}t^ de-vir-mek, to turn about, 
 
 to upset, 
 p t::-%-yO (?o«i, a friend. 
 T Ll.C»_ijJ dii-shur-me/c, to put in 
 
 order, to collect. 
 I (.lilijO dil-sheh, a bed, a cushion. 
 T lL>-*J^jJ diish-meh, to fall [nietaph. 
 
 to happen). 
 T (ji^J dii-glish, combat, battle. 
 T (__s.*ji.^J du-gush-melc, to fight. 
 T Lli^KjO du-Ml-meh, to be spilled, 
 
 to be upset, cast down in quan- 
 tities. 
 T (_5v«6jJ ditlz-iniek, to throw down. 
 
 T LLx^ii. J dil-Tcen-meh or tu-lcen-melc, 
 to finish, terminate. 
 
 I «5. J du-giim, a knot. 
 
 T lLC+jjO dug-meh, to beat. 
 
 T ij)Jj J du-giln, a marriage. 
 
 T ^^^t-iilj J do-lash-mah, to turn round 
 about, surround. 
 
 T (_^^j'^ do-la-mak, to surround. 
 
 A ci^ )l) da-H-Iet, nation; fortune, hap- 
 piness; empire, power. 
 
 T JlJjJ da-u-lat-lu, happy, rich. 
 
 p Jj.^1 J da-H-lai-mand, happy, rich, 
 powerful. 
 
 T oI.J ifo-te, full. 
 
 T ^J^\j,ii do-nat-mah, to adorn, equip 
 (a vessel). 
 
 T \aj u « J do-nan-ma, a fleet. 
 
 T ^J^liiJ do-nan-mak, to be adorned, 
 equipped. 
 
 T lLC*;JojO dun-dir-mek, to cause to 
 turn about, return. 
 
 I L_C«JjJ dun-meJc, to return, depart 
 from. 
 
 T ^J de-veh, a camel. 
 
 T ^J-*jjO do-i-mah, to satisfy one's 
 appetite, to be filled. 
 
 I j_iL*jjJ du-i-mah, to hear, compre- 
 hend. 
 
 T jy-*JjJ da-y-iim-lih, spoil, booty, 
 abundance. 
 
 T y-^.jO du-yum-lu, fertile, abundant. 
 
A'^ 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 LS^J 
 
 T 2(J dah (post-pos.), in within, eto. 
 
 [130 and 253]. 
 I Hii dah (for |_»-J), and, again, eU. 
 
 See [123].- 
 A u: -i, * u. fe ij deh-shet, astonisliment, 
 
 ■wonder ; fear. 
 A J I) J di-yar, a country, a district. 
 P j^,ui(JijJ di-de-Mn, a guard, spy; 
 
 the vanguard, sentinel. 
 Tjji) diz, the knee. 
 T (jiu J dish, a tooth. 
 T ic'^.J di-sM, female. 
 1 fj>^_^ di-lcen, a thorn, dart, spur, 
 
 point. 
 T (_lC«Jj J dil-meh, to wish, eto. See 
 
 T lIS^J dc-mek, to say, speak. 
 
 T ^O de-yii (for C-Jj/.'-^ ^^-yup)) saying. 
 
 p 2jl5 <Zw, a dive, a demon, a devil. 
 
 Pjl^J di-war, a wall. 
 
 A (j^?:;^ di-mn, a royal court, the 
 
 divan. 
 p "iJ^j^J di-wa-neh, foolish, mad. 
 A ci^ji'^ di-va-m, a courtier. 
 p lU J <ZeA, a town, a village. 
 
 A lijIj %at, person; essence; nature; 
 
 endowed with ; a lady. 
 A , U!j %a-hel, forgetful. 
 
 A iij^s~-ii %a-lM-rih, provision. 
 
 A j^ J %ilcr, memory, mention ; reciting 
 the Eoran, or repeating the name 
 of God over and over again, 
 until some of the company fall 
 off in a fit. 
 
 A (JJj ze-lil, abject, base, humble. 
 
 A jfjj zavh, taste, delight, pleasure. 
 lLC«.~i1 \su! j iJJ J zavTc va sa-fa 
 et-melc, to rejoice, be contented. 
 
 A l::^5-1 1 rd-hat, tronquillity, repose. 
 
 /Jk«J.' i.::-^=^l; ra-hat ol-malc, to 
 
 be tranquil, 
 p ij:.— ;li rast, the right hand ; right, 
 
 sincere, true; straight. 
 A i_^\) rd-zi, consenting, agreeing, 
 
 satisfied, 
 p is\j rah, a road, path. 
 A i_s\j ra-i, opinion, counsel, advice; 
 
 seeing. 
 A dsirlt rd-'i-ha, odour, exhalation, 
 
 stench. 
 A L>-j ri-ja, a request. 
 A yj^-*-=*v' '■^^->'2fl», merciful (applied 
 
 to God). 
 A (rrr^j ra-hhn (the same as uU>=- i) 
 
 clement. 
 
24 
 
 ^'J 
 
 TUEKISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 e 
 
 U 
 
 A J. redd, restitution, repulsion. 
 
 A jjhj raz-zah, the provider of the 
 necessaries of life (God). 
 
 A <i]Lj) ri-sd-let, a letter, a mission. 
 
 A ijy^j ra-sul, a prophet, an ambas- 
 sador. 
 
 A La I ri-za, aoquiesoenoe, wish, will. 
 
 A lilc) «-ca-yff,subjeots(ofanempire). 
 
 A fj-'ij ra-fih, a companion. 
 
 p ii.jl_j; ri-wdn-eh, travelling, flowing, 
 preceding, moving. 
 
 A _ . I riXh, the soul, spirit. 
 
 r T ili \jj rH-zi-gar, the wind; an ex- 
 perienced person ; time ; an event. 
 
 A (jr^&i ra-hm, pledged, pawned ; gage. 
 
 A [j^j ri-is, a head, chief, prince ; 
 pilot, captain. 
 
 J 
 
 p ^bj zc-ldn, the tongue, speech, 
 
 a language, 
 p jj ze-ler, above, on, upon, 
 p T (jV) za-lun, weak, sick, infirm. 
 A >,j^,ij>-j zah-met, grief, trouble, 
 
 fatigue. 
 p_jllji) zer-da-lu, an apricot. 
 A (_^ii-^ J za-mdn, time, season, an age. 
 A , 'uj ; zem-h'il, a basket. 
 
 p i-=rj zin-fir, a chain. 
 
 p (JoJjJ zin-da-gani, life, living. 
 
 p iXJ'^J zan-dd-gi, life. 
 
 T i^jj^j zen-g'm, rich. 
 
 p _(jjj zin-Jiar, beware! look out! be 
 
 on your guard ! 
 Pjjjj zdr, force, violence, strength. 
 A irjbj zi-yd-deh, more, much, too 
 
 much, excessively, very. 
 A i Xij zi-ya-ret, a visit to a holy 
 
 man's tomb, 
 p Lj j zi-ha, elegant, adorned, 
 p J ; zir, under, below, 
 p 1 J j zi-rd, because, since, 
 p J j zm, since, because, etc. {lit., 
 
 from this.') 
 p ^ ; zm, a saddle. 
 A c:.-~iJ J zi-net, ornament, dress, 
 
 embellishment. 
 
 p 5jLj sd-dah, clear; even; only; 
 
 simple, pure, 
 p jL: sds (from ^^A^ L: saM-tati),done, 
 
 arranged ; a musical instrument ; 
 
 rushes. 
 A i-ji-^iLj sa-!,at, an hour, time, the 
 
 present time; a watch. 
 ,snxL; sa-^at-j'i, a clockmaker. 
 
W....J 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 •j^ 
 
 25 
 
 T C->^j>_ 5 J L) sa-li-ver-melc, to deliver, 
 let go. 
 
 p (jL; san, custom, habit, manner. 
 
 A JL: sa-yer and sa-'ir, aU, the rest, 
 the whole, another. 
 
 p tj\^ sa-yejt, shadow, shade. 
 
 A ( ^«j sa-lab, cause, reason, motive. 
 
 p ^bLw; si-pa-hi, a soldier, an officer 
 of irregular cavalry caUed Spahis. 
 
 p *:;«: se-tem, injustice, tyranny. 
 
 T Jjl-s*^ si-jah (for ^lsa_;l) heat, 
 warmth ; warm. 
 
 T (^^.s:*^ s'l-chan, a mouse. 
 
 p —J ser, the head, top, chief. 
 
 T ^j^j~! ser-d-i, the seraglio. 
 
 p J_: scrd, cold. 
 
 T J— J sert, harsh, cruel, severe. 
 
 A Lii-^^j^ s'ir-tMt, quickly, in haste. 
 
 X c!_>-^ r-i ser-meli, to extend, lay out 
 (a cloth). 
 
 J^jjj^ su-riir, joy, delight. 
 
 T tj s»z, aparticle signifying without,' 
 which is added to words to ex- 
 press privation : thus, Ua--.-j 
 se-ieh-siz, without motive. 
 
 T /L<^j«j siz-la-malc, to lament; to 
 suffer. 
 
 T (w— > ses, voice, sound. 
 
 A ciJJiU-j sa-^-det, felicity, happi- 
 ness. 
 
 X Ajjltuj sa-^a-def-li, happy, excel- 
 lency. 
 
 A ^-j sa-ci, diligence, effort j an 
 express messenger. 
 
 a_Lj se-fer, a journey, road, tra- 
 velling ; war. 
 
 I ^ r^ se-fer-ji, a traveller. 
 
 I j-Srft-; se-fer-l'k, a soldier; an ex- 
 perienced person. 
 
 T SjL^ suf-ra, a table. 
 
 X <ui-; sa-fih, foolish. 
 
 I CS^>^ sig-ret-met and sei-ret- 
 met, to run, to walk about. 
 
 T ^..uA-j seli-san, eighty. 
 
 A lZjS^ sii-lcut, quiet, being silent. 
 --;^u iJuS,~i su-liut pd-rd-s'i, 
 a bribe. 
 
 I iJ_>.X-: si-neh, a fly. 
 
 A /»lL: sd-ldm, a salutation; peace. 
 
 A i^lL; sd-Id-met, safety, liberty. 
 
 A jj^ai—i sul-tdn, the Sultan; absolute 
 power. 
 
 A dJaL-j sul-ta-net, power, majesty. 
 
 X L-C*J-J sil-mel:, to clean. 
 
 A Lliy-j sii-luJc, a journey, way, 
 manner ; i su-lulc, leeches. 
 
 T aLj sil-leh, a box on the ear. 
 
 A l::.^.^^ semt, direction, way, road, 
 path. 
 
 p ,/♦--: se-mer, a pack-saddle. 
 
 T CS^y*^ se-mi%-lih, fat; eniboivpoint. 
 
26 
 
 TURKISH GRAMM.'iR. 
 
 l^ 
 
 T }y*^ se-mk, fat, stout. 
 
 A JU-) su-'dl, a question. 
 
 T Oj-j sut, milk. 
 
 p \lV-s sa-H-da, melancholy, love, 
 ambition. 
 
 T lIJo i'l Jj-j sa-u-da-gir-lih, com- 
 merce, agriculture. 
 
 A ^j-j sii-ret, one of the 113 chapters 
 of the Koran. 
 
 T CS^i^jj^ sur-tun-meJc, to glide, to 
 creep. 
 
 T CS^^jy^ siir-meh, to goad on (a 
 horse). 
 
 1 i^jj"' sH-ri, a flock, a troop, a 
 multitude. 
 
 Tj^-; suz, word, voice, discourse. 
 
 T Sj-^ sev-ffu, love, fondness. 
 
 T iSj-^ sev-gii-lu, beloved, dear. 
 
 T cS^y^ sug-meh, to curse. 
 
 T C->^^ sev-mei, to love. 
 
 T (J.x^jJJ)"' s«w-ire-&r-mcZ.', to rejoice, 
 be pleased, to console. 
 
 T u_5^^J>J}-j siin-der-meh, to extin- 
 guish (a light). 
 
 T Ll.x*jiJj »-j sii-'i-lish-meh, to talk 
 together, to chatter. 
 
 A 7-u-j sai-ydh, a pilgrim. 
 
 A c:-«»-U-.) si-yd-hat, a pilgrimage, 
 journey. 
 
 p iL-j si-yah, black. 
 
 p u-^^^-i «zi, an apple. 
 
 A^,--: soyy, walking, a promenade; a 
 
 show. 
 !l ^j\ .^ sai-rd-ni, a promenade; to 
 
 go to the country. 
 A J-»j sayl, flowing, a current of 
 
 water. 
 
 V jLi s/jai^, glad, rejoicing. 
 
 T ^JL^Li shasli-malc, to be confused, 
 
 troubled. 
 A i^Li) sha-her, thankful. 
 pji^Li) sha-herd, a disciple. 
 A lo'-"' sAara, honor, name, rank, state, 
 
 station. 
 p ^^JsLi slia-hhi, the peregrin falcon. 
 A i~J^ shuih, resemblance ; a ghost ; a 
 
 dream. 
 A i^^ shul-Jiat or shul-Jia, doubt, 
 
 scruple. 
 A iiJSJ^ she-did, vehement, violent. 
 A t_'l-i) AV-dJ, wine; any beverage. 
 A.jJa sliarr, wickedness; quarrelsome, 
 j-i is a termination added to 
 
 numerals. Vide [49]. 
 l::,^ _i) sha-ri-z-at, the law. 
 A iLi) she-fa, remedy, medicine ; state 
 
 of convalescence, cure, 
 p jlLi) shi-kar, hunting,game, plunder. 
 
Ib^Jij 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 JU 
 
 27 
 
 p ^J^J^ shi-lca^i, a hunter. 
 A ki^jULi) sTii-ha-yet, a complaint, 
 p j^ she-Tier, sugar. 
 A ili sAttXr, praise, thanksgiving (to 
 God), thanks. 
 
 A JiLi she-lcil, manner, way, form. 
 
 A p iSjl^-i) s7ue-md-ta, noise, cry, 
 tumult. 
 
 T IJCjaJ A^ sMm-dan-son-ra, for the 
 future, from henceforward. 
 
 1 i_fJUH.il sMm-di, now, at present. 
 T uJ3j^ shen-Wc, rejoicing, feast, 
 splendour. 
 
 A c:.-'jl^^ sha-ka-det, witness, attes- 
 tation, testimony. 
 
 Pj-^-i sheJir, a city. 
 
 T ^Mr^ she-hir-lu, a citizen. 
 
 A ^-i shay, a thing, something. 
 
 p i^,ry^ shi-rin, sweet, agreeable. 
 
 T (_/i— 1 sAm/j, a swelling, a tumour. 
 
 p itA^ shi-sheh, a bottle, a water 
 pipe, called also nar-g'i-leh and 
 (/a-Zj-KW. 
 
 T CS-^J^j^ shi-shir-melc, to swell, 
 to cause to swell. 
 
 T LL^-«-u«-.i shish-meh, to swell. 
 
 A f^i^!^^ shmj-tdn, Satan. 
 
 T <__)Lj «ai (and l-jLc), the stalk of 
 a flower, the stem of a plant. 
 
 A J Us sa-her, patient. 
 
 T Mt^^ sd-iiin, soap. 
 
 T fJXj\j£i sat-maTc, to sell. 
 
 T / iu]l i^y^ sa-t'kn dl-malc, to buy. 
 
 T -sO'l^ sa-ti-j'i, a seller. 
 
 T ^—U; sach, the hair. 
 
 A i_.^=-La sa-hel, a friend; a pro- 
 prietor of anything. 
 
 T jJjLj sd-rih, a muslin. 
 
 T (_^ jLj sar-mak, to wrap about the 
 head. 
 
 T i Itf sdyA, the right hand, the right 
 side ; whole, sound, etc. 
 
 T i Up sagh, safe, safe and sound ; not 
 broken. 
 
 T jj^^l^ sagh-mah, to milk. 
 
 T ipjA^ sagh-lih, safety, health. 
 
 A I sLj sdf, pure, clean. 
 
 T ^L^liLs saJc-Ia-mdk, to hide. 
 
 T ^J,^[^ sd-lcin-mali, to take care, 
 be on one's guard. 
 
 T ^-jtlL* sal-ghin, adj. dispersed; 
 sa-li-an, a tax. 
 
 T ^_^ Ls sdl-mak, to send ; to shake, 
 
 T ^^Lj sa-len-mah, to be sent. 
 
28 
 
 \m2 
 
 TURKISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 V.^ 
 
 / es.O 
 
 T ivi^rJ^ sd-Ii-giin, Tuesday. 
 
 T lLC«j v^l-a sd-U-ver-mek, to let go. 
 
 T f_y*j\M sdn-malc, to think. 
 
 T i^A.J^Xa sd-wush-mah, to dismiss. 
 
 T /L«jLfl sa-i-m,alc, to count. 
 
 A _L«s sa-iah, the dawn. 
 
 A ,sA.u5 sm57j, the morning, dawn. 
 
 A — «» sair, patience. 
 
 T ^J^\ -s"* sioh-ra-mah, to leap. 
 
 A l::_^-.s^ silli-lat, society, discourse, 
 
 friendship. 
 A ^j^"" sah-ra, a desert, a plain (hence 
 the word Sahara) ; a cool place 
 near a spring of water where 
 people go to pass a day. 
 A p 1 Ju» sd-dd, a sound, voice, echo. 
 A JjJw3 sadk, speaking truth. 
 A iii,X^ sa-da-la, charity, favour, alms. 
 T CLJj^ syrt or CIJ— •, the hack. 
 T ij^j^e syr-mak, to tie, wrap up. 
 T iSj^ se-rah, order, series, turn. 
 T (Ji-**-: sigh-mali, to hold, contain. 
 A iLc sd-fd and se-fd, pleasure, con- 
 tent, pastime, recreation. 
 A |ji-« sa-fi and ^S^ ^^.-fi, cleai', 
 
 just, upright, sincere. 
 T (J^ syJc, frequent, often. 
 T JU.^ sa-Ml, the beard. 
 T 1JL« son-ra (pron. so-U-ra), after, 
 afterwards, etc. 
 
 A ^ 
 
 sulh, peace ; a treaty. 
 
 T ijU.-<» sa-mdn, straw. 
 
 T ^.4^ sy-mah, to break, disperse. 
 
 A »_i«5sa-?jc, art, workmanship,a trade. 
 
 A ijc.^ san-z.at, art, a trade. 
 
 T jl:DtX^ san-^at-lu, skilful. 
 
 A Jjii..a san-dal, sandal-wood. 
 
 A p ritSu^ san-duTc, a box, chest. 
 
 A »i...» sa-nmn, &-n.id,o\; the beloved one. 
 
 I ^^^tJ^a sa»-mffi/:, to think. See^l^X.^. 
 
 T ^J^*^^ syn-tndk, to be broken, routed. 
 
 I ^ sU, water. 
 
 T fj^ ilj«3 su-var-maJc, to water, 
 sprinkle. ( Vide ^JuJ «~j . ) 
 
 A LlJyo sote, sound, voice. 
 
 T ^ j-i5 such, a fault, sin. 
 
 T jL>j.«5 such-lii, guilty, blameable. 
 
 A i-^i^ sii-ret, form, image, counten- 
 ance, portrait. 
 
 T ^aij^ sor-malc, to ask, interrogate. 
 
 T J-;j.c5 su-sh, without water, thirsty. 
 
 T CiJj— ■»^ su-siz-lilc, thirst. 
 
 T f^js su-sam, the island of Samos; 
 also, a seed of that name. 
 
 T fj^.4.^^ sus-mak, and , L4>..ff»«3 sii- 
 
 sa-mak, to be thirsty. 
 A ^^ su-fi, wise, pious, devout ; 
 a Soofi. 
 
 A 1 i^^j: suf, wool. 
 
 A ic^j-fl su-fi, a woollen pelisse. 
 
 T j;^ so-m/c, cold. 
 
 I ijy^j-^ sti-kdk, a street. 
 
' <jzi 
 
 tdne) the end, extremity, 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 Jli. 
 
 29 
 
 jya son, 
 
 after. 
 T J^ s6l, the left hand, left side. 
 T Jj3^ siJL-lah, left-handed. 
 T ^_jUJj..a su -la- male, to water, to 
 
 moisten, to sprinkle, to give 
 
 (horses) to drink. 
 T j;^^^ sUb-lan-malc, to be watered, 
 
 to leek (as a ship). 
 T (Jk»^^ sav-malc, to let pass, to pass 
 
 along. 
 T ^j;-*J}..tf son-male, to present. 
 T (_/uJ_j-a so-ish, prey, spoil. 
 T jp»j^ so-i-mak, to plunder. 
 T ^-tjo .-« su-yin-malc, to undress. 
 A A^ say-ydd, a sportsman. 
 A J,^ sa-'id, the chase, game. 
 A i_i».>a ««-«/", summer. 
 
 -ol^ zd-let, holding firm; a 
 governor. 
 
 wandering, lost ; 
 hungry. 
 A n.^ zabt, possession, seizing ; direc- 
 tion. 
 A t—Jj^ darb, beating, a blow. 
 ,_ji-« t— ' -a darb me-tlial, a proverb, 
 an adage. 
 
 A j-jI-5 za-ye^ 
 
 i- jfi %a-ra/r, injury, damage. 
 
 T J ^ za-ra/r-Ui, injurious, hurtful. 
 
 A k-i-x-« za-df, weak. 
 
 I ^jli-/i.« za-yif-lik, weakness. 
 
 A —,♦«,« da-mir and za-mir, the mind, 
 
 sense. 
 A L::_->iL.tf di-ya-fet, afeast; hospitable. 
 
 T ^J.^'lb ddt-malc, to taste. 
 
 T lUa (?fflr, narrow. 
 
 T ^_^jl!5 dart-male, to weigh. 
 
 T ^jliji^lL dar-ghin-lih, anger. 
 
 T j;-»L lUr dd-ril-malc, to grow angry. 
 
 A p (jAiUs tass, a bowl, a cup, a goblet. 
 
 T (ilb ^asA and dash, a stone. 
 
 T ^^.^.ilb dash-mali, to carry. 
 
 T /^l^ki-i IL &-«Am-TOc^, to move house. 
 
 T p It <?o'y^, a mountain. 
 
 T ^Jp*ailL da-ghit-mdh, to disperse. 
 
 p A jjlb <d^, a cupola, a window. 
 
 A LiuJ It ta-lcet, power, force, strength. 
 
 A ijlb td-lcim, a set; assortment. 
 
 A ^JyiJJlb tah-malc and ddle-mak, to 
 
 suspend, fasten. 
 A t_^Jli; te-feS, asking, searching, 
 
 desirous ; a student. 
 A ^It td-hz., horoscope, the dawn. 
 T Lu^Jlis ta-Uc-siz, unfortunate. 
 
30 
 
 ^_^ 
 
 TURKISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 J^ 
 
 T /^Ua da-ld-malc, to bite. 
 
 T lilt o»" <Ulls ta-ni or ta-na, a heifer. 
 
 T ^JL^AJUs dd-nisli-mah, to consult. 
 
 I (jAijlSs td-wus, a peacock. 
 
 T jjjlL ta-viih, a fowl. 
 
 T j.s'jli' ta-ioid-fi, a drummer. 
 
 T i_jll5 i<J-S, a colt, a foal. 
 
 A i._ol]a te-yi'J, good, pleasant, lawful. 
 
 A i.::,^-Ja ta-hi-^-at, nature, genius, 
 
 disposition. 
 T A^r^ iq^-rd^, earth, territory ; dust. 
 T /i^Ja tap-mak, to adore, worship. 
 1 jLjj tat-lii or tat-li, sweet, pleasant, 
 
 agreeable. 
 A ^Jo tarah, v?a.j, manner, position. 
 (__^wtJi T-r? ^'J'^^* et-mek, to 
 
 place, to cast upon one and 
 
 compel him to take. 
 A (V,)s ta-rih, a road ; way, method. 
 aLI /^ i? }J Jii ta-rik i-leh, in this 
 
 way. 
 A aUL ta.-'jM.m, food, nourishment. 
 I jjAL or i^j^io Aogli-ru or dogh-ri, 
 
 straight, right. 
 T jol*'**^ dolc-san, ninety. 
 T ^j.^Ui ta-kel-meh, to be closed, shut 
 
 up, adjourned, (vulg. di-hil-mah) 
 T J lib do-Mz, nine. 
 A i_JJ3 ta-lab, a petition, a request. 
 A J— *t te«2c, avarice, desire, gluttony, 
 r iljowi' tam^-kiar, avaricious,greedy. 
 
 I !Sjs^!h tan-ja-ra, a saucepan. 
 
 I jljt andj^,!^ da-var, animals, horses, 
 sheep, oxen, etc. 
 
 T jJ-«L .L top-la-mah, to gather up. 
 
 T ^J.^')t tut-mah, to take, seize. 
 ^J^.L ;)-j siiz tut-malc, to obey. 
 
 T ^_L»» 1^ dur-mah, to stand, wait. 
 
 I li I it tur-na, a crane, a stork. 
 
 T |jl-i«L ta-u-shaii, a hare. 
 
 T ^i^ _c »1» dogh-ril-mah, to make 
 straight, set in order, correct. 
 
 T /ytji.^ do-ghwr-mak, to beget. 
 
 T /yts.^ dogh-mak, to be bom. 
 
 ly;^ do-gM, birth, origin, com- 
 mencement. 
 
 T ^L*ij»t do-kun-mak or to-kun-mak, 
 to touch, to push. 
 
 T JJjL do-nuz (pron. do-muz), a pig. 
 
 T lyttSt^ don-mak, to freeze. 
 
 T /i*J Ja dol-mak, to be filled. 
 
 I (_^ Js (?(5», a pair of drawers ; skin, 
 color (of a horse). 
 
 T ^_^L1j da-yan-mak, to resist, sup- 
 port, lean against. 
 
 A Juj zd-fer, victorious, overcoming. 
 A J Hi zd-lem, a tyrant, oppressive, 
 
 tvrannical. 
 
u 
 
 ^,U 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 L? 
 
 31 
 
 A^Uj %d-her, apparent, clear, mani- 
 fest, certain. 
 
 4 I— cjii za-rif, beautiful, elegant. 
 
 A^Jdi za-far, victory, a triumph.. 
 
 A Jii sii^OT, injustice, tyranny, op- 
 pression. 
 
 A L::.-^^♦Ji3 ziil-mef, darkness. 
 
 A ^6 zmm, thought, opinion ; zann 
 et-meh, to think, etc. 
 
 A |..^ji ze-hur, arising, manifested, 
 appeared. 
 
 A JjIc !.d-led, an adorer of God. 
 A >-lc >Ji.-jez, weak, feeble. 
 T Lli3>-lc zA-jiz-Kk, weakness. 
 A i'jlc od-det, custom, mode, rite. 
 A JjIc cd-del, just, upright. 
 A c:JjJlc ia-dii-ieet, enmity. 
 A lie c.ar, disgrace ; modesty. 
 
 A 1 Jilc ta-rs/", wise, knowing, skilful. 
 
 A ^J-i)Lc ^a-shek, loving, a lover. 
 
 A o-^-ilc ^d-M-iet, the end; (aA'.) 
 
 in fine, in short, finally. 
 al.L*;^- ;Xj.J!lc c.a-ke-iet-i-niz Jcha'ir 
 
 o-la, may your end be good ! i.e. 
 
 may you die a Mosolman ! 
 A (Jilc c.a-M, prudent, wise, sensible. 
 A p Jlc ca-lem, the world, the 
 
 universe ; time, age ; mankind. 
 
 A Jlc ijM,-Um,, learned, wise. 
 
 A iJUiA^s- i«-J«<?-«^, worship, adoration 
 
 p (Uo jLc ^-had-et-Uar, devout, reli- 
 gious. 
 
 A 'ij\s. J-lar-et, interpretation, sense, 
 phrase. 
 
 A Ji-a; i^abd, a servant, a slave. 
 
 A ji-.-£ iM'-iid, a hermit; a servant. 
 
 A L_>1:^ ^i-tdb, reprehension, re- 
 proving. 
 
 A ^U^ ^th-mdn, Osman, the name 
 of the third Khalif. Hence the 
 word Ottoman.' 
 
 A i_-ols^ iM-ja-yeb, and <—-^ ta- 
 yaS, wonderful, marvellous. 
 
 A ir^ ^a-jam, foreign, barbarian ; a 
 Persian ; incompetent, etc. Tide 
 page \ ■ r, note 1. 
 
 A I'jtc id-zdr, the face, the cheek; 
 an excuse ; a veil. 
 
 A (_;SrC cflr(?or iflrz, honor, reputatioii. 
 JUw tj^rC •^rz-lial, a petition. 
 
 A Ic c.«zz, glorious, magnificent. 
 
 A cu^, Jc pd - z? - OT«^, invitation. 
 C->^^^\ l::-s.*j Jc ^d-zi-met et- 
 meh, to go. 
 
 A iflc ^%%et, glory, honor. 
 
 A ilkui ^s-kar, a soldier; an army, 
 a troop. 
 
 A ^_^jl£ tMsM, love. 
 
32 
 
 (^ 
 
 TURKISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 tJU 
 
 A uL..a£ :.iis-yi-a.n, rebellion, sin. 
 
 A i.::-v«-iic !.a-zi-met, grandeur, mag- 
 nificence. 
 
 A *-ilc ta-zim, great, grand. 
 
 A Ji£ tB/j; or ca-/M, pardon, absolu- 
 tion. 
 
 A JJLc iM,-hil, intellect, wisdom. 
 
 A lie zAi-Jva-la, prudent, wise. 
 
 T l^Jjiii '^a-Tcel-siz, without sense, 
 foolish. 
 
 T Ll>!UuiiLc ^a-hel-si%-lih, folly, stu- 
 pidity. 
 
 T yliic c a - ^«? - lu, wise, prudent, 
 judicious. 
 
 T ^4llii£. ^a-hel-l-k-lili, prudence, 
 intelligence, sagacity. 
 
 A ^ys. ui-I;u-tet, punishment. 
 
 A (jj*xc (,ah, reflection ; an image ; 
 a return-angle. 
 
 A „lLc ^i-ldj, medicine, a remedy. 
 
 A dLc <.il-ht, a malady ; an accident, 
 a pretence. 
 
 A *lc <dlm, knowledge, science, art, 
 profession. 
 
 A ,\s. uila, above, upon, according to. 
 
 A 2 jU.ji zi-ma-deh, a colonnade. 
 
 A -♦x- ^mr, life, age. 
 
 A J-KC t,a-mal, work, action. 
 
 A ^ urn, on, from, of, concerning, 
 etc. 
 
 A jLx; c.«-«a(?,obstinacy. i_^%s-u3l51;j; 
 
 !.i-ndd sa-heh, an obstinate man. 
 A —ii z.dm-bar, amber ; a place to 
 
 put barley in. 
 A a:-c cind, near, with, about, in, 
 
 according to, etc. 
 p <SJ lie- uw-ret, a woman, a wife. 
 A (_;i»^ cflM(?, exchange, recompense, 
 
 reward. 
 A iXvt :.ahd, a promise, contract, 
 
 agreement ; a will. 
 A I— -^^ tozJ, shame; a vice, stain, 
 
 infamy. 
 A S-^r^ ^id, a festival, a religious feast. 
 A (_/u--c ^ai/sJi, life, delight. 
 A ^-x tfflSre, a spring; the eye; a 
 
 fountain. 
 A iL^.^ Ji-net. assistance. 
 
 A Jilc glia-fel, imprudent, negligtnt; 
 asleep. 
 
 A Isli gha-fil-an, suddenly. 
 
 A t_.--Jlc ghd-leh, victorious, conquer- 
 ing. 
 
 A ULc. glid-Uha, chiefly, upon the 
 whole. 
 
 A i_-^.li gha-yel, absent, invisible, 
 hidden. 
 
i^^\i 
 
 VOCAliULAKY. 
 
 L^li 
 
 33 
 
 A c:-oli gha-yet, chiefly, extremely, 
 the end : gha-yet et-meJc, to de- 
 termine, intend, resolve. Vide 
 page ^ P . 
 
 A -ili. ghd-yer, jealous. 
 
 A ij\i- gha-'i-ret, the meridian; mid- 
 day. 
 
 'A <tljLc ghd-i-let, disgrace ; an evil. 
 
 A I Jlc gha-da, repast in the day about 
 twelve o'clock. 
 
 A is\si g}ia-dat,\h.6 day of to-morrow. 
 ( Vide (^rJjlj ya-rin). 
 
 A ijjj-i ghar-lel, a sieve. 
 
 T A (jjjri gliu-rush (plural of /Ar^ 
 gursh) piastres, five or six of 
 which make a shilling. Originally 
 it was of the value of a Spanish 
 dollar, but it has been reduced 
 (by the governments constantly 
 debasing the standard of the 
 coin) to be worth about 2d. 
 
 A i—^y: gha-rib, a stranger, a 
 foreigner, a poor man. 
 
 A (he gha-zal, an ode, a short poem. 
 
 A k_v^ gha-dah, anger, violence, 
 wrath. 
 
 A LU^Lfti ghaf-let or ghif-let, negli- 
 gence, imprudence. 
 
 A jjii gjia-fiir, forgiving, clement. 
 
 A j*jLc ghu-ldm, a boy, a servant. 
 
 A i_Jj: ghalb, victory, excelling. 
 
 A <uLc ghal-let, victory, superiority, 
 (adverbially used to signify for 
 the most part,' andpro. gha-li-lah) 
 
 A LLc gJia-lat, an error, blunder. 
 
 A |»i yAfl»z, grief, sorrow. 
 
 p i~sxh- ghum-jeh, a rose-bud. 
 
 p Icji ghd'tL-gJid, a noise, dispute, 
 quarrel, (sometimes written ^ii 
 
 A^^ ghayr, other, another, except, 
 besides, without, ete. 
 
 A ^^ gha-i-ret, courage, honor, 
 jealousy, (should be ghi-ret.) 
 
 T ^jf^ ghay-ri, another, besides, in- 
 dependently : also used esple- 
 tively — (J^^\ ^_c^jj lu gha-'i- 
 ri ol-maz, But indeed this will 
 not do. 
 
 A rii-li fd-hher, precious, excellent. 
 
 A _j Is fd-reh, glad, happy. 
 
 A J-ili fa-del, excellent, virtuous, 
 
 learned. 
 A i3ij fd-n'i, frail, transitory. 
 A ifiijlj fa-'i-det, profit, advantage. 
 T (.LX/«J;(Jols fa-'i-deh-len-meh, to 
 
 profit, derive advantage from 
 
 anything ; to be useful. 
 T ^iiSi\i fa-'i-deh-lu, useful, profitable. 
 
.•]4 
 
 J- 
 
 ^ 
 
 TURKISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 t: 
 
 A iUii fit-net, sedition, rebellion. 
 
 T ^ i:^ fit-neJi-lu, querulous. 
 
 A J.«ii fi-t'il, fidgetty ; the 'wick of a 
 lamp or candle ; fi-t'il al-malc, to 
 become fidgetty. 
 
 ,\ Li-v-jl-s fi-ra-set, intelligence, sa- 
 gacity. 
 
 A cLj fi-rdgh, leisure, repose, tran- 
 quillity, idleness. 
 
 p lAr* fi'i'^K ^ carpet, mat, cushion, 
 bed. 
 
 A i.::_^«ffj fir-sat, an opportunity, oc- 
 casion. 
 
 T i--Jj^jO L::^^ji fir -sat dti-shvp, an 
 opportunity presenting itself. 
 
 p ^^\ji fe-ra-jeh, a cloth cloak or 
 overcoat. 
 
 p (_^^ fu-rUsh, a seller. 
 
 p t>Li^ fir-ydd, complaint, cry for 
 help, clamour. 
 
 A J^ fdsl, a section, chapter ; de- 
 cision, etc. 
 
 A J-^/a(^?,exoeUence, virtue; science; 
 grace. 
 
 A 'J-.-.iJ fd-d'i-let, excellence. 
 
 A ,J*j fid, acting, doing ; fi'l, an ac- 
 tion, a verb. 
 
 A^yJLJ fa-lc'ir, poor, a religious mendi- 
 cant ; a faquir. 
 
 A ili fihr, thought, care, advice, 
 reflection. 
 
 A ^3.i fa-ldn, such a one, such, etc. 
 
 A al^Ai fel-sa-feh, philosophy. 
 
 A Llili fa-lah, the stick with which 
 boys are beat at school ; the fir- 
 mament. 
 
 A Li fe-na, bad, base, shameful. 
 
 A LUji fa-M, passing away ; death ; 
 negligence, omission. 
 
 A /i^ fok, above, besides; superiority. 
 
 T <)jljji fd-u-lca-neh, above. 
 
 A tl fi, in, among, of, by, concerning, 
 etc. Jls'l i_J fil-hal, in truth, 
 truly ; j-^U^ iJ fil-wa-Tie'', it so 
 happened ; in short, etc. 
 
 A ij-i /zZ, an elephant. 
 
 (J 
 
 A ^Is Tca-hil, receivable, credible, 
 
 etc. ; able, possible ; the future. 
 
 A iiJjlj Ica-li-li-yet, appetite; skill, 
 
 aptitude. 
 
 <U-./»»ij\j hwp-lum-la-glia, a tortoise. 
 
 A ^J^li Icap-mdlc, to seize, carry oflT. 
 
 T CL>\i hdt, folds. ^j:-."li _lj Mchhdt} 
 is. 
 how many folds? i.e., how often ? 
 
 T jjy*j\i hat-male, to add, to join. 
 
 T —\> hdch, some ; interrog., how ? 
 
 how many ? 
 
Xi 
 
 VOCABULAEY. 
 
 .30 
 
 T fj^j:<~\j Ica-cldr-mali, to cause to 
 
 run away. 
 T ^JiAs=-\i hacli-mah, to run away. 
 A oli Mi, quantity, length. 
 AjJIj ha-der, skilful, apt, capable. 
 Tjli hdr, snow. 
 T /A>i-s hd-rish, mixture, confusion, 
 
 medley. 
 T ^JytpJ^Xi hd-rish-ter-mdh, to mis; 
 
 to trouble, interfere with, (causal 
 
 of kd-rish-mdk) 
 T ^J^t^jXi ka-rish-mdh, to mix. 
 T ^JUJ^^jIj ha-ri-shii-la-malc, to go 
 
 and meet (a person). 
 T !_?; ^ ha-r'i, a woman, a wife. 
 T jlj /ids, a goose. 
 T ^j;:.^ ; \i haz-mah, to dig. 
 T ^JUi^iJ ka-shin-mak, to scratch. 
 A (-.^e ^d-rfi, a judge, a Cadi. 
 T Js li kd-tir, a mule. 
 T ^i.^ jJoli' kal-dir-mak, to raise up, 
 
 to carry away. 
 T ^^.tilli kalk-mak, to rise, to depart. 
 T (J^Ki kal-mak, to rest, to stay. 
 T JU ka-lin, thick. 
 A. i^\s kd-met, standing, the height 
 
 of a person. 
 T j^li kan, blood. ^Jl^l ^U to be bled 
 
 (from the veins). 
 T ^_^li kan-mak, to quench one's 
 
 thirst. 
 
 T ^j^jAi ka-wu,r-mak, to cook, to fry. 
 T (_/i-ili kd-yisli, a tie, band, strap. 
 A ^'U /iifl-'?/, content, consenting. 
 A tjXs ka-im, erect, firm, vigilant. 
 A Li-^r^Lj ka-hd-liat, fault, deformity, 
 
 baseness, turpitude. 
 T jjLi ka-hak or ka-pak, a covering ; 
 
 ]5umpkin ; the deck of a vessel. 
 ' iicJi-ka-pak-lu, a three- 
 
 c 
 
 X-5 
 decker. 
 
 T (JJi ka-hal, a task, a day's labour. 
 
 .JJi id-j kd-hd-ldh dlditn, I have 
 
 dertaken to do this work for so 
 
 much. 
 A JJj kail, before, the front. 
 A dLjj kub-ht, a kiss. 
 A j-j ku-bur, (pi. of -J) a tomb. 
 T J;)fJ ka-iak, rind of a tree, a shell. 
 A jj^ ka-bUl, consenting, agreement. 
 T |.,2LJ! kap-ldn, a tiger. 
 T (J^~> kap-mak, to close, to shut. 
 I i-j ka-pii, a gate, a door. 
 A J:J /,-«(!?, killing, slaughter. 
 T -:ii /.:«-<«, vehement, strong; adv., 
 ^very, entirely. 
 
 
 ka-ti gech, too late. 
 
 T ^ /cffc/i, some. (««« r-li) 
 
 T ij^ ka-chdn, when, at the time 
 
 that. 
 T ^.tjys- ka-chur-mak, to put to 
 
 flight, to cause to fly. 
 
36 
 
 Ch/ 
 
 TURKISH GRAMMAK. 
 
 J^ 
 
 A ks'' laht, a famine. 
 
 A jJ hadd, stature, body. 
 
 A ,jJ Ica-dar, value, price ; quantity, 
 
 number, etc. iJJs Jjl ol ka-ddr, 
 
 so muob. 
 A ijiXi hud-ret, power. 
 A aJj ha-ddm, a foot, a step. 
 A l^jJ ku-dd-md, the ancients, (pi. of 
 
 *jjj' Ica-d'tm). 
 A *J Jii ha-dim, old, former. 
 A il Jj ka-rdr, constancy, firmness ; 
 
 rest, repose; resistance. 
 T JlJJ Zra/, a king, cbief. ^]j^ 
 
 (pron. hrd-li-jali) the queen. 
 A ^\ji kur'dtt, tbe Koran. 
 
 T iJiitX-Aj! ka-rdn-dash (also 
 
 ^\^ 
 
 A iM^y' kur-lan, a sacrifice. 
 
 uV/ 
 
 kdr-ddsh), a brother. 
 
 *1 -J kur-hdn la-'i-rdm, the feast 
 
 of the sacrifice. 
 T iJCji kur-la-ghah, a frog. 
 T JljJi kar-tdl, an eagle. 
 T »-i) J kar-sha, opposite, against, 
 
 towards. 
 T ^^^ji J kar-shu-la-mak, to oppose. 
 
 T <ii Ji kar-gliah, a crow. 
 T jiJJ ^jVX-, forty. 
 T /J^y kir-mak, to break. 
 T ,jjj ^-flrra, the belly. 
 
 ^f 
 
 , a horn. 
 
 T i^i ka-rin-jeli, an ant. 
 
 A L_^.y Aa-rzJ, near ; nearly, about. 
 
 T ij^Vl kd-%dn-mak, to gain, ac- 
 quire, get profit. 
 
 T t^'i kaz-ghan, kettle, boiler, a 
 large saucepan. 
 
 A LUjLuj ki-sa-ioet, sorrow, anguish, 
 regret. 
 
 T , sl-uJ kis-ralc, a mare. 
 
 A f^ kasm, an oath ; division. 
 
 A t—:\~a: kas-sdh, a butcher. 
 
 A Ju^ kasd, intention, project, design. 
 
 A -iijj kasr, a castle, a tower. 
 
 T ^i.4lw2i kys-syl-mak, to be shortened, 
 
 to make short. 
 T ^Lai Z-y-s«, short. 
 A JUaJj to-«»,' a tale, story; an affair. 
 A ki kat, only, at least, e^c. 
 A «_ki Afl-ic., cutting. 
 A ijLki ka-ti-fi, velvet. 
 
 ' When the h [a) is not pronounced, it is purposely left out, in order that 
 the learner should not aspirate it. The a is sometimes eh, sometimes ah, and 
 sometimes ^ : for this there is no rule ; the learner must be guided by his 
 ear, and by the words noted in this vocabulary, as a sample of the rest in the 
 language. Vide page 2, preceding the Vocabulai-y. 
 
\ J} VOCAliULAKY. 
 
 
 A ^jjJiJ Jca-fas, a cage. 
 
 T ^^ or ^^Is hd-lan, (participle of 
 
 tj^^) remaining or remainder. 
 A i_^ Icalh, the heart, soul; t kalp, 
 
 false. 
 p imi-^ Icil-ti-bdn, a man of bad 
 
 repute. 
 T ^^jis hal-dir-mak, to take away, 
 
 carry off. 
 T ^j^^ hil-mah, to do, ete. (auxiliary 
 
 verb) /i*!; jL«J na-maz Jcil-mak, 
 
 to pray. 
 T ^IJ &-Zj?", a sabre, a sword. 
 T Jjj kd-Ul, small, little. 
 T ^^'*U,i ham-clieh, a whip. 
 A _4J ha-mar, the moon. 
 T (ii./fci Ica-mish, a reed. 
 T l>Lj &-»«(? (vulgarly /iS-wa^) a wing. 
 T jIjLj ka-nad-lu, winged. 
 T LJU-^i^lxJi Jci-na-^at, content, satis- 
 faction. 
 p A Jcj kand, sugar (hence our word 
 
 sugar candy') 
 T ^J^JcJs lean-dir-mak, to excite, 
 
 stimulate, provoke. 
 T (_]j Aijj han-d'il, a candle. 
 T iOii; han-da, (vulg. lian-da) where? 
 
 whence ? 
 T ty^ Ican-mah, to quench one's 
 
 thirst. 
 T (J'tf^y Ico-iva-la-mak, to pursue. 
 
 T ^J^jiiji ho-par-mak, to pull up, 
 
 carry off, tear. 
 T fj.*^ ^ kop-mak, to rise, to go out. 
 A ClJii kxL-wet, strength, power, 
 
 vigour, ability; virtue. 
 T J^ujy ku-icet-si%, powerless, without 
 
 force. 
 T L_Ct>Jj' J kii-wet-lan-mek , to ac- 
 quire strength, to fortify one's 
 
 self ; to give strength to another ; 
 
 to assist with money. 
 T yu^ kut-lv. and mut-lu, happy, 
 
 fortunate. 
 T yJV kii-wet-lu, strong, powerful, 
 
 robust. 
 T fJ^*s>-J ko-ja-mak, to grow old. 
 I i^iH ko-ja, an old man; old, 
 T j^^n^^ ko-cM-j'i, a coachman. 
 T ie*-y kiX-clii, a coach. 
 T fj^ '"jy kur-tar-mak, to save, to 
 
 deliver. 
 T ^juij iji kHr-tul-mak, to be saved, 
 
 to be freed from anything. 
 T fjXij^ ku-riU-muk, to defend, pro 
 
 tect ; to be dried up. 
 T i^jiji kiird, (pron. kiirt) a wolf. 
 T Jj^ij^J kor-kak, fearful, timid. 
 T ^JK*^ It! kor-kut-mak, to frighten. 
 T (jyt^ 1 fc! kork-mak, to fear, be afraid. 
 I -^ijji kor-kfmj, terrible, fearful. 
 T iJJ.:sxi .J kor-k&nj-lik, fear, horror. 
 
a 
 
 >y 
 
 TURKISH GRAMMAK. 
 
 u 
 
 T ^j^ Tior-hu, fright, fear. 
 
 T^)jj»j hor-hu-liX, terrible, frightful. 
 
 T (J-tj^ kor-mah, to extend ; to 
 stretch; to dry (linen, etc.). 
 
 T a 15J' M-ra, dry, useless. 
 
 T ^J.^jjjy: 7cu-rut-maJc, to eemse to dry. 
 
 T fj^jj^ Icu-ru-malc, to defend, pro- 
 tect ; to grow dry, to wither. 
 
 T i.s^ 
 
 r 
 
 Icu-ri-jeh, dry. 
 
 T ,_f iy liU-zi, a lamb. 
 
 T (py hilsh, a bird, ys-^jj kiish-ji, 
 
 a falconer. 
 T , ;u>Li J iM-sJia-mah, to attach to, 
 
 to harness. 
 T <)Utj ko-gheh, an urn, a vessel, 
 
 (utensil) a bucket, (vulg. ku-fa) 
 T , iul; J kok-la-mak, to smell. 
 T iJ J ko-kH, smell, scent, exhalation. 
 T ^jXJ^:^ ko-kat-mak, to give a smell 
 
 to anything. 
 T ^L^ jjjj ho-ku-la-mak, to smell. 
 T ^^^^ ko-nii-shu, a neighbour. 
 T J»js /ciiZ or kol, a servant, a slave; 
 
 a soldier. 
 A (J J or Jjli ka-ivul, a word, a 
 
 compact; an opinion; a bargain. 
 (__5n.40j1 ,\J • (j)j Z:«i«? «ca ka-rar 
 
 et-mek, to agree. 
 T „!l!ti ku-l(ij, a measure the length 
 
 of the two arms extended. 
 
 Tji^jj kH-la-ghuz, a guide, a pilot, 
 
 an escort. 
 T jiy ku-lak, the ear. 
 T ^t^ ho-la-'i, easy, convenient. 
 T jJj^y ko-la-'i-Uk, ease, facility. 
 A I* J ko-um, people, a nation. 
 T »A^ij ko-mu-shu or ko-nii-shu, a 
 
 neighbour. 
 T /»-»»J ko-mak or commonly 7co-z- 
 
 «ia/i:, to place, ^i^i^' i_JjJ oj^ 
 
 /:o-i! ^ii-»» or-dah, put that down 
 
 there. 
 T/ilivi ko-nak, a house where one 
 
 puts up on arriving at a village ; 
 
 a residence, home. 
 T ^J^^JLJii ko-nush-mak, to converse 
 
 with any one in a neighbourly 
 
 manner, (from ko-nii-shu) 
 T /j^ jJ kon-mak, to place one's self, 
 
 to encamp, to perch. 
 T (J-^'^ ko-H-mak or kov-mak, to 
 
 drive away, to turn away (a 
 
 servant). 
 A i_f ji ka-w'i, strong, robust ; solid. 
 T ^. J jj kii-'i-ritk, the tail. 
 
 T L_>-^ 
 
 
 ko-i-icr-mek, to let go. 
 
 A j_>uUj ki-as, an opinion. 
 
 A AiLJ ki-d-fit, dress, appearance, 
 
 air, manner. 
 T aIJ; k'l-ydm, rising up. 
 
.r 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 u"- 
 
 r 
 
 39 
 
 T 'I'^uJ M-d-mef, the last day : i.e., 
 the day of resurrection. 
 
 lyr^ ^1/r, a plain. 
 
 T (ji-J fo'sA, winter. 
 
 T J.-J M, the hair ; skin. 
 
 T tU-j lei-met, price ; measure, stature. 
 
 p lU-j lii-mah, hashed meat. 
 
 T /i-*-J hi-malc, (for Ico-'i-mak) to place. 
 
 T /JU-J ha-'i-mak, a delicious kind of 
 cream. 
 
 T ^^'U-j' Icai-nat-mak, to make boU. 
 
 T ^Jl.^u^ kai-na-mah, to cook, to boil. 
 
 T 4-j /kZ-yM or kii-i, a well. 
 
 T i^y^ Jco-yun, a lamb. 
 
 T J^\ii.^ Icia-ba-shi, a bathman, a 
 man who washes people in the 
 bath: (from i-i, a kind of sponge 
 from which a lather is made : it 
 is composed of the unspun silk 
 threads taken from the interior 
 of the worm, in the same way as 
 catgut is made.) 
 
 L^ 
 
 A Lli, an Arabic particle signifying 
 'like, as,' etc. Ex.CSj ^^ ka-in- 
 na-ka, as if thou wert; iji-^Jjli 
 kal-dib, like a thief. 
 
 A Jjill^ kal-dii-wal, as before {comp. of 
 
 lL^, as, like; J I, the Arabic 
 article, and J« I, before, formerly) 
 
 A pjx.li' ka-ghaz, paper. 
 
 i.ji^ ka-fer, denying God ; an in- 
 fidel, an impious wretch. 
 
 A (J.-«o ka-mel, perfect, full, entire. 
 
 A '-7-' Us ki-hab, roasted meat. 
 
 ^j^ ka-Vir, great, large. 
 
 A ^ci kit-tan, flax. 
 
 v IjuSrii ket-khu-da, a viceroy, lieu- 
 tenant, an agent, etc. ; hence the 
 word Ls^ kekh-ya, the chief of 
 of a village. 
 
 p Ls'^ ku-ja, where ? whither ? 
 
 T (ff.^ ki-cln, a she-goat. 
 
 T t_5'J6 ke-di, a cat. 
 
 A (J.^ lii ke-zd-lek, also, thus, there- 
 fore. 
 
 A L::^v-tLS ki-ra-met, honor, respect. 
 
 A i^S kiir-si, a throne, chair, pulpit. 
 
 A ^S kur-ki, a crane. 
 
 A ^f ke-rem, generosity, favour. 
 
 V T nf kir-reh, a time. >iS A ^^f 
 ker-reh, one time, once. 
 nS i_/ijv ba'd ker-reh, sometimes. 
 i^ J;>f" ^^"^ ker-reh, many times, 
 often. 
 
 A i^'S ka-rim, generous, splendid, etc. 
 
 A <l)^ ka-r'ih, detestable, filthy. 
 
 A tjjS kess, a man, a person, some 
 one. ^;*^S -& her-kes, every one. 
 
40 
 
 TURKISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 .'If 
 
 T f^j^M^ kes-Mn, violent, strong ; 
 
 sharp (said of vinegar, wine, a 
 
 knife, etc.) 
 T uJs/*-^ kes-tnek, to cut. 
 p .jijli' kesh-ti, a boat, a ship. 
 A i__iil^ heshf, open. i__C«i.il i_jLi*i 
 
 ^ssA/ et-mek, to enquire into, to 
 
 look after an affair. 
 T J^i ki-slii, a man, a person. 
 A e:-.oU$' h'-fa-yet, sufficiency, profit. 
 A^ kiifr, infidelity, 
 r lLnI^ kek-lik, a partridge. 
 A J^ ^m/, all, the whole. 
 T Ji hd, ashes, cinders. 
 A *iS kd-ldm, a word, a speech, 
 p *S /ie»!, wanting. 
 T fS kim, who, that, efo. 
 A JU-^ ke-mal, perfection, excellence; 
 
 integrity ; fulness. 
 T iwj.^ ki-mes-nah, some one, a 
 
 person. 
 I ikjjj^ kim-seh, some one, somebody, 
 
 any one. 
 F lUi^ ke-nar, a side, shore, edge. 
 p 10^^ ki-nun, or ^j v^ ' ek-nun, now, 
 
 at present. 
 T CSj Sku-pekj'd.Hog. (pron. H-o-jjei) 
 T i.^J'^ kii-tiik, the stump of a tree, 
 
 piece of the root used to light 
 
 a fire with. 
 T lLXs~^ kU-ehuk, small, little. 
 T jj^ ^jir, blind. 
 T i-li;j^ kiirk, a pelisse. 
 T cJ;_j^ kii-rek, a spade. 
 P ii ^ ku-sheh, a corner. 
 I lL^^ Z-ij/:, a root. 
 T j>-j^^ ku-milr-ji, a coal merchant, 
 p i^ kuh, a mountain, a hiU. 
 p tj-^ ]cu-i, a farm ; a town. 
 T jjj jS^ ku-i-lu, rustic. 
 T i^r-^ kir-li, dirty. 
 p T ^.u-^ k'l-seh, a purse. 
 A "Li-^ kay-fi-yet, quality; state of 
 
 thing or matter. 
 I 1^ or iK ki-lar, dispensary ; a 
 
 place where the provisions of a 
 
 house are kept. 
 T j>-XS ki-lar-ji, the keeper of 
 
 the same ; a person in charge 
 
 of the keys. 
 
 ^' 
 
 p ^li gdh, time, place. i^S ilS some- 
 times. 
 T i.sX!t>'6 ffa-M-j'eJi, sometimes. [200] 
 
 The (/ is always hard, at all times, before every vowel. 
 
■^ 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 (J-J 
 
 / 
 
 41 
 
 T i-o ^5-M, like, as, according to, 
 upon, on. Viie page e P. 
 
 T CS~^jf^ gii-tur-mek, to bring, con- 
 duct, carry away. 
 
 T i.sr'^^or i.s:^ ge-jeh, the night. 
 
 T 1^ , part, of lL>^^ gech-mek, ' to 
 pass,' used adverbially for past 
 time : — as Si^y^^ ge-chen-lar-da, 
 in olden time. 
 
 T lLn-kst gech-mek, to pass, to tra- 
 verse, to arrive. 
 
 T uXk^^ ge-chin-mek, to be, to live, 
 to exist ; to gain one's bread. 
 
 p \i^ ge-Aa, a beggar. 
 
 V y&jf ge-rif-tar, a prisoner, captive; 
 taken. 
 
 T C-ij' gi - reli, it is necessary. 
 .1 i.liX }j C^^ ge-relc iil ge-relc o, 
 whether this or that. CXT C^ 
 ge-rek-ge-rek, it is indispensable. 
 
 T iJ-C»^ gir-mek, to enter ; also 
 
 T i.L^^'S giz-le-mek, to hide, to con- 
 ceal. 
 
 I cS^^'f>giz-lan-inek, to be hidden. 
 
 T ij>-^^ giz-lu-ja, secretly [200]. 
 
 T CS^j^ gez-mek, to walk, to march. 
 
 p ssi'S ge-zi-dah, chosen, selected. 
 
 p u:_>.io gesht, walking ; passage. 
 LL^Ccj] il jo j \^:.-J^ gisht-u 
 gii-zar et-mek, to promenade. 
 
 p jliiT giif-ta/r, speech, speaker. 
 
 p jS J Lii^^ii guf-t'u.-gu, conversation. 
 
 I ilS^jS giir-mek, to see. 
 
 p 1^ giil, a rose. 
 
 I LlX*ii gel-mek, to come, to arrive. 
 
 T cS~sM^ ge-lin-jik, a little bride. 
 
 p ij^ gii-man, opinion, thought. 
 
 p iilii gii-nah, a sin. 
 
 T -jaS genj, young, tender. 
 
 p ^S yew;', a granary ; a hidden 
 
 treasure, 
 p {JL:^ gii-nesh, the sun. 
 T iiS and i:^^ (pro. ye-»e or yi-ni), 
 
 again, nevertheless. 
 T CJjS yu?, anus. 
 T ^^ gtich, force, power; occupation. 
 
 {Adj. difficult. Ado. A^^ gilj- 
 
 Uh, with diflculty. 
 A (-LTiSSyew-rs/c, fragile, tender, weak; 
 
 a biscuit. 
 T ij^jy gil-rill-ti, noise, thunder. 
 T CS^jf gur-mek, to see, perceive, 
 
 discover. 
 T L.S^jif gii-riin-msk, to be seen, to 
 
 appear. 
 T ij^ gii-ra, near, according to [136]. 
 T jji y?iz, the eye. 
 T i^jy gii-zel, handsome, beautiful. 
 T L.S-*JJif gii - zet - mek, to view, 
 
 observe ; consider. 
 T L_>-»r:i-j«i gus-ter-mek, to show. 
 

 TUKKISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 i'o3 
 
 p iPy gush, tte ear, hearing. 
 
 T lLSjS gibTc, the heavens. 
 
 T J^jT gil-nul, the heart, soul, the 
 mind ; intuition. 
 
 I ijS gv.1, a pond. 
 
 T CS-^j'^S gul-dir-mek, to amuse, to 
 make laugh. 
 
 I CS-"^^ S gu-lusji-meh, to joke to- 
 gether: to strive, wrestle. 
 
 I «0 jS gul-geh or Iciil-geh, shade. 
 
 T t^iC^J AxjjS gill -g eh- Ian - meh, to 
 take the shade, to refresh one's 
 self. 
 
 T iLS^y gul-mek, to laugh. 
 
 T f^Ju^^ gu-mush, silver, money. 
 
 I CS^'S gev-mek, to ruminate ; gii- 
 mek, to think intently. 
 
 T i__5-^»L»«S gum-le-meh, to be buried, 
 to bury. 
 
 T iJ_C« tS gum-meh, to bury (a trea- 
 sure, not a dead man). 
 
 T jj«r giin, the day. 
 
 T ilS^^jiioS gdn-der-meh, to send. 
 
 T jiiJjS gun-diiz, (adm.) by day. 
 
 T t^CtJ »S gu-ven-meJc, to boast. 
 
 T tj^y^^:^ git-melc, to go, to walk. 
 
 T is^r ge-jeh, night, the evening. 
 
 I cS~*j^ glr-meh, to enter. 
 
 Tji-^ or J 5 (/z-ru, back, over again, 
 (adv.) CS^^ 'f gl-ru gd-meh, 
 to return. 
 
 I ^'j^ gi%-lu, rather^jhj (affw.) hidden, 
 
 secret. 
 T L-X^JUi giz-lan-mek, to be hid. 
 I CS^ gi-yik, a stag, a kind of deer 
 
 only existing in Mount Taurus. 
 
 J 
 
 A J^'^ li-ajl, because, for the reason 
 that. 
 
 A > ;^ la - zim, necessary, urgent, 
 suitable. ^^^.^ l5^J^ la-zem-i 
 i-chun, as far as is needful. 
 
 p ipi lash, a corpse. • 
 
 T ^^ji ^ Id-ldr-d'i, word, speech. 
 
 p Jl lal, a ruby. 
 
 p i!ii la-leh, a tulip. 
 
 A (jSi Id-yelc, worthy, proper, suitable, 
 able. 
 
 A i_-J lal, the lip ; edge, shore ; side 
 of a river. 
 
 A (_/jjU li-hds, a garment; clothes; 
 drawers. 
 
 T l:>s la-ha-na, a cabbage. 
 
 A ijj li%-%et, pleasure; sweetness. 
 iJJiJl) ^_/u-jJl ^^ jJ liz-zet il-t.aish 
 hil ta-nuk-ho-li, the sweetness 
 of life consists in moving 
 from place to place (changing 
 about). 
 
u 
 
 U 
 
 VOCABULAEY. 
 
 >u 
 
 A j>.) jd la-%1%, sweet, delightful. 
 
 A (jUul li-sdn, the tongue ; language, 
 speech. 
 
 TjLJi] lash-lcer, an army. 
 
 A (IsUa! la-ta-fet, grace, elegance. 
 
 A 1 aU lutf, gentleness, humanity, 
 
 courtesy. 
 
 A c- ij . y la - tif, sweet, agreeable : 
 
 (plur.) I wiy la-td-yef, jokes, 
 
 tales, etc. 
 
 A "U-lJ Id-ti-feh, a jest, a joke, a talc. 
 
 A i_^J foci, playing; a game. 
 
 A iCjJ la^-net, a curse, anathema. 
 
 A ijCi la-ghat, speech, language; a 
 dictionary. 
 
 A <UJu loh-meh, a morsel, a mouthful. 
 Afciil i.:i-^=-' ) ra-hat li-lcutn, a 
 mouthful of pleasure :' a kind of 
 sweetmeat for which Constanti- 
 nople is celebrated among the 
 people of Turkey. 
 
 A ^C le-lcen, but, nevertheless, how- 
 ever. 
 
 A /•;!«! li-wa-zim, necessaries. 
 iU lii-ld, a pipe, a tube whence 
 the water of a fountain flows. 
 
 A }^ la-hu, blood : Zi'Aw, play, di- 
 version. 
 
 p ^^ lay-ken, but. 
 
 A JJ &y?, the night. 
 
 A lL^U lay-UJc, a stork, for (.^.wiJ 
 leg-leg, from the noise which it 
 makes. 
 
 p i_^_j-«J la'i-mun, a lemon, a citron. 
 
 A *«J la-im, cursed. 
 
 r 
 
 A t< ma, that, which, what. ITo, 
 not. (Neg.) 
 
 A Ln OT« and ma' , water. 
 
 A ^^La» md-layn, (adv.) between. 
 
 A \y>-\^ md-jara, an event; accident; 
 occurrence ; (lit., that which has 
 taken place.) 
 
 A lj.r.L« ma-^ada, the past; besides, 
 except ; the rest. 
 
 A JL« mdl, wealth, riches, estate. 
 
 p I IJjinJL* ma-li-hho-li-ya, melan- 
 choly. 
 
 Pj1jJL< mal-ddr, rich, wealthy. 
 
 T ^jljJL* mal-dar-lik, wealth, opu- 
 lence. 
 
 A lLnIL* md-lelc, a king, lord, master, 
 possessor. 
 
 A jjt< ma-ne^, a hindrance, im- 
 pediment, objection. 
 
 r A:jl.^ md-ndni, lUie, as. 
 
 p jL» HiaA, the moon. 
 
44 
 
 U-=l^ 
 
 TURKISH GEAMMAE. 
 
 u= 
 
 A lO t» ma-yet, a hundred. 
 
 A (Jjt* ma-'il, inclined, bent; well- 
 disposed; affectionate. 
 
 p jL-« mu-idd, let it not be, lest, etc. 
 
 A i«L/jL.^ »jM-Sd-r«A, happy, blessed, 
 holy. i]j\ lLJ\\^^ mu-ha-reh o-la, 
 may it do you good ! Ju (.LTjU^ 
 mu-la-reh had, compliments. 
 
 A i-iL^ mu-ha-sM-ret, beginning, 
 commencement. 
 
 A ^A jJl--< mu-la-le ila, extremely. 
 
 A <U!L.^ mu-ha-h-gha, diligence, best 
 endeavour. 
 
 A j_jb^ mii-ta-li:^, a follower, a 
 servant. 
 
 A ^vAJu^ mii-ta-M-iat, obsequiousness. 
 
 A ^.jsX^ mut-td-liad, united, made one. 
 
 A (J^ic^ mu-ta-al-lelc, belonging to. 
 
 A f r*;^ mut-ta-far-ret. , sprouting 
 from ; originated, produced. 
 
 A (jh^ mut-ta-felc, concurring, suit- 
 able, agreed. 
 
 A (Ji-« mi-thil, like, likeness. 
 
 A ^y^ mi-thal, a fable, a proverb. 
 
 A (j^.s^ ma-jdl, power, force; skUl. 
 
 A (•-'■".sr' 7iiu-jas-sem, incarnate, cor- 
 poreal. <-^j«« j,u.. j^ i_^A^Lil 
 ^u u d-gliaj-dan mu-jas-sem sii- 
 ret ya-pdn, a maker of wooden 
 images. 
 
 A ^/.ul^"* maj-lis, an assembly ; the 
 council. 
 
 A <UjW* mu-lid-ri-heh,, war, combat. 
 
 A <-_»»->^r^ mah-Mh, beloved, a lover. 
 
 A ijjjy^'* mah-hiis, imprisoned; a 
 prisoner. 
 
 A LtJjv.s'' mu-had-des idetK), a nar- 
 rator, teller of tales. 
 
 A t^\jSf* mah-rdl, or mih-rdh, the 
 chief place in a mosque. 
 
 A j*^'^ m-k -liar -ram, unlawful; 
 name of a month (the first of 
 the Mohamedan year). 
 
 A (♦•r=^ mah-rum, prohibited, de- 
 prived. 
 
 A J^-iLS'* mah-sul, the produce of 
 the earth, the harvest, jj.^s.s" 
 mu-lias-sel, an officer who collects 
 the tithes, etc. 
 
 A j_^is'' maAz, pure, fuU ; only. 
 
 KjAs."^ mah-der, the (royal) presence. 
 
 A (S-^ mu-hak-lzhn, solid, [adv., 
 firmly] 
 
 A duxs'' meh-M-me, the tribunal of 
 the Cadi. 
 
 A J.s'^ ma-lidll, a place. J-s"* i»J rawr- 
 ma-hall, the light of the place ; 
 i.e., the beauty of the Palace. 
 
 A A-*.s^ Mu-liam-med, the prophet. 
 
 ^ tti-s'' mill-net, trouble, disgrace. 
 
-!r* 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 ^y* 
 
 45 
 
 A l:»s'* mH-Mt, comprehending ; sur- 
 rounding ; a fortress. \-i..-r^jSsr, 
 hahr-mii-Mf, the ocean. 
 
 A ^^Isr^ mu-hhd-te-reh, danger. 
 
 T JiJslsr* mu-Tthd-te-ri-lu, danger- 
 ous. 
 
 A i_j!lsr* mH-hha-lef, contrary, op- 
 posed to. (J^^ i__ills'* mH-kha- 
 lef il-JiaTc, false. 
 
 p Ui^lsT* mu-hha-li-fet, opposition, 
 resistance. 
 
 A jlxs^ muTih-tdr, chosen; the best; 
 an ambassador. 
 
 A ^y^r^ maMi-sus, peculiar, proper. 
 {ad/v., on purpose, an express 
 messenger). 
 
 A riS.s^ malcJi-Mh, created, produced ; 
 a creature. 
 
 A itX^ mid-det, time, a certain time. 
 
 A j-tV* madh, praise, applause. 
 
 A JJt^ ma-dad, assistance, help. 
 
 A jJ>»iijL^ mad-hush, senseless, con- 
 founded. 
 
 A (SijJc^ me-di-neh, a city. Medina 
 is called par excellence ' the 
 city. 
 
 A ii\j^ mu-rdd, will, desire, intention. 
 
 A ^j^ mar-te-heh, a step, degree ; 
 rank, dignity; time. 
 
 A <^L~^^£>-y mer-ha-met, clemency, 
 
 compassion, mercy. 
 T »l::.-4.»- -» mer-ha-mei-la, merciful, 
 
 gracious. 
 A *»»-_« mar-h'&m, euphemism for 
 defunct' : lit., one upon whom 
 
 God has had mercy : also, LU»i 
 
 fd-Ht, (one who has) passed away, 
 p Ltj-t merd, a man. 
 p jltJ^ mur-ddr, dirty, impure. 
 A ijOr* mdrd, falling sick ; maraz, 
 
 disease. 
 Ty_ff^ ma.-ra%-l'&, sick, ill. 
 I <^^j^ mar-kab, a thing ridden ; a 
 
 donkey. 
 T i_-o.^ mu-ralc-Tcah, ink. 
 
 I JJ -^ me-rel-dd-mah or , 'i/iJ JO 
 
 ' ^j^\tiiy 
 
 CJ-^J-V 
 
 me-rel-dan-mak, to murmur, cry, 
 
 etc. 
 A Hy^ mu-ru-wet, pity, assistance, 
 
 protection, kindness. 
 T Ajtjy tnu-ru-wet-lu, benevolent. 
 A ^\y* ini-%aj, temperament, (used for 
 
 health,' etc., in common parlance) 
 A jl 'k* ma-zdd, an auction. 
 A iij^ »je-z(fr, a sepulchre, tomb, 
 p isyt mazh, taste, a relish. 
 A iXiV* ma-zii, increase, energy. 
 A i^„y* tnu-zay-yan, adorned : also, 
 a barber,' because he makes 
 
46 
 
 J 
 
 ..«*.>^ 
 
 TUfiKISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 cJL^ 
 
 you neat and orderly by clipping 
 
 the beard, etc. 
 p iJt^ muj-deh, good tidings. 
 A iijU.1..^ ma-sa-fet, distance, space ; 
 
 endurance, sufferance. 
 A -jL.v< mu-m-fer, a traveller, a guest. 
 A i^.^--iu.^ mu-sab-lah, the causer of 
 
 causes, i.e., God ; to gain one's 
 
 livelihood. 
 p i.::_-v.u*.< mast, drunk. 
 A fjfj^^j^^ miXs-ta-hakk, deserving, 
 
 worthy. 
 A ^Jcjjj.^ mus-tagh-ralc, immersed, 
 
 drowned. 
 XjkkLu^.^ mus-tagli-fer, soliciting 
 
 pardon. 
 A ajS.**^ mas-liha-ra, raillery, 
 
 mockery ; a buffoon ; a mas- 
 querade. 
 T ^^ijS"'^ mas-hlia-ra-lih, ridicule, 
 
 railery, nonsense. 
 Kj^yjj^ mas-rur, cheerful, contented, 
 
 joyful, delighted. 
 A ^Lu*./» mas-lcan, a dwelling. 
 A J— L^u^ mis-lcm, poor, a beggar. 
 A LLuj^ mu-sal-lat, a governor; ruling, 
 
 overpowering ; a vampire. 
 (jy*^j\ LLu.^ mu-sal-lat ol-mah, to 
 
 prevail, be superior. 
 
 ^\L.^ mu-slia-yelch, (the pi. of ^_-2j ) 
 
 A *Lb.^ mus-Um, a true believer ; a 
 Mussulman. 
 
 A ^Liv.^) 
 
 chiefs. 
 
 A ijtXJL.^ mu-slid-ive-ret, counsel, de- 
 bate. 
 
 A lL5^^^ mush-te-reh, a partner. 
 
 A ^juJu^ mush-te-ri, a purchaser. 
 
 A I — s^.i^ mu-slier-ref, honored. 
 
 A Ji/^ mash-rah, the east. 
 
 A _ jjl.^ mash-ruh, explained, afore- 
 said. 
 
 A J jAA^ masli-ghul, occupied, atten- 
 tive, dUigent. 
 
 A^t».^^^ mash-hur, celebrated, famous. 
 
 A ^i-» ma-sM, walking. 
 
 A (Lsr-^^^ mas-la-hat, employment, 
 business, occupation. 
 
 A i_ c' .. a -« mu-san-nif, the composer, 
 author or editor of a book. 
 
 A ''■---i^ mu-si-het, a misfortune, 
 trouble, disgrace. 
 
 A AiL)ui» mu-dd-i-lca, want, narrow- 
 ness; oppression. 
 
 A hy^^^a^ mas-but, good, proper ; held, 
 governed. 
 
 A ^^Ji^ 7nu-ttcj obedient, subject. 
 
 A (*yii^ maz-lUm, oppressed ; modest. 
 
 A Ajjx^ mu-^a-tca-net, assistance, 
 subsidy, aid. 
 
J^ 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 w< 
 
 47 
 
 A JlJcj^* muc-fe-del, temperate, just. 
 
 A 1 5.'i^ muy-te-ref, known, cele- 
 brated , confession making. 
 
 A iSx^ mic-det, the stomacli. 
 
 A tijjX^t ?w»t-rz-/«i,knowledge,scienoe; 
 a clever thing. 
 
 A jJ.iU.< ma^lcul, reasonable, just. 
 
 A fXx^ mu^lem, also /*jl-«^ may-lii,in, 
 known, certain. 
 
 A jj^ijt^ ««c.-»jitr, cultivated ; fre- 
 quented ; agreeable ; prosperous. 
 
 A iji*.^ ma^na, sense, meaning ; 
 and ^-M^ ya^-ni, used for, that 
 is to say.' 
 
 A J.^,jt-< ma^had, appointed, agreed 
 upon; the identical; {adv.) that 
 very. 
 
 A ij\k^ ma-gha-ra, a cave, a den. 
 (plural) jU.^ ma-gha-yer. 
 
 A t—' je^ magh-reh, the west, the 
 setting sun ; time of prayer at 
 that hour. 
 
 A j; jL-« magh-riir, deceived. 
 
 T^ly^ttjky* magh-riir-lan-mak, to 
 grow proud ; to deceive. 
 
 A j^* mH-gJiai-yer, changed, change- 
 able. 
 
 A _lii.< mif-tah, a key. 
 
 A iiJL^ muf-red, one, only ; great, 
 huge. 
 
 A ijjlit< ma-Ica-bel, opposite. 
 
 A *liL« ma-Icam, rank, station; resi- 
 dence. , 
 
 A J«;A^ mak-iul, pleasing, accepted, 
 agreeable. 
 
 A^ljJL* muJc-ddr (pron. vulg. mil- 
 ddr), quantity, part, number. 
 j1jJL» J, a little. 
 
 T j_jjljkJL» mulc-dd-r'i, almost, nearly, 
 about. 
 
 AjAiL» mu-kad-der, predestined. 
 
 A L»jiJL« mu-had-di-man, firstly, 
 anciently. 
 
 A iJL< mu-lcar-rar, established, fixed, 
 certain, positive. 
 
 A S^JL^ mu-ha'i-yed, attentive, writ- 
 ten down, noted. 
 
 A ililC* mu-lca-fet, recompense, price. 
 
 A (jl^ me-lcan, a place, a station. 
 
 p i^ me-ger, perhaps, but, unless, 
 only, if, etc. 
 
 A i_nL» me-leh, an angel. 
 
 A lLnLi me-lilc, a king; miiffi, a 
 kingdom, eic. ; milk, possessions, 
 domains. 
 
 A (Jy.^ me-liil, tired, vexed. 
 
 A 1^^^-^ mum-kin, possible. 
 
 A ti-^xL*^ mem-la-ket, an empire, 
 province, power. 
 
 A LL>y-4^ «ifl»! - ?i(^, possessed ; a 
 slave. 
 
48 
 
 l:^ 
 
 TURKISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 XL.^ 
 
 p ^^ men, I, used poetically, instead 
 
 of ^. ien. 
 A ^^ man, he, who, that, which, any 
 
 one, etc. 
 A ^-» min, from, of, by, than, etc. 
 A i_f jli^ mi-nd-di, a crier, a herald. 
 A <U-jli-» mu-na-sih-et, fitness, pro- 
 priety, convenience; proportion. 
 ^ <)Ljli./» iU nsk mu-na-se-het iu, 
 
 what does this mean ! 
 lLC* i»S i.-;!:^ mu-na-se-het giir- 
 
 meh, or mu-na-seb giir-mek, to 
 
 approve. 
 A /iiu-< mu-na-filc, a hypocrite, 
 
 sycophant. 
 
 T ^_^liiil:>^ mu-na-fik-lik, hypocrisy, 
 impiety. 
 
 A -i^ mdm-har, a pulpit ; a high 
 seat. 
 
 A i>-< min-net, a favour ; praise. 
 h.^ <L«jl?- ja-ni-ma min-net, I 
 shall be delighted. 
 
 A *jsn,.^ mu-naj-jam, astrologer, astro- 
 nomer. 
 
 A Ay-^ men-zel, a place where one 
 descends from horseback after a 
 day's journey ; a house, a home. 
 
 A i_^vwi:^ man-sab, a situation or 
 post under Government. 
 
 A j_:^ mmiz. a prohibition. 
 
 ' Fi-zii-li has said — 
 
 We-fd her him-se-dan-lcim is-ti-dim an-dan je-fa gnr-dum 
 Ki-mi-Tiim lUfe-na dun-ya-da gur-dum I'l wi-fd gur-dum 
 Ki-mi-lcim ha-lim et-hdr ei-U-yup is-te-dim der-mdn 
 
 JJ-ziim-da hem he-ter der-da dni man mub-te-ld gur-dum. 
 
 I have met with rejection from all whose friendship I sought. 
 
 And have found all unfriendly on whom, in this sad world, I counted : 
 
 All, from whom I asked sympathy, after exposing my sorrows, 
 
 I have found to be immersed in greater evil than I myself. 
 
tX-^ 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 J 
 
 b 
 
 49 
 
 A ixk^ mam-fa-zat, emolument, 
 profit, advantage. 
 
 A ij\y^ min-wal, mode, manner. 
 !ijj^\ Jl_j:^ iJ nek man-wal il-zS- 
 rah, in what way can you pre- 
 
 K ^ji\y* mu-d-fih, suitable, proper; 
 
 according to. 
 A ^i_j-» »2a-«fc{-^ec,ocourrences; what 
 have happened (pi. of jjij t»). 
 T jijyt mUt-liL, happy, fortunate. 
 A Liy>-y, mdii-jud, existing, being ; 
 
 found, 
 p Ay4 miim, a candle. 
 A ,^y mu-men, a true believer; 
 
 faithful, 
 p "^J-^^ meh - ter, a tambour, war 
 trumpet, etc. ; band of musicians. 
 P {^^jY* mih-ri-han, affectionate, 
 
 benevolent ; a friend, 
 p al^^» mih-M, delay, jij ^x« lib 
 Id-nd mih-let ver, give me a little 
 time (and I will pay you). 
 A CuWy* mu-him-mat, necessaries, 
 
 provisions. 
 p ^^ md'i, wine. 
 
 p ij [sX^ mi-Tiha-ni, a wine-tavern. 
 mihh-la-mah, to nail up. 
 i, a plain, an open 
 field; a place where the horses 
 are exercised with the jen'd. 
 
 A u'j>-^ mal 
 
 (J-'*j^ ^<->-^ niai-da-nih cM-kar- 
 maJc, to publish abroad, etc. 
 ^j^ mir, a prince, lord, chief. ^ r^^ 
 mir-lii,a or mir-U-wa, general of 
 brigade. 
 
 A Cj1_;-^ mi-rdth, inheritance, heri- 
 tage. 
 (J^y ^-iJ^j^ mi-rdth ol-malc, to 
 succeed to an estate. 
 
 K jtjj.^ mu-yas-ser, made easy, facili- 
 tated. 
 
 T iJL^ mi-sheh, an oak. 
 
 A J-^ mail, leaning towards; affec- 
 tion, love. 
 
 T f^y.^.^^ mdi-mun, an ape. 
 
 p *•».« tnai-va, fruit. 
 
 Pjl>-li nd-chdr, helpless, without 
 
 resource. 
 A ^Jl=-lj nd-Mh, unjust, injustice, 
 p (oi'Jw na-ddn, ignorant. 
 T ^JjJ'jL) nd-dan-lilc, ignorance. 
 Ajjlj na-iir, rare, singular, [adv., 
 
 rarely) 
 Aj U ndr, fire ; a pomegrante. 
 A p iff^'j na-rinj, an orange. 
 pjU ndz, blandishment, coquetry; 
 
 elegance. 
 P CJj\j nd-zik, thin, elegant, pretty. 
 
 i 
 
50 
 
 ^y 
 
 TURKISH GUAMMAR. 
 
 U3 
 
 T i_$^l,^jlj na-rdlc-lik, elegance. 
 
 T Ai\j nd-fi-leh, useless, (also d-nd- 
 fi-U) 
 
 A Jjil) nd-Ul, a relator, story-teller, 
 etc. ; one who takes (anything) 
 from place to place. 
 
 p .^IsU nd-gdh, suddenly. 
 
 V 1*1) nam, a name ; fame, renown. 
 
 p i_jlj nd-'i, a reed, pipe, a flute. 
 
 A Jjlj na-yil, obtaining, attaining, 
 aoqairing. 
 
 A *jU na-yem, a sleeper. 
 
 T AsT ni-jeli, how? in what manner? 
 A^J i^LsJ «l:snj «z.-y'e^ zd-man 
 der-lci, what a long time it is 
 that. is=f^) termination added 
 to numerals. Vide [45]. 
 
 A Lvj ni-da, calling, proclaiming. 
 
 T jJo ne-dir for tJ Jj re«/» (?er, what 
 is it? 
 
 T )Jj ne-ddti for j^ J iU reeA «?a», from 
 whence ? 
 
 A J Jj n«sf, a vow, a gift. 
 
 p (jV';^ ner-de-lan, a ladder, a stair- 
 case, (also mer-di-vmi or «!er- 
 di-umn) 
 
 T iJ^ no-ra-da, (abbre. for iJi dj) 
 where ? in what place ? 
 
 A cly n'l-za^, a dispute, litigation. 
 
 r lL>-;^^Jj naz-d'ih and mrc<?, near, 
 close to. 
 
 A t_~>**J ne-sel, genealogy, lineage. 
 T iUjjJ nes-nah, a certain person or 
 
 thing. Ai.uJ Js Aer nes-na, 
 
 whatever. 
 A *-j.iJ ne-s'im, the zephyr, fragrant 
 
 air. 
 p |0^ ni-sMn, a sign, signal ; seal ; 
 
 an order. j\ss^\ .^'^^ ni-shdn-'t 
 
 if-ti-kliar, decorations of the 
 
 Sultan Mahmoud II. 
 A -ij nasr, assistance ; victory. 
 A i_«-.»£J na-sib, lot, fortune, destiny. 
 
 /l.t\i\ I '~-n: na-sib d-rd-tnak, 
 
 to seek one's fortune. 
 A (tjSUaJ na-s'i-hat, advice, counsel. 
 A (»ll2J ni-zdm, stringing (pearls) ; 
 
 arrangement, order, regulation. 
 
 JO Aj- i*lLiJ ni-zdm je-did, new 
 
 military regulations. 
 A JiJ na-zar, the sight ; looking af, 
 
 seeing, etc. 
 A -<]i3 na-zir, alike, equal to; simili- 
 tude. j2a.'i -si ghair-i na-zir, 
 
 unequalled. 
 A Jjt) nad, a horse-shoe, a hoof, etc, 
 A A-^ nactii, yes, thus, very well. 
 A <UjtJ tii^mef, grace, favour, wealth, 
 
 etc. 
 A ^^.fcjlij ne-fd-yess, anything delicate, 
 
 precious, (pi. of ^_/u-aj nc-fii) 
 
t.^5Lj 
 
 VOCABDLAllY. 
 
 .A 
 
 i? 
 
 51 
 
 A (jjjiJ nefi, the soul ; the person, 
 (jj-ij ne-fass, the breath; water- 
 pipe to smoke. 
 T LLN.^.iL;.A) ne-fd$-len-mch, to take 
 
 breath, to repose. 
 A j_ij ?i«/c., gain ; doing good ; advan- 
 tage. 
 A i_/2iiJ nah, defect, wanting, short. 
 A Jjij nald, history, narrative, tale, 
 etc. ; moving from place to place, 
 p ilxj nigah, a look ; custody, care, 
 r itfcJ na-mdz, prayers, worship. 
 P y ndii, new, fresh. 
 A city nau-lat, a period, time, turn ; 
 a band of music. <uj1 <!; J wa-M- 
 Ist i-lah, by turns, alternately. 
 V (M^j^y na-u ja-ivan, a young man. 
 I 3«j ?io-/3 (abbrev. for ij, what, and 
 iiiji, it may be [78]), i.e. what 
 can happen ? whore's the harm ? 
 willingly ; with pleasure. 
 T ,_i,-jJLj nol-i-di for ,_>-jJ»l ij ne 
 ol-i-di, would to God ! may it 
 please God ! Vide page f" T . 
 T ij wcA, what ? 
 
 p jLj ni-dz, demand, prayer, suppli- 
 cation. 
 A lUJ ni-yet, intention, will, object, 
 r u_^*J nil; good, beautiful. 
 
 va, (conj.) and, also. 
 
 -1; 
 
 I, necessary, expedient. 
 
 fit, proper. 
 
 A Ji=».U wa-hed, one, sole. 
 
 T jlj «;«r, impersonal verb. Vide [9 1 J. 
 ilj 4^ffr, a Persian termination im- 
 plying possession.' iij '\:--«' 
 u-mid-vdr, there is hope, I hope, 
 or have hope. 
 
 T ^v» i)i var-mdk, to go, to arrive. 
 
 A Jvjli loa-sel, joined, met. J-^'j 
 /JL^jl loa-sel ol-mak, to arrive 
 at, attain one's end. 
 
 A li^U wa-ziz, a preacher. 
 
 A jlj ivd-fir, abundant, copious; 
 many, much. 
 
 A %-ilj vd-Jccz, happening, an oc- 
 
 currence. 
 iiii wd-lcif, 
 learned. 
 
 standing; 
 
 skilful. 
 
 A 4^!u wd-Ud, 
 
 a parent, a father. 
 wa-li-da, a mother; hence tva-li- 
 da sul-tan or hha-tun, the Sultan's 
 mother, the Dowager Sultana. 
 
 A ill I • wdl-lah, by God. 
 
 A Jlj wd-li, a prince, a governor. 
 
 r ilj t'ffl/i, oh ! ah ! 
 
52 
 
 yj 
 
 TURKISH GRAMMAK. 
 
 Ai> 
 
 iL l5.:=-_j wit-jtid, existing, existence ; 
 
 found, etc. ; life. 
 A i)J>-; loajh, the face, aspect, form. 
 
 is>-t ij ne wajh, in what way ? 
 A i^j^ iverd, a rose. [ Vide .JT J 
 
 A J i_j vd-rdk also Jj^r'V. l/'^p-'^'^^! ^ 
 
 leaf of a tree. 
 A i_j;«!3j I'dsf, description, narrative ; 
 
 praise. 
 A o<«>*5j va-si-yet, a will, a testament ; 
 
 a command, an order. 
 A ^bj lod-tan, a country ; home ; a 
 
 plain. 
 A iA£j' toap-(?fl, a promise, vow. 
 A lir.. «d.'ac.z, a discourse, sermon. 
 A U; wa-fa, performing a promise ; 
 
 a promise, sincerity, friendship. 
 
 Vide the word ^ men, I.' 
 A t.::^ij KflX-<, time, season, hour. 
 A i_J jij vu-haf, practice, skilfulness ; 
 
 permanence ; entail. 
 
 jUj wd-ld-yet, a country, a city, 
 a tovsTi, a residence. 
 T lLx^Jj ver-meh, to give. 
 
 T T-jli) Jia-wuj, a kind of herb. 
 
 T ^li& /w-i, (interj.) ho ! etc. 
 
 T l_.J^ 7iep, all, the whole. 
 
 A ^uj^ hdt-td, till, until, as far as. 
 
 A » r.s'* Mj-rd, flight ; the era of the 
 
 Hijra commences A.D. 622. 
 A (*5-s'^ hu-jHm, an assault, effort. 
 A Lir-^lkiJ!) hi-da-yet, direction ; the 
 
 gift of God to go in the true path, 
 p J^ Mr, all, every. ..JAj^ ^'r i'i-ri, 
 
 each one. 
 A LLS'hb he-IdJc, ruin, destruction. 
 T iUJb ha-Id or Jie-la, interjection and 
 
 expletive [123]. 
 
 ' A Turkish poet has said — 
 
 An-lar ftt-hir-'i wac-da-'i wus-lin ne lidl is-sa 
 Jan-der u-mar ejfen-dim ni dang-l'i ma-hal is-sa 
 
 I, poor follow, have learned to know the value of your promises. 
 
 But such is life, that one still hopes on, oven under impossible circumstances. 
 
>\j 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 ,U 
 
 53 
 
 p *& hem, and, also, etc. (conjunction 
 and expletive) 
 
 p ^^uJi hem-dn, at once, (conjunction 
 and expletive) 
 
 p !ij.*J» hem-rdh, a companion. 
 
 p ^-oiw»Ji> hem-sAi-reh, a sister. 
 
 T jij^fJUytJi hem-she-hir-lu, a fellow- 
 countryman. 
 
 A p I t jJ& hd-vd, the air, wind ; love, 
 desire. 
 
 A {jjjyn ha-wdss, desire, lust, wish, ete. 
 
 A <UJ6 ha'i-het, fear ; grandeur, im- 
 posing greatness. 
 
 Tjlx.^ ha-'i-bet-lu, formidable, ma- 
 jestic. 
 
 p ^ii Mch, nothing, never at all. [43] 
 
 p Jx-J^ ha-'i-hel, a temple. 
 
 A <ti-Ji ha-'i-ne, convenience, facility, 
 (also ko-ld-'i-lilc) 
 
 lS 
 
 A I) ya, ! hoUoa ! 
 
 T I) yd, or, weU.. 
 
 p (o^' V yd-ldn, a desert; wild. 
 
 T -stIjIj yd-Mn-ji, a stranger; un- 
 known. 
 
 T ^j^jJijj\i] yd-piah-ter-mak, to 
 ,'L^J JuIj u ' cause to touch, to 
 attach, join ; to apply ; to stick 
 together. 
 
 T ^i^vljlj yd-pish-mah, to touch, at- 
 tain, reach, (the simple form of 
 
 the above) 
 T ^^^V. yap-malc, to construct, make, 
 
 build, to do. 
 T (J^^_ yat-mak, to lie down, repose, 
 
 rest. 
 p 1-5^ V. y^-klwd, either, or. Vide 
 
 page IP. 
 p ol) ydd, remembrance, memory, 
 p J u ydr, a friend. 
 T <_»-<Jju yd-ril-mak, to be cleft or 
 
 burst. 
 T lojV. yd-rin, to-morrow. 
 T jb yaz, the summer. 
 T ij^j^_ ya%-mak, to write. 
 T ib 2/«^A, butter, il) ei-o J %i-it 
 
 yagh, burning oil. 41) mvJJ 
 
 zd-'i-tun yagh, olive oil. 
 I y..cl; yagh-lu, fat, oUy. 
 T ^L«-iJu ya-kish-mak, to beseem. 
 T (J^V. y<''T^-'^<''k, to light a candle 
 
 or fire. 
 A ^^u ya-kin, near; ya-kin, certain, 
 
 certainly. 
 T JjQl; ya-li-niz, only, alone. 
 T /^ iXJu ya-U-niz-lik, solitude, unity. 
 T i^b ydn, side, flank, efo. 
 Tijli ya-vui and yd-iiz, energj-. 
 
 (commonly used applauditorily). 
 
54 
 
 U:^ 
 
 TURKISH GRAMM.iK. 
 
 LlS^ 
 
 I* jl ;.u i/a-fiz a-dam, a good man. 
 T /^-*J ijL; ya-vuz-lan-mah, to exaspe- 
 rate, render fierce and energetic. 
 T i_«u ya-2, a bow. 
 T (.,l.'lj ya-yan, a footman — a man on 
 
 foot. 
 T jL^iLj ya- par -male, (commonly 
 
 used instead of fj^\i\ d-par- 
 
 mak, to take away, 
 r T ^^Lj ya-ldn, a desert, a wide plain. 
 S'^jy uW y^-^o-ii y-r-de-g'i, wild 
 
 duck. 
 T ijl -o ya-prdlc, a leaf. 
 T (.l>.*^i^; ye-tish-melc, to attain, to 
 
 arrive at ; to suffice. 
 T CS^ it~) ye-tir-nieh, to lose, and 
 
 ye-tilr-meh, to make suffice. y;j 
 
 ye-ter, it suffices. 
 T L-C< .Jo ye-dir-mek, to give to eat, 
 
 to cause to eat. 
 T t^Jlxj ye-dek, a led horse, 
 r , ff.s'^jo ye-deh-ji, a groom, the man 
 
 leading a horse. 
 
 T^J. y^*") a. place. J_jJ. ^-; J'«>- yo/^, 
 
 there is no room. 
 T V J ya-ral-, state of a falcon when 
 
 in best condition to hunt. 
 T ^J^Jjl J ye-rak-lan-mak, to arm, 
 
 equip. 
 T , ^1 J ya-yal-mak, to wound. 
 
 I j^i J ya-ra-ma%, useless. 
 T /I'fl'r! ya-ra-mak, to be useful, 
 of service. ,1 J <sJ neh ya-ran, 
 what use is it? 
 T /f*J,J yirt-mak, to tear in pieces. 
 T (*iV. yar-dum, aid, assistance, 
 j] _i yer-lu or yer-li, appertaining to 
 
 a place ; countryman. 
 T (j^'ji_ or ^_v»i^, yuz-mak, to write. 
 A .L.J yes-sdr, the left (side). 
 A iiL^j ye-sa-ret, facility, prosperity. 
 T J-ji*J ye-sJi'il, green. 
 T t,l.>Jl;»jij ye-sJiil-lik, verdure, a 
 
 meadow. 
 T i_>-«.ilL.^_ ye - sh'il -Ian- meh, to 
 
 render green. 
 A ,5^1 yac-n'i, that is to say. TlVfe 
 
 page 1 . 
 T^T«-*ij yagh-mur, rain, ililj .y»Aj 
 
 yagh-mur ya-ghar, it rains. 
 T ^iJ__,^i) yagli-mur-lik, a, cloak for 
 
 the rain. 
 T lib ya-ka, the skirt, a border, bank. 
 T JUJiisij yak-lash-mak, to approach. 
 T JJ-^JJij y'l-kyl-mak, to be demolished, 
 
 to fall down. 
 T (J.^_ yik-mdk, to destroy, demolish. 
 A ^j^l ya-k'm, certain. 
 
 one. t^.' (_jCi 
 
 y^X- or 'ek, one. i 
 ye-ka-yek, one by one. 
 
tM-».:> 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 (jy 
 
 00 
 
 •-C) yen, a sleeve. 
 L-f-iSj yen-meh, to conquer. 
 T ^JL) ye-««', new, modern. m'^^M 
 
 ye -m- dan, over again; de 
 
 nouveau.' 
 T Jj yel, wind, tlie air ; yil, a year. 
 T (_f^ib ya-la-mah, to lick. 
 T ^jS.J 'i-ldn, a serpent. ^^.5*5 «ii- 
 
 'i-fa, an eel (a water-serpent). 
 T ^jl) ya-lan, an untruth. ^s^lU 
 
 ya-lan-j't a liar. 
 T (»)Jki-' yil-Ayrm, lightning. 
 T ^L» iJjj yil-dir-mah, to shine. 
 T CS^j^ yel-dir-meh, to cause to 
 
 run about. 
 T Jjjj yil-dk, a star. 
 I Jj'-NV. yil-dn-lu, fortunate. 
 T Lli3.j_ ye-lelt, a waistcoat. 
 T ^j^. y el-hen, the sails of a ship. 
 T J^^iljlj yal-var-mak, to supplicate, 
 
 request, beg, entreat. 
 T f^^ yem, food, meat. 
 T (_A^. ye-mish, fruit. 
 T Jjljit^^ yd-mu-shdic, soft. 
 T J.u»ji*^_ yi-mish-si%, without food. 
 T CJvLl^_ ye-m'ish-Wc, a fruit-garden. 
 T I— C»J ye-meh, to eat. 
 I i!rij.4j yu-mur-ta, an egg. 
 T |^/«J ya-min, an oath. 
 T }i;>y»J ye-min-lu, one who has sworn. 
 
 T iiJ yi-neh or i^ gi-neh, again. 
 
 T 1 .J yii-va, a nest. 
 
 T (_^'_jJ ya-vash or ya-wash, gently ; 
 sweet, agreeable. 
 
 T (J^^_ yU-mal;,, to swallow, to 
 gobble down. 
 
 T \.LS~^m>- ,:i_ yuj-lan-meh, to rise, 
 become illustrious. 
 
 T '^-JJ yu-ja, high; greatness. 
 
 T <Uu:i-^^ yohli-sa for <Uuj1 ^»j yo^- 
 2S.sa, otherwise, if not, unless. 
 
 X ^^^;_JJ yor-ghdn, a quilt, a counter- 
 pane. 
 
 T i~3^. yii-relc, heart, mind, soul ; 
 courage. 
 
 T i.Ln^«Jo^i^_ yii-relc-lmi-meJc, to take 
 courage. 
 
 T ^j^_ yii-reh-lii, courageous, bold. 
 
 T fj^jji yo-ril-malc, to be fatigued. 
 
 T CS^jijtJ^ yu-rli-mek, to walk [p. 16] 
 
 T lUC^^ »j jjj yu-ri-ver-mek, to walk; 
 lit., to take to walking. 
 
 Tj^^ yiiz, figure, face, manner; a 
 hundred. 
 
 T i-LiljJ yii%-ilc, a ring. 
 
 I i—Cfljjj yuz-meh, to swim. 
 
 T vy^ yo/c, no, not. 
 
 T i_?;^j:l yu-lari, above ; up-stairs. 
 
 T ^^..^jLjjJ yok-la-malt, to try, endea- 
 vour, efo. ; to touch. 
 
56 
 
 C-^^ 
 
 TURKISH GRAMMAK. 
 
 Jr^ 
 
 T LLi^_ y&k, burden, load of a horse. 
 T l1>-4cIS jj yulc-let-melc, to load. 
 T uJv-^iiijj yuh-len-mek, to fall upon 
 
 or attack a person. 
 T J^_ yol, a road, way, means. 
 Tj^jj y-ii-lar, a rope, collar. 
 T I J^_yJ yH-ldf, oats, (perhaps a cor- 
 ruption of A c_ol,r.) 
 T ij^y„ yol-fi, a traveller. 
 p jiiJJjj yol-iash, a companion on 
 
 the road. 
 T jp_i)ijjy^ yol-dash-lih, company. 
 T (JUJjJ yUl-mdk, to pluck up. 
 A *^_ y(5»j, a day. 
 
 T (J-*J^_ yun-mah, to wash. 
 
 T (JjCsn_) yi-ye-jih, eatables. 
 
 T ^JI^liLj y'l-lca-malc, to wash. 
 
 T J-J yz/, the year. 
 
 T J-j yj7, (for Jj yeT) the wind. 
 
 T ^^^ yi-lan, a serpent, (for |o*Jl 
 
 "i-lan) 
 p *jJ.-J yil-pa-zeh, a pan. (for y«?- 
 
 T ALj yil-lu, yearly, aged. 
 
 I /i^«-..i y'l-mak for /v«u ya-mak, to 
 
 spread out. 
 T vJ yi-yu, food, sustenance, victuals, 
 cibus edulium.' 
 
 ATKPirKN ArSTIN, miNTER, IIKIITFOUD. 
 
Authors desirous of publishing will find James Madden at all times ready 
 to give them estimates and advice upon all matters relating to paper 
 and print. 
 
 In the Press, in One Volume, 8vo., nearly ready for Publication, 
 
 A Vocabulary, English and Turkish, for the use of Travellers, 
 
 Students, etc. etc. By Capt. Fletcher Hates, M.A., Oxon, Member of the 
 Asiatic Societies of Great Britain and Ireland, of Paris and Calcutta ; and Assistant 
 Resident at the Court of Lucknow. 
 
 Wow ready, in Two Volumes, post 8vo., price 21s., 
 
 Islamism : its Rise and its Progress ; or, the Past and the Present 
 
 Condition of the Turks. By F. A. Neale, Esq., Author of "Eight Tears in Syria." 
 
 " Now and then, however, we alight upon a good Book of permanent interest and 
 value, which deserves to be placed upon our shelves after it is read, and which has suffi- 
 cient merit to justify a future reference to its pages for information or amusement. Such 
 is Mr. Neale's " Else and Progress of Islamism," which details in a very succinct manner 
 the history of the Mahometans from the time of the " Prophet to the Reign of Abdul 
 Medjid." — English Churchman. 
 
 "The reader of these Volumes must award to Mr. Neale the praise of a most indus- 
 trious and conscientious historian."— Douglas Jerrold. 
 
 " This is one of the best books which Mr. Neale has ever written. Even Washington 
 Irving's " Mahomet and his Successors" cannot eclipse Mr. Neale's very clever history. 
 There is no portion of these volumes which will not thoroughly repay a perusal." — 
 Bell's Weekly Messenger. 
 
 Now ready, the Second Edition, price 7s. 6A, 
 
 The Thistle and the Cedar of Lebanon. By Habeeb Risk 
 
 Allah, Effendi. 
 
 " One of the most delightful books on the East that we have read." — Standard. 
 
 "Often as Syria and its inhabitants have been described by English travellers, 
 strangers and pilgrims in the land, we have now for the first time a more vivid picture, 
 drawn by the graphic pencil of a native artist, and marked by the simplicity of truth. 
 Both the Syrian and English scenes possess the charm of novelty in manner, style, and 
 " — E. Times. 
 
 In One Volume, crown 8vo., price Is. ; or, by post, Is. 6rf., 
 Russia: A Historical Review of the Reign of the Emperor Nicholas 
 
 the First. By Professor Ustbialoff. 
 " We recommend our readers to buy this shilliog work, in order io learn how the 
 Emperor is driven mad by the adulation of his ignorant foolish people." — Examiner. 
 
 In Three Volumes, 8vo., £3 7s., 
 
 Bopp's Comparative Grammar. Translated by Professor Eastwick, 
 and Edited by Professor H. H. Wilson. The Second Edition of Vol. I. is now 
 ready, and may he had separately. 
 " Bopp has created a new epoch in the science of Comparative Philology." — Edinburgh 
 
 Sevicw. 
 
 JAMES MADDEN, 8, LEADENHALL STREET. 
 
James Madden' s PuMications. 
 
 What to observe ; or, the Traveller's Eemembrancer. By Colonel 
 
 J. R. Jaokson, F.R.S. Second Edition. Thick 12mo., lis. 
 "No young man, or old, should leave the country without possessing himself of this 
 work. It should he in the trunk of every trayeller." — Westminster Review. 
 
 Ancient and Modern India; being a popular History from the 
 
 Earliest Period down to the Present Tear. By the late Dr. "W. Cookb Taylor. 
 
 This edition is edited and continued by P. J. Mackenna, Esq., many years resident 
 
 in India. Second Edition. Entirely revised, and brought down to the present 
 
 day, including matter never before published, selected by permission of the Hon. 
 
 Court of Directors from original documents. One volume, 650 pages, with a 
 
 copious Index. 125. 
 
 "It is cheap, concise, and clearly and carefully written. It contains everything 
 
 which the general reader need seek to know ; and is, besides, a good book for those who 
 
 design to penetrate more deeply into the subject, to begin with. — Morning Herald. 
 
 The Oriental Album. — The Valley of the Nile, consisting of a 
 
 Series of Drawings ef the Costmnes of Egypt and the Se^ Sea, with Letter-press 
 description, beautifully Illustrated with "Wood Engravings, and printed on the 
 finest paper, corresponding in size with the Mounted Plates, so that the whole may 
 be bound in one splendid volume. Thirty-one Plates, mounted on card-board,~ana 
 coloured equal to the most higlily finished water-colour drawing, and executed by 
 the first artists of Paris, in portfolio. Published at f 15 15«., now reduced to 
 £10 10s. An inspection of this work is respectfully solicited. Another edition, at 
 £2 15s. and £4 4s. 
 
 The Revelations of an Orderly. Being an Attempt to Expose the 
 
 Abuses of Administration by the Revelation of Every-day Occurrences in the 
 Mofussil Courts of India. By Panchkotjree Kkan. The Author is one of the 
 Magistrates of Benares, of more than twenty years' standing. One volume, post 
 8vo., 3s. dd. 
 
 Recollections of Scenes and Institutions in Italy and the East. 
 By Joseph Beldam, Esq., F.E.G.S., Barrister-at-Law. Two volumes, 8vo., 24s. 
 
 Ancient Egypt; her Monuments, Hieroglyphics, History, and 
 Archaeology, and other subjects connected with Hieroglyphical Literature. By 
 George Gliddon, late TJ. S. Consul at Cairo. Nearly 20,000 copies of this work 
 have been sold in America. Small folio, containing as much matter as an ordinary 
 sized 8vo. vol., with nearly 100 Woodcuts, 2s. 
 
 Professor H. H. Wilson's Sanscrit Grammar. New Edition. 
 
 Svo., 18s. 
 
 A Chinese Manual. Recueil de Phrases Chinoises Compos^es de 
 
 Quatre Caracteres et dont Explications gout ranges dans I'ordre Alphabctique 
 Erangais. Just Published, in small folio, 12s.